Proceedings of Symposia in PURE MATHEMATICS Volume 33, Part 1 Automorphic Forms, Representations, and L-functions A. Borel W. Casselman \; American Mathematical Society # Providence, Rhode IslandPROCEEDINGS OF THE SYMPOSIUM IN PURE MATHEMATICS, OF THE AMERICAN MATHEMATICAL SOCIETY HELD AT OREGON STATE UNIVERSITY ‘CORVALLIS, OREGON JULY 11-AUGUST 5, 1977 Prepared by the American Mathematical Society with partial support from National Science Foundation Grant MCS 76-24539 Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publ ‘Symposium in Pure Mathematics, Oregon State University, 1977. Automorphic forms, representations, and L-functions. (Proceedings of symposia in pure mathematics; v. 33) Includes bibliographical references and index. 1, Automorphic forms — Congresses. 2. Lie groups — Congresses. 3. Representations of ‘groups — Congresses. 4. L-functions — Congresses. I. Borel, Armand. I. Casselman, 1941- Ill. American Mathematical Society. IV. Title. V. Series. QA331.8937 1977 512.7 78-2184 ISBN 0-8218-1435-4 (v.1) ISBN 0-8218-1437-0 (v.2) tation Data Copying and reprinting. Individual readers of this publication, and nonprofit libraries acting for them, are permitted to make fair use of the material, such as to copy a chapter for use in teaching or research. Permission is granted to quote brief passages from this publication in reviews, provided the customary acknowledgment of the source is given. Republication, systematic copying, or multiple reproduction of any material in this publication (including abstracts) is permitted only under license from the American Mathematical Society. Requests for such permission should be addressed to the Assistant to the Publisher, American Mathematical Society, P.O. Box 6248, Providence, Rhode Island 02940-6248. Requests can also be made by e-mail to reprint-permission@ans.org, ©1979 by the American Mathematical Society. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of Americ. ‘The American Mathematial Society retains all rights except those granted to the United States Government. © The paper used in this book is acid-free and falls within the guidelines established to ensure permanence and durability. 10987654 02 01 00 99 98 97CONTENTS Foreword Part | I, Reductive groups. Representations Reductive groups By T. A. SPRINGER Reductive groups over local fields .... By J. Trrs Representations of reductive Lie groups By Nota R. WALLACH Representations of GL,(R) and GLC). By A. W. KNAPP Normalizing factors, tempered representations, and L-groups .. By A. W. Knare and GREGG ZUCKERMAN Orbital integrals for GLa(R) By D. Suetstap, Representations of p-adic groups: A survey By P, CarTIER Cuspidal unramified series for central simple algebras over local fields. . By PAUL GéRARDIN Some remarks on the supercuspidal representations of p-adic semisimple groups peter eee ee a By G. Lusztic II, Automorphic forms and representa Decomposition of representations into tensor products By D. Fiat Classical and adelic automorphic forms. An introduction By I. PIATETSKI-SHAPIRO Automorphic forms and automorphic representations By A. Boret and H. JACQUET On the notion of an automorphic representation. A supplement to the preceding paper : By R. P. LaNGtanps Multiplicity one theorems .. By I. PIATETSKI-SHAPIRO Forms of GL(2) from the analytic point of view By Steven GetparT and HERvé JACQUET Eisenstein series and the trace formula By JAMES ARTHUR O-series and invariant theory . By R, Howe six 29 1 87 93 107 uw 157 11 179 185 189 203 - 209 213 253 275vi CONTENTS Examples of dual reductive paits ......0..0.0000cc0:eceecseeee reese ess 287 By STEPHEN GELDART On a relation between SLz cusp forms and automorphic forms on orthogonal BFOUPS oe. cece bette tctteeeeeeeeeees : 297 By S. RALLIs A counterexample to the “generalized Ramanujan conjecture” for (quasi-) split groups .. 315 By R. Howe and LI. PIATETSKI-SHAPIRO. Part 2 III. Automorphic representations and L-functions Number theoretic background nee . . 3 By J. TATE Automorphic L-functions 27 By A. Boret Principal L-functions of the linear group ..... feet 63 By HERvé JACQUET Automorphic L-functions for the symplectic group GSp, ...... 87 By Mark E. Novopvorsky On liftings of holomorphic cusp forms .......... 6c ceeeeeeee eee 97 By TAKURO SHINTANT Orbital integrals and base change ............ feeteeeee AM By R. Korrwirz, The solution of a base change problem for o12) (otlowing Langlands, Saito, Shintani) . ee eer By P. GéRarbIn and J.-P. Lanesse Report on the local Langlands conjecture for GLz .... . 135 By J. TUNNELL IV. Arithmetical algebraic geometry and automorphic L-functions ‘The Hasse-Weil {-function of some moduli varieties of dimension greater than one oe... eee ce cece tteeeeeee eee 141 By W. CASSELMAN Points on Shimura varieties mod p ........... 165 By J. S. MILNE. Combinatorics and Shimura varieties mod p (based on lectures by Langlands) . naseeee beeen eee 185 By R. Kortwirz Notes on L-indistinguishability (based on a lecture by R. P. Langlands) 193 By D. SHELsTAD Automorphic representations, Shimura varieties, and motives. Ein Marchen settee . oo 205 By R. P. LANGLANDS.CONTENTS. Variétés de Shimura: Interprétation modulaire, et techniques de construction de modéles canoniques By PIERRE DELIGNE Congruence relations and Shimura curves By YASUTAKA [HARA Valeurs de fonctions L et périodes d’intégrales ... By P. DELIGNE with an appendix Algebraicity of some products of values of the /’ function . By N. Kostirz and A. Ocus An introduction to Drinfeld’s “Shtuka” By D. A. Kazipan Automorphic forms on GL2 over function fields (after V. G. Drinfeld) By G. Harper and D. A. KAZHDAN Index Author Index... vii -.247 291 313 - 343 347 357 - 381Foreword The twenty-fifth AMS Summer Research Institute was devoted to automorphic forms, representations and L-funetions. It was held at Oregon State University, Corvallis, from July 11 to August 5, 1977, and was financed by a grant from the National Science Foundation. The Organizing Committee consisted of A. Borel, W. Casselman (cochairmen:), P. Deligne, H. Jacquet, R. P. Langlands, and J. Tate. The papers in this volume consist of the Notes of the Institute, mostly in revised form, and of a few papers written later. ‘A main goal of the Institute was the discussion of the L-functions attached to automorphic forms on, or automorphic representations of, reductive groups, the local and global problems pertaining to them, and of their relations with the L~ functions of algebraic number theory and algebraic geometry, such as Artin L- functions and Hasse-Weil zeta functions. This broad topic, which goes back to E. Hecke, C. L. Siegel and others, has undergone in the last few years and is undergo- ing even now a considerable development, in part through the systematic use of infinite dimensional representations, in the framework of adelic groups. This devel- opment draws on techniques from several areas, some of rather difficult access, Therefore, besides seminars and lectures on recent and current work and open problems, the Institute also featured lectures (and even series of lectures) of a more introductory character, including background material on reductive groups, their representations, number theory, as well as an extensive treatment of some relatively simple cases. The papers in this volume are divided into four main sections, reflecting to some extent the nature of the prerequisites. I is devoted to the structure of reductive groups and infinite dimensional representations of reductive groups over local fields. Five of the papers supply some basic background material, while the others are concerned with recent developments. II is concerned with automorphic forms and automorphic representations, with emphasis on the analytic theory. The first four papers discuss some basic facts and definitions pertaining to those, and the passage from one to the other. Two papers are devoted to Eisenstein series and the trace formula, first for GLy and there in more general cases. In fact, the trace formula and orbital integrals turned out to be recurrent themes for the whole Institute and are featured in several papers in the other sections as well. The main theme of the last four papers is the restriction of the oscillator representation of the metaplectic group to dual reductive pairs of subgroups, first in general and then in more special cases. III begins with the background material on number theory, chiefly on Weil groups and their Z-functions. It then turns to the L-functions attached to automor- phic representations, various ways to construct them, their (conjectured or proven) properties and local and global problems pertaining to them. The remaining papers are mostly devoted to the base change problem for GL; and its applications to the proof of holomorphy of certain nonabelian Artin series. Finally. IV relates automorphic representations and arithmetical algebraic ‘geometry. Over function fields. it gives an introduction to the work of Drinfeld for ixx FOREWORD Glz, which constructs systems of adic representations whose L-series is a given automorphic L-function. Over number fields, it is mainly concerned with problems on Shimura varieties: canonical models, the point of their reductions modulo prime ideals, and Hasse-Weil zeta functions. This Institute emphasized representations so that, at least formally, the primary object of concern was an automorphic representation rather than an automorphic form. However, there is no substantial difference between the two, and this should not hide the fact that the theory is a direct outgrowth of the classical theory of automorphic forms. In order to give a comprehensive treatment of our subject matter and yet not produce too heavy a schedule, it was decided to omit a number of topics on automorphic forms which do not fit well at present into the chosen framework. For example, the Institute was planned to have little overlap with the Conference on Modular Functions of One Variable held in Bonn (1976). The reader is referred to the Proceedings of the latter (Springer Lecture Notes 601, 627) and to those of its predecessor (Springer Lecture Notes 320, 350, 476) for some of those topics and a more classical point of view. Also, some topics of considerable interest in themselves such as reductive groups, their infinite dimensional representations, or moduli varieties, were discussed chiefly in function of the needs of the main themes of the Institute. These Proceedings appear in two parts, the first one contains sections I and II, and the second one sections III and IV. ‘A. BOREL W. CASSELMANProceedings of Symposia in Pure Mathematics Vol. 33 (1979), part 1, pp. 3-27 REDUCTIVE GROUPS T. A. SPRINGER This contribution contains a review of the theory of reductive groups. Some knowledge of the theory of linear algebraic groups is assumed, to the extent covered in §§1-5 of Borel’s report (2] in the 1965 Boulder conference. §§1 and 2 contain a discussion of notion of the “root datum” of a reductive group. This is quite important for the theory of L-groups. Since the relevant results are not too easily accessible in the literature (they are dealt with, in a more ‘general context, in the latter part of the Grothendieck-Demazure seminar (17), it is shown how one can deduce these results from the theory of semisimple groups (which is well covered in the literature). In §§3 and 4 we Teview facts about the relative theory of reductive groups. There is more overlap with [2, §6], which deals with the same material. §5 contains a discussion of a useful class of Lie groups (the “selfadjoint’” ones). We indicate how the familiar properties of these groups can be established, assum- ing the algebraic theory of reductive groups. 1 am grateful to A. Borel for valuable suggestions and to J. J. Duistermaat for comments on the material of §5. 1. Root data and root systems. The notion of root datum (introduced in [17, Exposé XXII] under the name of “donnée radicielle”) is a slight generalization of the notion of root system, which is quite useful for the theory of reductive groups. Below is a brief discussion of root data. For more details see floc. cit.]. For the theory of root systems we refer to [7]. 1.1. Root data. A root datum isa quadruple = (X,, XY, OY) where: X and XY are free abelian groups of finite type, in duality by a pairing ¥ x XV > Zdenoted by ¢,>, @ and OY are finite subsets of X and XV and there is a bijection a ++ aY of © onto OY. If ae define endomorphisms s, and s4y of X, XY, respectively, by — Ka, u> a. Sax) = x — X¥ by P(X) = x Kx, aD Since a”, as follows by summa- tion over 6 ¢ @ from the identity Ka, BYPaY = Ca, BYDBY + Cas qv (BY) Sav (8). This shows that p @ id is a surjection V + VY, whence dim VY < dim V. Bysym- metry we then have dim V = dim VY, whence Q () Ker p = {0}. The assertion now follows readily. 1.3. Root systems. It follows from the proof of 1.2 that VV can be identified with the dual of the vector space V. We write again ¢ , ) for the pairing. Also identify © with & ® 1 < Vandassume that © # G. We then see that 0 is a root system in V in the sense of [7]. Recall that this means that the following conditions are satisfied: (RSI) is finite and generates V, moreover 0¢ 0; (RS2) for all ae ® there is a’ & VY such that (a, a = 2 and that s, (defined as before) stabilizes 0; (RS3) for all a €® we have a(@) < Z. The s, then generate a finite group of linear transformations of V, the Weyl group WO) of 0. If 8 = (X, 0, XY, O) is a root datum which isnot toral, we call the root system & V the root system of V. The Weyl group W(®) is identified with the group of automorphisms of X generated by the s, of 1.1 and with the group of automorph- isms of XV generated by the sav. The following observation is sometimes useful. 1.4. Lemma, Axiom (RD2) is equivalent 10: (RD2'Ya) For all ae ® we have s() < 0; (b) the 5, (a € ®) generate a finite group. It suffices to prove that (RD2') implies the second assertion of (RD2). Let a, Be®. Then 5,595, and 5,,.3) are involutions in the group generated by the s,. We have by an easy computation, S,(@)SaSp8A(X) = X + (CX, 'a(BY)> — Cx Sa(8)Y>) Sas where ‘s, is the transpose of s,. Since ¢s4(8), ‘s,(BY)) — Sa) = = 0, we see that the above automorphism of X is unipotent. Since it lies in a finite group it must be the identity. Hence ,(3)Y ‘s,(B"), and the assertion follows by observing that s,yREDUCTIVE GROUPS 5 1.5. Properties of root systems. Let © < V be a root system. Proofs of the pro- perties reviewed below can be found in [7]. (@) If we@and Jae @ then d= +1, +4, +2. The root system @ is called reduced if for all « € ® the only multiples of a in @ are ta. To every root system, there belong two reduced root systems, obtained by removing for every a € ® the longer (or shorter) multiples of a. (b) @ is the direct sum of root systems 0’ c V’ and @" < V"if V= V'@ v" and ® = 0" U @". A root system is irreducible if it is not the direct sum of two subsystems. Every root system is a direct sum of irreducible ones. (©) The only reduced irreducible root systems are the usual ones: 4, (x 2 1), B, (a = 2), C, (0 2 3), Dy (0 = 4), Bo Ey, Bsy Fy, Gp (@) For each dimension n there exists one irreducible nonreduced root system, denoted by BC, (see below). Examptes. (i) B,. Take V = Q* with standard basis {¢, ---, e,}. Then VY = Q", with dual basis {ey’, ..., ey}. We have B, = {+e,+e, (i 0<> O forall xeC. a € @ is simple (for this ordering) if it is not the sum of two positive roots. The set of simple roots 4 is called a basis of ®. We have the following properties. (a) The Weyl group W(f) acts simply transitively on the set of Weyl chambers, (b) The s, (we 4) generate W(0). More precisely, (W, (Sq)-4) is a Coxeter system (see (7), (©) Every root is an integral linear combination of simple roots, with coefficients all of the same sign, (d) Say that J is connected if it cannot be written as a disjoint union 4 = 4'U A’, where (4' + 4") A= @. Then we have: @ is irreducible <> 4 is connected. A connected d leads to a connected Dynkin graph. These are described in {7} 1.7. We collect a few facts about root data to be needed later. First, there is the notion of direct sum of root data. This is clear and we skip the definition. Next we have to say something about morphisms of root data. The following suffices. For more general cases see [7]; see also 2.11(ii) and 2.12. Let ¥ = (X, 0, XY, OY) and UW" = (X', 0, (X’)Y, (HY) be two root data. A homomorphism f: X" -+ X is called an isogeny of U” into ¥ if: (a) fis injective and Im fhas finite index in X,6 T. A. SPRINGER (b) finduces a bijection of & onto and its transpose f induces a bijection of @ onto (0')Y Notice that then ‘fis also an injection XY + (X")" with finite cokernel. Also, coker fand coker(!) are in duality. ExampLe. Given %, we shall construct a ” and an isogeny of X into X", which we shall call the canonical isogeny associated to U. If L is a subgroup of X we denote by £ the largest subgroup containing L such that L/L is finite. Then L = L if and only if L is a direct summand Let Xpand Q beas in 1.1. By 1.2 wecan view @ as a subset of X/Xp. It follows that l'; = (X/Xo, 0, OY, ©) isa semisimple root datum. Likewise, Y= (X/0, @. Xo. D) is a toral root datum. Put ¥” ; @W5. Then the canonical isogeny f: X + (X/Xq) ® (X/O) is the canonical homomorphism of X into the right-hand side. 1.8. Let @ be a root system in the Q-vector space V. The aY (« € 6) in the dual V¥ of V also form a root system OY (the dual or inverse root system). There are finitely many semisimple root data (X, @, XY, OY) where ¥ c V, XY c VY. In fact, let Q and Q¥ be the lattices in V and VYgenerated by @ and ®Y, respectively, and define P = {xe Vix, a) € Z for all w 0}. PY G VV is defined similarly. Then Qc P and P/Q isa finite group, in duality with PY/QY. An X as above is then contained between P and Q and for each such X there is a unique XY between PY and QV such that (X, 9, X, 0°) is a root datum. 1.9. Let ¥ = (¥., XY. 0%) bea root datum, Assume that its root system < V is reduced. Let J be a basis of ®. Then JY = {alae is a basis of the dual root system OY c VY. We call based root datum a sextuple o = (X, 0, ol XY. OY, IY), where (X, ®, XY, 0”) is a root datum with reduced root system @ and where J is a basis of ®. However, since J and JY determine ® and 9” uniquely, it also makes sense to view a based root system as a quadruple #) = (X, J, XV, J”). This we shall do. 2, Reductive groups (absolute theory). 2.1. Let G be a connected reductive linear algebraic group. In this section we consider the absolute case, where fields of definition do not come in. So we can view Gas. subgroup of some GL(n, 2), 2 an algebraically closed field (see (2}). Let S be a subtorus of G. We define the root system #(G, S) of G with respect to Sto be the set of nontrivial characters of § which appear when one diagonalizes the represen- tation of S in the Lie algebra g of G, S operating via the adjoint representation. 2.2. The root datum of G. Fix a maximal torus T of G. We shall associate to the pair (G, T) a root datum 4(G, T) = (X, , XY, Y) (also denoted by <(G). X is the group of rational characters X*(T) of T. This is a free abelian group of finite rank. XV is the group X..(7) of |-parameter multiplicative subgroups of T, i., the group of homomorphisms (of algebraic groups) GL, > T. Then XY can be put in duality with X by a pairing < , > defined as follows: if xe ¥*(T), we X4(T), then x(u(1)) = 1" (re 2"). We take © = 0G, T), the root system of G with respect to T. To complete the definition we have to describe OY. If « € ®, let T,, be the identity component of the kernel of q. This is a subtorus of codimension 1. The centralizer Z,, of T, in Gis a connected reductive group with maximal torus T, whose derived group G,. is semi- simple of rank 1, ie., is isomorphic to either SL(2) or PSL(2). There is a uniqueREDUCTIVE GROUPS 7 homomorphism a: GL, -> G, such that T = (Im aY)Ty, (a, a”) = 2. These a make up @Y. The axiom (RDI) is built into the definition of a. We use 1.4 to establish (RD2). Let n, €G, — T, normalize T,. Then n? ¢ T, and, s, being as in 1.1, we have, for xeX,reT, x(ngtnig!) = 1%, In fact, working in G, one shows that there is u XY such that the left-hand side equals #*~"*, One then shows that (a, uv) = 2 and that (x, uw) = Oif G, such that tru = x,(teu) (te T, we). Put U, = Im(x,) and let X, € g be a nonzero tangent vector to U,. Then = Lie(T) ® Y OX,. a Let B be a Borel subgroup containing T. There is a unique ordering of @ (as in 1.6) such that B is generated by T and the U, with a > 0, and any B > T is so ob- tained. It follows that we can associate to the triple (G, B, T) a based root system dG, B, T) = (X°(T), 4, X(T), AY) (or go(G)), where dis the basis of @ deter- mined by the ordering associated to B. 2.4, Isogenies. An isogeny $: G ~ G' of algebraic groups is a surjective rational homomorphism with finite kernel. EXamPLes. (i) The canonical homomorphism SL(2) + PSL(2) (PSL(2) is to be viewed as the group of linear transformations of the space of 2 x 2-matrices of the form x ++ gxg-, where g ¢ SL(2)). If char Q = 2 thisis an isomorphism of abstract groups, but not of algebraic groups. (ii) Let G be defined over the finite field F,. The Frobenius isogeny G + G raises all coordinates to the qth power. It is again an isomorphism of groups, but not of algebraic groups. Let G and G’ be connected reductive and let T be a maximal torus of G. A central isogeny g: G— G’ is an isogeny which (with the notations of 2.3) induces an iso- morphism in the sense of algebraic groups of U, onto its image, for all « € 0. Equivalently, dé(X.) # 0 for all « € (where dg is the induced Lie algebra ho- momorphism). The image 7" = 9(T) is a maximal torus of G’. We shall say that gis a central isogeny of (G, T) onto (G’, T’). Let f(g) be the homomorphism X*(T’) > X*(T) defined by 2.5. PRoposttion. (i) If ¢ is a central isogeny then f(g) is an isogeny of (G', T’) into GG, T); (ii) if 4 and 9 are central isogenies of (G, T) onto (G', T') such that f() = f($') then there is t T with $' = g « Int(t). That f(@) has property (a) of 1.7 is equivalent to the fact that ¢ induces a sur- jection T-+ 7’ with finite kernel. There is a bijection a + a’ of root systems such8 T. A. SPRINGER that g(U,) = Uy or that dé(X,) = Xy (choosing Xq- properly). We then have Ad(G(O)Xy = a(t)Xy, whence f(g\(a') = a. Then /f(G)(a’) = (a’)Y, as follows for example from the equality ‘s, = s,, established in the proof of 1.8. This proves (i). Let A be a basis of @. One knows that the U,, with « € 4 together with T generate G. So an isogeny ¢ is completely determined by its restriction to T and to the U, (a 4). Since f(g) determines T+ T', the only freedom one has when /(d) is given, is in the choice of the isomorphisms U, ~ Uy (a € 4). The assertion of (ii) then readily follows. 2.6. Let g be a central isogeny of (G, T) onto (G’, T’). Then Ker g lies in 7. It is a finite group isomorphic to Hom(X/Im /(¢), 9). Let p be the characteristic ex- ponent of Q, Then this kernel is isomorphic to the p-regular part of X/Im f(g). It follows that there is a factorization of g: G+ G/Ker ¢ * G’, where z is the canonical homomorphism and where pis an isomorphism if p = 1 and gis a purely inseparable isogeny if p > 1 (i.e., such that p is an isomorphism of groups). Let t be the Lie algebra of T; we have Ker(d) < t. Now t can be identified with XY @z Q. It follows that Ker(dg) is isomorphic to the kernel of f(g) @ id: XY @zQ > (X")Y @z Q, which is isomorphic to ((X’)“/p(X')Y + Imf(@)”) @p, 2. Hence Ker(dd) = 0 if and only if Coker(/(¢)) (which is dual to Coker(‘/(é))) has order prime to p. If p > 1 then Ker(dg) is a central restricted subalgebra of g, which is stable under Ad(G). Let G/Ker(dg) be the quotient of G by Kerdg (see [3, p. 376}. It follows that we can factor g, G *G/Ker (49) G', where o is the canonical (central) isogeny of floc. cit.]. These remarks imply that we can factorize ¢ as follows: a) G Gy 2+ Gy > Gy 2+ + — G4 FELG, = where ¢ = m,-; 0 ++ © Xo. Put $; = 1° x; (i 2 1). Then G, = G/Ker g, G41 = G/Ker(dg,) (1 $ i S 5 — 1) and the x; are canonical isogenies. Also, if G | 6 @ is a commutative diagram of isogenies, we can arrange the factorizations of @ and # such that there is a diagram with commuting squares G=G@—G—>--- + 6,, 9G, =@ | Notice that the vertical arrows are uniquely determined once the first one is given. 2.7. Lemma. Let ¢ and 6, be central isogenies of (G, T) onto (G’, T’) and (Gi, T;), respectively. Assume that Im f($) = Im f(¢,). Then (G', T’) and (G,, T;) are isomor- hic. @REDUCTIVE GROUPS 9 Let G" < G’ x G; be the image of the homomorphism g + (d(g), $1(g))- Let (i: G+ G" be the induced homomorphism. Then ¢ is a central isogeny of con- nected reductive groups and so are the projections : G" + G’, mz: G" > Gj. A straightforward check (working in tori) shows that Ker x; = {e}, Ker dz; = {0} (i = 1.2), Hence z and 2 are isomorphisms, whence the lemma. 2.8, Lemma, Let be a root datum and let f be an isogeny of ” into y(G, T). Then there exist a pair (G’, T’) and a central isogeny $ of (G, T) onto (G', T’) such that = 9G6.T)S@O =f. From the knowledge of f we can recover successively the groups G; figuring in (1). This allows one to define G’. We omit the details. 2.9. THEOREM. (i) For any root datum with reduced root system there exist a connected reductive group G and a maximal torus T in G such that © = §(G, T). The pair (G, T) is unique up to isomorphism; (ii) ler B = YG, T), U" = GG’, 7’). If fis an isogeny of V" into there exists a central isogeny of (G, T) onto (G', T’) with f(g) = f. Two such @ differ by an automorphism Int(1) (t€ T) of G. Let f be the canonical isogeny Y — ¥” of 1.7. Using 2.8 we see that it suffices to prove the existence statement of (i) for the two cases that ¥ is semisimple or toral. The second case ( = ¢) is easily dealt with: take for G the torus T = Hom(X, 0%). In the semisimple case the statement follows from the existence theorem of the theory of semisimple groups which can be dealt with using the theory of Chevalley groups. (See [18] or [6, part A]. The uniqueness statement of (i) is part of (ji). To prove (ii) one first reduces to the case that f is an isomorphism (using 2.7 and 2.8).) In the case that G is semisimple the statement of (ii) is Chevalley’s fun- damental isomorphism theorem, proved, e.g., in [10, Exposé 24], or in [14, Chapter XI]. The case of a torus G is easy. In the general case, there are central isogenies G, x SG, G, x S' + G', where G, and G; are the derived groups of G and G’, and where S and S’ are tori, such that the corresponding isogenies of root data are just the canonical ones of 1.7 (see also 2.15). Now f defines an isogeny f, of ((G; x S’)into g(G x S)and we may assume that there exists a central isogeny g1: G; x S + G; x S’ with f(g) = We can then complete the diagram like (2), with G, x 8, G; x S’, G, G’ instead of GG, G’, G’, respectively, and with 4, as first arrow. The right-hand arrow, which is uniquely determined by ¢;, is then the required isomorphism. The last point of (ii) follows from 2.5 (ii). 2.10, Remarks, (i) In the semisimple case the existence statement of 2.9(i) is due to Chevalley [Séminaire Bourbaki, Exposé 219, 1960-1961]. He constructs a group scheme Gy over Z such that G = Gy x zk. This construction is also discussed in [6, part A] ‘A generalization of 2.9, where the field & is replaced by a base scheme, is con- tained in [17, Exposé XXIV]. i) The result on the existence of central isogenies of reductive groups contained in 2.9(ii) is a special case of one on arbitrary isogenies, which we shall briefly indi- cate. Let g: G > G’ be anisogeny of connected reductive groups with (7) = 7’. Let f be the induced homomorphism X*(7") ¢ X*(T). Let Xp, %y (ae D,a' € 0")10 T. A. SPRINGER eas in 2.3. One shows that there is a bijection a ++ a’ of @ onto @” and a function q: + {p"\neN} (p the characteristic exponent) such that the x, and x, can be so normalized that $(x,(0)) = x,(¢?). It follows that Ka’) = gaa, fla) = glaya’\’. If isa central isogeny then all g(a) are 1. If ¢ is the Frobenius isogeny of 2.4 then ‘fis multiplication by q and all g(a) are g. Such an fis called a p-morphism in [17, Exposé XI], The analogue in question of 2.9(ii) is obtained by assuming f to be a p-morphism and admitting in the conclusion an arbitrary isogeny g. The proof can be given along similar lines, reducing to the case of an isomorphism. For semisimple G the result is due to Chevalley (10, Expose 23]. EXAMPLE OF A p-MorpHisM. p = 2, G is semisimple of type By and, with the notations of the example in 1.5, we have f(e,) =e + en, flea) = e1 — ee A classification of the possible p-morphisms can be found, e.g., in [17, Exposé XXI, p.71]. 2.11. Let ¢:G > G’ be a homomorphism of connected reductive algebraic groups. Let T and 7” be maximal tori in G, G' with (7) 7’. Assume that Im ¢ is normal subgroup of G’. We shall briefly describe the relation between the root data Y(G, T) = (X, 0, XY, OY) and GG’, T’) = (X"0,(X'Y, (OW). Let f: X' + X be the dual of g: T > 7’. In general, fis neither injective nor surjective. Put 0, = 0) Imf, b; = @ ~ ,. Then @ = ®, U , is a decomposi orthogonal subsets (i.e., (0, OY) = (2, OY) = 0). Likewise, if ®; = 0’ ) Kerf, ; = 0" ~ @;, then 0! = 0; U @} is a decompo- sition into orthogonal subsets. There is a bijection a+ a’ of ; onto @; and a function q : 0; -+ {p*|ne N}, such that for a €; we have Ke’) = qa)a, fla”) = qa) (a). Moreover f(a) = 0 if «&; and f(a) = 0if we b>. 2.12. It follows readily from 2.9(i) that if Wy is a based root datum with reduced root system there exists a triple (G, B, T) as in 2.3 with go(G, B, T) = Wo, whichis unique up to isomorphism. There is no canonical isomorphism of one such triple onto another one. In fact, based root systems have nontrivial automorphisms. In this connection the following results should be mentioned. Let ¢o(G, B, T) = Go(G). For each « € d fix an element u, # ein the group U,. The following is then an easy consequence of 2.5(ii). jon into 2.13. PROPOSITION. Aut yg(G) is isomorphic to the group Aut(G, BT, {te}-3) of automorphisms of G which stabilize B, T and the set of tq 2.14, CoROLLARY. There is a split exact sequence {1} — Int(G@) — Aut(G) — Aut Jo(G) — {1}. In fact, an isomorphism as in 2.13 defines a splitting. Any two such splittings differ by an automorphism Int(¢) (¢€ T). 2.15. Let G bea connected reductive group, with a maximal torus T, Put g(G, 7) = (X, 0, XY, OY),REDUCTIVE GROUPS on We have a decomposition G = G’ - S, where G’ is the derived group of G (which is semisimple) and where S is a torus, viz. the identity component of the center C of G. We have T = T'S, where T’ is a maximal torus of G’. ‘We use the notations of 1.1 and 1.7. The following facts can be checked without difficulty. (a) WG, T’) = (X1Xo, ®, OY, OY) (we view @ as a subset of X/Xp, as we may by 1.2). (b) The character group Hom, XY (S) = X¥. (©) The isogeny G’ x S + G defines the canonical isogeny of (G, T) (see 1.7). This fact was already used in the proof of 2.5(ii). It follows that G is semisimple if and only if ¢(G, T) is semisimple. In that case we say that G is adjoint if X = Q and simply connected if X = P (notation of 1.8). From 2.5(ii), using what was said in 1.8, we see that a semisimple group G is adjoint (resp. simply connected) if and only if a central isogeny ¢: G + G’ (resp. ¢: G’ G) is an isomorphism. In the case of a general reductive G we have the following facts. (d) The derived group G’ is adjoint = ¥ = Q @ Xy<- XY = PY @ XY. (©) G’ is simply connected <> P < X + (Xp @ Q) = OY = OY. (f) The center of G is connected <> 90 = = PY < XY + (Xl @Q). (C, *) is X/Q, and we have X*(S) = X/0, 3, Reductive groups (relative theory). Here we let a ground field k < @ come into play. We denote by & the algebraic closure of k in @ and by k, its separable closure. A linear algebraic group G which is defined over k will be called a k-group. We then denote by G(k) the group of its k-rational points (and not by G,, as in [2]). If Ais a k-algebra, we denote by G(A) the group Hom,(k{G], A) (see (2)). 3.1, Forms of algebraic groups (16, III, §1}. Let G and G" be k-groups. G’ is said to be a k-form of G if G and G’ are isomorphic over Q. Exame. k = R. Then U(n) is an R-form of GL(n). To describe k-forms one proceeds as follows. The k-group G is completely de- termined by the group G(k,) of k,-rational points. This means the following: if G > GL(n) is an isomorphism of G onto a closed subgroup of GL(n), everything being defined over k, then the subgroup G(k,) of GL(n, k,) determines G, up to k-iso- morphism. The fact that G is defined over k is reflected in an action of the Galois group J’, = Gal(k,/k) on G(k,). The k-forms G’ of G can be described as follows (up to k-isomorphism). We have G'(k,) = G(k,) and there is a continuous func- tion c: s+ c, of I to the group of k,automorphisms of G (the Galois group being, provided with the Krull topology and the second group with the discrete topol- ogy), satisfying () Ca =e. 8G) (8, ET) such that the action of /’, on G'(k,) (denoted by (s, g) + sg) is obtained by “twisting” the original action with c: (s* g) = ¢,(s-g). G’ is k-isomorphic to G if and only if there exists an automorphism c such that ¢, = cs. We say that G’ is an inner form of G if all c, are inner automorphisms. If Cisa group on which /;, acts, the continuous functions s + ¢, of [', to C which satisfy (+) are called 1-cocycles of /', with values in C. The equivalence classes of12 . A. SPRINGER these cocycles for the relation: (c,) ~ (c,) if and only if there is ce C such that ¢, = e-! + ¢, - (se), form the |-cohomology set H'(k, C). It has a privileged ele- ment 1, coming from the constant function c, = ¢. 3.2. Reductive k-groups. Now let G be a connected reductive k-group. It is said to be quasi-split if it contains a Borel subgroup which is defined over k (this is a very restrictive property). G is split (over &) if it has a maximal torus which is defined over k and k-split. In this case G is quasi-split. ExaMPLe, G = SO(F) (see (2, pp. 15-16)). This is quasi-split but not split if and only if the dimension 1 of the underlying vector space is even and the index equals in-1. From the splitting of 2.14 one concludes that G is an inner form of a quasi-split group. Now let B be a Borel subgroup of Gand T < Ba maximal torus, both defined over k,. Let go(G) = (X, 4, X”, 4”) be the based root datum defined by (G, B, 7). If'se there is g, € G(k,) such that int(g,(sB) = B, int(g,(sT) =T. Then int(g,)os defines an automorphism of T depending only on s (since the coset Te, is uniquely determined). This automorphism determines an automorphism yio(8) of X, permuting the elements of A (since int(g,) es fixes B). Itiseasy to check that juc defines a homomorphism jug: /', -+ Aut ¢p(G). Let G’ be a k-form of G. Then pic = yg if and only if G and G’ are inner forms of each other. 3.3. Restriction of the base field (22, 1.3]. Let I < k, be a finite separable exten- sion of k. Let Gbean /-group. Then there exists a k-group H = R,/,G charac- terized by the following property [2, 1.4]: for any k-algebra A we have H(A) = G(A @, 0). In particular, H(k) = G()). Let 3 be the set of -isomorphisms / -> k, We then have H(k,) = G(k,)°. The action of /', = Gal(k,/k) on H(k,) is as follows. If g € G(k,)? is a function on ¥ with values in G(k,), and se /', then, for o € 3, (s - $(o) = Gs - 0). RyAG is obtained from G by restriction of the ground field from | to k. If G is connected or reductive then so is Ri. G. Now let G be connected and reductive. Fix B and T (defined over k,) as in 3.2 and let gio(G) be the based root datum defined by (G, B, T). Then H = R,/,Gcon- tains the Borel subgroup B, = B® and the maximal torus T; = 7. The based root datum ¢o(R,/4G) (relative to B, and T,)is then go(G)¥. The action of /’, on the lattice X? is like before: if s ¢ I,, 6 ¢ X* then (s-¢\(o) = ¢(s-0). 3.4, Anisotropic reductive groups. A connected reductive k-group G is called anisotropic (over k) if it has no nontrivial k-split k-subtorus. Examptss. (i) Let F be a nondegenerate quadratic form on a k-vector space (char k # 2). Let G = SO(F) be the special orthogonal group of F (the identity component of the orthogonal group O(F)). It is anisotropic over k if and only if F does not represent 0 over k (the proof is given in (2, p. 13]). (ii) If kis a locally compact (nondiscrete) field then G is anisotropic over k if and only if G(k) is compact. (iii) If k is any field then G is anisotropic if and only if G(k) has no unipotent elements # e and the group of its k-rational characters Hom,(G, GL,) is trivial.REDUCTIVE GROUPS 13 3.5, Properties of reductive k-groups. We next review the properties of reductive groups. The reference for these is [5]. Let G be a connected reductive k-group. Let S be a maximal k-split torus of G, i.e., a k-subtorus of G which is k-split and maximal for these properties. Any two such tori are conjugate over k, i.e., by an element of G(k). Their dimension is called the k-rank of G The root system 0(G, S) of G with respect to S (see 2.1) is called the relative root system of G (notation , or ,O(G)). This is indeed a root system in the sense of [7], lying in the subspace V of X*(S) ® Q spanned by ,0. Its Weyl group is the relative Weyl group of G (notation ,W or ,W(G)). Let N(S) and Z(S) denote nor- malizer and centralizer of S in G; these are k-subgroups. Then N(S)/Z(S) operates on and in V. In fact it can be identified with ,W. Any coset of N(S)/Z(S) can be represented by an element in N(S) (K). Z(S) is a connected reductive k-group. Its derived group Z(S)' is a semisimple k-group which is anisotropic. To a certain extent G can be recovered from Z(S)' and the relative root system ,0 (for details see [19)). There is a decomposition of the Lie algebra g of G: a= 00+ 2ige where for we X*(S) we have defined g, = {Xe glAd(s)X = seX, se 5}. Then go is the Lie algebra of Z(S). If « € ,® there is a unique unipotent k-subgroup U,, of G normalized by S, such that its Lie algebra is gq In the absolute case (k = @) S isa maximal torus, @ is the ordinary root system and the U, are as in 2.3. If G is split over k then Sis a maximal torus of G and , coincides with the absolute root system ®. In the general case ,® need not be reduced, nor is dim g, = dim U, always 1. 3.6. Parabolic subgroups. Recall that a parabolic subgroup P of an algebraic group Gis a closed subgroup such that G/P is a projective variety. Equivalently, P is parabolic if P contains a Borel subgroup of G. Now let G be as in 3.5. Then the minimal parabolic k-subgroups of G are con- jugate over k. If P is one, there is a maximal k-split torus of G such that P is the semidirect product of k-groups P = Z(S) R,(P) (R,(P) denotes the unipotent radical). There is an ordering of such that P is generated by Z(S) and the U, of 3.5 with a > 0. The minimal parabolic k-subgroups containing a given S cor- respond to the Weyl chambers of ,. They are permuted simply transitively by the relative Weyl group. Fix an ordering of , and let , be the basis of ,0 defined by it. For any subset 0c 4d denote by Pp the subgroup of G generated by Z(S) and the U where @€ ,Pis a linear combination of the roots of J in which all roots not in @ occur with a coefficient = 0. Then P,, = G, Ps = Pand Py > P. The P, are the standard parabolic subgroups of G containing P. Any parabolic k-subgroup Q of Gis k-conjugate to a unique Py. If Sy is the identity component of (\aca(Ker 0) then S, is a k-split torus of G and we have Pp = Z(S,) - Ru(Pa)s a semidirect product of k-groups. The unipotent radical R,(Ps) is generated by the U, where a is a positive root which is not a linear combination of elements of 8. Let Q be any parabolic k-subgroup of G, with unipotent radical V (which is defined over k). A Levi subgroup of Q is a k-subgroup L such that Q is the semi-14 T. A. SPRINGER, direct product of k-groups Q = L- V. It follows from the above that such L exist. Two Levi subgroups of Q are k-conjugate. If A is a maximal k-split torus in the cen- tre of L, then L = Z(A). If A is any k-split subtorus of G then there is a parabolic k-subgroup @ of G with Levi subgroup L. Two such Q are not necessarily k- conjugate (as they are when A is a maximal k-split torus). Two parabolic k-sub- groups Q; and Q> are associated if they have Levi subgroups which are k-conjugate. This defines an equivalence relation on the set of parabolic k-subgroups. If Q; and Qz are two parabolic k-subgroups, then (Q; () Qz)- R,(Qy) is also a parabolic k-subgroup, contained in Q,. It is equal to Q; if and only if there is a Levi subgroup of Q; containing a Levi subgroup of Q2. Q; and Q» are called opposite if Q1 1) Qzisa Levi subgroup of Q; and Qo. 3.1. Bruhat decomposition of G(k). Let P and S be as in 3.5 and put U = R,(P). If we 4W denote by ny a representation in N(S\(K). The Bruhat decomposition of G(k) asserts that G(k) is the disjoint union of the double cosets U(k)n,P(k) (we,W). ‘One can phrase this in a more precise way. If w € ,W there exist two k-sub- groups U;, Uz of U such that U = U\, x Uj (product of k-varieties) and that the map U; x P Un,P sending (x, y) onto xn,y is an isomorphism. We then have (G/P\K) = GP) = U auth), where zis the projection G > G/P. If k = Q this gives a cellular decomposition of the projective variety G/P. If 0 €,d let Wy be the subgroup of ,7 generated by the reflections defined by the a € ,d. If0, 0’ ¢ ,d there is a bijection of double cosets Palk)\G(k)/ Polk) =~ W(O)\sW/W(0'). Let 2/be the set of generators of ,W defined by ,d. The above assertions (except for the algebro-geometric ones) then all follow from the fact that (G(k), P(k), Z(S\(&),2) isa Tits system in the sense of (7). 3.8, The Tits building. Let G be the connected reductive k-group. We define a simplicial complex &, the (simplicial) Tits building of (G, k), as follows. The vertices of @ are the maximal nontrivial parabolic k-subgroups of G. A set (Py, P,) of distinct vertices determines a simplex of @ if and only if P = P,(\---[) Py is parabolic. In that case, the P; are uniquely determined by P. It fol- lows that the simplices of @ correspond to the nontrivial parabolic k-subgroups of G. Let apbe the simplex defined by P. Then gp is a face of ap. if and only if P’ < P. The maximal simplices correspond to minimal k-parabolics. These sim- plices are called chambers. A codimension 1 face of a chamber is a wall. Two chambers are adjacent if they are distinct and have a wall in common. One shows that any two chambers g, a’ can be joined by a gallery, i.e., a set of chambers « = 00 Oy +, 5, = 0", Such that g, and g;,, are adjacent (0 < i <5). Itis clear that G(k) operates on @. ‘One can show (using a concrete geometric realization of the abstract simplicial complex @) that @ has the homotopy type of a bouquet of spheres. For more details about buildings see [20].REDUCTIVE GROUPS 15 3.9, Examptes. (i) The preceding results apply when k = Q, the absolute case. In particular, we then have the properties of parabolics of 3.6 and the Bruhat decomposition of 3,7. (ii) G = GL(n) (k arbitrary). This is indeed a reductive k-group. Its Lie algebra gis the Lie algebra of all n x n-matrices. Let S be the subgroup of diagonal matrices. This is a maximal k-split torus which is also a maximal torus of G (in the absolute sense). Let ¢, ¢ ¥ = X¥(S) map s€S onto its ith diagonal element, The ¢, form a basis of X. The root system © = WG, S), which coincides with the relative root system ,0, consists of the e; — e; € X with i # j. One checks that the root datum of G is given by ¥ = Z*, XY = 24,0 = fe; — Chie DY = (6/— 6) }sny where (¢}) is the basis of X dual to (e,). The subgroup B of all upper triangular matrices is a minimal parabolic k- subgroup. It is a Borel subgroup. Its unipotent radical U is the group of all upper triangular matrices with ones in the diagonal. The basis J of defined by B is (e; — eisthcicn-1 The Weyl group W (which coincides with the relative Weyl group ,1) is isomorphic to the symmetric group &,, viewed as the group of per- mutations of the basis (¢,). The parabolic subgroups P > B are the groups of block matrices Ay Ay Ais 0 Agg es 0 0 Ay where Aj; is an n, x ny-matrix with m, + --- +m, =n, the 4,; being nonsingular. Its unipotent radical consists of these matrices where 4,; = 1 (1 $ i Ss). The sub- group of P of matrices with A,; = 0 for j > iis a Levi subgroup of P. The center of L consists of those elements of S at which the elements of d different from one of the ¢,, — éyix (I Si 5) are trivial. Hence with the notations of 3.6, we have P = Py, where @ ¢ dis the complement of the set of these roots. A more geometric description of parabolic subgroups is as follows. Let V = 0». A flag in V is a sequence 0 = Vy Vy cc V, = V of distinct subspaces of V. A k-flag is one where all V; are defined over k, i.e., have a basis consisting of vectors in k. G operates on the set of all flags. The parabolic subgroups of G are then the isotropy groups of flags. One sees that there is a bijection of the set of all parabol- ic subgroups of G onto the set of all flags, under which k-subgroups correspond to flags. If P is a parabolic subgroup, then the points of G/P can be viewed as the flags of the same type as P (ie., such that the subspaces of the flags have a constant dimension). The Tits building of (G, k) can then also be described in terms of flags: The sim- plices correspond to the nontrivial k-flags (i.e., those with s > 1). If @, is the simplex defined by the flag /, then a, is a face of oy. if and only iff’ refines f(in the obvious sense). The chambers correspond to the maximal flags (s = n, dim V, = i) and the vertices of @ are described by the nontrivial k-subspaces of V. We sce that the com- binatorial structure of @ pictures the incidences in the projective space P,_(k).16 T. A. SPRINGER The smallest nontrivial special case is n = 3, k = Fy. Here @ is a graph with 14 vertices and 21 edges (drawn in [20, p. 210)). (iii) Let char k # 2. Let V be a vector space over & (in the sense of algebraic geometry). Let F be a nondegenerate quadratic form on V which is defined over k. With respect to a suitable basis of V(k) we have Fry 00) Xp) = X%y FAN Foe A AGN + Footy 1 Feeds where Fy is anisotropic over k (.e., does not represent zero nontrivially). The index q of Fis the dimension of the maximal isotopic subspaces of V(k). Let G = SO(F) be the special orthogonal group of F. It is a connected semi- simple k-group. A maximal k-split torus S in G is given by the matrices of the form diag(ty +5 ty Lye Lh ge Then Z(S) is the direct product of S and the anisotropic k-group SO(F). For a description of a minimal parabolic k-subgroup and the determination of the relative root system , we refer to (2, p. 16]. The latter is of type B, if 2q # n and of type D, otherwise. If q < {n/2] there are always subgroups U, of dimen- sion > I (notations of 3.5) ‘A geometric description of parabolic k-subgroups similar to the one for GL(n) can be given, They are in this case the isotropy groups of isotropic k-flags in V, ie., flags all of whose subspaces are isotropic with respect to F. 4, Special fields. Let G be a tures for particular k. 4.1. Rand C. If Gis a C-group then G(C) has a canonical structure of complex Lie groups. The latter is connected if and only if G is Zariski-connected (this can be deduced from Bruhat’s lemma, compare 4.2). Now let k = R. Then G(R) is canonically a Lie group. -group. In this section we discuss some special fea- 4.2. Lemma. (i) G(R) is compact if and only if the identity component G® is a reduc- tive anisotropic R-group; (ii) G(R) has finitely many connected components. (i)is easily established. As to (ii), it suffices to prove this if G is connected reduc- tive. In that case one reduces the statement, via Bruhat’s lemma, to the case that Gis either compact or a torus. In these cases the assertion is clear. G(R) need not be connected if G is Zariski-connected, as one sees in simple cases (eg. G = GL(n). If Gis a C-group then the real Lie group Ro,a(G)(R) (see 3.3) is that defined by the complex Lie group G(C). 4.3. Finite fields. Let k = F, and let k be an algebraic closure. F denotes the Frobenius automorphism x + x! of k/k. The basic result here is Lang's theorem (6, p.171]. 4.4. THeoreM. If G is a connected k-group then g++ g-\(Fg) is a surjective map of G(R) onto itself. Using that G is an inner form of a quasi-split k-group (see 3.1) one deduces that @ connected reductive k-group is quasi-split. A complete classification of simple k-groups can then be given,REDUCTIVE GROUPS 7 Before continuing with local and global fields, we must say a little about group schemes over rings. 4.5. Groups over rings. If G is a k-group, the product and inversion are described (Gee [2, p. 4]) by morphisms of algebraic varieties u:G x G + Gp: G + G, which in turn are given by homomorphisms of k-algebras *: k{G] > k{G] ®, k{G] and p*: K{G] + k{G]. These have a number of properties (which we will not write down) expressing the group axioms. We thus obtain a description of the notion of linear algebraic group in terms of the coordinate algebra. ‘The fact that k is a field does not play any role in this description. Replacing k by a commutative ring o, we get a notion of “linear algebraic group G over 0”, which is habitually called “affine group scheme G over o”, which we abbreviate to o-group. It can be viewed as a functor, ef. (2, p. 4]. We write G(o) for the group of o-points of G (i.., the value of the functor at 0). Let o[G] be its algebra. If o’ is an o-algebra we have, by base extension, an o'- group G x, 0’, with algebra o[G] ®, 0’. Let m be a maximal ideal of o and put k(t) = o/m; this is an o-algebra. DEFINITION. The o-group G has good reduction at m if G x, k(m)is a k(m)-group. Gis smooth if it has good reduction at all maximal ideals m. EXAMPLE OF BAD REDUCTION. 0 = Z, Gis the group of matrices ( @) 2 a with a? — 262 = 1, Then Z[G] = Z[X, YI(X? — 2¥? — 1) and Z[G]@ hh ~ FAX, YV(®), which cannot be the coordinate ring of a linear algebraic group over Fe, since it contains nilpotent elements. Now let G be a k-group and let o be a subring of k. We shall say that G is de- finable over o if there exists a smooth o-group Go such that G = Gp x, k. By abuse of notation, we sometimes write, if o' is an o-algebra, G(0’) for Gy(o"). One can also define when an algebraic variety over k is definable over 0; it is clear how to do this. Exampte. By a theorem of Chevalley a complex connected semisimple group is definable over Z (6, A, 4]. 4.6. Local fields. Let k be a local field. We denote by o its ring of integers and by 1m the maximal ideal of . The residue field o/m is denoted by F. A profound study of reductive groups over local field has been made by Bruhat and Tits. So far, only part of this has been published [9]. For a résumé see [8] In Tits’ contribution [21] in these PROCEEDINGS more details are given about the Bruhat-Tits theory. In particular, he discusses the building of a reductive k- group and the theory of maximal compact subgroups. Here we mention only a few results. 4.7. Lemma. Let G be a connected reductive k-group. Then there is an unramified extension I of k such that G is quasi-split over 1. This can be deduced from the fact that a maximal unramified extension of k is a field of dimension < 1 (see [16, p. II-11)). ‘The group G(k) of k-rational points is a locally compact topological group (even a Lie group over &). It is a compact group if and only if the identity com-18 T. A. SPRINGER isa reductive anisotropic k-group. It is shown in the Bruhat-Tits theory that if G is connected and simply connected simple k-group, there is a finite-dimen- sional division algebra D with center k such that G(k) = SL(I, D). If G is connected and reductive and is definable over o (which is always the case if Gis k-split, see [8, p.31)), then G(o) is a compact subgroup of G(k). There is a re- duction map G(0) > G(F), which is surjective. 4.8. Global fields. Now let k be a global field. If v is a valuation of k, let k, be the corresponding completion of k. If v is nonarchimedean, o, denotes the ring of integers of k,. If S is a nonempty finite set of valuations of k, containing all the archimedean ones, denote by os the ring of elements of k which are integral out- side S. It is a Dedekind ring. Let G be a connected reductive k-group. 4.9, Lema. (i) There is an S such that G is definable over os; Gil) G x gk, is quasi-split for almost all v. (i) is easily established. Let C be the group of inner automorphisms of G; it is a semisimple k-group. We identify it with its group of k,-rational points. There is 7 € H\(k, C) such that G, twisted by a cocycle ¢ from 7 (see 3.1), is quasi-split. This is another way of saying that G is an inner form of a quasi-split group. Now c defines a principal homogeneous space C. of C over k, i.e., an algebraic variety over k, on which C acts simply transitively, the action being defined over k (see [16, p. I-58). We have 7 = | if and only if C, has a k-rational point. To prove (i) it now suf fices to show that the image of 7 in H'(k,, C x ,k,)is trivial for almost all v, or that C. has a k,-rational point for almost all v. Let v be nonarchimedean such that C x, k, and C, x, k, are definable over Op, SAY C Xp ky = Cy Xa, key Ce Xu ky = Ceo Xo, ky- Assume furthermore that the reduced group Cp x., Fy, over the residue field F,, is a connected F,-group. These conditions are satisfied for almost all v. By 4.4, it follows that C.o X., Fy has an F,-rational point. A version of Hensel’s lemma then gives that C,,. has an o,rational point, which shows that C has a k,-rational point. This implies (ii), as wwe have seen, 4.10, Adelization. Let A be the adele ring of k. It is a k-algebra, so the group of A-points G(A) of G is defined. Let G © GL, be an embedding over k. Then g + (g, ¢-*) maps G(A) bijectively onto a closed subset of 4”! @ 4”, Endowed with the induced topology, G(A) is a locally compact group, the adele group of G. It has G(k) as a discrete subgroup. The topology on G(A) is independent of the choice of the embedding G % GL(n). An alternative way to define G(A) is as fol- Jows. Let Sp have the property of 4.9(i). For each finite set of valuations S > Sy, the group GAs) = T] Go) « TL Gk) wes is a locally compact group. If $ < S' then G(4s) < G(4s). G(A) can also be de- fined as the limit group G(A) = inj lims—,s, G(As) (this is independent of the choice of So). For each y, we have an injection G(k,) > G(A). ExAMPLes. (a) G = GL(1). Then G(4) is the group of idéles (the units of 4). (b) k = Q,G = SL(n). One checks thatREDUCTIVE GROUPS 19 G(A) = SL(n, R)- ( SL(n, Z))- Go, from which one sees that there is a surjective continuous map G(A)/G(Q) + SL(n, R)/SL(n, Z). More precisely, if one defines, for a positive integer N, the con- sequence subgroup J'(N) of SL(n, Z)by I'(N) = {7 ¢ SL(n, Z)|7 = 1(mod NY}, then G(A)/G(Q) = proj lim SL(n, R)/T(N). (©) Let G be a Q-group and let G GL(#) be an embedding (over Q). Fix a lattice Lin Q* and let /'be the subgroup of G(Q) of elements stabilizing L. There exists a connection, similar to that of the previous examples, between G(A)/G(Q) and G(R)/P (see [1}). The main results about G(4)/G(k) are as follows (G a connected reductive k-group). Let X be the group of k-rational characters of G. For each y € X define a character ||: G(A) > R* by|y|((g.)) = To 1x(g.)l» where | |, is an absolute value, normalized so as to satisfy the product formula, Let G(4)? be the intersection of kernels of the ||, for ¢ X. The product formula shows that G(k) < G(A)°. 4.11. THEOREM. (i) G(A)°/G(k) has finite invariant volume; ii) (G semisimple) G(A)»/G(k) is compact if and only if G is anisotropic over k. This is a consequence of reduction theory, due to Borel and Harish-Chandra for number fields and to Harder for function fields (see [1] and [11}). Notice, that by restriction of the ground field, it suffices to prove this for k = Q or k = F(T). 5. A class of Lie groups. In this section we discuss a class of Lie groups close to the groups of real points of reductive R-groups. This is the class of groups occurring in Wallach’s paper in these PRoceEDINGS (see also [12]). We shall indicate briefly how the properties of these groups can be deduced from the algebraic properties of reductive groups, discussed above. We shalll say that an algebraic group G defined over a field of characteristic zero is reductive if its identity component G® (in the Zariski topology) is so. 5.1. Let G be a Lie group, with Lie algebra g. Its identity component is denoted by G®. We denote by °G the intersection of the kernels of all continuous homomor- phisms G — R¥. Then °G is a closed normal subgroup and G/9G is a vector group. A split component of G is a vector subgroup V of G such that G = °G - V, °"G NV = {e}. We assume henceforth that G possesses the following properties: (1) There is a reductive R-group G and a morphism v: G -» G(R) with finite kernel whose image is an open subgroup of G(R). It follows that » induces an isomorphism of g onto the set of real points of Lie G. We shall often identify g and v(q). It also follows that »(G)? = G(R)® and that G? has finite index in G (since this is so for G(R), see 4.2(ii), and ker v is finite). (2) The image of G in the automorphism group of ge = 9 @x€ lies in the image of the identity component G0 of G. The main reason to allow for finite coverings of linear groups is to include the metaplectic group and all connected semisimple groups with finite center. The20 T. A. SPRINGER main use of (2) is to insure that G acts veloping algebra of g 5.2. Let Oy be the automorphism of GL(n, R) which sends g to ‘g~!, Let 8 (resp. Sp) be the set of real symmetric (resp. and positive nondegenerate) n x n-matrices. Then exp: x ++ exp x = 1 + x + 22/2! + - is an isomorphism of 8 onto Sp, Given 5 € So, there is a unique analytic subgroup of GL(x, R), isomorphic to R, contained in So, and passing through s. It is contained in any dp-stable Lie subgroup of GL(n, R) with finitely many connected components which contains s. ivially on the center of the universal en- 5.3. Lemma. Let G < GL(n, C) be an R-subgroup stable under 0. (i) Let s € Sp () G(R). Then there exists a g-stable R-split torus S of G such that se S(R); (ii) let Xe 8 [| Lie(G). There is a Oy-stable R-split subtorus of G whose Lie algebra contains X; (iii) G is reductive. The element s generates an infinite subgroup of G, whose Zariski closure is a torus with the required properties. (ji) follows from (i), applied to exp x. Let U be the unipotent radical of G, let s€ G(R). Then s and (09s)s~ are unipotent. By (i) the last element is also semisimple, which implies s =. Hence U= {1}. This proves (ii). 5.4, By definition, a Cartan involution of GL(n, R) is an automorphism conju- gate to Jp by an inner automorphism. Let G and G be asin 5.1. Let G < GL(n, C) be an embedding over R. Then »(G) is stable under some Cartan involution 0 of GL(n, R). In other words, we may assume, after conjugation, that »(G) is stable under p (in which case it is said to be selfadjoint) [1], [15]. Let t (resp. 8) be the fixed point (resp. —1 eigenspace) of @ in g, and K the inverse image in G of the fixed point set of 0 in v(G). 5.5. Proposition. The automorphism 6 of g extends uniquely to an automorphism of G whose fixed point set is K. The map pu: (k, x) + k + exp x is an isomorphism of analytic manifolds of K x 8 onto G. ‘The automorphisms of G thus defined are the Cartan involutions of G. They form one conjugacy class with respect to inner automorphisms by elements of G°. The decomposition G = K - S(S = exp 8) is a Cartan decomposition of G. After conjugation, we may assume that 0 = 0. If G = GL(, R), then K O(n), S = Sp and our assertion follows from the polar decomposition of real matrices. Assume now that y is the identity. Write g eG as a product g =k -s where k € O(n), s¢Sp. Then s? = (09 g)"!- ge G, and the unique I-parameter subgroup in So through s? (see 5.2)is contained in G. In this group, there is a uni- que element with square s?, which must then be equal to s. Thus s €G, hence also kG. This implies that y is surjective. Injectivity follows from the uniqueness of the polar decomposition. The decomposition g = t + 8 implies that the tangent map at any point is bijective; hence y1 is an analytic isomorphism. Thus G is the direct product of K and a euclidean space, This proves the proposition when y is the identity. Let G be the simply connected group with Lie algebra g, K the analytic subgroup of G with Lie algebra f and z:G ~+ G the natural projection. Since the fundamental group of K is that of G®, the group is the universal covering of K; hence ker x < K. The automorphism @REDUCTIVE GROUPS 2 of g extends to one of G, which fixes K pointwise, hence acts trivially on ker x, and goes down to an automorphism of G. The result for 1(G) implies that G = KS = K- G°, Since ker y acts trivially on g, hence on G®, 9: G? + G? extends obviously to an automorphism of G which fixes K pointwise. The remaining asser- tions are then obvious. 5.6. COROLLARY. (i) K is a maximal compact subgroup of G; (ii) K meets every connected component of G. Gis the topological product of K by a connected space S, whence (ii). The first assertion follows from the fact that every s # 1 in S generates an infinite discrete subgroup. Fix a Cartan involution 6 of GL(n, R) stabilizing x(G). We also denote by 6 the Cartan involution of G defined in 5.5. 5.7. Let C be the center of G. It has again the properties (1), (2) and it is 0-stable. The group corresponding to G is the center of G. The subset corresponding to Sis now a vector group V. It is, in fact, the maximal §-stable vector subgroup contained in C. Let G; be the derived group of G. 5.8. Lema. (i) °G = KG, and V is a split component of G; (i) °G has the properties (1), (2) and is O-stable. KG, is a 6-stable closed normal subgroup of G, contained in °G. The Lie algebra gis the direct sum of those of KG, and of V, which implies (i). As to (ii) for the algebraic group of (1) we take the Zariski closure of »(°G) in G. Its identity com- ponent differs from G® only in its center. This implies (2), and the final assertion is clear. 5.9. Parabolic subgroups. A parabolic subalgebra p of g is a subalgebra such that te is the Lie algebra of a parabolic R-subgroup of G®. A parabolic subgroup P of Gis the normalizer in G of a parabolic subalgebra (which then is the Lie algebra of P). The parabolic subgroups of G correspond to the parabolic R-subgroups of G°. Let P be a parabolic R-subgroup of G®. Let N be its unipotent radical. Put PoP. 5.10. Lemma. (i) L is a Levi subgroup of P; (ii) the Lie algebra of G is the direct sum of those of N, @N and L. L 5.3(iii) shows that L is reductive. LN is a parabolic R-subgroup of G contained in P (see 3.6) with unipotent radical N, hence equal to P. This proves (i). Then (ii) follows by using that P and 6P are opposite parabolics. 5.11. Let S'be the maximal R-split torus in the center of L. Put A = »~"(S(R))°, N =y"1(N(R))P. These are subgroups of G. Since A is a 6-stable vector group, we have 8a = a for all a€ A. Let P be the parabolic subgroup of G defined by P and put L = P () OP, M = °L. Then Lis the centralizer of A inG. Also, L and M are 6-stable. 5.12, PROPOSITION. (i) L satisfies (1), (2) of 5.1. A is a split component of L and of P; Gi) (m, a, n) + man defines an analytic diffeomorphism of M x A x N onto P. Let H be the centralizer of Sin G. Then v(L) ¢ H. Moreover, the identity com- ponent H? is reductive and is equal to H (| G°(the last point because centralizers22 T. A. SPRINGER of tori in Zariski-connected algebraic groups are connected, see [3, p. 271]). It fol lows that (1) and (2) hold for L. The last point of (i) is easy. From P = LN we conclude that P = LN = MAN. Now (ii) readily follows. The decomposition of 5.12(i) is called the Langlands decomposition of P. There is a similar decomposition of the Lie algebra of P: y = mt + a+ 1. A parabolic pair in G is a pair (G, A) where P is a parabolic subgroup of G and Ais as above. 5.13, Minimal parabolic subgroups. Now assume that P is a minimal parabolic subgroup. Then Pisa minimal parabolic R-subgroup of G®. In that case the derived group of L is an anisotropic semisimple R-group. It follows that M is compact. We then must have M < K (recall that M is @-stable), so M = K () P. Let be the root system of G, S) (see 3.5). If ae@ put g, = {¥ eq| Ad(a)X = aX, ae A}. Then we also have ge = {Xeg|[H, X] = da(H)X, Hea} (a being the Lie algebra of 4). Also, there is an ordering of @ such that 1 = Lao gar On = Laco ga (n and Ou are the Lie algebras of N and ON). 5.14. Lemma. (i) We have direct sum decompositions gratmtnt On, gattatn (ii) a is a maximal commutative subalgebra of 8. The first decomposition follows by using 5.10(ii), It then follows that f is the direct sum of m and the space of all ¥ + 6X (Xe). Hence t () n= {0}, + m + 1 + On. This gives the second decomposition, We also get that $ is the direct, sum of a and the space of all X — 9X (Xen). Since a commutes with no nonzero element of n + Ort, the assertion of (ii) follows. From the above we see that @ is also the root system of the symmetric pair (G, K) (see [13, Chapter VII). 5.15. PROPOSITION (IWASAWA DECOMPOSITION). (kK, a, 1) ++ kan is an analytic diffeomorphism of K x A x N onto G. Let ¢ be the map of the statement. (a) im ¢ is closed. AN is a closed subgroup of G and G/AN is compact (because G/P and M are compact). Let x be the projection G + G/AN. Since K is compact, im(z © g) is closed. Hence so is im g = 27 im(x 4). (b) im ¢ meets all components of G, since k does (see 4.6(ii)). (©) The tangent map d¢ is bijective at any point (k, a, n). This follows from the direct sum decomposition g =f + a + 1, @), (b) and (©) imply that im ¢ is open and closed and meets all components. Hence ¢ is surjective. To finish the proof, it suffices to show that ¢ is injective. It is enough to prove that kan = a, implies a = a,, k =n = e. Now if this is so we have 6n = a’na;. The image under y of the last element is unipotent. It then follows that a? = af, a = ay, whence One N [) ON = {e}. 5.16. CorotLary. For any parabolic subgroup P of G we have G = KP.REDUCTIVE GROUPS 23 Let W be the Weyl group of the root system ®. This is the relative Weyl group of @, S) (see 3.5), ie., W = Neve (S)/Zecn)(S). 5.17, Lemma. M meets all components of G. It suffices to prove this for the case that »(G) = GR). In that case it follows from Bruhat’s lemma that the connected components of G(R) all meet N Neom(S). Let @ €@ be a simple root (for the order defined by P), Uiq) the uni potent subgroup whose Lie algebra is (qqle + (goa) (where the second term is zero if 2a ¢), and Urq) = O(Usq). It is known that Usg)(R)+ Uc )(R)- Ueas(R) contains an element of N representing the reflection in W defined by a. It follows that N < Zg2c@)(S)G®, which implies the assertion. It follows from the lemma that W = Ne(A)/Zo(A).. 5.18. Lemma. W = (K 1) Nc(A))/M. Let g = kan € No(A). Then also (61)-1a2n € N¢(A). Let wp € Nove (S) represent the element of maximal length of W. Then 0n-! = wm, for some m, ¢ N. We then have ¥53a2n € wa!N¢(A). The uniqueness statement of Bruhat's lemma then implies that m = e, whence n = e. This implies the assertion. From 5.18 we see that W is the Weyl group of the symmetric spaces G/K ({13, p. 244). 5.19. PROPOSITION (CARTAN DECOMPOSITION). We have G = KAK. This follows from 5.5 and the following lemma. Here S is as in 5.3 (observe that K normalizes 8). 5.20, LEMMA. S = Ucn KAKA. It suffices to prove this for »(G), id. Let s €S. Then s lies in a 0- stable R-split torus S, ¢ G®. Since S is a maximal R-split torus in G? (because P is a minimal parabolic R-subgroup of G®, see 3.5) we have that 5; is conjugate to a subtorus of S by an element of G°(R). By 5.17 we may take this element to be in GR), hence in G. So there is ge G with a, = g-isge A. Writing g = kan we obtain wa? On - ay = ayn) - a? - On. Using again the uniqueness statement of Bruhat's lemma, as in the proof of 5.18, we see that a, commutes with n. It follows that s is conjugate to an element of A via K, which is what had to be proved. 5.21. We finally give a brief elementary discussion of the geometric properties of the symmetric space G/K. We identify it with S (cf. 5.5). Itis a homogeneous space for G, the action being given by (x, $) ++ x-s = xs(0x)"!, If x €8 define |X|? = Tr(X%). This defines a K-invariant Euclidean distance on 8. The exponential map exp defines a diffeomorphism of 8 onto S. Its inverse is denoted by log. Define a Euclidean metric d(,) on A by d(a, 6) = lIlog a — log b|. This deter- mines a structure of Euclidean affine space on A. We may and shall assume that y=id.24 T. A. SPRINGER 5.22, Lemma. Let s, te S. (i) There is x €G such that x - sand x + t lie in A; (ii) if x’ is another element with the property of (i) then there is n € G normalizing A such that x-Inx! fixes s and t. (i follows from 5.20. To prove (i) it is sufficient to assume x’ = e. Then s, f¢ 4. Put x-s = a, x-t = , It now follows that a-}/2xs!/2 and b-1/2x01/2 ie in K, from which one concludes that st~! and ab~! are conjugate in G. The uniqueness part of Bruhat’s lemma then implies that these elements are conjugate by an element of the Weyl group W, from which (ji) follows. 5.23. Lema. Ifx¢ G, x» A = A then x normalizes A in G. Apply 5.22(ii), taking x’ = e, s a regular element of 4, 1’ = e. It follows that we may assume xe K and xs(x)"! = xsx-! = 5, Since s is regular, x centralizes A. The assertion follows. 5.24, The translates x-A of A in S are called apartments in S. It follows from 5.23 that for any apartment f there is a unique structure of Euclidean affine space on of such that any bijection 4 -> .f of the form a r+ x-a is an isomorphism of such spaces. $.22(i) shows that for any two elements s, fe S there is an apartment «/ con- taining them. It follows from 5.22(ii) that, if s # 1, the line in «/ containing s and t, together with its structure of 1-dimensional affine space, is independent of the choice of .. We call such lines geodesics in S. It now also makes sense to speak of the geodesic segment {st}, and of the midpoint of [st]. It also follows that there is a unique G-invariant function d on S x S whose re- striction to A x Ais the function of 5.21 5.25, PRoPosiTion. (i) d is a distance on S; Gi) ifs, t, we S, d(s, t) = d(s, u) + d(u, t) then w lies on the segment [st]; ii) a closed sphere {x € X | d(x, a) Sr} is compact in X. It suffices to prove this for the case G = GL(n, R). A proof of (i) and (i) is given in the appendix to this section. The proof of (iii) is easy. 5.26. Proposition. For each s€S there is a unigue involutorial analytic diffeo- morphism a, of S with the following properties: (a) o, is an isometry (for d), (b) s is the only fixed point of 0, (© a, stabilizes all geodesics through s. We have oy, = x°0,°x We may take x = e. The geodesic through e and exp X consists of the exp(¢X) (Ge R). Observing that d(e, exp(€X)) is proportional to |¢| it follows that the only possibility for o, is the map 1+ t-1, That this satisfies our requirements is clear. The final statement follows from the rest. 5.27. Lema. Let s, s’ be distinct points of S, let m be the midpoint (ss']. Let t beREDUCTIVE GROUPS 25 a point of S not lying on the geodesic through s and s'. Then d(t, m) < 4d(t, s) + dd(t, 8° Let ¢ = ¢,, then os = 5’. We have a(t, m) = d(t, o(8)) S a(t, s) + d(o(t), s) = a(t, s) + dt, 8’). If the extreme terms are equal we have, by 5.25(ii) that s lies on [f, o(#)]. Then so does s’ = as, and s, s', tlie on a geodesic, which is contrary to the assumption. The inequality follows. If Cisa subset of X we denote by 1(C) the subgroup of the group of isometries of S whose elements stabilize C. 5.28, Lema. If C is compact the group I(C) has a fixed point in S. Let r = inf..xsupjacd(x, y). Then F = {xe S| supyec d(x, y) intersection of the decreasing family of sets F, = {x € S| supjacd(x, y) S (x = 1, 2, «++ Since these are nonempty and compact (by 5.25 (iii)) it follows that Cis nonempty. Suppose a, be F, a # b and let m be the midpoint of [ab]. We then have by 5.27, for each y€ C, d(m, y) < 4d(a, y) + 4a(6, y) = r, which is impossible. Hence F consists of only one point, It is clearly fixed by 1(C). 5.29. THeorEM. Let M be a compact subgroup of G. Then M fixes a point of S. This follows by applying 5.28 to an orbit of M in S. 5.30. COROLLARY. M is conjugate to a subgroup of K. 5.31. COROLLARY. All maximal compact subgroups of G are conjugate. 5.32, ReMARKs. (1) In our discussion of the symmetric space S we wanted to stress, more than is usually done, the analogy with the Bruhat-Tits building @ of a p-adic reductive group. We mention a few features of this analogy. (@) It is clear from our discussion that S can be obtained, like @, by gluing together apartments (see (21, 2.1)) (b) We have introduced metric and geodesics in S in the same way as is done in the case of (see [9, 2.5] and [21, 2.3). In the case of @ an important role is played in the discussion of the metric, by the retractions onto an apartment {loc.cit., 2.2). Such retractions can also be introduced in S (an example is the map p used in the appendix). (©) The fixed point Theorem 5.29 has a counterpart for @ [8, 3.2.4]. (@) Lowe the proof of 5.29, using the strong convexity property 5.27, to J. J. Duistermaat. 5.29 can also be proved via the argument used in [8] (see also 21, 2.3} to prove its counterpart for . This requires the inequality (m is the mid- point of [x, y]) A(x, 2)? + d(y, 2)? 2 2d(m, 2? + 4dCx, WP, which can also be established in our situation (e.g. by using that the exponential map 8—S increases distances).26 T. A. SPRINGER, ‘Appendix. Proof of 5.25 for G = GL(n, R). A is now the group of all diagonal matrices with positive entries. It suffices to show: ifa,b€ A,s€S, then d(a,b) S d(a, s) + d(s,b) equality holding if and only if s lies on the segment [ab]. ‘As is well known, s€S being given there is a unique p(s) A and a unique ‘upper triangular unipotent matrix u(s) such that s = ‘u(s)p(s)u(s). If ae A, we have p(asa) = p(a)%9(s). We shall prove the following. Lemma. d(o(s), e) S d(s, e), equality holding if and only ifs € A. From the lemma it also follows that, for all a A, d(o(s), a) S d(s, a). Hence d(a, b) S d(a, ofs)) + d(o(s), 6) S d(a, s) + d(s, 6), proving the triangular in- equality. The case of equality is easily dealt with. Tt remains to prove the lemma, Let a; 2 a 2 -- 2 a, be the eigenvalues of s and b, 2 b, 2 --- 2 b, those of p(s). The lemma asserts that B dogs)? s 3 (ogay?. Results of this kind are known, they can be found, e.g., in H. Weyl, Ges. Abh. Bd. IV, p. 390. We use Weyl’s method. Let g = o(s)!/? u(s), sos = ‘g - g. There is a vector v ¢ R" with gv = b1/2 y, Then (,) denoting the standard inner product in R*, div, ¥) = (5) S av, ¥), whence b, S a. Applying a similar argument, working in the exterior powers of Rr, we see that bby «++ bp S aaz-- a, (1 S p Sn — 1), and, of course, bybe --- by dz --- dy. We may, and shall, assume that aya; --- a, = 1. Let Ve R" be the subspace of vectors with coordinate sum 0. Let a; =e; — 41 (1 Si S$ —1, (e) is the canonical basis), and define 0, V by (w;, &;) = 5; (1 Si, 7S n— 1). Then a, is the projection onto V of e+ -- +e. Let x = (log ay, log az,--, log a,), y = (log by, log be, Jog6,). We then know that (a) 20, (V,a)20, (X-y,a)20 (1 Sisn-)), and we have to prove that (y, y) < (x, x). Now (x, x) — (yy) =e — y,x — y) + 2%, x — 9). Since y is a linear combination, with positive coefficients, of the and x — y is a similar combination of the a;, we have that (y, x — y) 2 0. The inequality which we have to prove now becomes obvious. It is clear that we can only have (x, x) = (y, ») if x = y. In that case we have Tr(s) = Tr(o(s)). But it is immediate that if u(s) # e, we must have Tr(‘u(s)o(s)u(s)) > Tr p(s). So Tr(s) = Tr p(s) implies p(s) = s. This finishes the proof of the lemma, REFERENCES 1. A. Borel, Some finiteness properties of adele groups over number fields, Inst. Hautes Etudes Sci. Publ. Math. 16 (1963), 5-30. 2 Linear algebraic groups, Algebraic Groups and Discontinuous Subgroups, Proc. ‘Sympos. Pure Math., vol. 9, Amer. Math, Soc., Providence, R. I., 1966, pp. 3-20.REDUCTIVE GROUPS 27 3. A. Borel, Linear algebraic groups, Benjamin, New York, 1969. 4. A. Borel and Harish-Chandra, Arithmetic subgroups of algebraic groups, Ann. of Math. (2) 75 (1962), 485-535. 5. A. Borel and J. Tits, Groupes réductifs, Inst. Hautes Etudes Sci, Publ. Math. 27 (1975), 55 150. 6. A, Borel et al., Seminar in algebraic groups and related finite groups, Lecture Notes in Math., vol. 131, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1970. 7. N, Bourbaki, Groupes et algébres de Lie, Hermann, Paris, 1968, Chapters IV, V, VI. 8 F. Bruhat and J. Tits, Groupes algébriques simples sur un corps local, Proc. Driebergen Con- ference on Local Fields, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1972, pp. 23-36. 9. ———, Groupes réductifs sur un corps local. 1, Inst. Hautes Etudes Sci. Publ. Math. 41 (1972), 5-282, 10, C. Chevalley, Séminaire sur la classification des groupes de Lie algébriques, Paris, 1956-58, 1, G. Harder, Minkowskische Reduktionstheorie uber Funktionenkorpern, Invent. Math, 7(1969), 33-54. 12, Harish-Chandra, Harmonic analysis on real reductive groups. 1, J. Functional Analysis 19 (1975), 104-204. 13, S, Helgason, Differential geometry and symmetric spaces, Academic Press, New York, 1969. 14, J. E. Humphreys, Linear algebraic groups, Grad. Texts in Math., vol. 21, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1975. 15, G. D, Mostow, Sel/adjoint groups, Ann. of Math. (2) 62 (1955), 44-55. 16, J.P. Serre, Cohomologie galoisienne, Lecture Notes in Math., vol. 5, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1964. 17. SGA 3: Schémas en groupes (séminaire dirigé par A. Grothendieck), Lecture Notes in Math., vol. 153, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1970. 18, R. Steinberg, Lectures on Chevalley groups, Yale University, 1968. 19. J. Tits, Classification of algebraic semi-simple groups, Algebraic Groups and Discontinuous ‘Subgroups, Proc, Sympos. Pure Math., vol. 9, Amer. Math, Soc., Providence, R. I., 1966, pp. 33~ 2. 20. + On buildings and their applications, Proc. Internat. Congr. Math. (Vancouver, 1974), vol. I, Canad. Math, Soc., 1975, pp. 209-221. 21, ~--—, Reductive groups over local fields, these PROCEEDINGS, part 1, pp. 29-69. 22. A. Weil, Adeles and algebraic groups, Institute for Advanced Study, Princeton, N. J., 1961. MATHEMATIscH INSTITUUT DER RUKSUNIVERStTEIT, UTRECHTProceedings of Symposia in Pure Mathematics Vol. 33 (1979), part 1, pp. 29-69 REDUCTIVE GROUPS OVER LOCAL FIELDS J. TITS TABLE OF CONTENTS 0. Preliminaries 0.1. Introduction 0.2. Notations .... 1. The apartment of a maximal soli torus and the affine root system............31 1.1. The split case.. 1.2. The apartment A(G, 5, K) 1.3. Remark 1.4, Filtration of the groups U,(K) . 1.5. About proofs, references and generalizations. 1.6. The affine root system Oy .....-- : 1.7. Half-apartments, chambers, affine Weyl group. 1.8. Bases, local Dynkin diagram, characteristic dimensions . 1.9. Root system attached to a point of A and special points, 1.10, Behaviour under field extension and hyperspecial points... 1.11, Absolute and relative local Dynkin diagram; the index 1.12. Reduction to the absolutely quasi-simple case; restriction of scalars 1.13. The case of simply-connected groups 1.14, Example: general linear groups... 1.15. Example: quasi-split special unitary groups in 1 odd dimension. 1.16. Example: quasi-split but nonsplit orthogonal groups .. 2. The building 2.1. Definition: 2.2. Affine structures, facets, retractions, topology and other canonical structures on 2, 2.3. Metric and simplicial decomposition .. 2.4, Dynkin diagram; special and hyperspecial points, 2.5, Action of (Aut GK) on # and 4; conjugacy classes of special and hyperspecial points... 2.6. Behaviour under field extensions. 2.7. Example: groups of relative rank I. 2.8, Example: SLs and GL... AMS (MOS) subject classifications (1970). Primary 20G25; Secondary 20G30, 15A63, (© 107, American Mathematical Society 2930 41s 2.9. Example: general linear groups .. 2.10. Example: special unitary groups. 3. Stabilizers and centralizers 3.1. Notations: a BN-pair 3.2. Maximal bounded subgroup 3.3. Various decompositions 3.4. Some group schemes. 3.5. Reduction mod p . 3.6. Fixed points of groups of units of tori =... 3.7. Iwahori subgroups; volume of maximal compact subgroups 3.8. Hyperspecial points and subgroups 3.9. The global case 3.10, Example: general linear groups 3.11. Example: quasi-split special unitary group in odd dimension, 3.12. Example: quasi-split but nonsplit special orthogonal group 4, Classification 4.1, Introduction .... 4.2. Residually split groups.. 4.3. Nonresidually split groups 4.4. Interpretation 4.5. Invariants 4.6. The classification kit. References.. 0. Preliminaries. 0.1, Introduction. This is a survey of some aspects of the structure theory of reduc- tive groups over local fields. Since it is mainly intended for “utilizers”, the main emphasis will be on statements and examples. The proofs will mostly be omitted, except for short local arguments which may give a better insight in the way the theory operates. When proofs are available in the literature (which is not always the case!), references will be given; references to [8] are often conditional, as explained in §1.5. We shall not try to give the historical background of the results exposed here. Let us merely recall that the theory was initiated by N. Iwahori and H. Matsumoto [15], who were considering split semisimple groups, that quasi-split and classical groups were later on studied by H. Hijikata (13), and that, in the generality given here, most results are due to F, Bruhat and the author (6}, 7} [8]. [9]. For further information, one may consult the introduction of (8). 0.2. Notations. The following notations will be used throughout the paper: K denotes a field endowed with a nontrivial discrete valuation q, the value group «(K*) (© R) is also called 7, o represents the ring of integers, » = zo with x <0 its prime ideal and K = o/p the residue field. We always assume K complete and K perfect. We consider an algebraic group G defined over K whose neutral com- ponent G? is reductive, and call S a maximal K-split torus of G, N (resp. Z) the normalizer (resp. the centralizer) of S in G, °W the finite group N(K)/Z(K) (asREDUCTIVE GROUPS OVER LOCAL FIELDS 31 usual, (K) stands for the group of rational points of ? over K), X* = X*(S) = Homg(S, Mult) (resp. X_ = X4(S) = Hom(Mult, 5)) the group of characters (resp. cocharacters) of S, V the real vector space ¥, @ R, @ = OG, S) < X* the set of roots of G relative to S, *W the Weyl group of the root system @ which we identify with a normal subgroup of "7 (equal to “W if G = G°) and U,, for a, the unipotent subgroup of G” normalized by S and corresponding to the root, a (ie., the group called U;,) in (3, 5.2). 1. The apartment of a maximal split torus and the affine root system. 1.1, The split case. As a motivation for what follows, we first consider the case where G” is split, that is, where S is a maximal torus of G. Then, the groups U, are K-isomorphic to the additive group. Indeed, the choice of a “Chevalley basis” in the Lie algebra of G determines a system of K-isomorphisms y,: Add — U, (an ““épinglage”) satisfying the commutation relations of Chevalley [10, p. 27]. Since K is a local field, its additive group is filtered and so are the groups U,(K), “par transport de structure”. The terms of those filtrations are conveniently indexed by affine functions on V: fora @ and 7 € /’,a + 7 issucha function and we set ay Kory = ploy, 0). If we transform the Chevalley basis by Ad s for an element s ¢ S(K), the system (ye) is replaced by (7) = (za °a(s)) and, setting X;., = x; (w™ [y, co), we have Q) Katy = Xotrewiet) Thus, the terms of the filtrations of the groups U,(K) are unchanged but their indexation has undergone a translation. The same conclusion holds for an arbitrary change of Chevalley basis (one just has to replace s by a rational element of the image of S in the adjoint group). We may express that conclusion in a more invariant way as follows. There exist, an affine space A under V, a system ®,; of affine functions on 4 and a mapping a X, of ®,; onto a set of subgroups of G(K) with the following property: to every Chevalley basis, there corresponds a point0.¢A such that 0,; consists of all functions 8) aixeax-O+7 (xedsaed7el) and that, if (,) denotes the “épinglage” associated with the given basis, the group X,, corresponding to the function (3) is given by (1). The group S(K) operates by translations on A in such a way that, for s € S(K), we have @ SAX GS = Koos From (2) it follows that the translation y(s) € V of A induced by s (i.e., defined by (x) =x + v(s) for x € A) is given by (5) a((3)) =— w(a(s)) for every ae @. More generally, the normalizer N(K) of S(K) in G(K) operates on A by affine trans- formations in such a way that (4) holds for any s ¢ N(K). 1.2. The apartment A(G, S, K). Our purpose is to generalize the above results to an arbitrary group G in the following form: to G, S, K, we want to associate an32 2. TITS affine space A = A(G, S, K) under V on which N(K) operates. a system Dyy = ©,AG, S, K) of affine functions on A and a mapping ar Xq of Dy onto a set of subgroups of G(K), such that the relation 1.1(4) holds for s € N(K), that the vector parts (a) of the functions « €,; are the elements of ®, and that, for ae ®, the groups X,, with («) = a forma filtration of U.K). We first proceed with the construction of the space 4; the set ®, and the X,’s will be defined in §§1.6 and 1.4. The relations (5) show us the way. The group X*(Z) of K-rational characters of Z can be identified with a subgroup of finite index of X*. Let: Z(K) > V be the homomorphism defined by @ YQ) = - w(y(z)) for z€ Z(K) and y= X*(Z), and let Z, denote the kernel of ». Then, A = Z(K)/Z. isa free abelian group of rank dim S = dim V. The quotient W = N(K)/Z, is an extension of the finite group ° 7” by A. Therefore, there is an affine space A(= A(G, S, K)) under V and an extension of y to a homomorphism, which we shall also denote by », of Vin the group of, affine transformations of A. If G is semisimple, the system (4, ») is canonical, that is, unique up to unique isomorphism. Otherwise, it is only unique up to isomor- phism, but one can, following G. Rousseau [19], “canonify” it as follows: calling BG the derived group of G° and S; the maximal split torus of the center of G®, one takes for A the direct product of A(ZG°, G° 1) S, K) (which is cano- nical) and X(S;) ® R .The affine space A is called the apartment of S (relative to Gand K). The group N(K) operates on A through W. 1.3. Remark, Since V = Hom(X*, R) = Hom(¥*(Z), R), the groups Hom(X*, ’) and Hom(X*(Z), /’) are lattices in V and one has qa) Hom(X®, [’) »(Z(K)) = A c Hom(X*(Z), /’). If Gis connected and split, both inclusions are equalities, but in general they can be proper. Suppose for instance that G = R,/« Mult, where L is a separable extension of K of degree n, and let / be the value group of L. The group X*(Z) is generated by the norm homomorphism N;/x, hence has index n in X*. On the other end, A is readily seen to be equal to n-Hom(X*(Z), 1’). In particular, the first (resp. the second) inclusion (1) is an equality if and only if the extension L/K is unramified (resp. totally ramified). A semisimple example is provided by G = SU3 with split- ting field L; exactly the same conclusions as above hold with = 2 (indeed, in that case Z = R,,x Mult). One can prove that the first inclusion (1) is an equality when- ever G splits over an unramified extension of K. 1.4. Filtration of the groups UK). Let a€ ® and w¢ U,(K) — {1}. It is known ef. [3, §5]) that the intersection U_,uU_. () N consists of a single element m(u) whose image in *W7 is the reflection r, associated with a, from which follows that, r(u) = v(m(u)) is an affine reflection whose vector partis r,. Let a(a, u) denote the affine function on A whose vector part is a and whose vanishing hyperplane is the fixed point set of r(x) and let 9" be the set of all affine functions whose vector part belongs to @. For aw € 9", we set X, = {we UK) |u = 1 or a(a, u) = a}. The following results are fundamental. 1.4.1. For every « as above, X, is a group. 1.42. Ifa, BO, the commutator group (Xq, X) is contained in the group gen- erated by all Xyax49 for p,qeN* and pa + q3e"REDUCTIVE GROUPS OVER LOCAL FIELDS 33 Clearly, the X,’s with (a) = a form a filtration of U,(K). We denote by X., the union of all Xq4, fore R, ¢ > 0 (of course, X,4 = Xatefor ¢ sufficiently small). From 1.4.2, it follows that X,, is a normal subgroup of X,, and we set X, = X,/Xq4. Thus, the X,'s, for (a) = a, are the quotients of the filtration of U,(K) in question, It is obvious that for n ¢ M(K), one has n-1X,q. = Xow) 1.5. About proofs, references and generalizations, Let us identify A with V via the choice of an “origin” 0, and, for every a€@ and u € U,(K), set p4(u) = aa, u) —a (€R). The assertions 1.4.1 and 1.4.2 essentially mean that the system of functions (eleco is a valuation of the root datum (Z(K); (U(K))ae ¢), a8 defined in [8, 6.2). ‘That fact itself is roughly equivalent with (actually somewhat stronger than) the ex- istence of a certain BN-pair in the group generated by all U,(K) (cf. [8, 6.5 and 6.2.3(€)]), and with the existence of the affine building of G over K (cf. §2 below and [8, §7)). Those results have been announced in 6}, (7] and [8, 6.2.3(c)]), but complete proofs by the same authors have not yet appeared (though the case of classical groups is completely handled in [8, §10], and quasi-split groups are es- sentially taken care of by [8, 9.2.3)). In the meantime, proofs of closely related results have been published by H. Hijikata [14] and by G. Rousseau [19]. In the sequel, quite a few statements will be followed by references to [8); this will usually mean that the quoted section of [8] contains a proof of the statement in question once 1.4.1 and 1.4.2 are admitted. For the sake of simplicity we have assumed that w is discrete and K perfect. In fact, much of what we shall say until §3.3 remains valid (with suitable reformula- tions) without those assumptions, provided that 1.4.1 and 1.4.2 hold, and this has been shown to be always the case except possibly if char K = 2 for some groups G whose semisimple part has factors of exceptional type and relative rank S 2 (cf. {8, $10}, [25] and (19). 1.6. The affine root system O,. For every affine function a on A whose vector part a = v(a) belongs to , one has an obvious inclusion X2, % ¥, (if 2a¢ 0, we set oq = {1}) and the quotient ¥,/_ has a natural structure of vector space over K (cf. 3.5.1) whose dimension is finite and will be denoted by d(q). In particular, if char K = p, X, is a p-group. An affine function a such that a = (a) € @ is called an affine root of G (relative to S and K)if d(a) # 0, that is, if X, is not contained in X yee: Us(K) (= Xate if 2a ¢ 0) for any strictly positive constant e. We denote by 0,4G, S, K) = , the affine root system of G, i. the set of all its affine roots. Note that if 2a¢®, one has a(a, u) ¢ ®,; for every we U,(K) — {1}; in particular, if@ is reduced, ®,; = {a(a,u)|ae0,ue UK) — {1}}- 1.7. Half-apartments, chambers, affine Weyl group. For every affine function a such that a = (a) € 0, we denote by A, the set a~([0, 00)), by 24, its boundary (0) and by r, the affine reflection whose vector part is the reflection r, (cf. 1.4) and whose fixed hyperplane is 4,. The sets 4, (resp. 04,) for a € ®,; are called the half-apartments (resp. the walls) of A, and the chambers are defined as the connected components of the complement in A of the union of all walls. The facets of the chambers are also called the facets of A; thus, the chambers are the facets of maximum dimension. If G is quasi-simple the facets (and in particular the cham- bers) are simplices, if G is semisimple they are polysimplices (i.e, direct products of simplices) and in general they are direct products of a polysimplex and a real affine space.34 411s The group W generated by all r, with a € @,,is called the Weyl group of the affine root system Oy. (If G is not semisimple, this is a slight abuse of language since W depends not only on 0, but also on the subspace of V generated by X,(2G° () S), where 2G° denotes the derived group of G°.) If G is semisimple, W is the affine Weyl group of a reduced root system (cf. [5, VI. 2.1]) whose elements are propor- tional to those of @, but which is not necessarily proportional to , even if @ is re- duced (cf. the examples in §§1.15, 1.16). Clearly, 2, is stable by the group W = v(N(K)) (cf. §1.2). It follows that the half-apartments, the walls and the chambers are permuted by 1, and that Wis a normal subgroup of W. 1.8. Bases, local Dynkin diagram, characteristic dimensions. The Weyl group W is simply transitive on the set of all chambers (i.e., it permutes the chambers transi- tively and the stabilizer of a chamber in W is reduced to the identity). Let C be a chamber and let Lo, ---, L, be the walls bounding C. For i {0, ---,1}, let a, be the unique affine root such that L; = 4,, and 4a, ¢@q. The set {a | i= 0, +++, J} is called the basis of @,: associated to C. Let a, be the vector part of a; and let us introduce in the dual of V a positive de- finite scalar product ( , ) invariant by the (ordinary) Weyl group *W. To as, one associates a (local) Dynkin diagram A = A (0,) obtained as follows: The elements a; of a basis are represented by dots ¥, called the vertices of the diagram; if 2a; € O,, the vertex v, is marked with a cross; two distinct vertices v,, vj are joined by an empty, a simple, a double, a triple or a fat segment (edge of the diagram) according as the integer 4,, = 4(a;, 4,)?/(a;, 4,\(@, 4;) equals 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 (in the latter case, a, is a positive multiple of — a); if 4; = 2 or 3 (which implies that (a,, a,) # (a;, a;)) or if A, = 4anda; # —a;, the edge joining v, and y; is oriented by an arrow pointing toward the vertex re- presenting the “shortest” of the two roots a; and ay. Since the chambers are permuted simply transitively by W, 1.8.1. the Dynkin diagram does not depend, up to canonical isomorphism, on the choice of the chamber C. Itis easily seen that the system (A, ©) is determined up to isomorphism by the Dynkin diagram d and the dimension of A (i., the relative rank of G). The Coxeter diagram underlying the Dynkin diagram—i.e., deduced from it by disregarding the crosses and arrows—is the Coxeter diagram of W, hence the Coxeter diagram of an affine reflection group (cf. [5, V.3.4, and VI.4.3], where our “diagrams” are called “graphes”). ‘Conversely, consider any Coxeter diagram which is the diagram of an affine reflection group, orient all double and triple edges and possibly some fat ones, and mark some vertices (possibly none) with a cross, Then, the diagram thus obtained is the local Dynkin diagram A of some group G over some field K if and only if, for every vertex v marked with a cross, all edges having v as an extremity are double or ‘fat and none of them is oriented away from v. ‘The necessity of the condition is obvious. As for the sufficiency, the classification of $4 even shows that for any given locally compact local field K, every diagram satisfying the above condition is the local Dynkin diagram of some semisimpleREDUCTIVE GROUPS OVER LOCAL FIELDS 35 group G over K: indeed, itis an easy matter to list all irreducible diagrams in ques- ion, and one verifies readily that they all appear in the tables of §4. Note that the above statement, or alternatively the tables of §4, provide the classification of all affine root systems, for a suitable “abstract” definition of such systems, which the interested reader will have no difficulty to formulate (cf. also (8, 1.4], where the affine root systems are called ““échelonnages”, and, for the reduced case, [17]). If the vertex v of 4 represents the affine root a, we set d(v) = d(a) + d(2a) (= d(a) if 2a ¢ ,), where the function d is defined as in §1.6. The integer d(v) of course depends not only on 4 and v but on the group G itself. In the tables of §4, the value of d(y) is indicated for every v whenever it is not equal to 1. If Gis split or ifthe residue field K is algebraically closed, all d(v) are equal to 1 1,9. Root system attached to a point of A and special points. For x ¢ A, we denote by ®, the subset of @ consisting of the vector parts of all affine roots vanishing in x, and by WW, the group generated by all reflections r, for a €@q and a(x) = 0 (Cf. $1.7). To x, we also associate as follows a set /, of vertices of the local Dynkin diagram 4: there is an element w of the Weyl group W which carries x in the closure of the “fundamental chamber” Cand one sets I, = {v, |wx ¢ L;}, with the notations of §1.8; that J, is independent of the choice of w follows from well-known pro- perties of Coxeter groups: cf. e.g., [5, V. 3.3, Proposition 1]. The objects 0,, Ws, I, depend only on the facet F containing x and will also be denoted by ®;, Wr, Ip. The set , is a (not necessarily closed) subroot system of @ whose Weyl group is the vector part of 17, and whose (ordinary) Dynkin diagram is obtained by delet- ing from 4 the vertices belonging to J, and all edges containing such a vertex. The set J, has a nonempty intersection with every connected component of 4 and, con- versely, every set of vertices with that property is the set J, for some x. The point x is called special for 4; if every element of the root system @ is pro- portional to some element of @,, that is, if @ and , have the same Weyl group. When it is so, W is the semidirect product of W, by the group of all translations contained in W; similarly, if G is connected, W is the semidirect product of W, by v(Z(K)) = Z(K)Z, (ef. 1.2). The fact for a point x to be special can be recognized from the set of vertices J, as follows. A vertex of the Coxeter diagram of an irreducible affine reflection group is called special if by deleting from the diagram that vertex and all adjoining edges, one obtains the Coxeter diagram of the corresponding finite (spherical) reflection group. (Equivalently: such a diagram being the Coxeter diagram underlying the extended Dynkin diagram—“graphe de Dynkin complété” in the terminology of {5]—of a reduced root system, the special vertices are the vertex representing the minimum root and all its transforms by the automorphisms of the diagram.) Clearly, such vertices exist. Now, x € A is special if and only if /, consists of one special vertex out of each connected component of J. In particular, special points always exist. In the tables of $4, the special vertices are marked with an s or an his (“hyperspecial points”: see below). 1.10. Behaviour under field extension and hyperspecial points. Let K, be a Galois extension of K with Galois group Gal(K,/K) = 0, and let S; be a maximal Kj- split torus of G containing S and defined over K. Such a torus exists for instance in the following cases: if G is quasi-split over K (obvious!);36 211s iff K, is the maximal unramified extension of K [6(c), 3, Corollaire 1]; if the residue field X is finite and K,/K is unramified. (The latter condition is necessary as is shown by the following example due to Serre: suppose that 6 has even order and no subgroup of index 2, and that G is the norm one group of a division quaternion algebra; then G splits over K, but none of its maximal tori does.) Let 4; = A(G, Si, Ki) be the apartment of S; and let Pras = DG, Sy, Ky) be the corresponding affine root system. The Galois group @ operates on A; (“canonified” as in §1.2) “par transport de structure”, and 4 can be identified with the fixed point set 9. That identification is not quite obvious. To characterize it, we have to describe an operation of N(K) on A§ (cf. 1.2). First observe that 44 clearly is an affine space under V. Let now m€ N(K), let N; be the normalizer of S; in G and let y; be the canonical homomorphism of N\(K;) into the group of affine transformations of A). Since the conjugate *S; is a maximal K;-split torus of Z, there exists z © Z(K,) with n’ = nz“ N,(K,). Upon multiplying z by a suitable element of (Z [] Ny) (Ky), one may choose it so that »,(n’) stabilizes Af. Let now v(z) be the element of V defined by the relation 1.2(1) where « must be replaced by the valuation of Ky. Then n = n’z operates on A? through »4(1x') v(z). That this action is independent of the choices made and indeed defines an operation of N(K) on A# is best seen by using the “building” of G over K; defined in §2: that building contains 4? and is operated upon by G(K;), hence by N(K), and one verifies that V(K) stabilizes A? and operates on it as described above. Note that, more generally, the results of §2.6 show that if S; is any maximal K,-split torus of G containing S, 4 can be naturally identified with an affine subspace of A(G, Sj, K,); much of what we shall say here extends to that situation, 1.10.1. If KyJK is unramified, by consists of all nonconstant restrictions ala, with AEDs. That is no longer true in general when K,/K is ramified. An obvious example is provided by the case where G is split over K. Then, S; = S, A, = A, and if we identify A with V as in §1.1, we have Oy = {a + 7] @e®, pel} and Oar = {a + rlae®, 7 © Jy}, where I denotes the value group of Ky From 1.10.1, it follows readily that 1.10.2. If Ky/K is unramified, every point of A which is special for Oy: is also special for D.:. The above example shows that that assertion becomes false without the assump- tion on K;/K. A point x A is called hyperspecial if there exist K,, $1 as above such that K;/K is unramified, that G splits over K, and that x is special for ®y.e. Then, it is easily seen, using 1.10.2, that the same holds for any Galois unramified splitting field K, of G and any choice of S; (assuming that such a torus exists). More in- trinsic characterizations of the hyperspecial points will be given in 3.8. If G is quasi-split and splits over an unramified extension of K, hyperspecial points do exist. Indeed, take for K, the minimum splitting field of G and (obligatorily) S1 = Z, let a, ---, a; be a basis of the root system O(G, S,) invariant by @ and choose ay, «, a; € Pyar SO that 1(a,) = a; and that (a1, --, a} is stable by 6 (the possibility of such a choice readily follows from the description of A and 4; given in §1.1). Then, the equations a, = -- = a, = 0 define an affine subspace of 4; invariant by @ (in fact a single point if Gis semisimple), and every point invariant by @ in that subspace belongs to A and is clearly hyperspecial.REDUCTIVE GROUPS OVER LOCAL FIELDS 37 ‘Suppose G is quasi-simple. We say that a vertex v of the local Dynkin diagram is hyperspecial (with respect to G) if the points x¢ A such that J, = {v} are hyper- special (a property which depends only on v obviously). In the tables of $4, hyper- special vertices are marked with an hs. Let now K, be the maximal unramified extension of K. The group Gis said to be residually quasi-split over K if there is a chamber of Aj stable by Gal(K,/K), and hence meeting A. We say that G is residually split if A, is fixed by Gal(K,/K), that is, if G has the same rank over K and over Kj, i.¢., if S; = S. For an explanation of the terminology and another definition, cf. 3.5.2. 1.10.3. If the residue field K is finite, G is residually quasi-split. If K is algebraically closed, G is residually split. By a well-known result of R. Steinberg, if X is algebraically closed, G is quasi- split. From that, it follows that: 1.10.4, Every residually split group is quasi-split. If Ris finite and, more generally, if G is residually quasi-split, G has a “natural splitting field”. Indeed, there is a smallest unramified extension K’ of K on which G is residually split, namely the smallest splitting field of S, (which does not depend on the choice of that torus), and the group G, being quasi-split over K’, has a smallest splitting field ” over K’. The field K" can also be characterized among all splitting fields of G over K as the unique one for which the pair consisting of the degree [K": K] and the ramification index e(K"/K) is minimal for the lexicographic ordering. L.11, Absolute and relative local Dynkin diagram; the index. In this section, Ky denotes the maximal unramified extension of K, and 4), S1, Oy: have the same meaning as in §1.10. As in the classical, “global” situation (cf. [22] and the references given there), one associates to G, K, S, (in fact, to G, K alone: cf. §2.4) a local index consisting of the Dynkin diagram 4; of ®,. (absolute local Dynkin diagram), the action of @ = Gal(K,/K) on 4, “par transport de structure”, and a @-invariant set of vertices of d, called the distinguished vertices. The latter are characterized as follows: to define 04s, one uses a chamber C; of A; whose closure contains a chamber of A (such a C; exists by 1.10.1), and then, the distinguished vertices are those representing the elements of the basis of Pyys asso- ciated to C, (§1.8) whose restriction to A is not constant. Residually quasi-split and residually split groups can be characterized as follows in terms of the index. The group G is residually quasi-split if and only if the orbits of in the set of all nondistinguished vertices are unions of full connected com- ponents of , and G is residually split if and only if @ operates trivially on Ay, all vertices of J, are distinguished and the smallest splitting field of the connected center of G is totally ramified. The index of G determines its relative local Dynkin diagram d = AG, S, K) and the integers d(1) (cf. §1.8) uniquely. We shall indicate an easy algorithm which allows us, in most cases, to deduce the latter from the former. First of all, there is a canonical bijective correspondence v ++ O(1) between the vertices of J and the or- bits of 6 in the set of distinguished vertices of 4). For every vertex v (resp. every pair {v, 1°} of vertices) of 4, let Jj,» (resp. 4;,,.-) denote the subdiagram of 4, obtained by removing from it all vertices not belonging to O(1) (resp. O(%) U O(’)) and all edges containing such vertices, and let 4),, (resp. 4y,.°) be the38 4. TITS subdiagram of d,,, (resp. 4), ) consisting of its connected components which con- tain at least one distinguished vertex. Then, 4j,., together with the action of @ = Gal(K,/K) on it and the set of distinguished orbits it contains, is the index (in the sense of [3] and [22)) of a semisimple group of relative rank one over K, the integer (0) is half the total number of absolute roots of that group and vis marked with a cross in if and only if the relative root system of the group in question has type BC, (if R is finite—or more generally if all vertices of 4,,, are distinguished—that means that 4;,, isa disjoint union of diagrams of type A2). As for the edge of @ joining v and v’, its type is determined by 4, O(1) and O(v'). If no connected component of 4; meets both O(») and O(v'), then y and v’are joined by an “empty edge”. Otherwise, @ permutes transitively the connected components of 4,,,,, and the result can be described in terms of any one of them, say 4}, If the latter has only two vertices v, € O(v) and vj ¢ O(v’), then v and y’ are joined in 4 in the same way as v, and y, in dy, yy. Thus, we may assume that Af,» has at least three vertices. Suppose first that 4; is not a full connected component of 4). Then, there is an “admissible index” (i¢., an index appearing in the tables of. [22)) of relative rank 2 whose underlying Dynkin diagram is 4%.» and whose dis- tinguished orbits are O(v) () di and O(0’) () Ai,w; indeed, it follows from the assertions 3.5.2 below that to {v,»’} is canonically associated a quasi-simple group defined over a certain extension of K and having such an index. The relative Dynkin diagram corresponding to that index, which can be computed by simple explicit formulae given in (22, 2.5}, provides the nature of the edge joining v and y’ in d. The following table gives the result in the case where all vertices of di, w- are dis- tinguished (e.g., in the case where the residue field K is finite); in the first row, which represents 4 yy the sets O(s) () Ai. and OC) () di ware circled: Sivwe —p) en corresponding edge in 2 There remains to consider the case where 4}, is a full connected component of 4;, which means that v, v’ are the two vertices of the local Dynkin diagram of a quasi-simple factor of relative rank 1 of G (cf. §1.12). Here we shall restrict our- selves to the case where all vertices are distinguished and simply refer the reader to the tables of §4 which give 4 in all the cases that can occur. 1.12. Reduction to the absolutely quasi-simple case; restriction of scalars. We shall now indicate how the local Dynkin diagram—with the attached integers d(v)— and the index of an arbitrary group G can be deduced from those of related ab- solutely simple groups. First of all, those data are the same for G and for the adjoint group of G*. Thus, we may assume that G is connected and adjoint, hence is a direct product of K- simple groups. Then, the Dynkin diagram—with the d(v) attached—and the index of G are the disjoint unions of the Dynkin diagrams and the indices of its simple factors.REDUCTIVE GROUPS OVER LOCAL FIELDS 39 There remains to consider the case where G is K-simple, which means [3, 6.21] that G = Ri, x H, where L is a separable extension of K, H is an absolutely simple group defined over L and Rz/x denotes, as usual, the restriction of scalars. We shall, more generally, assume that G = R;,« H for an arbitrary reductive group H;; this allows us to decompose the extension L/ into its unramified and its totally ramified parts and to handle the two cases separately. If L/K is totally ramified, the index, the local Dynki d(v) are the same for G, Kas for H, L. If L/K is unramified, the index of G, K consists of [L: K] copies of the index of H, L permuted transitively by Gal(K,/K) whose operation on the whole diagram is “induced up” from the operation of Gal(K,/L) on one copy, the relative local Dynkin diagram of G, K is the same as that of H, L, and the integers d(v) are [L: K] times as big. 1.13. The case of simply connected groups. In §1.7, we have seen that the Weyl group W of 0, is a normal subgroup of W = N(K)/Z(K). When G is semisimple and simply connected, one has W = W. In this and in other instances, nonsimply connected groups behave with respect to the “local theory” in a way similar to non- connected groups with respect to the classical theory. 1.14, Example. General linear groups. Let D be a finite dimensional central di sion algebra over K. The unique extension of the valuation w to D will also be denoted by w. Suppose that G = GL,,, the algebraic group defined by G(L) = GL,(D ® L) for any K-algebra L, and take for S the “group of invertible diagonal matrices with central entries”, that is, the split torus whose group of rational points S(K) consists of all diagonal matrices Diag(s, ---, s,) with s,¢ K*. The homomorphisms e,: Mult + S defined by et) = Diag(l, , 1, 1, 1, +++, DE with the coefficient r-1 in the ith place (i = 1, ---,n) forma basis of X,, and hence of V =X, @ Rf (a)rzsen is the dual basis in the dual of V, the relative roots of G are the characters a,; = a; ~ a, (i # j), the group U,,(K) consists of the matrices ud) =1+ ((g,)) with g,, = 5;¢d (de D), and N(K) is the group of all invertible monomial matrices (a3 dy, +--5 dy) = (gi) with giz = 42% dy, where g is a permutation of {1, «-, n) and d; D* (= D — {0}). For de D*, one has, with the notations of 1.4, oO m(uifd)) = wy — dus (duj( a!) = (95 diy +5 dy), where g is the transposition of iand j, d, = d,d; = —d-! and dy = 1 fork # i,j. We may identify the apartment 4 with V in such a way that v(nlo3 days dd) (35 wes) gram and the integers ¥ + afd). Vier with vo “*To avoid confusion, we adhere to the notations of [8, §10] which, unfortunately, impose this somewhat unnatural choice of the basis (e,) (and, consequently, of (a;)). This remark also applies to §81.15 and 1.16.40 3. TITS From (1) and the definition of a(a, u), it now follows that a(a;;, u;,(d)) = a; + w(d). Thus Q Oe = {a5 + 7 KJELL Mi ARTEL} and the filtration of U,,(K) by the groups X, with (a) = a,, (cf. §1.4) is the image of the natural filtration of D by the isomorphism d + w,,(d). In particular, for any a €Oy, the integer d(a) of §1.6 is equal to the dimension of the residual algebra of D over K. The description of the walls and half-apartments is readily deduced from (2). The chambers are prisms with simplicial bases, one of them, call it C, being defined by the inequalities a 6, which contradicts the maximality of 6. In view of (6), one of the following holds: a L/Kis unramified and [= I = 1"; (8) L/Kis ramified, 7 = 27; and [” = 27, + 6 + w(m). In both cases, /” U (2/; + 6) = 4; therefore, the walls are the vanishing sets of the affine functions a,; + 7 and 2a; + 7, with 7 € /}, and the inequalities 0 < a <42 4, 11s az < + < a, < $a(z;) define a chamber. The corresponding basis is {a,, a-,2 1) Gopi 2d-y + amr)} if dis an even multiple of w(x) and {a_, + }.am), pti "2,25 2a;} otherwise. It follows from (7), (8) that in the first case, 2a, is an affine root if and only if L/K is unramified, and in the second case (where L/Kis necessarily ramified) 2a_, + «x(z,) is never an affine root. As a result, we see that, whatever the value of 6, the local Dynkin diagram, together with the attached integers d(v) (Cf. §1.8) are ° Bee E - 322 22 (4 tn ) or (10) me ifm = priori a according as L/K is unramified or ramified, A point v= 52, ye; € 4 is special if and only if either v;¢ J for all i or ¥ = 4o(m) € /' for all i. It is hyperspecial if and only if L/K is unramified and ¥€ 1; for all i, which means that J, consists of the vertex at the right end of the diagram (9). 1.16. Example. Quasi-split but nonsplit orthogonal groups. Let L be a separable quadratic extension of K and let n be an integer = 2. In the space K" ® L @ Kr, viewed as a (2n + 2)-dimensional vector space over K, we consider the quadratic form Gm oH) Dee + Nivexy — (XL; x € K fori # 0) A (where V,,<¢: L + K denotes the norm), and we suppose that G is the orthogonal group O(q). The elements of G(R), for any K-algebra R, are conveniently repre- sented by (2n + 1) x (2n + 1) matrices ((gi;))-nai, jen Where g;;€R if both i and j are not zero, g9j¢L@xR if j #0, gine Homg(L, Rif i # 0, and gq € Homg(L, L) @x R. For S, we take the group of diagonal matrices Diag(d_,,"-~ with d_d; = 1 for 1 Sim and doy = id. The characters a: Diag(d_,, ++ d_,for | S i A’ called the retraction of onto A’ with center C. Clearly, geodesic segments are mapped by p,,¢ onto broken lines (connected unions of finitely many geodesic segments). The building @ is commonly endowed with a topology invariant by G(K) which is most naturally defined via the metric considered below (2.3), but which can also be more canonically defined as the weakest topology such that all pgc are con- inuous. If the residue field K is finite, that topology makes 2 into a locally compact space and coincides with the “CW-topology” (that is, the quotient topology of the natural topology of the disjoint union of all apartments). Otherwise, itis strictly weaker than the latter. In all cases, the topological space 1 is contractible; indeed, for every point xe @, the mappings 9,: # + @ defined by g(y) = 1x + (I—Ay form a homotopy from the identity to the retraction of 2 onto {x} [8, 7.4.20} A subset of is called bounded if its image by some retraction 4c is bounded, in which case its image by every such retraction is bounded, as is easily seen. AsREDUCTIVE GROUPS OVER LOCAL FIELDS 45 usual, a subset H of G(K) is called bounded if for every K-regular function fon G, the set w(f(H)) is bounded from below. The action of G(K) on @ is bounded and “proper” in the following sense: in the mapping (g, 6)-+(gb, 6) of G(K) x @ in Ax B, bounded subsets of G(K) x @—i.e., subsets of products of bounded sets— are mapped onto bounded sets, and the inverse images of bounded subsets of @ x @ are bounded. If K is finite, “bounded” becomes synonymous with “relatively compact”; in particular, the action of G(K) on @ is proper in the usual sense. 2.3. Metric and simplicial decomposition. In various questions, buildings play for p-adic reductive groups the same role as the symmetric spaces in the study of noncompact real simple Lie groups (cf. [24, §5] and the references given there) This section shows some aspects of the analogy; ef. also [18, 5.32]. Note that, unlike those introduced in §2.2, the structures considered here are not canonical, at least when G is not semisimple. Let us choose in V a scalar product invariant under the Weyl group *W. If G is quasi-simple, such a scalar product is unique up to a scalar factor, and there are various “natural” ways of normalizing it (Killing form, prescription of the length of short coroots, ete.). Canonical choices are also possible—componentwise—if G is semisimple, but not in general. From the scalar product in question, one deduces a Euclidean distance on A, hence, through the action of G(K), on any apartment. From 2.2.1, it follows that two points x, y of # have the same distance d(x, y) in all apartments containing them, and the properties of the retractions pc described in §2.2 readily imply that the building @ endowed with the distance function d: Bx B+ R, isa complete metric space [8, 2.5]. The associated topology coincides with that defined in §2.2. Again using the retractions p4,c one shows (8, 3.2.1] that d satisfies the following inequality, where x, y, z, me€@ and d(x, m) = d(y,m) = $d(x,y) A(x, 2)? + d(y, 2) & 2d(m, 2? + 4d(x, y). In Riemannian geometry, that inequality characterizes the spaces with nega- tive sectional curvatures (hence is valid in noncompact irreducible symmetric spaces!); as in the Riemannian case, it can be used here to prove the following {fixed-point theorem: 2.3.1. A bounded group of isometries of A has a fixed point (8, 3.2.4], Interesting applications are provided by Galois groups (“Galois descent” of the building) and by bounded subgroups of G(K) (cf. §3.2). In some applications (cf, e.g., (2)), it is useful to dispose of a simplicial decom- position of @ invariant under G(K). To obtain it, it suffices to choose a simplicial decomposition of A invariant under N(X) and finer than the partition in facets—it is easily seen that such a decomposition always exists—and to carry it over to all apartments by means of the G(K)-action. If G is semisimple, one can more directly use the canonical barycentric subdivision of the partition of B in polysimplical facets. If G is quasi-simple, that partition itself meets the requirements. 2.4. Dynkin diagram; special and hyperspecial points. Let C be a chamber of &. Starting from any apartment containing C, we can, following §1.8, define a local Dynkin diagram (G, C) which, in view of 2.2.1, does not depend, up to unique isomorphisms, on the choice of the apartment. If C’ is another chamber, 1.8.1, applied to any apartment containing C and C’, provides an isomorphism gcc:46 J. TITS AGC) + A(G, C’) which, again by 2.2.1, is independent of the apartment in ques- tion. All those isomorphisms are coherent: if C, C’, C” are three chambers, one has gore = Your ° Pec Thus, we can talk about she local Dynkin diagram 4(G) = AG, K) of G over K,a diagram which is well-defined up to unique isomorphisms. The same is true of the absolute local Dynkin diagram (§1.11), which is nothing else but the diagram 4(G, K,) of G over the unramified closure K, of K, and of the local index (§1.11). The definitions of §§1.9 and 1.10 can be immediately transposed to arbitrary points x and arbitrary facets F of the building @: one chooses an apartment con- taining x or F, uses the definition under consideration and deduces from 2.2.1 that the result is independent of the apartment chosen. Thus, to every point x (resp. facet F) of @ is canonically associated a set I, (resp. I;) of vertices of 4(G) and a root system ®, (resp. Of), the latter being only defined up to noncanonical iso- morphisms. We can also talk about special and hyperspecial points of &. The criterion in terms of J, for a point x to be special (last paragraph of §1.9) remains of course valid. A necessary condition for the existence of hyperspecial points is that G split over an unramified extension of K; that condition is also sufficient if G is quasi-split. To every vertex v of the diagram 4(G) is attached an integer d(1): the definition given in §1.8 made reference to an apartment A but the result is independent of its choice, always by 2.2.1. If the residue field is finite, isomorphic with F,, the number d(») can be interpreted as follows: a facet F of codimension one and “type v”, that is, such that Zp is the complement of v in the set of alll vertices of 4(G), contained in the closure of exactly g¢® + 1 chambers (cf. §3.5). 2.5. Action of (Aut G)(K) on B and A; conjugacy classes of special and hyper- special points. The group (Aut G)(K) of all K-automorphisms of G and, in par- ticular, the group G,q(K) of rational points of the adjoint group Gas of G°, act on @ and on the local Dynkin diagram 4 = 4(G) “par transport de structure”. Through the canonical homomorphism int: G -> Aut G, that gives an action of G(K) on @ and on 4. The action of G(K) on @ provided by the definition of @ as a G(K)-set coincides with this one if G is semisimple but not in general; however, the induced actions on J are always the same. We call £ = &(G, K) the image of G(K) in Aut 4. If G is semisimple and simply connected, it operates trivially on A, i.e., & = {1} (another illustration of the “philosophy” of §1.13). Suppose G connected. Then, # is also the image of Z(K) in Aut 4, and it can be computed as follows. We denote by Ga simply connected covering of the derived group of G, by 5 the maximal split torus of G whose image in G is contained in S, by Z the centralizer of S in G, by S, the maximal subtorus of S which is central in G and by Z, the image of Z(K) in Z(K). Then, S(K), Z, and Z, ew(x(2)) = 0 for all y € X*(Z)} (Cf. §1.2) are normal subgroups of Z(K) and their product S,(K) - Z,~ Z, is the kernel of the action of Z(K) on 4; thus & Z(K)|(S\(K) Z, - Z,). If Gisquasi-split—in particular if K is algebraically closed— Zand Z are tori and the computation of & is particularly easy. Note that, in most interesting cases, the subgroup £ of Aut dis uniquely determined by the underlying “abstract” group. Two facets F and F' of @ are in the same orbit of G(K)—for any one of the twoREDUCTIVE GROUPS OVER LOCAL FIELDS 47 actions of G(K) on @ described above—if and only if I and Ip. (cf. §2.4) are in the same orbit of &. In particular, if G is semisimple and simply connected, the orbits of G(K) in the set of special points of & are in canonical one-to-one correspondence with the sets of vertices of A consisting of one special vertex out of each connected com- ponent. Suppose G semisimple. If Gis K-split, the group G,y(K) permutes transitively the special points of @: that is an immediate consequence of Proposition 2 in [5,VI.2.2]. A case analysis shows that, for any semisimple G, G,a(K) permutes transitively the special points except possibly if the Coxeter diagram underlying 4 has a connected component of the form s So ss Fe or be Suppose now that G is quasi-simple and that the Coxeter diagram in question is one of those above, Then, obvious necessary conditions for G,.(K) (and even (Aut G\(K)) to permute transitively the special points are the existence of an auto- morphism of permuting its two special vertices, and the equality of the numbers (>) attached to them. One verifies that if the residue field K is finite, those conditions are also sufficient. For arbitrary G, if 8 has hyperspecial points, the facets consisting of such points— hence the points themselves if G is semisimple—are permuted transitively by G,a(K). 2.6. Behaviour under field extensions. The buildings behave functorially with respect to Galois extensions. More precisely, for every Galois extension K; of K, we can consider the building AG, K,), on which the Galois group Gal(X,/X) acts naturally (in the nonsemi- simple case, one has to “canonify” the apartments—and hence 3—as described in §1.2),and there is a unique system of injections bin; BG, Ki) > BG, Kz) (Ky Kz Galois extensions of K with K, < Ky) with the following properties: the image of ¢i,4, is pointwise fixed by Gal(Kz/K,); the restriction of ¢,x, to any apartment of @(G, K;) is an affine mapping into an apartment of @(G, Kz); fax, i8 G(K;)-covariant; if Ky © Ky © Ky one has has ¢x,, = ¢Kaky ° City The last property allows us to identify coherently every (G, K,) with its image by every ¢xsk 2.6.1. If Ky|K is unramified (or even tamely ramified: cf.{19)), & is the fixed point set of Gal(Ky/K) in BG, K,) and the apartment A = AG, S, K) is the intersection of B with the apartment A(G, 8), K,) of any maximal K,-split K-torus Sy of G contain- ing S. Still assuming that K;/K is unramified, one deduces from 1.10.2 that a point x of B which is special in BG, K,) is also special in B; if furthermore G is split over K,, the point x is hyperspecial. If K,/K is wildly ramified, the fixed point set of Gal(K,/K) in @(G, K;) may be strictly bigger than @: it then looks like the building @ “covered with barbs”, Suppose for example that G is split and is not a torus, that K = Qy and that K, is totally ramified over K and different from K (which implies that Kj/K is wildly ramified). The apartment 4 = A(G, S, K) of @ is also an apartment of @(G, Ky).48 4. TITS Let F be a facet of codimension one of A with respect to Ki which is not a facet with respect to K (cf. the example following 1.10.1). By the last assertions of §§1.8 and 2.4, there is exactly one chamber of @(G, Kj) not contained in A and whose closure contains F; it must of course be fixed by Gal(K,/K) and cannot be con- tained in @ since F is not a facet of B. For a proof of the above results and a more detailed analysis of the situation, of. [19]. 2.7. Example. Groups of relative rank 1. The building of a semisimple group of relative rank | is a contractible simplicial complex of dimension 1, i.e., a tree. All its vertices are special points. If K = F, and if d, d’ are the integers d(v) attached to the two vertices of the Dynkin diagram, each edge of the tree has one vertex of order g# + 1 and one vertex of order q + 1 (cf. §2.4). Consider for instance the special orthogonal group of a nonsplit quadratic form in 5 variables over Q,: here, d= 1, d’ = 2, and the building looks as suggested by the picture below. In that case, the vertices of order 5 are hyperspecial and the others are not. 2.8. Example. SLs and GLs. Suppose that G = SLs. The building @ = @(G, K) is a 2-dimensional simplicial complex whose maximal simplices are equilateral triangles, for the metric introduced in §2.3. The apartments are Euclidean planes triangulated in the familiar way: To picture the building itself, one must imagine it “ramifying” along every edge, each edge belonging to g + I triangles if g = card K. The link of each vertex inREDUCTIVE GROUPS OVER LOCAL FIELDS 49 is the “spherical building” of SLa(K), that is, the “flag complex” of a projective plane over K, a picture of which can be found in [24] or [26] for the special case where K = Fy, All vertices of @ are hyperspecial. The building A(GLs, K) is the direct product of @ and an affine line. 2,9. Example, General linear groups. We adopt the hypotheses and the notations of §1.14, In particular, D denotes a finite dimensional central division algebra over Kand G = GL,,» (thus G(K) = GL,(D)). Then, the building @ = @(G, K) can be interpreted as the set 1” of all “additive norms” in D*, that is, of all functions p: D* + RU {+00} such that 9% + ¥) 2 inf{p), pO)} ye DY), lad) = g(x) + afd) (xe D", de D). More precisely, if we identify the apartment A with V as in §1.14, the mapping A 4 which maps 377, ve; onto the norm (Gi x.) + inffo(x) — vi = 1, +, a} extends—of course uniquely—to an isomorphism of G(K)-sets @ + 1”, where G(K) operates on 4” by (gp)(x) = g(g-1x). A norm gis special—ie., corresponds to a special point of B—if and only if there is a basis (6,), <<» of the vector space D* and a real number f such that AZ bet) =f + intfoldy|i=1--.n} he D); u @ is hyperspecial if and only if it is special and D = K. A similar interpretation of @(SL,,, K) can be found in (8, p. 238]. The space AW has been first considered by O. Goldman and N. Iwahori [12]. 2.10. Example. Special unitary groups. Let L, w, m, I, ¢ and 6 have the same meaning as in §1.15. In particular, L is a separable quadratic extension of K and 5 = supfo(d) [de L, d+ d* = 1}. Let E be a finite dimensional vector space over L endowed with a nondegenerate hermitian form h relative to z, and suppose that G = SU(h). Then, the building @ of G over K, which is also, by the way, the building of U(A), can be interpreted as the set 1”, of all additive norms g: E > RU {+00} satisfying the inequalities alh(x, x) 2 2p(x)-6 (xeE), off, Y) 2 9G) + 90) EE), and maximal with that property (cf. [8, p. 239] for a more general result). Suppose further that £ = L?*1 and that h is asin 1.15(1). Then, the identification of & and 1, can be described more explicitly as follows: with the notations of §1.15, the mapping A — 47, which maps 3%; ve; onto the norm (Cea 15 Mn) inf fao(,) — vis o(%) + Ye (Xp) — 4/1 S i Sn} extends uniquely to an isomorphism of G(K)-sets @ + A,. A norm y € Ws is spe- cial—i.e., corresponds to a special point of @—if and only if there is a basis (Ddsceen Of E with respect to which ft has the form 1.15(1) and a constant fe 4’; such that, for x; € L,50 4. TITS aw o( 3) (one can then choose the basis (6,) so that f = 0 or 4a(x;)). The norm g is hyper- special if L/K is unramified and if there is a basis (b,) of E such that (1) holds for f=. inf{ola) —f a(x) +f, alma) -6|1 Si n) } 3, Stabilizers and centralizers, From now on, G is assumed to be connected. 3.1, Notations; a BN-pair. For every algebraic extension K; of K with finite ramification index and every subset ( of the building @(G, K;), we denote by G(K,)? the group of all elements of G(K;) fixing @ pointwise. If Q is reduced to a point x, we also write G(K,)* for G(K,)?. Note that if Fis a facet of @(G, K,) and if x is a point of F “in general position”, one has G(K;)F = G(K,)*. The stabilizers G(K) of special (resp. hyperspecial) points x ¢ @ are called special (resp. hyper- special) subgroups of G(K). We recall that if G is semisimple and simply connected, the group 17 M(K)/Z(K) coincides with the Weyl group W of the affine root system ®,. As be- fore, we set # = 4G, K). 3.1.1. Suppose that W = W. Then G(K)F = G(K) for every facet F of @ and every x F. Furthermore, if Cis a chamber of A = A(G, 8), the pair (G(K)°, N(K)) is a BN-pair (or Tits system: ef. {5}, [23)) in G(K) with Weyl group W. In that case, the groups G(K)* for x @ are called the parahoric subgroups of G(K) (cf. (8), but we shall avoid using that terminology here in order not to prejudge of its ‘most suitable extension to the nonsimply connected case. An alternative con- struction of the building @ starting from the above BN-pair (which can be defined independently of the building, as we shall see) and using the parahoric subgroups defined by means of that BN-pair is given in [8, §2]. Let Q be a nonempty subset of the apartment A whose projection on the building of the semisimple part of G (cf, last paragraph of 2.1) is bounded. For any root @€, let a(a, 2) denote the smallest affine root whose vector part is a and which is positive on Q. Let ” be the set of all nondivisible roots—ic., all roots ae @ such that Ja¢—and let '* (resp. @'-) be the set of all nondivisible roots which are positive (resp. negative) with respect to a basis of @, arbitrarily chosen. Set N(K)® = M(K) () G(K)? and let Z, and X, be defined as in $81.2 and 1.4. Then ‘one has the following group-theoretical description of G(K)? (cf. [8,6 .4.9, 6.4.48, 7.4.4) If X*(Q) denotes the group generated by all X,ia,q) with ae ®'*, the product mapping Teco Xaie,o) > X*(Q) is bijective for every ordering of the factors of the product and one has G{K)? = X-(Q)+ X*(Q)-N(K)°. If Q contains an open subset of A, the product mapping Wace Xota,a, * Z- > GK)? is bijective for every ordering of the factors of the product. 3.2. Maximal bounded subgroup. For every nonempty subset 2 of @, G(K)? is a bounded subgroup of G(K) (cf. §2.2). If the residue field K is finite, G(K)? is even compact and, in what follows, “maximal bounded” can be replaced by “maximal compact” From 2.3.1, one easily deduces that:REDUCTIVE GROUPS OVER LOCAL FIELDS 51 every bounded subgroup of G(K) is contained in a maximal one and every maximal bounded subgroup is the stabilizer G(K)* of a point x of @. It is now clear that if x belongs to a facet of minimal dimension of B, G(K)* is a ‘maximal bounded subgroup of G(K), in particular, special subgroups are maximal bounded subgroups. From 3.1.1, it follows that the above two statements give a ‘complete description of the maximal bounded subgroups in the simply connected case if G is semisimple and simply connected, the maximal bounded subgroups of G(K) are precisely the stabilizers of the vertices of the building B; they form Tlf (I; + 1) con- jugacy classes, where ly, »-,1, denote the relative ranks of the quasi-simple factors of G. For an analysis of the nonsimply connected case, cf. [8, 3.3.5]. 3.3. Various decompositions. Let C be a chamber of A = A(G, S). We identify A with the vector space V in such a way that 0 becomes a special point contained in the closure of C; in particular, G(K)? is a special subgroup of G(K). Set D = Rt -C (a “vector chamber") and B = G(K)°; if Kis finite or, more generally, if G is re- sidually quasi-split, and if G is simply connected, B is an Iwahori subgroup of G(K) (Cf. §3.7). Let U* be the group generated by all U, for which a|,—and hence aly— e and let ¥ be the “intersection of V and W”, that is, the group of all translations of A contained in W; thus, ¥ is the image of Z(K) by the homomor- phism y of §1.2. Set ¥, = ¥ () D (closure of D) and Z(K), = »-1(¥,), a subsemi- group of Z(K). 3.3.1. Bruhat decomposition. One has G(K) = BN(K)B and the mapping BnB + v(n) (n= N(K)) is a bijection of the set {BgB | g ¢ G(K)} onto W. If ne N(K) and v(x) = w, we also write BnB = BwB, as usual, If K = F,, the cardinality q, of BwB/B (used for instance in [1]) is given by the following formula in terms of the integers d(v) of §1.8: set w = ry---rWq, Where (r), ++, r)) is a reduced word in the Coxeter group W and w9(C) = C, and let v be the vertex of 4 repre- senting r,; then g, = g¢ with d = ¥/., d(y,). In particular, we have another inter- pretation of d(v): q# = q,c where r(v) denotes the fundamental reflection cor- responding to the vertex v of 4. More generally, for any X, the quotient BwB/B has a natural structure of “per- fect variety” over K, in the sense of Serre [Publ. Math. ILH.E.S. 7(1960), 1.4], and, as such, it is isomorphic to a K-vector space of dimension Y-, d(v,), with the above notations. 3.3.2. Iwasawa decomposition. One has G(K) = G(K)°Z(K)U*(K) and the map- ping G(K)"2U*(K) r+ (2) (z € Z(K)) is a bijection of {G(K)9gU*(K)| g € G(K)} onto Y. 3.3.3. Cartan decomposition. One has G(K) = G(K)°Z(K)G(K) and the map- ping G(K)"2G(K) ++ v(2) (2 € Z(K),) is a bijection of {G(K)°gG(K) lg € G(K)} onto Y,, In particular, we see that if K is finite, the convolution algebra of all functions G(K) + C with compact support which are bi-invariant under G(K)? (Hecke al- gebra) has a canonical basis indexed by Y_.. That algebra is commutative. For the proofs and some generalizations of the above results, cf. [8, $4]. 3.4. Some group schemes. The results of this section and the next are special cases of results which will be established in [9]52 4. TITS It is well known that the maximal bounded subgroups of SL,(K) are the group SL,(0) and its conjugates under GL,(K). It is natural to ask whether, more gener- ally, the maximal bounded subgroups of G(X) can always be interpreted as the groups of units of some naturally defined o-structures on G. A positive answer is provided by the statement 3.4.1 below. In this section, we denote by G,, the derived group of Gand by pr,, the canonical projection @(G, Ki) + B(Gq, Ki) (cf. the last paragraph of 2.1) for any K, 3.4.1. If Q is a nonempty subset of an apartment of B whose projection pr(Q) is bounded, there is a smooth affine group scheme %p over 0, unique up t0 unique isomor- phism, with the following properties: the generic fiber G, x of Gais G; for every unramified Galois extension K, of K with ring of integers ox,, the group G_hox,) is equal to G(Ky)? (cf. 3.1), where Q is identified with its canonical image in the building BG, Ky) (cf. 2.6). Clearly, Yq depends only on the closed convex hull of pr..(0). The following two statements are easy consequences of the definitions. 3.4.2. If G is split, the group schemes ¢, associated to the special points x of @ are the Chevalley group schemes with generic fiber G 3.4.3. Let K, be an unramified Galois extension of K with ring of integers og,, let Q & B be as above and let Q, be the canonical image of Q in B, = BG, Ky) (2.6). Then Go, is the group scheme over ox, deduced from Gp by change of base. Con- versely, let @ be a smooth group scheme over o with generic fiber G and suppose that, by change of base from 0 to og, Y becomes a group scheme Go, with Q) = B as in 3.4.1; then pr,(Q,) is stable by Gal(K,/K), and if it is pointwise fixed by Gal(K,/K), hence can be identified with a subset of &(G, K) (cf. 2.6.1) whose inverse image by pr,, in B we denote by Q, one has G = Go. If Q’ is any nonempty subset of the closure of , the inclusion homomorphisms G(K,)? + G(K,)®, for K; as in 3.4.1, define a morphism of group schemes % Ge which we denote by ogra. We represent by Go and yp the algebraic group defined over K and the K-homomorphism obtained from %o and poo by reduction mod p. 3.4.4. The reduction homomorphism Go) = G(K)? > Go(R) is surjective. 3.5. Reduction mod p. Let Q be as in 3.4, Our next purpose is to investigate the group Gp. We assume, without loss of generality, that Q. < A(G, 5). Then, the well- defined split torus scheme whose generic fiber is Sis a closed subscheme of %, and its reduction mod p, called 5, is a maximal K-split torus of Gg. The character group of S is canonically isomorphic with the character group X* of S and will be identified with it; similarly, we identify the cocharacter group of S with X,. The neutral component G° of G possesses a unique Levi subgroup containing 5, which we denote by Gy4; it is defined over K. We suppose Q convex. Let F be a facet meeting and of maximal dimension with that property. Since F satisfies all the conditions imposed on Q, the reductive group Gis defined and it also contains 5. One shows that the identity map of 5 onto itself extends uniquely to an isomorphism Gz! + Gp; if Fc Q, that is nothing else but the restriction of Por to G4. In the sequel, we shall be mainly concerned with the group G*. The notion of coroot associated with a root a is usually defined for split groups (Cf. [11, XX, 2.8], 20, §1)). In view of the next statement, we extend it as follows toREDUCTIVE GROUPS OVER LOCAL FIELDS 53 arbitrary reductive groups: if 2a is not a root, we simply take the coroot associated with a in the split subgroup of maximal rank defined in [3, §7]; if 2a is a root, we define the coroot associated with @ as being twice the coroot associated with 2a (X, being written additively). 3.5.1. The root system of Gi" with respect to 5 is the system Dx (cf..1.9); in partic ular, its Dynkin diagram is obtained from the local Dynkin diagram A(G, K) by deleting the vertices belonging to I (cf. 1.9) and all edges containing such vertices. The coroot associated with a root a ¢ Or is the same for G's! as for G. If U, denotes the unipotent subgroup of G's* corresponding to a, the group U,(K) is nothing else but the group X,, of $1.4, where is the affine root vanishing on F and whose vector part is a. Applying that to the unramified closure of K, one gets the following immediate consequence. 3.5.2. The index of Gi" over R, in the sense of [3] and (22), is obtained from the local index of G by deleting from 4, all vertices belonging to the orbits O(1) with ve Ip (the notations are those of §1.11) and all edges containing such vertices. In particular, if G is residually quasi-split (resp. residually split), G's is quasi-split (resp. split). When F is a chamber, then G is residually quasi-split (resp. residually split) if and only if Gp is a torus (resp. a split torus), If Gis simply connected, the group Gy is connected. In general, the group of com- ponents of Gg is easily computed when one knows the group 5, = 5(G, K,) (cf. §2.5), where K; is the maximal unramified extension of K. Here, we shall give the result only in the case of a facet. 3.5.3. The group of components of Ge is canonically isomorphic with the intersec- tion of the stabilizers of the orbits O(») with v < Ip in the group &y. A component is defined over K if and only if the corresponding element of £, is centralized by Gal(K,/K). If Kis finite, every component of Gp which is defined over K has a K- rational point (by Lang's theorem). The groups Gf¢ give an insight into the geometry of the building through the following statement: 3.5.4. The link of F in B is canonically isomorphic with the spherical building of Gs! over K, i.e. the “building of K-parabolic subgroups” of Gie* (cf. (23, 5.2). ‘The groups G#! also provide an alternative definition of the integers d(v) of §1.8. Suppose F is of codimension one and let v be the complement of Jy in the set of all vertices of 4. Then, Gi" has semisimple K-rank | and d(v) is the dimension of its maximal unipotent subgroups, or, equivalently, the dimension of the variety Gz/P,, where Py is a minimal K-parabolic subgroup of Gi, the neutral component of G;. This, together with 3.5.4, implies the interpretation of d(v) given in 2.4. If G is residually split, G}/Pr is a projective line, hence d(v) = 1; in particular, we re- cover the last statement of §1.8. While 3.5.2 gives an easy algorithm to determine the type of Gzé, 3.5.1, applied to the unramified closure of K, actually provides the absolute isomorphism class of that group. Here is an immediate application of that. Suppose that G is quasi simple, simply connected and residually split and that F is a special point. Then, Gis a simply connected quasi-simple group except if the local Dynkin diagram is the following one: qa ee)54 J. TITS and if Ip is the vertex marked with a +. Indeed, it is readily verified that in all other cases, Or contains all nonmultipliable relative roots of G, and the assertion follows from [4, 2.23 and 4.3]. In the exceptional case above, Gf is a special orthogonal group, hence not simply connected. Using the fact that in a simply connected group the derived group of the centralizer of a torus is also simply connected, one easily deduces from the preceding result the following more general one. Let us say that a special vertex of the absolute local Dynkin diagram 4 is good if it is not the vertex * ofa connected component of type (1) of that diagram. Then if G is semisimple and simply connected and if \Jy-1,O(0) contains a good special vertex out of each connected component of d,, the derived group of Gi is simply connected. 3.6. Fixed points of groups of units of tori. Let M be a subgroup of the group of units S, = {5 € S(K)|a(y(s)) = 0 for all x € X*} of S. We wish to find under which condition the apartment 4 = A(G, S) is the full fixed point set 2” of M in 2. From the properties of the building recalled in §2.2, one deduces that A = @™ if and only if, for every facet F of A of codimension one, the only chambers con- taining Fin their closure and fixed by M are the two chambers of A with those pro- perties. By 3.5.4, that means that the image M of M in 5(K) has only tivo fixed points in the spherical building of Gg? over X. If ais any one of the two nondit sible roots in @p, that condition amounts to a(iZ) # {1}. Thus, we conclude that: 3.6.1. A necessary and sufficient condition for A to be the full fixed point set of M in @ is that aM) ¢ 1+p for every relative root ae ®. In particular, if R has at least four elements (resp. if R & F2) A is always (resp. never) the full fixed point set of S_ in B. The preceding discussion also gives information on the fixed point set of the group of units S,,, of a nonsplit torus S, which becomes maximal split over an unramified Galois extension K, of K: one applies 3.6.1 to the action of S;,, on &(G, K,) and one goes down to & by Galois descent, using 2.6.1. In that way, one gets the following result for instance: IfSy is an anisotropic torus which becomes maximal split over an unramified Galois extension of K, then S,(K) has a unique fixed point in the building 2. By contrast, it is easily shown that if S; is a maximal torus of G = SLz whose splitting field is ramified, then S,(K) necessarily fixes a chamber of @ and possibily more than one®; for a similar torus 5; in PGL», Si(K) may have a single fixed point in @ and may have more than one 3.7. Iwahori subgroups; volume of maximal compact subgroups. In this section, we suppose G residually quasi-split; remember that that is no assumption if the residue field Kis finite (1.10.3). To every chamber C of the building &, we associate as follows a subgroup Iw(C) of G(K), called the Iwahori subgroup corresponding to C: if Gz denotes the neutral component of the algebraic group Ge (cf. 3.4), Iw(C) is the inverse image in Gc(0) = G(K)° of the group G-(R) under the reduction homomorphism ¥(0) -+ GA(K). Clearly, all Iwahori subgroups of G(K) are conjugate. From 3.5.2, it follows that Gg is a solvable group, hence is the semidirect product of a torus T by a uni- * This answers a question of G. Lusztig.REDUCTIVE GROUPS OVER LOCAL FIELDS 55 potent group U. By general results on smooth group schemes, it follows that Iw(C) is the semidirect product of 7(X) by a pronilpotent group Iw,(C) ; if K has finite characteristic p, Iw,(C) is a pro-p-group, and if Kis finite, T(X) is of course a finite group, of order prime to p. If x is a point of the closure of C, the image of Gz by the homomorphism ,c? Gc > G, is a Borel subgroup B of G,, and the kernel of A,c is a connected uni- potent group. It follows that g,¢ maps Gz(K) onto B(K) and consequently, by 3.4.4, that Iw(C) is the inverse image of B(K) in G(K)¥ = @,(0) under the reduc- tion homomorphism. Thus, the Iwahori subgroups of G(K) can also be defined as the inverse images in the stabilizers G(K)*, for x € @, of the X-Borel subgroups of the reductions G,. Now, suppose that Kis finite. Then, G(K) is a unimodular locally compact group of which the Iwahori subgroups are compact open subgroups. Therefore, there is a unique Haar measure j« for which the Iwahori subgroups have volume 1. From the above, it follows that, for any x € @, the volume of G(K)= with respect to pis the index [G,(K): B(K)] where B is any K-Borel subgroup of G,. If x is “tin general position” in the facet F of @ containing it, one has G, = Gr and the assertions 3.5.2 and 3.5.3 provide an effective way of computing that volume knowing the local index of G (together with the correspondence v ++ O(0) of 1.11), the set I, of vertices of d and the group &, = S(G, K;) (cf. 2.5), where K; is the unramified closure of K. 3.8. Hyperspecial points and subgroups. From 3.5.1 and 3.5.3, one easily deduces the following characterization of the hyperspecial points of @ defined in §1.10: 3.8.1. A point x of B is hyperspecial if and only if the neutral component of the group G, is reductive, in which case G,, itself is connected and hence reductive. One can also show that the schemes %, corresponding to the hyperspecial points x are the only smooth group schemes over o with generic fiber G and reductive reduction. Thus, the hyperspecial subgroups of G(K) can be characterized as the groups of units of such group schemes. 3.8.2. Suppose that R is finite and that G(K) possesses hyperspecial subgroups (a condition satisfied, for instance, if G is quasi-split and has an unramified splitting field: of. 1.10); then, the hyperspecial subgroups of G(K) are among all compact subgroups of G(K), those whose volume is maximum. ‘The proof, using §§3.5 and 3.7, is not difficult. 3.9. The global case. Let L be a global field. For every finite extension L’ of Land every place v of L’, we denote by v,, (resp. o,) the ring of integers of L’ (resp. of the completion £;). Let H be a reductive linear group defined over L. We suppose H embedded in the general linear group GL, and, for every L’ and v as above, we set H(0,) = H(L;) (1) GL,(o,). Another way of viewing that group consists in con- sidering the o;-group scheme structure »#,, “on H” defined by the standard lattice of in L*—in more precise terms, #,, is the schematic closure of H in the standard general linear group scheme $%,, ,,—; then H(0,) = #,,(0,). For any ring R con- taining 0;, we denote by 2g the group scheme over R deduced from #',, by change of base. 3.9.1. At almost all finite places v of L, 2, is the group scheme 3, associated with @ hyperspecial point x of the building ACH, L,); hence H(o,) is a hyperspecial sub- group of H(L,).56 3. TITS Indeed, let L’ be a Galois extension of L over which the group H splits, and let iy, be a Chevalley group scheme over o,, with generic fiber #,,. Since the group schemes 3, and 3€7,, have the same generic fiber, they “coincide” at almost all places of L’. Since almost all places of L’ are unramified over their restrictions to L, the assertion now follows from 3.4.2, 3.4.3 and 2.6.1 3.10. Example. General linear groups. Suppose that G = GL,. The Iwahori sub- groups of GL,(K) are the subgroups conjugated to (ei)|giv€ 0%. Bi €0 for i < jand gp fori = j} Let (bi)icicn be the canonical basis of K*, For 1 Sr $n, let A, be the lattice in Ke generated by {bi/zli Sr} U {bili > r} and let P, be the stabilizer of A, in GL,(K). Thus, P, is the group of all matrices whose determinant is a unit and which have the following form where the notation means that the upper left corner is an r x r matrix with coef- ficients in o, the upper right corner an r x (n ~ r) matrix with coefficients in x-1o, etc, The group B is the centralizer in GL,(K) of the chamber C described in §1.14. The subgroups P, are special and every special subgroup is conjugate to any one of them. The P,’s are the stabilizers of the points of # contained in a one-dimensional facet of C; with the notations of §2.9, the points fixed by P, correspond to the norms of the form ry U folx) -e > 7) for some constant ¢¢ R. If y is any such point, the scheme %, is the Chevalley scheme “on” GL, defined by the lattice A,. One can describe the scheme %, whose group of units is B, by embedding GL, in GLyz by means of the sum of n times the standard representation, and considering in K** the lattice Ay ® --- @A,. Note that Bis the stabilizer of any point of C. The corresponding statement for G = PGL, is not true. For instance, the image in PGL,(K) of the group generated by Band by the linear transformation Q By by ne yr bi (x1, + 9) + inf(Lo(x) + of) — is the stabilizer of the “center of gravity” y of the chamber of @ (PGL,,K) project- ing C. That group is also a maximal bounded subgroup of PGL,(K). The scheme G, can be described by means of lattice in the Lie algebra of G = PGL, on which G acts by the adjoint representation. If F denotes the cyclic group of order » generated by the reduction mod ) of the image of (I) in PGL,, the group G, is the semidirect product of F by a connected group; in particular, its group of com- ponents is cyclic of order n. 3.11, Example. Quasi-split special unitary group in odd dimension. We take over all hypotheses and notations from 1.15 and denote by o, the ring of integers of L. Let Ae L be such that A + 4* + 1 = O and that @(A) = 6 (we recall that d is de- fined as sup{a(d) | L, d + d* + 1 = 0}). We suppose the uniformizing element m chosen in such a way that (4m) + (Am,)° = 0: if L/K is unramified the pos-REDUCTIVE GROUPS OVER LOCAL FIELDS 7 sibility of such a choice is obvious and if L/K is ramified it follows from 1.15(6). Let (6,)-nzin be the canonical basis of L?*1, For 0 0, and we denote by A, the o;-lattice generated by that basis. Note that if 5 = w(A) = 0, which is always the case except if L/K is ramified and char K = 2, A, is also generated by the basis {b,/x, |i < —r} U {bli = —r}. The stabilizer P, of A, in G(K) is also the stabilizer of the point », of V= Ac @ (with the conventions of 1.15) determined by a(v,) = 46 ifisr, H6 + afm) if7>r. The points », are the vertices of the chamber defined by the inequalities 43 < a < + Dtere (89, — £9) in £, with obvious nota- tion. Let £, be the kernel of that form, defined by the equations x; = 0 for |i] > r, and let A,,9 be the inverse image of Ey in A,. We now consider the restriction of A to A,,9 x A,,o which, by reduction mod p, becomes the hermitian form A(x). () = + Fai (BD -rsrn Oran) 380 + NEI + ARI in Ep. Finally, G,, can be described as the stabilizer of the pair (fy, fz) in the group Ry (SLr(E)), that is, the special linear group of the E-vector space £ “considered as an algebraic group over K” by restriction of scalars. Let £, be the subspace of E defined by the equations x; = 0 for —r $i S r, and let hy denote the restriction of the antihermitian form h, to £, x £;. Then, G,, clearly contains the group SU(h;) x SU(h2), which is nothing else but its Levi subgroup Gz (cf. 3.5). Observe that, in conformity with 3.5.1, the diagram obtained from the diagram (9) of 1.15 by deleting its (r + 1)st vertex and the adjoining edges is a diagram of type BC, x Cy-r, which is indeed the type of the relative root system of SU(h) x SU(hiz). Second case. L|K is ramified. Then, the scalar multiplication by 7 in A,, reduced mod z, provides an endomorphism v: E + E£, obviously centralized by G,,, and58 J. TITS whose kernel is equal to its image v(E). The quotient £ = £/v(£) is canonically isomorphic with the quotient /,/7r,, and will be identified with it. From the fact that p is centralized by G,,, it follows that the projection £ + £ induces a homo- morphism of K-algebraic groups G,, + GL(E) whose kernel is unipotent. Here, we shall only describe the image G,, of that homomorphism, leaving as an exercise the determination of the full structure of G,,. By reduction mod z;, the antihermitian form x,h/A* becomes the alternating form hy: (5), (9) > Dkerss (3 Fs — %4 5) im B. Let By be the kernel of that form, defined by the equations ¥; = O for |i] > r, and let A,,9 be the inverse image of £ in A,. We now consider the function q: A,, + K defined by g(x) = h(x, x). By reduction, it becomes the quadratic form g: Ey + K given by G3))-+: Finally, the group G,, is the group of allelements of SL(E) stabilizing / and induc- ing on Eg an element of the (reduced) group SO(q). Let £, be the subspace of E defined by the equations x; = 0 for —r < i < r and let h, denote the restriction of hy to B, x By. Then Sp(h;) x SO(q) is a Levi subgroup of G,,, which is the iso- morphic image in that group of the Levi subgroup Gre! of G,,. Asin the unramified case, we can test the statement 3.5.1, this time by using the diagram (10) of 1.15 which provides, for Gist, a root system of type B, x Cy, Note that, also in the unramified case, we could have, instead of the restriction of h to A,o * Apo Considered its “contraction” q: A, + K defined by q(x) = ‘h(x, x), thus making the treatment of the two cases still more similar. On the other hand, we have introduced 2 in order to reduce the case distinction to a minimum; in the unramified case, as well as if char K # 2, we could have replaced 2 by I every- where, thus simplifying the equations somewhat. 3.12. Example. Quasi-split but nonsplit special orthogonal group. Now, we take over the hypotheses and notations of §1.16 except that we take for G the special orthogonal group SO(q). We shall not, as in §3.11, treat that example in any systematic way. Our only aim here isto give an example of a vertex v of the building such that G, is not connected. We suppose that L/K is unramified. Let be the lattice o* ® zo, © o* in K" © L © Kr where o, is the ring of integers of L. The stabilizer P of A in G(K) is also the stabilizer of the point ve Vc A defined by a,°) = 40(z) for 1 n, which is a vertex of the chamber described in $1.16. In the diagram (1) of §1.16, J, is the vertex at the extreme left. As in §3.11, one can describe G, asa subgroup of GL(£), where E is the K-vector space A/zA. By reduction, the form q, restricted to A, becomes the quadratic form g : (&,)-nsizn xix; in £, with obvious notations (x; belongs to the residue field of L if and to K otherwise). Let By be the two-dimensional kernel of 7 defined by the equations x, = O for i # 0, and let @ be the quadratic form in E = £/Ep image of q. Clearly, G, preserves the form g. Therefore, the projection £ + E induces a K-homomorphism G, > O(@). One verifies that that homomorphism is surjective (in particular, G, is not connected) and that it maps Gj isomorphically onto SO(q). If ¢ denotes the nontrivial K-automorphism of L, the linear transformation (ei nctan * Oye Xmtty “y Katy Xp Xp“) Nye X-y)y Which belongs to P, provides by reduction an element of G(X) which is mapped into O(4) but not into SO(@).REDUCTIVE GROUPS OVER LOCAL FIELDS 9 4, Classification. 4.1. Introduction, To finish with, we give the classification of simple groups in the case where the residue field K is finite, which will be assumed from now on. We recall that, in the characteristic zero case, that classification has been given first by M. Kneser [16]. The tables 4.2 and 4.3, together with the comments in §4.5, provide a list of all central isogeny classes of absolutely quasi-simple groups over K. For each type of group, they give the following information, where K, denotes the unramified closure of K: a name of the shape *X where the symbol X represents the absolute local Dynkin diagram 4, (1.11) with the notations of [8, 1.4.6]—except that our C-BC cor- responds to the C-BC™ of [8]—and where a is the order of the automorphism group of 4; induced by Gal(K,/X); for residually split groups, a = 1 and the superscript a is omitted from the notation; note that the index on the right of X is the relative rank over K;, hence equal to the number of vertices of 4; minus one; primes, double primes, etc. are used to distinguish types of groups which would otherwise have the same name; the symbol representing the affine root system (or échelonnage) in the notations of [8]; in the residually split case, that symbol coincides with the name of the type and is not given separately; note that the right part of the symbol gives the type of the relative root system @ and, in particular, that the index on the right of itis the relative rank over K, hence equal to the number of vertices of the relative local Dynkin diagram 4 minus one; the local index (§1.11), the relative local Dynkin diagram A (§1.8) and the integers d(¥) attached to its vertices (§1.8); the action of Gal(K,/K) on dj— through a cyclic group of order a (see above)—is essentially characterized by its orbits in the set of vertices of 4, orbits which are exhibited as follows: the elements of the orbit O(») corresponding to a vertex v of 4 (1.11) are placed close together on the same vertical line as v (in the few cases, such as 2D,, Dj,, etc., where two vertices of J are on the same vertical, the correspondence » ++ O(v) should be clear from the way the diagrams are drawn); since K is finite G is residually quasi-split (1.10.3), hence all vertices of 4, are distinguished except for the unique anisotropic type 44, ($1.11), and there is no need for a special notation like the circling of orbits, as in [22]; hyperspecial vertices ($1.10) are marked with an hs and the other special vertices (§1.9) with an s; the index of the form, in the “usual” sense of [3] and [22]; for simplicity, we do not represent that index by a picture but rather by the corresponding symbol in the notation of [22]; we recall that that symbol carries, among other, the following in- formation: the absolute type of the group, the absolute rank, the relative rank (already provided by the symbol representing @,9) and the order of the auto- morphism group of the ordinary Dynkin diagram induced by the Galois group of the separable closure of K. In the case of the inner forms of 4, the diagrams are, for technical reasons, re- placed by explanations in words.60 4. TITS 4.2. Residually split groups. ‘Name Local Dynkin diagram Index (22) A,(22 2) | Acycle of length m + 1 all vertices of which 149, are hyperspecial — A hs hs 1p hs Ba (n & 3) a —< Bun hs s B-C, (n = 3) et aD, s C,(n 2 2) est} ck, hs hs C-B,(n = 2) 2DL, » CBC, (22) Fa} tn “UD, 5 3 CBC, — 24gREDUCTIVE GROUPS OVER LOCAL FIELDS. 6 Name Local Dynkin diagram Index [22] hs hs D, -- —< DE, (rz 4) he hs hs Ee hs TER 6 hs E; 1. Ely hs hs Es —__L Fis hs Fy nan Fla +t a 5 “Eh G hs Gra a eet $D4z or SDaa62 1. 11s 4.3. Nonresidually split groups. Affine root system Local index and relative Name | (notations of local Dynkin diagram, Index [22] (81.4.6) “The absolute local Dynkin diagram 4, i a cycle of length md on which Gal(K,/K) acts through a “Aya Ant cyclic group of order d generated by a rotation | 14 41 of the cycle. The relative diagram is a cycle of (m23, length mall vertices of which are special but not a hyperspecal and carry the number d. 4, is as above, with m = Ara Ay AP, @z2 4,8 as above, with m = 1, on ifd = 2, consists 4Ag @ ‘of a fat segment whose vertices are permuted by | 'A{%s,9 Gal(K,/K)and 4 = © (22) Aan Cm PAS am (m22 Abe C-BCh PAS a mt (m23) 2s c-BC} : 24gREDUCTIVE GROUPS OVER LOCAL FIELDS 63 Affine root system Local index and relative Name gia local Dynkin diagram. Index (22) Un cacy "AB (m2 2) 2A, c-Bcy 24g 22, CB, Brana (v2 3) BC, c-BcH, coe PAB awa (m2 3) Cont Bama (m 2 3) °C c-BCWY SS cH64 4. 111s Affine root system Local index and relative Name TT of local Dynkin diagram, Index (22) Com ce CR (m 2 2) 2c, A CR 2C-Boy) | C-BC!_, DE mt (m= 3) °C-Bs C-BC} eae, De 2C-Boy, C-BCI Dim (m= 2) 2C-By c-Bctt DeREDUCTIVE GROUPS OVER LOCAL FIELDS 65 Affine root system ; " Local index and relative Name fae | ocal Dynkin diagram, Index (22) 2D, By *Dityt 24) 2D, CB a DM,» 24) 2Di, BC, D2, (m = 3) Dims B-BC,, D2 a.m (m= 3) 2 s s 2 i Dy BBC DB, 3's * s 2 Dy G 5 Dao at hs "This “Echelonnage” is missing in the table of [8, p. 29]66 3.1113 Affine root Isystem Local index and relative (notations o i Index [22] Name [otetign local Dynkin diagram. ‘Dom C-BCHL, DE mt (m= 3) Dy c-BC}! DR Dome C-BCha DEA m (m2 3) 4D. CBC Se ‘Di 5 1 a sR x4 ss 2, KR — 7 "Ey et hs « | 4 <= vat ri 2B, A > 2 2 Fi St 3REDUCTIVE GROUPS OVER LOCAL FIELDS 67 4.4. Interpretation, We shall now repeat the classification in classical terms. The following enumeration gives a representative of every central isogeny class of absolutely quasi-simple groups over K and, in each case, the name of the cor- responding type, with the notations of the first column of the Tables 4.2 and 4.3. Special linear group SL, of a d®dimensional central division K-algebra (md 2 2). The type is “pat Special unitary group SU(h) of a hermitian form h in r variables (r > 3) with Witt index r’ over a quadratic extension L of K. If L/K is ramified, we assume r # 4 because the case r = 4 is more adequately represented by an ordinary special orthogonal group in 6 variables or a quaternionic special orthogonal group in 3 variables according as r’ = 2 or 1. If the form h is split, the type is 247. if L/K is unramified and C-BC, (r = 2n + 1) or B-C, (r = 2n) otherwise. If his not split, one has r = 2r’ + 2 and the type is 247, or 2B-C,.,, according as L/K is un- ramified or ramified. Special orthogonal group SO(g) of a quadratic form q in r variables (r 2 6) with Witt index r’ over K. If r is even, we denote by L the center of the even Clifford algebra of q which is isomorphic to K © K (form q of discriminant one or Arf invariant zero) or is a quadratic extension of K. If L/K is unramified (in particular if L = K @ K), we assume r 4 6 because the case r = 6 is more adequately re- presented by a special unitary group in 4 variables. If r = 2r’ (resp. 2r’ + 1), the type is D, (resp. B,). If r = 2r’ + 2, Lisa quadratic extension of K and the type is®D,.., or C-B,, according as L/K is unramified or ramified. Finally, if r = 2r’ +3 (resp. 2r’+ 4), the type is @B,,.; (Fesp. 2D42). The symplectic group in 2n = 4 variables is of type C,. Special unitary group of a quaternion hermitian form in r variables (r = 2) re- lative to the standard involution. The Witt index is always maximal and the type is 2C,. Special orthogonal group SO(g) of a quaternionic o-quadratic form in r variables (r 2 3) relative to an involution g of the quaternion algebra whose space of sym- metric elements is 3-dimensional (cf. (21), (23); if char K # 2, ¢-quadratic amounts to g-hermitian and the group is also the special unitary group of an antihermitian form relative to the standard involution). Let r’ be the Witt index of the form and L the center of its “even” Clifford algebra Cl(q) (cf. (21). If L/K is unramified (in particular if L = K @ K), we assume r # 3 because the case r = 3 is more ade- quately represented by a special unitary group in 4 variables; if furthermore r = 2r', we also assume r # 4 because the case r = 2r’ = 4 is more adequately re- presented, through the triality principle, by an ordinary special orthogonal group in 8 variables with Witt index 2. One always has 2r’ Sr $ 2r' +3. If r = 2’, one has L = K @ K and the group is of type 2D’. If r = 2r’ + 1 (resp. 2r’ + 2), Lis a quadratic extension of K and the type is *D; (resp. ‘D,) or 2C-B,_ according as L/K is unramified or ramified. If r = 2r’ + 3, one has L = K @ K and the type is ‘D,. Quasi-split triality D,, Let L denote the splitting field, which is a cyclic extension of degree 3 or a Galois extension of degree 6 with Galois group 3. If L/K is unra- mified (hence cyclic of degree 3), the type is °D,; otherwise, itis G. Split exceptional groups. The type has the same name Gz, Fy, Eg, Ez or Eyas the absolute type of the group.68 3. TITS Quasi-split groups of type Es. The type is #Eg or F] according as the quadratic splitting field Z is unramified or ramified. Nonquasi-split groups of type Es and E>. They are the forms of Es and Ey con- structed by means of a central division algebra of dimension 9 and 4 respectively; their types are 3E, and 2E;, 4.5. Invariants. All types of groups listed in the Tables 4.2, 4.3 exist over an arbi- trary field K with finite residue field. The central isogeny class corresponding to a given name is always unique except in the following cases. The isogeny classes of type 44,.4-1 for d 2 5 are classified by the pairs of op- posite central division algebras of dimension d? over K; their number is therefore 49(d), where 9 is the Euler function. The isogeny classes of the types B-Cy 2B-Cy, C-By, 7C-By, C-BC, and Fi are classified by the ramified quadratic extensions of K, namely the extension always called L in §4.4, The groups of type G] are classified by the Galois extensions L of K which are either cyclic of degree 3 or noncyclic of degree 6, 4.6. The classification kit. The following experimental facts provide a handy way of reconstructing the classification. First note that, except for 44,_, each type in the Tables 4,2 and 4.3 is completely characterized by the local Dynkin diagram and the integers d(v) attached. Now, consider a connected Coxeter diagram of affine type and rank (number of vertices) at least three, attach an integer to all vertices, mark some of them (possibly none) with a cross and orient each double or triple link with an arrow. Then a necessary and sufficient condition for the existence of a semisimple group G having the resulting diagram as its relative local Dynkin diagram with the given integers as d(») is that all subdiagrams formed by the pairs of vertices belong to one of the following types, representing the ordinary Dynkin diagrams of quasi-split groups of relative rank two: aod Led qd x * ddd Lead dd — add ee add —S The group G can furthermore be chosen to be absolutely quasi-simple if and only if the integers d(v) are relatively prime or if the underlying Coxeter diagram is a cycle. As for the types of relative rank one, whose underlying Coxeter diagram is 41, they can be obtained as “limit cases” of types of higher ranks, but we shall not elaborate on that. [REFERENCES 1, A. Borel, Admissible representations of a semi-simple group over a local field with vectors fixed under an Iwahori subgroup, Invent. Math. 35 (1976), 233-259. 2. A. Borel et J.P. Serre, Cohomologie d'immeubles et de groupes S-arithmétiques, Topology 15 (1976), 211-232.REDUCTIVE GROUPS OVER LOCAL FIELDS 0 3..A. Borel et J. Tits, Groupes réductifs, Publ. Math, Inst, Hautes Etudes Scientifiques 27 (1965), 55-150. 4. ——, Compléments & Varticle “Groupes réductifs", Publ. Math. Inst. Hautes Etudes Scien- tifigues 41 (1972), 253-276. 8, N. Bourbaki, Groupes et algébres de Lie, Chap. 1V, V, VI, Hermann, Paris, 1968. 6. F. Bruhat et J. Tits, (a) BN-paires de type afin et données radicelles, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris, 263 (1966), 598-601 ; (b) Groupes simples résiduellement déployés sur un corps local, ibid., 766-168; (©) Groupes algébriques simples sur un corps local ibid., 822-825; (d) Groupes algébriques simples sur un corps local: cohomologie galoisienne, décomposition d’Iwasawa et de Cartan, ibid., 867-869. 7. ——, Groupes algébriques simples sur un corps local, Proc. Conf. on Local Fields (Drie- bergen, 1966), Springer, New York, 1967, pp. 23-36. 8. Groupes réductif sur un corps local. 1, Données radicelles valuées, Publ. Math. Inst. Hautes Etudes Scientfiques 41 (1972), 5-251. 9, ——, Groupes réductfs sur un corps local. 1, Schémas en groupes (en préparation). 10. C. Chevalley, Sur certains groupes simples, Tohoku Math. J.7 (1955), 14-66. 11. M, Demazure et A. Grothendieck, Sehémas en groupes. Ill, Sém. Géom. Alg, 1962/64, Lec- ture Notes in Math., vo. 153, Springer, New York, 1970 12. 0. Goldman et N. Iwahori, The space of p-adic norms, Acta Math, 109 (1963), 137-177. 13, H, Hijikata, On the arithmetic of adic Steinberg groups, Mimeographed notes, Yale Univ., 1968. 14, On the structure of semi-simple algebraic groups over valuation fields. 1, Japan. J. Math. 1.(1975), 225-300. 15.N, Iwahori and H. Matsumoto, On some Bruhat decomposition and the structure ofthe Hecke ‘ing of b-adic Chevalley groups, Publ. Math. Inst. Hautes Etudes Scientfiques 25 (1965), 548, 16. M. Kneser, Galois Kohomologie halbeinfacher algebraischer Gruppen uber vadischen Kér- pera, Math. Z. 88 (1965), 40-47; 89 (1965), 250-272. 17.1. G, MacDonald, Affine root systems and Dedekind's 7 function, Invent. Math. 15 (1972), 91-143. 418, G. Prasad, Lattices in semi-simple groups over local fields, Advances in Math. (to appeat). 19.G, Rousseau, Immeubles des groupes réductifs sur les corps locaux, These, Paris XI, (1977). 20.7. A. Springer, Reductive groups, these PROCEEDINGS, part 1, pp. 3-27. 21. J. Tits, Formes quadratiques, groupes orthogonaux et algebres de Clifford, Yavent. Math. § (1968), 19-41. 2 Classification of algebraic semisimple groups, Proc. Summer Inst. on Algebraic Groups and Discontinuous Groups (Boulder, 1965), Proc. Sympos. Pure Math., vol. 9, Amer. Math. Soc., Providence, R. I. 1966, pp. 33-62. 23, ——, Buildings of spherical type and finite BN-pairs, Lecture Notes in Math., vol. 386, Springer, New York, 1974, ‘24, ——, On buildings and their applicaions, Proc. Internat. Congr. Math. (Vancouver, 1974), vol. 1, Canad. Math. Congr., 1975, pp. 209-220. 25, ——, Résumé de cours, Annuaire du College de France pour 1975-1976, pp. 49-56. 26. ——, Classification of buildings of spherical type and Moufang polygons: a survey. Coll. Intern, Teorie Combinatorie, (Rome, 1973), Atti dei Convegni Lincei 17 (1976), 229-246, CoLtiGe oF FRance, ParisProceedings of Symposia in Pure Mathematics Vol. 33 (1979), part 1, pp. 71-86 REPRESENTATIONS OF REDUCTIVE LIE GROUPS NOLAN R. WALLACH ‘The purpose of this article is to give an introduction to the representation theory of real, reductive Lie groups (see §1 for the precise class of groups to be studied). Our main goal is the Langlands, Harish-Chandra classification of irreducible re~ presentations of such groups. §§7 and 8 are devoted to a study of intertwining operators for GL(2, R) and GL, C) and to a detailed exposition of how the classification specializes to GL(2, R) and to GL(2, C). The representation theory of reductive Lie groups is a vast subject. A complete survey of the subject would be a very ambitious task. It would also involve a size- able monograph rather than an article of modest limit ourselves to a single path through the subject leading to the Many important aspects of the theory are hardly discussed (e.g., the det: of the discrete series (5, [6], [19], intertwining operators {13}, [14], the Plancherel theorem (8}, [9], [10). However, we feel that the material covered will give the reader an idea of the flavor of the subject. Much of the material that is not covered in this article will appear in other articles in this volume. There are several surveys of the subject of representations of semisimple Lie groups that are available (notably [20)). The reader interested in a deeper pursuit of the subject should con- sult the monographs of G. Warner [22]. 1. The class of groups to be studied. 1.1, Let G be an algebraic group over C defined over R. We denote by G(R) the real points of & and by (° the identity component of &. 1.2. The type of group we will be studying will be a Lie group, G, having the following properties: (1) There is an algebraic group 6 defined over Rand a Lie group homomorphism 7:G > G(R) so that 7(G) is open in G(R) and 7: G + 7(G) isa finite covering. (2) ? is reductive. (3) Ad(7(G)) < Ad(G*). Here Ad denotes the adjoint representation of 6” on the Lie algebra of &°, 1.3. Our basic examples are GL(n, R) and GL(n, C) (looked upon as the real points of an algebraic group defined over R). One of the main reasons for in- troducing a broader class of groups than linear groups is to include the “meta- plectic” group, a two-fold covering of Sp(n, R). AMS (MOS) subject classifications (1970). Primary 22E45. © 1979, American Mathematical Soe: 1RD NOLAN R. WALLACH 1.4. Let G be as in 1.2. Let X(G) denote the group of all continuous homomor- phisms of G into Rx = R — (0). Set°G = {ge G | [x(g)] = 1, xe X@)} 15. If His a Lie group, we will denote by § the Lie algebra of #. Ad will denote the adjoint representation of H on §. Hp will denote the complexification of §. 1.6. Let G satisfy the conditions in 1.2. Then it is not hard to show that there is a nondegenerate, Ad(G)-invariant, symmetric bilinear form, B, on g and an involu- tive automorphism, 0, of G such that: () Bis 0-invariant and (X, Y) = — B(X, @Y) is positive definite. (2) There is a maximal compact subgroup, K, of G so that K° < {g 6G |0(g) = g} isan open subgroup. For such G we fix B, 0, K. Let c denote the center of g. Set °c = {Xe c| 0X = X}. Then exp (°c) = K () exp(c). Set 5 = {Xe cl OX = —X}. Let Z = exp(). Then Z is called the split component of G. 1,7, It is not hard to show that the map Z x °G -+ G, (z, g) + 2g is a Lie group isomorphism. 1.8. We now look at our examples. If G = GL(n, F), F = Ror C, set B(X, Y) = Re (tr XY). Set 9X = —X* (here X* denotes the conjugate transpose of the matrix X).°G = {g €G| |det g| = 1}, Z = {alla > 0}. K = O(n) if F = Rand K = Um) ifF=C. 2. Admissible representations. 2.1. We fix Gasin 1.2, Band Kas in 1.6. 2.2. Let H be a separable Hilbert space. Let GL(H) denote the group of all invertible, bounded operators on H. A representation (x, H) of G on His a homo- morphism x: G > GL(H) so that (1) The map G x H+ H, g, v + x(g)v is continuous. (x, H)is said to be unitary if (g) is unitary for g < G. 2.3. Let || «+ || denote the operator norm on End(#). The principle of uniform boundedness implies that if @ < G is a compact subset then |/x(g)|| $ Cw) < 0 for g ¢ w. This implies that if (, ) is the Hilbert space structure on H and we set = Sx (x(H)v, x(K)w) dk (here dk denotes Haar measure with total mass 1 on K) then <, > gives the same topology on H as (,) and mlx is unitary relative to <, >. We therefore assume that zis unitary. 2.4, Fix a Haar measure dg on G (G is unimodular). If fe C=(G) (C= with com- pact support) we can define x(f): H > H by @ Caf, w> = So Me) dg and |ix(f)) S$ Clw)lif lr if supp f < w(see 2.3, || f\], the L' norm of f). Iffe C-(K) set xx(f) equal to (x|x)(/). 2.5. Let &(K) denote the set of equivalence classes of irreducible, unitary re- presentations of K. If y <8(K) fix (z,, V,)€7. Then dimV, < 0. Set a,(k) = (dim V,)tr (KY), ke K. Then zx(q;) is a projection operator on H. Set g(a,)H = H,. Then H = @,H, Hilbert space direct sum. 2.6. A representation (x, H) of G is said to be admissible if dim H, < co for 7e6(K). 2.7. A representation (x, H) is said to be irreducible if the only closed x(G)- invariant subspaces of Hare (0) and H.REPRESENTATIONS OF REDUCTIVE LIE GROUPS. B 2.8, ThoreM (HaRisH-Cranpra (2). (1) If (x, H) is an irreducible unitary re- presentation of G then (ze, H) is admissible, (2) If x, H) is an admissible representation of G and if F < &(K) is a finite subset then if © @ yar H, the map g -> m(g)v is real analytic. 2.9, Let (x, H) be an admissible representation of G. Set Hy equal to the algebraic sum of the H,, 7 € 6(K). If ve H, set H(”) = Dyex Cx(kv. Then Hy = {ve HI dimH(0) < <0}. 2.10. If v Hp then Theorem 2.8 implies: (EX eg, e(X)v = (ddiya(exp tX)r|,-0 exists Q)fke K, Xe gthen x(k)a(X)v = x(Ad(k)X)x(k)v. 2.11. 2.10 (2) implies that if X€ g, v € Ho. Then x(k)x(X)v € x(g)-H(»). Thus dim H(x(X)») < ©. This implies x(X)v € Hy for ve Ho, X 4g. Just as in the case dim H < © we find (I) IFX, Yegthen x[X, ¥] = a(X)a(¥) — a(¥)a(X) = [x(X), x(¥)] on Ho. 2.12. 2.10, 2.11 lead naturally to the notion of a (g, K)-module. A (g, K)-module is a complex vector space V such that (1) V is a g-module. That is, there is a linear map g @ V+ V, X @ v—» Xv such that [X, ¥]-v =X - Yy — Y¥- Xv, X, Yeg. (2) Visa K-module. That is there is a map K x V > V linear in the V-variable such that 1 - v = vand ky « (kav) = (aks) » ki, ky €K. @Q) If ve V then dim ex Ck - v < «0 and if Wc V isa finite dimensional K-invariant subspace of V then: (a) K acts completely reducibly on W. (b) The map K x W + W,k,w — k » wis continuous (hence real analytic). (@UXetandye Vthen Xv = (djde) exp 1X (9) Ike K, Xeg,ve Vthenk » X- v = (Ad(K)X) - (k-¥), 2.13. If V, W are K-modules (resp. g-modules) then we denote by Homg(W, V) (resp. Hom,(W, V)) the space of linear maps A: W V such that Ak-w = k-Aw, ke K,we W(resp. AXw = XAw, X eg, we W). If V, Ware (g, K)-modules we set Hom, x(W, V) = Hom(W, V) 1) Hom,(W, V). 2.14. A (g, K)-module V is said to be admissible if for any 7 € &(K), dim Homx(V,, V) < «0. We set V(7) = Circtiongev,v) AV, < V. V(7) iscalled the 7-isotypic subspace of V. 2.15. If (x, H) is an admissible representation of G and if we set V, = Ho with action Y- y = a(X)y, ve V, Xeg. Then 2.10(1), (2), 2.11(1) imply that V, is an admissible (g, K)-module. 2.16. A (g, K)-module, V, is said to be irreducible if the only g- and K-invariant subspaces are V and (0). 2.17. THEOREM (HARISH-CHANDRA [2]). If (x, H) is an admissible representation of G then (xe, H) is irreducible if and only if V~ is an irreducible (g, K)-moudle. 2.18. If (x, H,), i = 1, 2, are representations of G then an intertwining operator from (7, H,) to (x, Hz) isa continuous linear map A: Hy + Hso that 4 >m(g) =74 NOLAN R. WALLACH o(g) A. yy m2 are said to be equivalent if there is a bijective intertwining operator from m to 7p. If 1, xz are unitary representatives of G then m, mz are said to be unitarily equivalent if there is a bijective unitary intertwining operator from m, to m2. 2.19. THEOREM (HARISH-CHANDRA [4)). If (tj, H;) are unitary, admissible re- presentations of G then x1, x2 are unitarily equivalent if and only if V., and Vz, are isomorphic (that is, there is a bijective element of Hom, x(Vqy» Vx))- 2.20. A (g, K)-module, V, is said to be unitary if there is a positive definite inner product ¢, on Vso that: () , Keg. 2.21. THEOREM (HaRISH-CHANDRa [2], [3]). Let V be an admissible (g, K)-module. A necessary and sufficient condition for V = V,, with x an admissible, unitary re- presentation of G is that V be unitary. 2.22. The results of this section imply that the determination of the set 6(G) of equivalence classes of irreducible unitary representations of G is the same as finding the set £(g, K) of isomorphism classes of irreducible, unitary, admissible (g, K)-modules. This can be done in two steps, The first is to determine the set IK(g, K) of isomorphism classes of irreducible, admissible (g, K)-modules. The second is to determine which elements of //(g, K) have a unitary representative. The first step has been carried out in Langlands’ classification (an alternate classification has been given by Vogan which should have important and far-reaching conse- quences). The second step is far from complete. There should be some discussion of the literature on this problem in the lectures of Knapp and Zuckerman [14]. 3. Infinitesimal characters. 3.1. Let g be a Lie algebra over a field. Let 7(g) be the tensor algebra over g. Let 1(g) be the right and left ideal in 7(g) generated by the elements X@Y-Y@X-IX,¥} Set U(g) = T(g)/IUq). Letj: g > U(g) be defined by (X) = X + 1G). 3.2. (UG), j) or U(g) is called the universal enveloping algebra of g. We note that JX, ¥1 = JCI) = JODIX) = LE), JOP]. UG) is called the universal envelop- ing algebra of g because of the following universal mapping property: If g: g +E, Ean associative algebra with unit such that gLX, ¥] = (p(X), e(¥)} then there exists a unique algebra homomorphism g of U(g) into E so that (a) (1) = 1, (6) pi) = 9X). 3.3. In particular, every g-module is naturally a U(g)-module. 3.4, THEOREM (cF. (11). Let Xj,---, X, be a basis of g. Then the monomials Xp Xpeform a basis of Ul). 3.5. Theorem 3.4 is usually referred to as the Poincaré-Birkhoff-Witt (P-B-W) theorem. In particular it implies that j: g > U(g) is injective. We therefore suppressREPRESENTATIONS OF REDUCTIVE LIE GROUPS. 15 the j and look upon g as a subalgebra of U(g) under the commutator of the associa- tive multiplication. 3.6. Let G be as in 1.2. Let g be its Lie algebra (as per our conventions). Let ge be the complexification of g. Let (gc) = 2 be the center of U(gc). 3.7. We note that if g G then Ad(g): ge + ge extends to an automorphism of U(gc). 1.2 (3) implies that if z ¢ 2 and g eG then Ad(g)z = z. 3.8, Recall that a Cartan subalgebra § of ge is a subalgebra of ge such that (1) 0 is abelian, (2) If he then ad(h) diagonalized on ge. (3) h is maximal subject to (1), (2). 3.9. Cartan subalgebras always exist. (E.g., if G@ = GL(n, R) then g = M,(R) with [¥, ¥] = XY — ¥X and gc = M,(C). We can take } to be the diagonal matrices in go.) 3.10. Let § be a Cartan subalgebra of go. If w € §* set (ole = {¥ € gelld, X] = a(H)X, Heb}. Set 4 = {aeh*la #0, (go)e # 0}. Then A is called the root system of (ge, ). We have Dnaa(Gede + 5 = go- 3.11. Let B also denote the complex linear extension of B to ge (see 1.6). Then B lous is nondegenerate. Let < , ) denote the dual bilinear form to B |g.s on 5. ae Aset sgh = h — 2(a(h)| 0}. 3.14, Let dt be a system of positive roots for 4. Set n* = Dacas(gele Set 6 + n*, Then 6 is called a Borel subalgebra of go. Set 1” = Dneg:(Go)-e 3.15. By P-B-W, U(go) = U(H) © (n-U(ge) + U(ge)n*). It is easily checked that & & U(§) © n-UGe) and F < U(h) ® Ulgc)n*. Using these observations we see that if p: & + U(6) is the projection into the U(j)-factor in the above direct sum decomposition then p: 2° + U(G) is an algebra homomorphism. 3.16. Let x: U(G) + U(G) be defined by yu(1) = 1, w(h) = hk — H(H) = 1, (Paha) = why) lhe). Set 7 = feo p. 3.17. THEOREM (HaRISH-CHANDRA, CF. [1]). (I) The map 7: 2 -+ U(S) is injective with image equal to U(h)” = {he U(G)Is- hh = h,se WM}. (2), is independent of the choice of A. Set 7 = Tu, (3) If x: ¥ —+ Cis a homomorphism such that (1) = 1 then there is A ¢ }* so that 2) = Mr(@)), z€ 2. Here A: U(6) > Cis the extension to U(S) of the linear map hh Ah) of 8 into C. (4) Set for Ae §*, x42) = A(p@), 2¢ X. Then 44 = yx if and only if A’ = sA for somes ¢ W(A).16 NOLAN R. WALLACH 3.18. The hard part of Theorem 3.17 is (1). (3) follows from the fact that U(§) is integral over U(6)”“. (4) is just a restatement of (1). 3.19, Let V be an admissible (g, K)-module. Then V = @,eeuy Viz). ze z then z - V(r) < V(q), 7 € 6(K). Since dim V(r) < co we see that #Iy,,)can be put in upper triangular form. 3.20, Set for a homomorphism y: % — C, V, = (ve Vi(z—7@)*v = 0 for z€ &, d depending only on ¥}. The discussion in 3.19 implies that V is the (g, K)-module direct sum of the V's. 3.21. If Vis irreducible and V, % 0, then V, = V. Let W = {veViz-v = x2)», z€ 2}. Since V, = V it is clear that W # 0, But W is clearly a(g, K)-sub- module of V. Hence W = V. x is called the infinitesimal character of the (g, K)- module V. 3.22. THEOREM (CHEVALLEY, HARISH-CHANDRA, CF. (22)). Let w be the order of W(A). Then there exist elements uy, «--, ty of U(§) 80 that U(G) = Du,V Hy". 3.23, THEOREM (HARISH-CHANDRA, CF. [22). If V is a (g, K)-module, finitely generated as a U(g)-module, and if V = V, for some x, then V is admissible. Further- more, if V is nonzero, then V has a nonzero irreducible quotient. 4. The principal series. 4.1. Let G be as in 1.2. Let P< G be a subgroup of G. Then P is said to be a parabolic subgroup of G if (1) P is its own normalizer in G. (2) Pe contains a Borel subalgebra of gc (see 3.14). 4.2. Let ay be a maximal abelian subalgebra of g contained in t! = {Xe gl BUX, t) =0}. If he ap then adh diagonalizes on g (indeed if h € ag then th = h). Let, for 2e af, gt = {Xeglad h- X = AA), h € ay}. Set A ={2E aflg’ 4(0), A# O}. Fix hig € ag so that Ap) # 0, Xe A. Set At = {2 € Ala(hg) > 0}. Set tty = Shzearg!. Set Mp equal to the centralizer of 4p = exp ay in G. Then Py = MjNp is a parabolic subgroup of G. If P is a parabolic subgroup of G then there isgeG so that gPog! kP9k~! for some k € K. Hence G = KP. 4,4, Fix (Pp, Aq) as in 4.2. Then (Pp, Ao) is known as a minimal parabolic pair. "My = Mg () K (See 1.5). Ap is a split component of Mo chosen as in 1. 4.5. Let P be a parabolic subgroup of G. Let NV be the unipotent radical of P. Let M = P () 6P. Then P = MN. M = °M - A with A asplit component of M chosen as in 1.6. (P, A) is said to be a parabolic pair or p-pair. (P, A) is said to be standard if A < Ap and P > Pp, Each p-pair is conjugate in G to a unique standard p-pair. 4.6.1f(P, A) isa p-pait, P = MN, then M satisfies the conditions of 1.2. Suppose that (P, A) is standard. Then M () K plays the role of K for G. The notion of admissible will be relative to M () K. 4.7. Let (P, A) bea standard p-pair. P = MN = °MAN. Let (0, H,) be a finitelyREPRESENTATIONS OF REDUCTIVE LIE GROUPS. 1 generated admissible representation of M. Let 4, denote the modular function of MN. Then 6,man) = a? = er if a = exp H and 2o(H) = tr(ad Hl,), Hea. 4.8, We form a representation (a(P, 0), H?.*) of Gas follows (1) Set HP. equal to the space of all measurable functions f: K +> H, such that Sem) = o(m)-f(k), me K ) M, ke Kand |if |? = |x ifGO|2 dk < 0. Q) If fe HP extend f to G by fikp) = 54(p)/? o(p)1fth), for pe P, KEK. Set (x(g)f) (x) = f(g 'x) (« = a(P, 0). 4.9, THeorEM. (x(P, 0), H?-*) = I(P, 0) is an admissible representation of G. 4.10, Theorem 4.9 can be derived from Theorem 3.23. 4.11, Set V(P, a) equal to the corresponding admissible (g, K)-module (ie, V(P, 0) = Vz, x = x(P, a). Let V, denote the (m, K (| M)-module corresponding too. 4.12. If fe V(P, 0), fis real analytic by Theorem 2.8(2). We define j(f) = f(l), fe V(P, 0). Then it is easy to see (1) j: V(P, 0) > Ve is a surjective (m, K () M)-module homomorphism. Q) Kerj > n- ViP, 0). This implies that V, is a quotient of the (m, K (| M)-module V(P, a)/nV(P, 0). 4,13. The following result can be proved using Theorems 3.22, 3.23, the sub- quotient theorem (Harish-Chandra [3], Lepowsky [16], Rader (18]) combined with a technique of Casselman using the asymptotic expansion of matrix entries of admissible representations (cf. Miligié [17]). For a proof that does not use asymp- totic expansions, see [21]. 4.14, Trtorem. Let V be an admissible (g, K)-module. Let (P, A) be a standard p-pair, P = MN. Then (VA. (2) If Vis finitely generated then V[uV is a finitely generated (m, M () K)-module. 4.15. The particular case of 4.14, (P, A) = (Po, do) has an interesting conse- quence, "Mp = My () K. Hence a finitely generated, admissible (m, K (| M)- module is finite dimensional. 4.16. Let V be a nonzero admissible, finitely generated (g, K)-module, Then 1 S dim¥/ngV < oo by the observation of 4.15. Let W be a nonzero irreducible quotient of Ving as an (m, K [) Mo)-module. Then ap acts by » € (af)o. We can therefore look upon W as a representation (0, H,) of Mo, Set € = dpi’. Let yu: V - Wbe the composition of natural maps. Define, for v € V, CO\(k) = lk), Then clearly, C: V > H?o€ = Hand C(k - v) =k - Cl). 4.17. Lemma. Set x = xp,¢. Then C((Xv)) = x(X)CQ) for ve V, Xeg. PRooF. We note C(k - X- ») = C(Ad(K)X k=»). Hence m(K)C(X- ») = C(Ad(®)X « kv). Thus it is enough to show that, (1) COX - ») (1) = (®(X)CO)) (1), for X eg, ve V. (1) is not hard in light of (2) g =2© ay @ mo, and the discussion in 4.12. 4.18. THEOREM (THE SUBREPRESENTATION THEOREM OF CASSELMAN). If V is anB NOLAN R. WALLACH irreducible admissible (g, K)-module then V is isomorphic with a (g, K)-submodule of V(Po, 0) for an appropriate irreducible representation of Mo. Poor. Let C be as in 4.16. Then C # O and hence Cis injective. 4.19. Coroutary. Let V be an irreducible, admissible (g, K)-module. Then V is isomorphic with V,, where (x, H) is an irreducible, admissible representation of G. 4.20. Let (P, A) be a standard p-pair, P = MN. Let V be an admissible, irredu- cible (g, K)-module. Then V/nV is a finitely generated, nonzero, admissible (1m, K ) Mj-module. Hence V/nV has an irreducible, nonzero quotient, Corollary 4,19 implies that this quotient is of the form V, for (¢, H,) an irreducible admissible representation of M. Arguing as in 4.16 and Lemma 4.17 we have: 4.21, THEOREM. Let V be an irreducible, admissible (g, K)-module. Let (P, A) be a standard p-pair P = MN. Then (1) Vin has a nonzero irreducible (m, K (\ M)-module quotient. (2) If W is an irreducible (m, K () M)-module quotient of V/nV then W = V, and V is isomorphic with a (g, K)-submodule of V(P, 85" 0). 5. Exponents, 5.1. We retain the notation of $4. 5.2. Let(P, A), P = MN bea standard p-pair. Then M () P = *Poisa minimal parabolic subgroup of M. Then *P)= °Mgdo*No, *My = “Modo. (*Po, Aq) will be used for M in the same way as (Po, 4p) is used for G. We note that Np = *NoN. 5.3. If Vis an admissible, finitely generated (g, K)-module then it is easy to see that (1) Vitg¥ = (VJnV)/*nq(V/nV). 5.4, Let V be as in 5.3. Let (P, A) be a standard p-pair. Set E(P, V;) = {» — pel aweight of a on V/iV}. 5.3(1) implies that E(P, V) = {yl [ee E(Po, V)}- 5.5. If (P, A) is a p-pair let 3(P, A) be the set of weights of a on n. Then 3(P, A) is called the set of roots of (P, 4). An element 2 3(P, A) is said to be simple if Acannot be written in the form 4; +++ + 4,7 2 2, with 4€3(P, A), i = 1, - r. Set °3(P, A) equal to the set of simple roots of 3(P, A). 5.6, Set °Zo(Po, Ao) = {ery +44}. Let Hy, »--, Hy € ag be defined by a(H,) = 31, and H; 1 3 (3 the Lie algebra of Z, the split component of G chosen as in 1.6). Set Dy = URH,. Then a = 3 ® Dp, orthogonal direct sum. 5.7. Let B;€ Df be defined by <8;, aj) = 4, If Fc {1, =, 1} set D3(F) = {ve Diy = — Leer XB; + Lier Vitis %; > 0, Ye 2 0}. 5.8, LEMMA (LANGLANDS [15]). Df is the disjoint union of the D§(F). 5.9. Ifye D§(F) set ® = —DyerrGrify = —DieriBs + Lier Wa Ifa, Be Dg we say a > Bifa — Dziay 7 R, 2, ZF = 1, yl 5.10. LEMMA (LANGLANDS [15]. If A, v € D§ and A > v then X° > v* 5.11. Let &:(G) denote the set of equivalence classes of irreducible, admissible (g K)-modules V, such that if y € E(V, Po) then Re(»|p,) € D§(@). 5.12. If F & {1, ---,/} then we can construct a standard p-pair (Pp, Ap) as follows:REPRESENTATIONS OF REDUCTIVE LIE GROUPS 9 Set ap = {He agla(H) = 0, i¢ F}. Set 3p = (Le B(Poy Ao)lAlep # O}. Set np = Lhezp(tto)i- Set My equal to the centralizer in G of Ap = exp ap. Then MyNp = Pr and (Pp, Ar) is a standard p-pair. It is well known (ef. [22}) that every standard p-pair is of the form (Pp, A;). 5.13, Lemma. Let V be an irreducible, admissible (g, K)-module. Then there exist F & {1,1}, and an irreducible, admissible representation (a, H,) of Mp, so that if » © E(a, *Po) then Re (v|p,) ¢ D§(F) and V is isomorphic with a(g, K)-submodule of VP, 0). Note. In particular, V, ¢ (Mp) Proor. Let L(V, Po) = {Re v In|» € E(V, Po)}- Let ye L(V, Po) be a minimal element. Then ¢ D§(F) for a unique F< {1, ---,}. Let (P, A) be the correspond- ing standard p-pair. Since V/1gV = (V/nV)/*ng(V/nV) we see that there is 7¢ E(V|nV, *Po) so that Re 7p, = x. This implies that there is a quotient W of V/nV so that 1 € E(W, *Po). If 7' € AW, *Pp) then 7], = ql. Thus if w= —Drerxi6i + Der Jit, X; > 0,1 F, y= 0 then Re 7'|p, = — DierXiBy + Drer2cy with 2, €R. Ifwe show that z; = 0 we will have completed the proof of the lemma. Sup- pose only zi,,2;, <0. Then Re 7'Iny S — Dreribe + Dieris, on 4i2ee Set py’ = Reg lop 2” = — DierXiGs + Deortiy ini Then pu’ X p" and hence ou! < ox". But °u" = °p. Hence °y’ <*y, But : was assumed to be minimal. Hence “= °x’. This implies the result. 5.14, Let €,(G) be the set of equivalence classes of irreducible, admissible (g. K)-modules V such that ify € E(V, Po) then Re (H;) > Ofori = 1, ---,/. 5.15, Lemma. Let V be an irreducible (g, K)-module such that the equivalence class of V is in &(G) but is not in &,(G). Then there are a standard p-pair, (P, A), and an irreducible admissible representation (o, H,) of M so that (1) fae A then o(a) = y(a)I and if Hea () Do then |y(exp H)| = 1, (2) V, €&4(M), and V is isomorphic with a subrepresentation of V(P, 0). 5.16. The proof of this lemma is essentially the same as the proof of Lemma 5.13. 6. The discrete series and the Langlands classification. 6.1. We maintain the notation of §5. Let (x, H) be an irreducible unitary re- presentation of G. If v, we H then || = @.,0(g) satisfies (1) Ps0(82) = Poul(g) for g eG, ze Z. This is because x(z) = y(2)/, x a unitary character of Z. (z, H) is said to be square-integrable if 9,» € L%G|Z) for all v, we H. 6.2. Let &,(G) denote the set of isomorphism classes of the Vz, (x, H) an irre- ducible square-integrable representation of G. 6.3. THEOREM (HARISH-CHANDRA [6], CASSELMAN, CF. MuLtéé [17)). (1) 8G) < 6G). (2) If V is a representative of an element of &(G) then there is a 1-dimensional (q K)-module W so that the class of V@ We &AG).80 NOLAN R. WALLACH 6.4. Theorem 6.3 is proved using the relationship between the elements of E(V, Po) and the leading exponents of V in the sense of Harish-Chandra (cf. Warner [22, Chapter 9). This relationship is due to Harish-Chandra and Cassel- man (see also Milidié (17). 6.5. Corottary. If V is a representative of an element of &\(G) then there is a 1-dimensional (g, K)-module W so that V ® W is unitary. 6.6 This result follows from the fact that V(P, a) is unitary if ¢ is unitary and 5.15. 6.7. THEOREM (LANGLANDS [15)). Let F < {1, «=, I} (see 5.6, 5.1). Let (0, Hs) be an irreducible admissible representation of Mr so that if » € E(V., *(Pr)q) then Re yp, € D§(F). Then V(Pp, aVhas a unique nonzero, irreducible, submodule denoted IP, 0). Furthermore if F’ = {1,---, 1} and o! satisfies the above properties for Mp, then J(Pp, 0) is isomorphic with J(Pp,, 0') if and only if F’ = F anda is equivalent with o'. 6.8, The first part of Theorem 6.7 is proved by using the relationship between intertwining operators and certain limit formulae. The second statement is proved using the limit formulae alluded to above and an argument similar to the proof of Lemma 5.13. 6.9. Theorem 6.7 combined with Harish-Chandra’s classification of the elements of 6G) (see [6)), Lemma 5.13 and Lemma 5.15 give the complete classification of irreducible (g, K)-modules. 7, The principal series for GL(2, R) and GL(2, C). 71. Let G = GLQ, F), F = R or C. We take 0, B, K, etc, as in 1.8. We take Py to be the group of upper triangular matrices in G and Po to be the group of lower triangular matrices in G. Mo is then the group of all diagonal matrices in G. 7.2. We denote by [/y, y] the diagonal matrix with diagonal entries /, hp. We also use the notation n(x) = fo rfl and a(x) = [i Hi 7.3. We note that 33(Po, 4a) ={2} and that 5) (Po, 4o) ={—2} with A(x, x2) = -%. 7.4. Up to normalization of Haar measure on Np (resp. No), dn(x) = dx (resp. di(x) = dx) where dx denotes Lebesgue measure on F. 75. If F = C (resp. R) we define for ky, ky € Z (resp. ky, ky € {0, 1}), 24 22 €C, En chanpa((lasta]) = ARAB |l™ [hg| 2%. Then Ey, 00 18 the most general ir- reducible admissible representation of Mo. We extend &, 1, t0 Po (resp. Po) by making it take the value 1 on n(x) (resp. f(x). 7.6. Lema. If ky, ke, 21, 22 are as in 7.5 and if Re(z, — 2) <0, if fe V(Por Ertan) then (Alby ey 20 201) = Ju ACen) de = AD) converges absolutely and uniformly for k ¢ K and defines a (g, K)-module homo- morphism of V(Po, 2) into V(Po, 6) (= Exy,t,2, 00)REPRESENTATIONS OF REDUCTIVE LIE GROUPS 81 Proor. (A(/))(K) = Jude7a(aln))-Yf (K(kn)) dn where dp,(kp) = be(p), keK, pe Py and if geG then g = k(g)a(gyn with k(g) eK, alg) € Ay and ne No. Now, [f(k(kn))| < If'le (Il -- lla is the L.-norm). Thus to prove the absolute and uniform convergence we must only show that © Jor 87.002 |o(aen)|> dr < 00. Writing n as n(x) a direct computation gives @ a(n(x)) = (1 + x91, (1 + x19), Set d = dimgF. Then (II) implies that the integrand in (I) is given by ay (1+ [xf2)a2 tte which is integrable on Fif Re(z, — 22) < 0. ‘The fact that Af eV (Po, 0) is proved by a simple change of variables. The uniform convergence of the integral implies that A is a (g, K)-module homomorphism. 7.7. We now focus our attention on the case F = R. In this case K = O(2). We use the notation ¢, for elements of {0, 1}. 78. Set 7 = diag(1, — 1) ¢ K and set 0s 9 sin 1 = [peng] oer. SO(2) = {k()|0.R}, K = SO(2} U ySO(2). yk(@y = k(—8). 7.9. We now describe &(K). Let W be an irreducible finite dimensional K- module. Then there is w»¢ W so that k(@) - wo = ewe, 0 R and Je Z, fixed. K(g)n¥o = e~**pwp. Thus if | # 0, w is completely determined by /. Since we can replace wo by ywo we can take / > 0. Let W,,/ = 1, 2, denote the K-module we just described. If] = 0, set Wo = {we WIk(0)w = w,0¢R}. Then 7» Wy = Wo. Hence since 7? = 1 we see W= Wo, dimW =1 and nw =, we W or gw = —w,we W. Weuse the notation W for the trivial representation of K and Wh for the case 7 > —1. 7.10. We leave it to the reader to check that Ad|x on gg is a direct sum of two copies of W} and one copy of W 7.11. We note that () W@W, = Wi, @ Wy for, k > 0. Q) W,@ Wi = W,¢ =0orl. G) W5@ Ws = We with e” =e + ¢' mod 2. 7.12. Let 7; denote the equivalence class of W,, ! > 0. Let 7§ denote the equi- valence class of W3,¢ = 0, 1. 7.13. Using the formulas of 7.5 we see that if Vis an admissible (g, K)-module then 9 VG) < Verna) + un) + Vr it > 0. Q) g- Vet) = VGH) + Vad.e = 01. 7.14. Since (Py, Ao) is a minimal p-pair we can take °"My = My [) K = {lund = £17 = 1, 2. Lt = VE eave PO) Goyevavelte with82 NOLAN R. WALLACH Exedln» 1a) = 7hing- Frobenius reciprocity implies that dim V(7) is the num- ber of times &,,,,, occurs in 7lomy 7.15. We leave it to the reader to check that if c,¢ 7, 1= 1, 2, 67h 0,1, then () Bless = Ga (2) thlomg = S1a- @) Flee = G00 ® G1. if is even, 1 > 0. A) Flos = 1.0 ® So. if Vis odd. 716. Let V = V(se,22 Po)» Then 7.15 implies dim V(7) $ 1 for ye 6(K) and (D If ey + e7 is even then V = V(75) © @noM(rad. (ID) Ife + eis odd then V = ®re0 Vrain). 7.17. Lema. Set, for z in C, k in Z a(2) = x VPE/(z + Y/DIPG +2 + HPC + z- H/2) where I” is the gamma function (cf. (23). Set. = Essay aun- Then if V = V(Po, 0) then as a K-module V is isomorphic with V(Poy 0). If Re (2, — 22) < 0 set A = Ale, €2 21, 22). Let us denote by yo either 7} or 78. Ife V4) then Af = a(z2 — 2)f. PROOF. 7.16 implies that A is a scalar on each V(r). Using the formula at the beginning of the proof of Lemma 7.6 and an easy computation, it follows that, on V(74), A is given by the following scalar: w $+ B10 + 2H |HOME ds, In (1) use the change of variables e = (1 + ix)/(1 + x9)!/2, —x/2 $1 < 2/2. Then the integral becomes Q of" cos(kt)(cos(t)) #1) dt, The lemma now follows from Whittaker and Watson (23, p. 263, Exercise 39] and the duplication formula for the gamma function [23, p. 240). 7.18. We now concentrate our attention on the case F = C. For the remainder of this section G will denote GL(2, C) and K will denote U(2). 7.19. As is well known, the map St x SU(2) + U(2) (S! the circle group) given by z, k++ 2k is a two-fold covering of U(2). If (¢, V) is an irreducible unitary representation of Kand if z is in S' then z(zI) = 21 for some k depending only on ¢. Hence the restriction of r to SU(2) is irreducible. The irreducible, unitary representations of SU(2) are determined up to equi- valence by their dimension. If (r, V) is the d + 1 dimensional representation of SU(2) then it is well known that c(ef) = el, ¢ = + 1. Hence k + dis even. 7.20. We have completely described 6(K). 6(K) is the set of all 7, with m ¢ Z, neZ and n= 0 and m +n even, Here 7,, denotes the class of all irreducible (, W) with dim W =n + Land ¢ (zl) = 2*1 for ze S!.REPRESENTATIONS OF REDUCTIVE LIE GROUPS. 83 721. Let En, 42 = &b,hn,nleue: It is an easy consequence of the classification of representations of SU(2) that Tmnlonty = D Entm21 12, mont) 72° 7.22. Using 7.21 and Frobenius reciprocity we find that if V = V(Po, Ex, 4a2y2) then VY = @ Vastra n-ne’ furthermore each V(7) is irreducible as a representation of K. 7.23. Lemma. Set, for 0 jj + 2. Then ji, — j, = 2m, m z 2. Hence WV 52) °° VIWM js2m-2) are nonzero. But (V/W)(r;,) = 0, (VW j12m) = 0. Now 7.13 implies g - OrAVI WV 120) © BtAV/W) 424). Hence ei(V/W)(rj-124) is a finite dimensional (g, K)-submodule of V/W. The finite dimensional representations of G restricted to Kare of one of the following forms: (@) W5® Qe Wu oF84 NOLAN R. WALLACH (©) Boaicy Wars This gives a contradiction proving (1). (1) easily implies that if V is reducible then V has a nonzero finite dimensional submodule or a nonzero finite dimensional quotient module. (2) If Wisa finite dimensional (g, K)-module, then W/tigW is isomorphic as an My-module with d¥26,, 042.29 With 2 —22 = —k —1, k 20, keZ and e + 6 = k mod 2. This is just the theorem of the lowest weight for G. ‘Combining (1), (2) and the fact that the dual (g, K)-module to V(Po, E.jeu aun) is V(Poy Gnyeunen) gives the lemma. 8.3, Lema, Set V = V(Poy Seyensun)> Suppose that 2, — 2 = —k - 1, ke Z, ke O and ey + ep = k mod 2. Set J = IlEasey a.m» Po)s Then the class of ViI is in &(G). roo. E(V/J, Po) = k. (QV) The V(P, Eiynun) With Re(z) — 2) = V(Poy Sry h.mun) if Re 71 — 72 = 0. 8.12. Using the analogue of Lemma 4.6 for GL(2, C) (the proof is exactly the same) and Lemma 7.23 it is not hard to give the following classification of the irreducible, admissible, unitary (, K)-modules: (D) The unitary characters of G. (Il) The unitary principal series: V(Po, &x,1y2.2)+ 2) €1R, j = 1,2. (UI) The complementary series: V(Po. Ety,t,%)» 21 + 22€1R, 2 — 2 € Ry O> 2-2 > —2 and ky — kp = 0. and VPo Esteve) = REFERENCES 1. J. Dixmier, Algebres enveloppantes, Gauthier Villars, Paris, 1974. 2. Harish-Chandra, Representations of semi-simple Lie groups. 1, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 75 (1953), 185-243. 3. . Representations of semi-simple Lie groups. 11, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 76 (1954), 26-65. 4. + The Plancherel formula for complex semi-simple Lie groups, Trans. Amet. Math, Soc. 76 (1954), 485-528. 5. , Discrete series for semi-simple Lie groups. 1, Acta Math. 113 (1965), 241-318. 6. ——, Discrete series for semi-simple Lie groups. I, Acta Math, 116 (1966), 1-11. 7, ——, Differential equations and semi-simple Lie groups, (1960) unpublished. 8. ——, Harmonic analysis on real reductive Lie groups. 1, J. Functional Analysis 19 (1975), 104-204, 9. —~, Harmonic analysis on real reductive Lie groups. Il, Invent. Math. 36 (1976), 1-55. 10. + Harmonic analysis in real reductive Lie groups. 111, Ann. of Math. (2) 104 (1976), 117-201. 11. N. Jacobson, Lie algebras, Interscience, New York, 1962. 12. N, Jacquet and R. Langlands, Automorphic forms on GL(2), Lecture Notes in Math., vol. 114, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1970. 13. A. Knapp and E. Stein, Intertwining operators for semi-simple groups, Ann. of Math, (2) 93 (1971), 489-578, 14, A. Knapp and G. Zuckerman, Classification theorems for representations of semisimple Lie ‘groups, Lecture Notes in Math., vol. 587, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1977, pp. 138-159.86 NOLAN R, WALLACH 15. R. P, Langlands, On the classification of ireducible representations of real reductive groups, Mimeographed notes, Institute for Advanced Study, 1973. 16. J. Lepowsky, Algebraic results on representations of semisimple Lie groups, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 176 (1973), 1-44. 11. D. Mili, Asymptotic behavior ofthe matrix coefficients of the discrete series (to appear). 18. C. Rader, Thesis, University of Washington, 1970. 19. W. Schmid, Some properties of square integrable representations of semisimple Lie groups, ‘Ann, of Math. (2) 102 (1975), 535-564. 20. V. Varadarajan, The theory of characters and the discrete series for semisimple Lie groups, Proc. Sympos. Pure Math. vol. 26, Amer. Math. Soc., Providence, R.I., 1973, pp. 45-100. 21, N. Wallach, Lectures on the representations of reductive Lie groups, Proc. Canad. Congr. 1977 (to appear). 22, G, Warner, Harmonic analysis on semi-simple Lie groups. 1,1, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1972, 23. E. T. Whittaker and G. N. Watson, 4 course of modern analysis, Cambridge Univ. Press, London, 1902 (reprinted 1965). BRANbEls UNIVERSITYProceedings of Symposia in Pure Mathematics Vol. 33 (1979), part 1, pp. 87-91 REPRESENTATIONS OF GL,(R) AND GL,(C) A. W. KNAPP 1. SL,(R). We shall give lists of the irreducible finite-dimensional representa- tions, the irreducible unitary representations, and the nonunitary principal series. Then we discuss reducibility questions, asymptotic expansions, and the Langlands classification, Let g = (¢ }) be a typical element of G = SL,(R). Irreducible finite-dimensional representations. Fy n = 0, an integer. (F polynomial on R of degree 7}, (bx + df((ax + AM(bx + d)). Finite-dimensional representations of G are fully reducible. Unitary representations. The irreducible unitary representations were classified by Bargmann [1], We give realizations in function spaces on the line or upper half= plane. Realizations on the circle or disc are possible also. (1) Discrete series @f and Dz, n = 2. Space for Ff = { (f analytic for Im z > 0| |||? = f fire dx dy < «}, 1e30 wy = a p( aete aiteyfie) =(be + ayn s( 25), ‘The space for 9 is not 0 because (z + i)-* is in it, The representation 9 is obtained by using complex conjugates. All these representations are irreducible, unitary, and square-integrable. The square-integrability (of a matrix coefficient) will be shown below. (2) Principal series P** and P~*, ve R. Space for P*#* = L&(R), Pe ghf(x) = |bx + di “f((ax + OM(bx + d)) if+, = sen(bx + d)lbx + dlp (ax + o(bx +d) if —. These representations are all unitary, and all but #~° are irreducible. Equivalences Pts = Pe and P-” =~ P--—iv are implemented by analytic continuations of intertwining operators that we give below. 2° is really the induced representation Indfax(o ® e* ® 1) with G acting by right translation and with the functions restricted to N = (19). Here MAN is the upper triangular group, o is trivial or signum on M ={ + 7}, and the character of A is 20) ait ( )-« ‘AMS (MOS) subject classifications (1970). Primary 2202; Secondary 22E45. (© 177, Ameren Mathematica Socey 8788 A.W. KNAPP (3) Complementary series @*,0 <5 < 1. L()FO) dx dy Space for er ={s:R + cf = f°” AMO TES < oh mins p(@t te ©) = [ox + dr“ sf( FETS), ‘These are irreducible unitary. They arise from certain nonunitary principal series (ee below) by redefining the inner product. (4) Others. There is the trivial representation, and there are two “limits of dis- crete series,” Qf and 9p. The group action with 9} and 97 is like that in discrete series, but the norm is different. We have the relation 9-° = 9} ® Oy. Nonunitary principal series. P*, CEC. Space = L?(R, (1 + x2)¥¢dx) Pg) f() = Ibx + di-tf((ax + o)[(bx + d)) if +, = sgn(bx + d)lbx + dl-tf((ax + dilbx + d)) if -. Reducibility. We can see some reducibility in *.* on a formal level by specializ~ ing the parameter { and by passing from z in the upper half-plane to x on the real axis, We obtain the following continuous inclusions: F, SPD ifn even, SPHo ifn odd, nz 0; BODSP if neven, SP ifnoddnz 1. There is no other reducibility. The quotient by an ¥ is the sum of two 9's, and vice versa, Asymptotics. Let ky be the rotation (S05 Sa) The maximal compact subgroup K = {ky} is abelian, and its irreducible represen- tations are one-dimensional, ky > e® with m an integer. We have G=KA‘K with At = {a =( a jee 2 9} and Haar measure is of the form dg = ¢ sinh 2t dkydky de if ¢ = kyaykp. Let U(g) be an admissible representation of G, and let g; and g transform under K accord- ing to ky > e'™# and ky > e™#, Then (U@) Pr 92) = (Uckeacko pr, 2) = expli(ms" + mz) (Ula)pr 2). Thus to test whether a matrix coefficient is in some L? class on G, it is enough to test (U(a,)p1, ¢2) and use the measure sinh 2t dt, t = 0. EXAMPLe. Di(k,\(z + i" = ez + i)". ThenREPRESENTATIONS OF GL (R) AND G2 (C) 89 (Biaye + iE +78 = ff ete + io + Dre — ety + Dyed. Indo By residues the right side is afro +1 + emmy? dy, and this in turn, after the change of variables y = y(I + e%), is = ¢j(cosh 1)”. Then (cosh 1 sinh 2¢ de, which is finite for n > 1. Thus this matrix coefficient is square-integrable on G. A theorem in functional analysis due to Godement [3] implies that all matrix coef- ficients are square-integrable on G. In the example, we could see the matrix coefficient was square-integrable by computation. There is a general technique, due to Harish-Chandra, for getting at the behavior of matrix coefficients by means of differential equations. Let 1 0 01 0 0) r=( 1) (0.0) F=(00) be a basis for the Lie algebra of G. The Casimir operator Q = 4h? + ef + fe is a member of the universal enveloping algebra. For SL;(R), 2 generates the center of the universal enveloping algebra. (For larger groups, it must be replaced in this discussion by the whole center of the universal enveloping algebra.) It acts as a scalar on each representation in our lists, hence on each matrix coefficient. Take a matrix coefficient whose two K-dependences are according to known characters of K, and regard the matrix coefficient as an unknown function. Then the equation Q(coefficient) = c(coefficient) leads to a second order ordinary differential equa- tion on 4+, with f as independent variable. The classical substitution is s = cosh t, and the resulting differential equation has three singularities, all regular; we ate interested in the behavior at s = oo. (If the “known characters” of K are trivial, this is Legendre’s equation.) This substitution does not generalize well, and Harish- Chandra’s treatment of this equation amounts to making the substitution z = e~2 instead. The resulting differential equation has four singularities, all regular, and we expand about z = 0, using standard regular-singular-point theory. The result is that coefficient(a,) = e~ 14043" cye-Bnt 4 e-I-OKS" dyer tmt i= = except when ¢ is an integer, in which case there may be factors of ¢ that arise from factors log z in the solution. If one of the leading terms vanishes, the whole cor- responding infinite sum vanishes. The eigenvalue of @ determines C, and in particular the matrix coefficients of P*“ead to the expansion with ¢ present. From this expansion, we can read off L?-integrability conditions, since we are to integrate for t = 0 the pth power against sinh 2r dt, which is comparable with ed. We see that 9*-# has coefficients in90 A.W. KNAPP. L2«(G) for every e> 0, but not in L4G). Discrete series Df with n Z 2 have one sum absent, in order to have coefficients in L2G). Representations with coefficients in L?++ for every e> 0 are said to be tempered. The tempered representations are 4° and OE with m = 1. Notice how in general the two leading terms give some information about where imbeddings occur as subrepresentations in the nounitary principal series; Wallach dealt with this point in his lectures. Langlands classification. For general G, Langlands parametrizes the irreducible admissible representations by triples (P, x, v), where P = MAN is a standard parabolic, 7 is (the class of) an irreducible tempered representation of M, and y is a complex-valued linear functional on the Lie algebra of A with real part in the open positive Weyl chamber. The Langlands representation Jp(z, ») is the unique irreducible quotient of Indf(« @ e* @ 1). In our case, P = (§ $) is minimal para- bolic, or P = G. Case P minimal, There are two (one-dimensional) representations of M = {+1}, and the functional y enters as the complex number { with Re { > 0; the character of A is a, = exp(v log a,) = exp(1). The Langlands list then includes the unique irreducible quotient of #*« for each £ with Re { > 0. Case P = G. Here y is irrelevant, and M = G. We simply get the irreducible tempered representations of G. The Langlands classification itself does not address the question of what these are, though one of the theorems implies for our G that they are subrepresentations of discrete series or unitary principal series. Intertwining operators. The Langlands classification theorem describes the uni- que irreducible quotient more precisely than we have done. Kunze and Stein [4] showed in 1960 that the operator 7 a , fo eee te for Pr, + f. Sux = OA for gs, fey intertwines %& with P, Note that the integral is convergent only if Re ¢ > 0. Later [5] they found a formula in the induced picture, namely f—> Sy flaw-1g) da, where N = (4%) and w =({}). This is the composition of two operators, Sf Sq flag) da and a relatively trivial translation operator by wl. Define A(P : Ps: v)f(x) = Sy flax) da. Under the Langlands conditions on y, this in- tegral is convergent if fis K-finite. The theorem is that Iola, v) = Ind§(x @ e @ l)/ker A(P: P: x: v) = Image A(P: P: x: ). 2. Other groups. GL,(R). To pass from SL,(R) to the group SL(R) of matrices of determinant £1, we first induce the representations of SL,(R). The ’s and #’s split into two equivalent pieces, and the 9's yield irreducibles on SL#(R) that restrict back to Q* ® D on SLAR). This construction gives us the representations of SLI(R). Then to pass to GL,(R), we paste on a character of the group R*(} SLC). This group has finite-dimensional representations given by two integer parameters; the representations can be realized in spaces of polynomials in z and 2 on. The group has no discrete series. We haveREPRESENTATIONS OF GL (R) AND Gz (C) 1 0 i M=(%Gea)t md 4 (00) so that the nonunitary principal series is parametrized by an integer m (for M) and a complex number ¢ (for A); by restriction of functions to W = (9), we can realize these representations in spaces of functions on C. See [2] for more detail. The unitary principal series is all irreducible and provides the only tempered irre- ducibles, and parameters (n, iv) and (—n, —iv) lead to equivalent representations. The Langlands classification points to the Langlands quotients of the nonunitary principal series with Re { > 0 and to the irreducible tempered representations. GLC). To an irreducible representation of SL,(C), we paste on a character of C*({9) that agrees with the representation on (-}-{). In this way we obtain all irreducible representations of GL,(C). REFERENCES 1. V. Bargmann, Irreducible unitary representations of the Lorentz group, Ann. of Math. (2) 48 (1947), 568-640. 2. 1. M. Gelfand, M. 1. Graev and N. Ya. Vilenkin, Generalized functions, vol. 5, Academic Press, New York, 1966. 3. R. Godement, Sur les relations d'orthogonalité de V. Bargmann, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris Ser. A-B225 (1947), 521-523, 657-659. 4. R.A. Kunze and E. M. Stein, Uniformly bounded representations and harmonic analysis of the 2 x 2real unimodular group, Amer. J. Math, 82 (1960), 1-62. 5. ——, Uniformly bounded representations. Il, Amer. J. Math, 89 (1967), 385-442, 6. S. Lang, SL.(R), Addison-Wesley, Reading, Mass., 1975. 7. R. P. Langlands, On the classification of irreducible representations of real algebraic groups, ‘mimeographed notes, Institute for Advanced Study, Princeton, N. J.,1973. 8. P. J. Sally, Analytic continuation of the irreducible unitary representations of the universal covering group of SLO, R), Mem. Amer. Math. Soc. 69 (1967). ‘CoRNELL UNIVERSITYProceedings of Symposia in Pure Mathematics Vol. 33 (1979), part 1, pp. 93-105 NORMALIZING FACTORS, TEMPERED REPRESENTATIONS, AND L-GROUPS A. W. KNAPP* AND GREGG ZUCKERMAN* Several lecturers have alluded to the intertwining operators associated with principal series representations, particularly for SL(2, R). These operators and their normalizations play a role in the trace formula, in reducibility questions for principal series, and in the construction of an inner product that exhibits certain representations as unitary. We shall review the development of these operators and their normalizations in the context of a linear real reductive group G (as defined in Wallach’s lectures) whose identity component has compact center. We shall be especially interested in the application to reducibility questions for unitary principal series and other continuous series of representations coming from parabolic subgroups, since the answers to these questions lead to a classification of irreducible tempered representations and thereby complement the Langlands classification [12]. The answers concerning reducibility are reviewed in §2 in terms of three easy-to-calculate finite groups, denoted JV, W’, and R. In lectures during 1975-76, the authors mentioned how, in some special cases, the groups W, 1’, R, initially defined in terms of roots, could be defined in terms of co-roots. Building on this presentation, Langlands [14] was able to redefine these groups in general in terms of the L-group. We present his definitions, along with an example, in §3. In §4 we summarize earlier work [8], {9] that leads from the Regroup to the classification of irreducible tempered representations. 1. Intertwining operators and normalizing factors. In the group G, fix a maximal compact subgroup K and Cartan involution 6. To each parabolic subgroup P, we associate the Langlands decomposition P = MAN with MA 0-stable and with M a linear real reductive group whose identity component has compact center. To the pair (€, »), where ¢ is an irreducible unitary representation of M and y is a com- plex-valued linear functional on the Lie algebra a of A, we associate the repre- sentation U;(G, », x), with x in G, given by ay UpE, ») = ind& aE @ e” @ 1). We adopt the convention that G acts on the left in the induced representation. A member f of the representation space satisfies Aleman) = exp( — (v + pp) log a) &()-1 f(x), “AMS (MOS) subject classifications (1970). Primary 22645. *Supported by the National Science Foundation. © 1979, American Mathematica Society 9394 ‘A.W. KNAPP AND GREGG ZUCKERMAN where pp is the usual half-sum of restricted roots associated with P. If P = Py is minimal parabolic, these representations comprise the nonunitary principal series. In formula (1.1), we have assumed that ¢ is an irreducible unitary represent: of M, but we shall allow also that ¢ is a nonunitary principal series representat of M, provided we are not working with formulas involving adjoints of operators. For SL(2, R), one can restrict the functions in the representation space for the nonunitary principal series to the lower triangular group N = ON = {( $)} and realize the representations in spaces of functions on R. The representations be- come F*@)f@) =| = bx + dbf) sen(—bx + d)| — bx + apney(. if g = (¢8). Kunze and Stein [10] showed that the operator (12a) f- 7 eae eRe vdy for Fé, 1.2b) = [> Gen fe =vd tor aos, (126) f_ SEZ 2® toro intertwines ®% with @¢ when it is convergent, namely for Re € > 0. Later (11] they found a formula in the induced picture, namely fo Su figwa) da, where w = (a o: This is the composition of two operators, f+ fiy f(g) da and a relatively trivial translation operator by w. The first operator intertwines the representation induced from P = MAN with the one induced from P = MAN and the same data on MA. In the general case, let P, = MAN, and P, = MAN; be two parabolies with the same MA, and define a3) A(Py: Py: 6:9) fl) = Srsnm Seen) dn. Formally (14) Up (E>, 8)A(Pe: Pi 2») = ACP: Piz €: Up (E48). In general, the integral (1.3) will not converge but will be defined by analytic continuation, To accomplish this analytic continuation, we need the representa- tions to occur in a single space, as » varies. This space is obtained by restricting the functions to X. Say € operates in the space Hé. We consider functions f: K -+ H® satisfying /(km) = &(m)- f(k) for ke K, me M () K. Under the action by g, we replace f(k) by /(g-tk) and restrict back to K. Thus we are led to define (1.5) UPA, », 8) lk) = exp( — (op + ») H(g™"K)) &(n 9K) F(e(a 1K), where x decomposes within G = KMAN as x(x)x(xe#n The analytic continuation of (1.3) is accomplished in three stages. In the first stage the essence of the argument can be seen by continuing (1.2) if f is smoothNORMALIZING FACTORS AND L-GROUPS 95 and compactly supported. Since f has compact support, we can integrate over a finite interval. Expand f(x — y) about y = 0 ina finite Taylor series with remaind- er. Each of the main terms can then be integrated explicitly and continues mero- morphically to the whole plane. The error term is integrable for Ret > — n — 1 if mis the order of the Taylor series. Hence the integral continues meromorphically to the whole plane. In Schiffmann [15] and in {6}, it is shown that this style of argument yields a meromorphic continuation of (1.3) if P, and P, are minimal parabolic and A is ‘one-dimensional. In the second stage, for minimal parabolics with dim A > 1, Schiffman shows how to decompose V, (| N3 into a product of subgroups and to write (1.3) as an iterated integral; the analytic continuation is essentially then reduced to the case dim A = 1. The third and final stage of the analytic continuation was obtained independent- ly by Wallach [17] and in {7}. We can use Casselman’s subrepresentation theorem. to imbed € as an (m, K (] M) module in a nonunitary principal series representa- tion of M. It follows from the double induction theorem that (1.1) is a subrepre- sentation of a nonunitary principal series and (1.3) is a restriction of an intertwin- ing operator for the nonunitary principal series. Then (1.3) has an analytic continua- tion for K-finite f, and (1.4) holds if g is replaced by a member of K or of the Lie algebra g of G. Moreover, with Haar measures normalized suitably, we obtain (6) A(Pp: Py: : v)* = A(Py: Pa: €: ~ 9) for € unitary, if the adjoint is defined K-space by K-space, and A(Pp: Py: €:¥) = Rw) Aw Paw: wPw-t: we: we) ROW), where R(w) denotes right translation by an element w in K representing a member of the Weyl group W(a). These operators tend to have poles at many interesting values of v. We introduce scalar normalizing factors—in part to eliminate some of these poles, in part to make the operators unitary for y imaginary, and in part to make the operators behave nicely under composition. The normalizing factors are not unique, and different choices are useful for different purposes. ‘Again the construction is in several stages. We impose the condition that ¢ have a real infinitesimal character. Matters are based on the following lemma [6, p. 544], proved using Weierstrass canonical products. Lemma 1.1. I/7(2) isa meromorphic function in the plane such that (i) (2) is real on the real axis, (ii) (2) = 0 on the imaginary axis, Gili) @) = 9-2) forall z, then there exists a meromorphic function y(2) in the plane such that (2) = 1(—2)r(@) and 7(2) is real for real z. The first stage of the construction deals with P = MAN a minimal parabolic and G of real rank one (dim A = 1).In this case A(P:P:€:v) A(P: P:€:v) is a self- intertwining operator for U,(G, »). It is a result due to Bruhat [3] that, for y nonzero imaginary, the unitary representation Up(€, ») is irreducible. It follows readily that, (7) A(P: P: €: v)A(P: P: Gv) = (P: P: ey)96 A. W. KNAPP AND GREGG ZUCKERMAN, with» = zpp meromorphic and scalar valued for z in C.One checks that :€:1) is real for y real. )) & O for y imaginary. : =v) for all ». :P:€:») depends only on the class of ,and if g is an automorphism of G leaving K and P stable, (P: P:?:v) = 9(P:P:€:»). Then we can apply the Jemma to obtain 7(P: P:€:v) and to define normalized operators by AP: P:G:y) = 7(P: P:&:v) A(P: P:E:0). The normalized operators satisfy AP: P 8:9) o(P:P:€:v) = I and AP: P:E:v)" = of P:P:€:—9). These two relations together imply .o is unitary for imaginary. The second stage is to handle a minimal parabolic for general G. Use Schiff- man’s decomposition of a general intertwining operator into operators that are essentially rank one operators, and use the product of the normalizing factors as normalizing factor for the given operator. Then one proves the relation (18) (Py: Py €:v) = af Ps: Po: 6:0) af Pp: Py:€:9). The third stage is to handle a general parabolic P = MAN with dim A again use the trick of imbedding € as a subrepresentation of a nonunitary principal series representation of M. If we combine this trick with formula (1.8) for minimal parabolics, we are led to the conclusion that (1.7) holds for our P with dim A = 1 and that 7 has the same properties as before. Again we apply the lemma to obtain normalizing factor 7, and we set of = 714. The final stage is for a general parabolic with G general and is handled in the same way as with a minimal parabolic and G general. If the 7’s are chosen com- patibly, the result is as follows {7, p. 2460]. TueoREM 1.2. The normalized intertwining operators satisfy () (Pa: Py:8:9) = oP. ») (Pz: Py:6:¥). Gil) (Pp: Py: E20)" = AP; 5), K-space by K-space. (ii) of(Py: P,:G:v) is unitary for v imaginary. (iv) Ifw in K represents a member of the Weyl group W(a), then A (Po: Py:€:v) = ROW) al (Pw): wPw-!: WE: w)R(W). For w in K representing a member of (a), let Aw, €,v) = R0w)of(w Pw: From (i) and (iv) we obtain the cocycle relation (9) Af WW, Gv) = of p(w, WE, WY) oA pW. Ev). From (ii) we find that (1.10) At Aw, §,v)* = of (wl, wE, — wd) and hence that «/(w,€,») is unitary for » imaginary. The intertwining relation isNORMALIZING FACTORS AND L-GROUPS 7 (un) Uwe, wr, g)so plw, &») = of pw, €,»)U P(E, v8) for g in Kor ing, For application to adelic situations, a more specific normalization is needed. At almost all places the representation has a K-fixed vector, and the infinite tensor product of local normalized intertwining operators will be defined only if the local operator fixes the K-fixed vector. This condition determines the normalizing fac- tor. For example, with P; and P; minimal parabolic and § = 1, we are led to normalize (1.3) by taking AP: Pit) =F exp = (or + ») H(A) aa, agin which can be computed in terms of Harish-Chandra’s e-functions. Schiffmann pursued this idea further at an early stage in his work leading to [15]. Langlands was led to conjecture [13, p. 282] in general that a valid norm: ition is obtained by using the quotient of two L-functions: (1.12) (Pe: Px: §:¥) = LO, Brxir, ° PLC, Grav 2 P)- Here g is the homomorphism of the Weil group of R into the L-group “(MA) of MA corresponding to € @ e”, and @p,.p, is the contragredient of the representation of 4(MA) on the Lie algebra of 4, (| 4Np. Arthur [1] proved that (1.12) is a valid normalization if the Haar measures are normalized suitably. 2. The R-group, a first formulation, Fix a discrete series representation € of M, and consider the corresponding continuous series representation U;(é, ») with » imaginary. In [7], it is stated how the problem of determining the algebra €(, ») of operators that commute with Up(E, ») can be reduced to algebraic problems involving certain finite groups. Fix p. Let W be the subgroup of elements s in W(a) that fix » and the class of €. If w is a representative in X of ans in W, then one can define &(1) in such a way that ¢ extends to a representation of the smallest group containing M and w; the definition of &() is unique up to a scalar factor equal to a root of unity. Then £(W) p(w, &, ») is independent of the representative w, and we can write QI) &(8) fps, &,v) for it. One sees from (1.11) that the unitary operator (2.1) intertwines U,(é, v) with itself. The essence of the next theorem is due to Harish-Chandra (4). TueoreM 2.1. The operators (2.1), for s in W, span the commuting algebra @(E, v). Despite formula (1.9), it does not follow that the map (2.2) SEW + & saps, & v) isa homomorphism into unitary operators; the &(s) factors need to be chosen com- patibly, and there may a priori be an obstruction to making such a choice. How- ever, the map (2.1) is at least a homomorphism into the projective unitary group. Let WW’ be its kernel. THEOREM 2.2. The group W’ is the Weyl group of a root system A’ contained in the98 ‘A. W. KNAPP AND GREGG ZUCKERMAN set of roots of (g, a); consequently W = W'Risasemidirect product if R is defined 1s the subgroup of W leaving stable the positive roots in A’. The image of the map (2.2) consists of linearly independent operators; consequently the dimension of 6(E, ») equals the order of R. It turns out that the elements of R are characterized in W as those elements for which the normalizing factor of (2.1) is holomorphic at . Thus W” and R are inti- mately connected with the functions (Pz: P;: €:v) defined by ACP, Py: G:0)A(Po: Py G29) = (Po: P20). In turn, these functions can be connected by analytic methods with the Plancherel measures of subgroups of G; these measures have been determined by Harish- Chandra. Consequently we can describe 4" very concretely, as follows. ‘Adjoin to a.a compact Cartan subalgebra of the Lie algebra m of #, and denote a typical root by 8. Let 4 be the Harish-Chandra parameter for the discrete series ¢ Let a be an a-root and suppose 2a is not an a-root. If « has even multiplicity and 2a is not an a-root, define Heol) = TR +». 8). If a has odd multiplicity, define Hea) = Hea) A+», 8 )fea), 20 where fe,a(v) = tan (x /|a|*) according as a) = —(— DHT or (= Lemont, Here a is a real root and there is a corresponding homomorphism of SL(2, R) into G, and 7. denotes the image of —Z. Now we can characterize 4’ as 4 = {rootsa of als, isin Wand pea(v) = 0}, where , denotes the reflection corresponding to a. As before, R= {pe W|pa > 0 for every a > 0in J’). Then we have the following result [5], [8]. ‘TuoREM 2.3. (a) Risa finite direct sum of 2-element groups Z. (b) For s in R the operators &s) can be selected so that the mapping (2.2) is a homomorphism into unitary operators; consequently the algebra @(é, v) is commuta- tive. (© There exists a set of positive orthogonal real roots 3° = {a1, -.-. a} such that (i) the only roots in the span of 3€ are the + a; (ii) each r in Ris of the form Suyy+- Say,5 and (iii) each a; occurs in the decomposition of some r in R. 3. The R-group, a second formulation. An admissible representation of G is tempered fits K-finite matrix coefficients are in L?*(G) for every ¢ > 0. It is known that every irreducible tempered representation is a summand in some representa- tion of the type considered in §2, induced from discrete series on M and a unitary character on A. The R group can be used to decompose these induced representa-NORMALIZING FACTORS AND L-GROUPS. 99 tions and give a classification of the irreducible tempered representations. We re~ turn to this point in §4. For now, we want to consider W, W’, and R from a different point of view. We begin with some motivation in the case that G is split and our parabolic is minimal. Then M is finite abelian and is generated by the elements 7, that are the images of (4-2) in the SL(2, R)’s that correspond to each root. Here € is a character of M, and we assume » = 0, Let the root system be 4. It is a simple matter to see that 4’ = {ae A| &(r2) = 1}. The elements 7, transform under Weyl group elements differently from what one might expect. The correct rule is, S085" = Top = Tarp. ‘Asa result, 4’ need not be closed under addition within the set of all roots. It is in the co-root system that there is closure under addition. The co-root of a isaY = 2a/, and 4’ is closed under addition within 4Y. We introduce a kind of dual group G~, not the L-group just yet. G~ is a connected real group with a compact Cartan subgroup and root system AY, arranged so that the roots of 4’V are compact and the others are noncompact; it is to have a centerless complexification Gg, a Lie algebra g~,and a Cartan decomposition g~ = t~ @ ip. Elements of W" lead to elements in the Weyl group of f~, with representatives in G~. Elements of W lead to elements in the Weyl group of gg that leave the compact roots stable, hence normalize tg and t~ ® ip, hence normalize t~ and p~ and therefore g~. It follows that R injects onto the quotient Normgs(q)/G~. This style of argument can be pushed to yield a proof that R = 32Z, in this case. Langlands [14] built on these ideas and gave a formulation in general of 1, W’, and R in terms of the L-group. We use the notation of Borel [2] approximately and will follow the L-group constructions given by Langlands {12] when we need them. First let us see what the above example has to do with the -group. Of course, 4G9 is just Gg, up to coverings. The character ¢ is specified by giving &(y.), and 7 behaves like the (character associated to the) co-root a. To know a” on € for each a isto know € as an element of the dual torus “7°. There is a corresponding homo- morphism g of the Weil group into “G given by g(z) = I for z¢ C* and g(r) = & x 0 /T; here g is the trivial outer automorphism of 4G, trivial since G is split. The elements of the Weyl group that centralize the image {1, € x a} of y are those of W; this statement motivates Theorem 3.1 below. The roots whose root, vectors are centralized by the image of g are those in 4’; this statement motivates Theorem 3.3 below. The observation above that Ris isomorphic to Norm¢z(g)/G~ could have been stated in terms of K~ and then motivates Theorem 3.4 below. ‘We pass to the general case, Fixa minimal parabolic Py = Mp4No in G, and let T bea Cartan subgroup of Gcontaining 4p. Let“G® » {1,0} be the L-group of G, with its maximal torus “7° and Borel subgroup !B, The “standard relevant parabolics” “P, in the sense of (2}, correspond to the standard parabolics P 2 Pp of G. Let 4(MA) be the Levi component of “P. According to [12], the classes of L-indistin- guishable irreducible admissible representations of G correspond to conjugacy classes (suitably defined) of certain kinds of homomorphisms g of the Weil group into 4G. A representation is tempered if and only if the image of g is bounded. It comes from the series of §2 for P if, after conjugation, p has image in the Levi component 4(MA) of “P but not in any smaller such Levi component. We may and100 ‘A.W. KNAPP AND GREGG ZUCKERMAN shall assume that g(C*) & 4T° and g(e) is in the normalizer of “T°. We shall give an example of these notions at the end of this section, illustrating the three theorems below. Fix a summand in a representation Up(6, »). The corresponding @ goes with a whole L-class of representations in G. Since the image of g is in (MA), the L-class consists of those representations obtained by inducing from a single L-class for MA. ‘The latter class corresponds with the map gp obtained by regarding as having image in (MMA), and it is characterized by the data v, the central character of &, and the infinitesimal character of €. But the definitions of W, W’, and R depend only on y, the central character of €, and the infinitesimal character of €. Thus the question arises how to define W, W’, and Rin terms of g directly. [Digression. A simple consequence of the discussion above and a lemma due to D. Shelstad is that the cardinalities of R and the L-classes corresponding to g and M4 are related by the formula | L-class for p| = [R| | L-class for p¥4]. In fact, the representations in the L-class for g are all the irreducible constituents of all representations U,(¢’, ») with é" ® v in the L-class for p!4. The R-group for all these U;(¢’, ») is the same as ¢’ varies. Moreover, Shelstad’s lemma says that UplGi, ») and Us(E2, v) are disjoint if € @ v and & @ v are L-equivalent but not equivalent. The formula follows.) Let S = Cent(Image ), the centralizer being taken in 4°, and let S° be the identity component of S and 8 its Lie algebra. The Weyl group W(a) imbeds in the Weyl group of (4G, 47°). Namely any ele- ment of W(a) has a representative that normalizes the Cartan subalgebra of m and preserves positive roots of m; in this way an element of (a) leads to a unique member of the Weyl group of (4G, “T°). With this identification in mind, we have the following result. THEOREM 3.1 (LANGLANDS). W = (Norm(4T%) () S)/(4T® () 5), the normalizer being taken in “G0, We denote the lattices that are given as part of the L-group data by Land LY: L = Hom (To, C*) = Hom (C*, “7%, LY = Hom (47°, C*) = Hom (C*, Te) ‘These are in duality as follows: If A is in L = Hom(C*, 47°) and 2Y is in LY = Hom(+T®, C*), then 2Y ° J is a power of z in C*, and <2, 4¥) denotes this power. ‘The homomorphism g on C*, with values in “7°, can be written symbolically as (3.1) gz) = 2H" where and y are in L @ Cand x — visin L. Formula (3.1) means that IM(yl2)) = 2-%* (zzyH40 ze(22)", for all 2Y in LY. The condition that the image of g lies in no proper parabolic within P means that o(e) aY = — @Y exactly for the roots of (MA) and that 0, we are led to nontempered representations. We shall spe-NORMALIZING FACTORS AND L-GROUPS 103 cialize to the principal series with ¢, — cy = 0, which corresponds to ei"? on the M part and trivial on the A part, by taking = n{z\/2 + nlw)/2. These principal series representations are reducible (splitting into two parts) if and only if m is even and # 0.To see what g(z) is, we realize “T° as LT = diag(a,,a,, ag) mod center. Apply (3.2) to the element g(z) with c = 1, d = 0, and then with ¢ = 0, d= Then (ay/az)(z) = d,g(2) = 2 8(z2)% 282 (zz) m8 = zH]) 2h and (aa/a3y(2) = 2/|2|*. Hence zni|z|" 0 0 \I8 wo=( 0 (ilzpy? 0 ) mod center, 0 Oo zilzly in the sense that if the cube roots are extracted compatibly, their ambiguity dis- appears when we pass to PGL(3, C). To compute the image of p completely, there is one more step—to determine ol) = x¥ x 9. We must have y(z)? = g(—1), and we conclude (x¥\(x") = e(—1). We can take Wal ifmiseven, = diag(i,1, -i)_ifmis odd. Now we can compute the groups $ and S® that are the subjects of the theorems of this section. There are three distinct cases for the image of p, corresponding to 1 = 0, n odd, and n nonzero even. The pattern of the computation is to compute 5, = Cent g(C*), which is connected, being the centralizer of a torus, and then to compute the centralizer of y(z) in S;. The idea is to work as much as possible on the Lie algebra level. For 1 = 0 and n odd, we use a trick to obtain S; S is con- tained in the normalizer in 4G® of 8, and 8 is found to be81(2, C). Since 8((2, C) has no outer automorphisms, S must conjugate S° by inner automorphisms. Then it is easy to see that S = S®. The results are as follows. jab n=0: a-(o0 b), s=8, Oc - a0 nodd: e-(00 0), S=8, 0 —al 0 0 0 °} S = Sm {1, wo}, =a)104 ‘A. W. KNAPP AND GREGG ZUCKERMAN These results are compatible with the theorems of this section and the facts that Z, R= {1}, {I}, R= Z 4, Irreducible tempered representations. We continue to investigate the repre- sentations Us(@, v) discussed in §2. Here & is a discrete series representation of Mf and » is imaginary on 9{. We need a parametrization for the discrete series, and we use Harish-Chandra’s. Let 7 be a compact Cartan subgroup of M, let t~ be its Lie algebra, and let Z,, be the center of M. Each discrete series representation of ‘M is determined by a nonsingular linear form 2 on it~ and a character y on Zyy The form A satisfies the integrality condition that 2 — p (with p equal to half the sum of the positive roots of M in some order) lifts to a character er on T-, and Aand x satisfy the compatibility condition that e*-* and y agree on their common domain. We write € = &(2, C, z), where C is the unique Weyl chamber of it~ with respect to which 2 is dominant. Two such ¢’s are equivalent if and only if y = y' and there is some w in the Weyl group W(T-, M) = Norm,(T~)/Cent,(7~) with wa = 2 andwC = C’. Representations that are “limits of discrete series” are discussed in [18]. We can parametrize them in the same fashion, writing € = &(2, C, z), except that 2 is allowed to be singular and there is more than one choice of C that makes 4 dominant. These representations are irreducible or zero, and the criterion for equivalence of nonzero ones is the same as for discrete series. ‘A basic representation is an induced representation Up(E(A, C, x), »), with &(2, C,) a limit of discrete series on M. If 2 is nonsingular, so that € is in the dis- crete series, then we say that the basic representation is induced from discrete series. A basic representation U(E(2, C, x), »), has nondegenerate data if for each root « of (m,t~), (Aa) = 0 implies that's, is not in W(T-: M). A representation induced from discrete series automatically has nondegenerate data. Nondegeneracy accomplishes several things. For one thing, it eliminates the 0 representation from consideration. For a second thing, it assigns a definite par- abolic to the data for a basic representation. For example, in SL#(2, R), there is a single limit of discrete series representation, and it imbeds as a full principal series, The nondegeneracy assumption requires that this representation be viewed in the principal series. In general, it requires that a basic representation be attached to as small a parabolic as possible. A third thing that nondegeneracy accomplishes is to allow the whole discussion of W, W’, 4’, and R in §2 to extend to basic re- presentations with nondegenerate data. The theorem from [8], [9] is as follows. n=Oorodd: W' neven #0: W' ‘TueoreM 4.1. (a) A basic representation with nondegenerate data is necessarily tempered, and itis irreducible if and only if its R-group is trivial. (b) Two irreducible basic representations Up(E(A, C, z), ») and Up(&(2’, C’, x’), »’) with nondegenerate data are equivalent if and only if there is an element w in G carrying M to M’, Ato A’, tot’, and (2, C, z,») t0 (a, C’, y',¥") (© Every irreducible tempered representation is basic and can be written with nondegenerate data. The R-group can be used to point to those basic representations with non- degenerate data that are needed to exhibit the reducibility of a representationNORMALIZING FACTORS AND L-GROUPS 105 induced from discrete series. The constituents of a given representation induced from discrete series, or even of all induced from an L-class of discrete series, are L-indistinguishable. A precise description of how this reducibility may be read off from the data, from the R-group, and from the set of orthogonal roots in Theorem 2.3(¢) is given in (8}. REFERENCES 1.1. Arthur, On the invariane distributions associated to weighted orbital integrals, preprint. 2. A. Borel, Automorphic L-functions, Automorphic Forms, Representations, and L-functions, preprint; these ProcseDiNos, part 2, pp. 27-61 3. F, Bruhat, Sur les représentations indutes des groupes de Lie, Bull. Soc. Math, France 84 (1956), 97-205. 4. Harish-Chandra, Harmonic analysis on real reductive groups. IM, Ann. of Math. (2) 104 (1976), 117-201 8. AW. Knapp, Commutativity of intertwining operators. Il, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 82 (1976), 211-273, 6. A.W. Knapp and E. M. Stein, Intertwining operators for semisimple groups, Ann. of Math. 2) 93.(1971), 489-578, 7. ——, Singular integrals and the principal series. W1, IV, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci, U.S.A. 71 (1974), 4622-4624; 72 (1975), 2459-2461 8. A.W. Knapp and G, Zuckerman, Classification of irreducible tempered representations of semi- simple Lie groups, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 73 (1976), 2178-2180. 9. ——, Classification theorems for representations of semisimple Lie groups, Non-Com- mutative Harmonic Analysis, Lecture Notes in Math., vol. 587, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1977, pp. 138-159, 10. R. A. Kunze and E. M. Stein, Uniformly bounded representations and harmonic analysis of the 2 x 2 real unimodular group, Amer. J. Math. 82 (1960), 1-62. 11. ——, Uniformly bounded representations. I, Amer. J. Math, 89 (1967), 385-442. 12. R.P. Langlands, On the classification of irreducible representations of real algebraic groups, ‘mimeographed notes, Institute for Advanced Study, 1973. 13, ———, On the functional equations satisfied by Eisenstein series, Lecture Notes in Math., vol. $44, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1976. 14. —, Notes on the Knapp-Zuckerman theory, mimeographed notes, Insitute for Advanced ‘Study, Oct. 1976; supplementary letter to A.W. Knapp dated May 25, 1977. 15, G. Schiffman, Intégrales d’entrelacement et fonctions de Whittaker, Bull. Soc. Math. France 91971), 3-72. 16. A. Silberger, The Knapp-Stein dimension theorem for p-adic groups, preprint. 47, N.R. Wallach, On Harish-Chandra's generalized C-functions, Amer. J. Math. 97 (1975), 386-408. 48. G. Zuckerman, Tensor products of finite and infinite dimensional representations of semi- simple Lie groups, Ann. of Math. (2) 106 (1977), 295-308. (Connent. University Yate UniversrryProceedings of Symposia in Pure Mathematics Vol. 33 (1979), part 1, pp. 107-110 ORBITAL INTEGRALS FOR GL,R)* D, SHELSTAD We report briefly on the characterization of orbital integrals of smooth (C*) functions of compact support on GL,(R), following [3]. A similar argument ap- plies to GLa(C) [3]. We begin by recalling some well-known properties of these integrals in a form convenient for the characterization, indicating the proof after- wards; a more elegant formulation is given in (3]. We fix an invariant 4-form we on G = GL,(R). If Tis a Cartan subgroup of G we take wy to be the form Crdy,dya/rir2 where 71, 72 are the eigenvalues of 7 under some order (prescribed by a diagonalization of T) and Cy is a constant as. follows: Cr = Lif Tis split, and C; = i otherwise. If fe C2(G) and rT, regular elements of G lying in 7, we set oF) = J, flere where dg, dt are the Haar measures defined by wa, wr respectively. Then OF is a well-defined C function on T,,,, invariant under the Weyl group and vanishing off some set relatively compact in T. Let Z be the group of scalar matrices in G; thus Z = T — T,,,. The behavior of OF near z ¢ Z is described as follows: there exist a neighborhood N, of z in T (invariant under the Weyl group) and C~ func- tions A}(z, _) and A}(z, _), each defined on N, and invariant under the Weyl group, such that w OF) = ABE 1) + AE DL DMA? for 7 € Nz () Treg: Here D() = (71 — 72)*/rira where, as before, 7; and 72 are the eigenvalues of 7. The functions A} (z, ) and A(z, ) depend on T although we omit this in notation. Note that the equation (1) determines uniquely the restric- tion to Z () N, of A(z, _), and of all its derivatives. Thus we may set Aj(z) = Aye’, 2) for any z' such that ze N,, with a similar definition for derivatives. Further (a) if Tis split then we may take AX, ) = 0 and if X; denotes the image under the Harish-Chandra isomorphism of the oper- ator X in the center of the universal enveloping algebra of gia(C) then (b) for each z € Z, X;A}(2) is independent of T. To determine the restriction to Z ) N, of the derivatives of Aj(z, it is suffi sq the set of AMS (MOS) subject classifications (1970), Primary 2230. “This work has been partially supported by the National Science Foundation under Grant MCS76-08218, 13 1979, American Mathematical Society 107108 D. SHELSTAD cient to compute X;Ai(z) for each X; X;A}(2), which we will not need explicitly, is the appropriately defined integral of Xf over the conjugacy class of ( !) and if T is not split then X;/9(z) = cgXf(2), where cg is a constant depending only on our choice of Haar measure on G. We recall the proof. It is sufficient to consider the Cartan subgroups 4, the diagonal group, and a= (4 ). at + be x oh We find it more convenient to write an element of Brg as Acosé Asin@ 1) =(_4FE85 FSR8), A> 0.0 #00). Proceeding formally, we may choose wz so that @) panl2o9c) = 5 [2 " nh toler) da where N= (6 a} dn= dx, fx) =Jx, flex) dk, Ky= (S09 ng). ae = ao and @ 970.0) = j(Fe0, 0) + Hy(—e'8, —e+0)) (et — e) de where = a) Hy, ») Sf exp(_ ° oye dk. We obtain (2) from the Iwasawa decomposition of SL,(R) and (3) from the Cartan decomposition, The function on the right-hand side of (3) can be analyzed as in [1]. It is easy then to see that this function can be expanded as on the right-hand side of (1). The proof is now straightforward. To compute X;/i(z) note that IDI? O&, = X(\D}/2 Of). This is essentially Harish-Chandra’s formula Ff, = X;FF [2]; |D| !/? Of is the function F# and (e —e*#) 8 (7(2, 0)) = FP(r (0). ‘We come then to the characterization. Suppose that for each Cartan subgroup T we are given a function $7, defined and C* on T,,,, invariant under the Weyl group and vanishing off some set relatively compact in T. Suppose that @7 and satisfy the obvious consistency requirements when T'and 7’ are conjugate. Finally, suppose that for each T and z ¢ Z there exist a neighborhood W, of z in T invariant under the Weyl group and C= functions Az, ) and A\(z, ) on N,, also in- variant under the Weyl group, such that Ale, 7) TD)? for 7 € N; () Trg: the functions A(z, ) are assumed to have the following two properties: @) Oy) = AMZ, 7) +ORBITAL INTEGRALS 109 @aAC, Oif Tis split and (b) for each X in the center of the universal enveloping algebra of gi,(C) the re- striction to Z (| N, of X;A\(z, _) is independent of T. ‘Then Lemma 4.1 of [3] asserts that there exists fe Cz(G) such that 07 = 07 for each T. We sketch the argument. Let G, = G — Zand Y = {(x,, x2) € R*; x, # 0}. Define x: G, + Y by x(g) = (trace g, det g); x is submersive and each fiber is a conjugacy class in G. Let S = {(2x, x); x # 0}. Then we define a function ¢ on ¥ — S by ¢(x(7)) = [DG)//°O7(7), 7 € Treg, allowing T to vary among the Cartan subgroups of G. If ¢ vanishes near S, that is, if each 7 vanishes in a neighborhood of Z, then it is easy to find fe C*(G) such that OF = OT for all T (via the coverings Try x G/T + TE,). Suppose now that ¢ extends to a smooth function on ¥. Since ¢ has compact support we may apply a partition of unity argument on Y and assume that ¢ has support in some neighborhood (to be specified) of a point in S. Fix ae S and ge xa). We can find a neighborhood N, of g in G, with a coordinate system y), «+, y4 such that yy = x, » 7, Jp = Xzom; We may as well assume that (y,) maps Ny to a cube in R4. Set Np = x(Nj) and assume that ge Ce(N2). We lift the form [xq|-¥/dxydx, to N,. Using this and the invariant form wg we construct a G-invariant measure on each fiber of x. Itis easy to find fe C=(N)) such that f,-i~) f= g(x), x€ No. On the other hand, suppose that 7 ¢ N, () T and that x = x(r). Then we find that J.) h = |D(y)|}/? f(y), he C=(N)). This is a straightforward computation with coordinates. Hence g(x) = |D(7)|!/207 (7) and our argument is complete in the case that ¢ is smooth. We observe next that ¢ extends smoothly to Y when the functions Az, ) at- tached to the Cartan subgroup B satisfy Ii 2 pe (DUC OI* AME as 72 )) = 0 for each n or, more simply, XgA°%2’, 2) for each X, z’ and z. As before we suppress 2’ and write just ¥,A°%z). To compute X,A%z) in general we resort to rapidly decreasing functions and their orbital integrals. On G, or any real reductive group, we may introduce the space of rapidly decreas- ing (Schwartz) functions, as defined by Harish-Chandra [2]; [2], together with earlier papers listed there, contains an extensive analysis of the “‘F,” (normalized orbital integral) transform on this space. If now fis rapidly decreasing on G then ®F has the properties listed earlier, except that in place of the statement about the support of ®f we have that |D|!/207 is “rapidly decreasing on T,,,” [2]. For the characterization we take {®7} as before, but allow |D|!/#T to be just rapidly decreasing on T,,,. The argument is straightforward (since there are many rapidly decreasing functions computable orbital integrals [2]), but lengthy. Here is ‘our procedure. Consider the rapidly decreasing function |D|!/24 on A. Using wave-packets [2] we find f, such that FA = |D|!/204; then 04 = 4, Consider sin 6 °(7(A, 0)) — FR(7(A, 6)). From (1) we see that this function is C» on B (and rapidly decreasing as a function of 2). Then using essentially matrix coefficients of the discrete series representations of {x ¢ G: |det x] = 1} we find f; such that Ff, = sin 008 — Ff and Ff = 0. If f = fy + fo then OF = OF for all T(... for a110 D. SHELSTAD general group this argument characterizes only stable orbital integrals). We refer to [4] for details. Returning to our original family {97}, where OT vanishes off some set relatively compact in T, we can find a rapidly decreasing function f such that OF =o". Then X5A%2) = coXf(z), 2 € Z. Multiplying f, if necessary, bya suitable function of det, we may assume that {xe RX; x = det g, f(g) # 0} is relatively compact in RX. This allows us to find in CG) a function f, which coincides with f on a neigh- borhood of Z. Then X/(z) = X/(2) for all z and X, and the function ¢ attached to {07 — 97.) is smooth on Y. We now argue as earlier and the proof of the characterization is complete. Finally, fix a quasi-character z on Z. Suppose that fe C-(G) satisfies f(zg) = y@flg) for z¢Z, ge G and has support compact modulo Z. Then OF is well defined and has the properties listed earlier, with the necessary modifications con- cerning support and transformation under Z. To characterize {7} we can argue as follows. Let {07} have those properties. We can easily find 9f, C* on T;,g, invariant under the Weyl group, vanishing off a set relatively compact in T, satisfying (4) and such that O7(r) = fz y(z~)0f(zr) dz, 7 € Tyg. For example, we may take Of as OT multiplied by a suitable function of |det|. We pick fy ¢ C@(G) such that G7, = OF for each T. Then f defined by f(g) = fzx(z~)folzg) dz, g € G, satisfies F = OF for each T and is of the desired form. REFERENCES 1. Harish-Chandra, Some results on an invariant integral on a semi-simple Lie algebra, Ann. of Math. (2) 80 (1964), 457-508. 2.——, Harmonie analysis on real reductive groups. I, I, III, J. Functional Analysis 19 (1975), 104-204; Invent. Math. 36 (1976), 1-55; Ann. of Math. (2) 104 (1976), 117-201. 3. RP. Langlands, Base change for GL() (to appear). 4. D. Shelstad, Characters and inner forms of a quasi-split group over R, Compositio Math. (to appear). Covumora UNIvERStTYProceedings of Symposia in Pure Mathematics Vol. 33 (1979), part 1, pp. 111-155 REPRESENTATIONS OF »-ADIC GROUPS: A SURVEY P. CARTIER Introduction. The aim of this article is to (partially) survey the present state of knowledge about the representations (mostly infinite-dimensional) of reductive algebraic groups over a local field. This includes the familar p-adic groups like GL,(Q,), SPoa(Qp)s This theory evolved slowly and lately. The first steps were taken around 1960 by Mautner and his students who concerned themselves with a detailed study of the particular group GL,(Q,). The first general results were obtained by Bruhat [8] who imitated the ‘real’ methods of his thesis [7] and by Satake who determined the spherical functions [38], But the next developments had to await the deep results of Bruhat and Tits {10}, {11}, [12] and [13] about the structure of p-adic reductive groups. In their reference work in which they were basically concerned with the group GL, Jacquet and Langlands [34] introduced the important notion of an admissible representation. They thus opened the way towards a purely algebraic theory of these representations. The basic results about induced representations were soon after obtained by Jacquet [32], who considered the case of GL, only, but used per- fectly general methods. These results have been generalized by Casselman and Harish-Chandra. The main goal of this article will be the description and study of the principal series and the spherical functions. There shall be almost no mention of two impor- tant lines of research which are still actively pursued today: (a) Planchere! theorem and detailed harmonic analysis on p-adic Lie groups. Here Harish-Chandra is the uncontested leader. We refer the reader to Harish- Chandra’s own description of his results [26], [27] and also to my Bourbaki lecture {14] for more recent results due to Harish-Chandra and Roger Howe. (b) Explicit construction of absolutely cuspidal representations (the so-called ‘discrete series’). Here important progress has been made by Shintani [40], Gérar- din [21] and Howe (forthcoming papers in the Pacific J. Math.). One can expect to meet here difficult and deep arithmetical questions which are barely uncovered. Let us give a brief description of the contents of these notes. In §I, we describe the various classes of representations in a very general framework. Following Harish-Chandra [25], we give the definitions for totally disconnected locally com- AMS (MOS) subject classifications (1970), Primary 22E50; Secondary 14L.10, 43490. © 1979, American Mathematical Society Mm112, P, CARTIER pact groups. Number theory and automorphic functions provide us with a host of such groups and their representations. Special attention is paid to various forms of Frobenius reciprocity and various notions of induced representations. Our exposition is based on an apparently novel method using tensor products (over rings without unit element, alas!). In §I, we build up the machinery which enables us, after Jacquet, to reduce the classification of the irreducible admissible representations for a p-adic group G to the two following problems: (a) Construct the absolutely cuspidal irreducible representations for G and the Levi components of its parabolic subgroups as well. (b) Study the representations induced from parabolic subgroups to the whole group. Our presentation of Jacquet’s fundamental construction (the two ‘Jacquet’s functors’) is based on our previous description of the induced representations and is slightly more symmetrical than usual. After specializing the previous results to the classical case of GL,, we turn to the relation between unitary representations and admissible representations. Here the basic results are due to Harish-Chandra [28] (generalizing earlier results of R. Howe [29] for GL,) and Bernshtein [1]. They show that any reductive algebraic group over a local field is of type I in the sense of von Neumann-Murray classification. The foundations are thus laid down for Plancherel theorem. SII is devoted to the unramified principal series. These representations are par- ametrized by the so-called unramified characters of the Levi component of a min- imal parabolic subgroup. Let us mention that those characters provide the crux of the applications to Langlands theory of L-groups (see Borel lectures in these PROCEEDINGS). In general, the representations i(z) in this series are irreducible. They have always a nonzero vector invariant under a special maximal compact subgroup. The main result concerns the explicit construction of an equivalence between Z(z) and 1(wz) where w is an element of the (relative) Weyl group. In the case of real Lie groups, this question led to the introduction of singular integral operators (Stein, Knapp). The deep analytical problems involved in the construc tion of these operators are bypassed by a very ingenious trick of Casselman, making full use of Jacquet’s construction V = Vy. An important role is played by the so- called Iwahori subgroups and their geometrical interpretation via buildings. In §1V, we culminate with the theory of spherical functions. Using the results expounded in §IIT, one recovers Macdonald’s formula [36], [37] for these spherical functions. This theory has been highly developed in the case of real Lie groups. From the point of view of representation theory, the spherical principal series is quite special, but plays a prominent role in the applications to L-functions a la Langlands. The whole approach leading to spherical functions through §SIII and IV has been developed by Casselman in a still unpublished paper [18]. I borrowed extensively from this paper as well as from a preliminary paper [17] by the same author de- veloping the foundations of representation theory in the p-adic case. The reader will have to consult these papers for the details of proofs and for numerous gen- eralizations. It is hoped that they shall appear soon. I have to thank several friends. Anna Helversen-Pasotto tape-recorded my lectures and made out of her tapes a transcript of the spoken words. This ungra-REPRESENTATIONS OF -ADIC GROUPS 13 tifying task proved very helpful to me when transforming the sketchy notes dis- tributed during the conference into the present report. Serge Lang and John Tate allowed me to use freely their notes about spherical transforms, My treatment in §IV has been influenced by them. Also John Tate corrected my misinterpretations about Frobenius reciprocity (see §1.7). Notations and conventions, 1. Let A be a ring with unit element 1. Let A* be the set of elements a in A for which there exists b in A with ab = 1. Endowed with ring multiplication, A* is a group, the “multiplicative group” of A. 2. Let M be a module over a ring A without unit element. One says that Mf is nondegenerate if every element in M can be written in the form ay-m+ --- +44 -my with a, ++, ain A and m, +, m, in M.! One says a sequence of elements nm, +, m, in M generates M if every element in Mis of the form ay +m + o> + ay + My + my + my + + yom, With ay, =, ay in A and integers 1, --, m (of either sign). If M is nondegenerate, we can omit the terms m + m, «+, Mg: My. The module M is finitely generated if there exists a finite sequence generating M. 3. By a local field we mean a nonarchimedean local field with finite residue field. Such a field F comes equipped with a subring O;, whose elements are called the integers in F. There exists in O a unique nonzero prime ideal py. Moreover there is in Opa prime element Gp such that pp = Op- Gp. Every element x in F* can be uniquely written as @f - u with some integer n and some w in Of = Op\pe. We set ord;(x) = min this case. By convention, ord,(0) is put equal to +00. The index 4g = (Op: bp) is finite and a power of a prime number p. We set |xlp = 72" for x in F* and [0], = 0. The index ‘F” may be omitted in Op, pp, Of, @p, ordp(x) and Ix|p when no confusion can arise. There are two possibilities: (a) If Fis of characteristic 0, then Fis a finite algebraic extension of the p-adic field Q, and Op consists of the elements integrally dependent on the ring Z, of p-adic integers. (b) If F is of characteristic p, then F is the quotient field of the ring Op = Fille of formal power series in one indeterminant ¢ with coefficients in the Galois field F,, (also denoted as GF(q) by various authors). 4, We use the standard notations: Z for the ring of integers, @ for the field of rational numbers, R for the field of real numbers, C for the field of complex numbers. 5. Let G be a topological group, whose unit element shall be denoted by 1. By a character of G we mean any continuous homomorphism z: G > C*. We say 7, is unitary in case z(g) isa complex number of modulus | for every g in G, that is * = ys"). 08) = Xe) !We make the convention that any unitary module over a ring with unit element is nondegene- rate, *Some authors call ‘qu: tary character’. i-character’ what we call ‘character’ and ‘character’ what we call ‘uni-14 P. CARTIER Assume that G is locally compact. We use the symbol C,() to denote the space of continuous compactly supported complex-valued functions on G. If pis a (left invariant) Haar measure on G, we denote usually by {¢/(g)dg the integral of a function f in CG) w.r.t. z. The modular function dg is characterized by the in- tegration rule f,,flode = Acteof fee0) de for f in C.(G). ‘The group G is called unimodular in case dg = 1. ‘One has sometimes to integrate over homogeneous spaces G/H. Suppose that ‘fis a continuous function on G and there exists a function f; in C.(G/H) such that ‘flg) = f(@H) for any g in G. Choose an invariant measure j on G/H. The integral off, w.r.t. « shall often be denoted by fc, f(g) 48. If G is a Lie group (real or p-adic) we use the corresponding German letter g to denote its Lie algebra. 6. Let X be any set. The identity map in X shall be denoted by 1y. If A is any subset of X, the characteristic function 14: X + {0, 1} is defined by LQ) for x in A, 0 for x in X\ A, where we denote by X\A the set-theoretic difference. If Xis finite, its cardinality shall be denoted by || 7. We use the abbreviations ‘iff’ for ‘if and only if” and ‘w.r.t.’ for ‘with respect to’. I. Totally disconnected groups and their representations. 1.1. Groups of td-type. Let G be a topological group. We say G is of td-type if every neighborhood of its unit element I contains a compact open subgroup. Such a group is a locally compact Hausdorff space. Moreover it is totally disconnected (hence td), that is there is no connected subset of G with more than one element. Let G be a group of td-type. If X¥, and Xz are nonempty compact open sets in G, there exists a compact open subgroup K of G such that X; and X; are unions of finitely many cosets x1, K, +, X;,q, K for X; and x2,1 K, +++, Xam, K for X. We set a) (Mi: Xe) = ming. For instance, if X; and Xz are compact open subgroups and X; is contained in X,, then (X: X) is the index of X, in X,. The chain rule holds, namely @ (Xi: Xa) = (Xi: Xo) - (Xa: Xa). Let » be a left invariant Haar measure on G. The following formula is obvious: @) (X12 Xa) = WX) W(X), true for Hence if ,«(X) is rational for some compact open set ¥ # @, the sam every such set. In this case one calls the Haar measure 1 rational.REPRESENTATIONS OF }-ADIC GROUPS 11s 1.2. Examples of groups of td-type. (a) Let G be of td-type. Then every open subgroup, every closed subgroup of G is of td-type. A factor group of G by a closed invariant subgroup is of td-type. (b) If G,, --, G, are groups of td-type, so is their direct product G, x --- x G, endowed with the product topology. (© Let (Gay be any infinite family of groups of td-type, and let K; < G; be a ‘compact open subgroup for each in J. In the direct product [Tey G;, let G be the subgroup consisting of the families (g;);., such that the set {i I|g, ¢ K;} is finite. Then K = [],<; K; is a subgroup of G. We endow K with the product topology. A. set U in Gis open iff gU () K is open in K for every g in G. Then G with this topol- ogy is a group of td-type and K’is a compact open subgroup of G. The group G is known as the restricted product of the groups G; w.r.t. the groups K;. (@) Let F be a local field. Then |x— yl, defines a distance in F, hence a topology. Then Fas an additive group is of td-type, with O, as a compact open subgroup. Moreover F* is open in F, hence, as a multiplicative group, itis of td-type with Of asa compact open subgroup. (c) Let n = 1 be an integer. The linear group GL,(F) is the open subspace of the 1?-dimensional space over F with coordinates x11, x12, °, Xp defined by det(x,,) # 0. It is a group of td-type. A compact open subgroup is GL,(O,), the set of n-by-n matrices with entries in O;, and determinant in Of. (f) Let G be a subgroup of GL,(F) defined as the set of common zeroes of a set of polynomials in the coordinates x,; with coefficients in F. For short, G is an algebraic subgroup of GL,(F) (more precisely, the set of F-rational points of an algebraic group defined over F). It is a closed subgroup of GL,(F), hence a group of td-type on its own merits. A neighborhood basis of the unit matrix J, in G is given by the subgroups Kn = {g = (gi) in G| | Bij — 3, Let G’ be an algebraic subgroup of GL,(F) for some integer n’ = 1. Assume that the group homomorphism 9: G > G" is rational, that is, there exist polynomials fu in F[X4,, -) Xp] and an integer m 2 I such that Sqm for 1 S i,j Sn}. 8) = (on (Sirs > Saw) /(Aet 8") tse for g = (g:;) in G. Then p is continuous w.r.t. the topologies defined on G and G’ by their embedding in the linear groups GL,(F) and GL,,(F) respectively. In par- ticular if pis a biregular isomorphism, i... ¢ is a group isomorphism and p, p~ are both rational, then pis a homeomorphism. In more intrinsic terms, the algebraic structure on G is defined by the ring F[G] of polynomial functions? and the topology defined above is the coarsest for which the elements of F{G] are continuous mappings from G to F (Fis given the topology defined in (d)). (g) By (b) and (f), the product of finitely many algebraic groups defined over the *This ring consists of the functions g ++ u(gss, “*, &ma)((det g)" for a polynomial w in FUX y+) Xue and an integer m = 0.116 P. CARTIER same or distinct local fields is of td-type. Similarly, by (c) and (f), adelic groups without archimedean components are of td-type. (h) Let F be a local field and F,,, a separably algebraic closure of F. Let Fy, be the maximal unramified extension of F contained in F.,, and ¢ the Frobenius au- tomorphism of Fig, over F. Let Gp = Gal(F.g/F) be the Galois group of Fi, Over Fendowed with the Krull topology. It is a compact group of td-type. Let Wp ¢ Ge be the subgroup of automorphisms of Fz, which induce some power o* of g in Foe. In a unique way we can consider W, the Weil group of F, as a group of td-type in which Gal(Figg/F,x,) (With Krull topology) is a compact open subgroup of Ws. 1.3. Hecke algebra. Let G be a group of td-type. If K is any compact open sub- group of G, we denote by »(G, K) the complex vector space consisting of the complex-valued functions fon G which satisfy the following two conditions: (a) fis bi-invariant under K, that is flkgk’) = f(g) for g in G and k, k’ in K. (b)f vanishes off a finite union of double cosets KeK. Moreover, let us choose a (left invariant) Haar measure on G. One defines a bilinear multiplication in the complex vector space #(G, K) by the customary con- volution formula ® (Ur fa)(e) =f, fue fbr te) de. This integral makes sense since, as a function of x, the integrand is locally constant and compactly supported. For this multiplication 2(G, K) becomes an associative algebra over the complex field C. Let us choose a set of representatives {g,} for the double cosets of G modulo K, ie., Gis the disjoint union of the sets Ke,K. For any index ar, let u, be defined by (6) ug) = WKY if ge Keak, 0 otherwise, In particular we may assume that gp = I for some index 0 and the corresponding function ty shall be denoted by ex. Hence © ex(e) = KY ifgeK, otherwise. ‘The family {u,} is a basis of the vector space #(G, K). Moreover, ex is the unit element of this algebra and the multiplication table is given by u, # us = EisCasrty where the coefficients c,s, are computed as follows. The group Ky = K()£aKga! is compact and open, hence of finite index in K. There exist therefore elements xy “++, Xm Of K such that K is the disjoint union of the sets x1Kqy *--, XmKq- Then KegK is the disjoint union of the sets xg, ---, XnfaK. Define similarly Ks and the elements yy, «+, yy. Then aa, is the number of pairs (i, /) such that g-*x;ea)/85 belong to K (see Shimura (39). When K’ isacompact open subgroup of K, then #(G, K) is a subring of #(G, K’) but with a different unit element if K # K’. Define 2¢(G) = x 2€G, K) where K runs through a neighborhood basis of 1 consisting of compact open subgroups. Then 3(G) is the space of locally constant and compactly supported functions on G. For the convolution product defined by (4), 2¢(G) is an associative algebra. It hasREPRESENTATIONS OF p-ADIC GROUPS 47 no unit element unless Gis discrete, and itis commutative iff G is commutative. The algebra %(G) is called the Hecke algebra of G and x¢(G, K) is called the Hecke algebra of G w.r.t. K# For later purposes, we need a generalization of »#(G). Namely, let Z be a closed subgroup of the center of G and y a character of Z. We denote by 2,(G) the set of, complex-valued functions which satisfy the following conditions: (a) fis locally constant; (b) one has fleg) = y(2)1f(g) for z in Zand g in G; (©)fis compactly supported modulo Z. More explicitly, assertion (c) means that vanishes off a set of the form (- Z where Qis compact in G. Choose a Haar measure v on G/Z. The convolution product is defined in 2#,(G) by o Cie F008) =f, A) fale) dz (notice that the integrand takes the same value for x and xz if z belongs to Z). This, product is bilinear and associative, There is no unit element in the algebra 2,(G) unless Z is open in G. When Z = {1}, this construction brings us back to 2G). 1.4. Smooth representations. By a representation of G, we mean as customary a pair (x, V) where V is a complex vector space and x a homomorphism from G into the group of invertible linear maps in V. If His a subgroup of G, we denote by V# the space of vectors vin V such that x(H)-» = v for any h in H, that is, vectors whose stabilizer in G contains H. DEFINITION 1.1. A representation (x, V) of G is smooth iff the stabilizer of every vector in V is open, equivalently if V = JxV where K runs over the compact open subgroups of G. Let (x, V) bea smooth representation of G and V* the space of all linear forms on V. The coefficient x,, » of x (for vin Vand v* in V*) is defined by @) Fe,ol8) = Cv, 2(g)-¥>. It isa locally constant function on G. For fin #(G) there exists a linear operator x(f) acting on V and such that o ee aA-¥) = J Meda e(8) de. It is computed as follows: given v in V there exist a compact open subgroup K of G, constants c++, Gq, elements g1,°°", 8m of Gsuch that ve VE and f = DM, Glyn Then x(f)-v is equal to (K)- DO eya(g,)-¥. Using standard calculations one checks that f+ x(f) is an algebra homomor- phism from »#(G) into Ende(V); hence we may consider V as an #(G)-module. For every compact open subgroup K of G, the operator z(ex) is a projection of V onto VX; hence every vector v in V satisfies v = x(ex)-v for asuitable K. As acorol- lary, Vis a nondegenerate (G)-module. The following facts are easily proved: “For G = GLyQ,) and K = GL, Z,), this algebra is just the classical algebra of Hecke opera- tors attached to p.118 P, CARTIER (a) A subspace V, of V is stable under the operators x(g) for g in G iff it is invariant under the operators x(f) for fin 2G). Otherwise stated, the subrepresentations (x1, V1) of (x, V) correspond to the submodules of the #%(G)-module V. In particular, the representation (x, V) is (algebraically) irreducible if V is a simple 2¢(G)-module. The representation (7, V) is said to be finitely generated if there exist finitely many vectors ¥,--+, Yq such that the transforms n(g)-v, for gin Gand 1 = i S m generate the complex vector space V. By (a), this amounts to the assertion that (¥3,"*+, Y,) generates the #(G)-module V. (b) Let (x, V) and (x', V’) be smooth representations of G, and let u:V -+ V' be a linear map. Then u satisfies x'(g)u = un(g) for every g in G iff it satisfies n'(f)u = un(f) for every fin #(G). ‘A map u:V > V’ such that 2'(g)u = ux(g) for every g in G is called an inter- twining map or a G-homomorphism. By (b), it is nothing else but a homomorphism of 3(G)-modules. (6) Let (x, V) be any irreducible smooth representation of G. Assume that the topology of G has a countable’ basis.6 Then every intertwining map u: V+ V isa scalar. This version of Schur’s lemma is proved as follows. Since G has a countable basis, the index (G: K) is countable for every compact open subgroup K of G; hence 2(G, K) has a countable dimension over C. Moreover, there exists a countable basis of neighborhoods of 1; hence 2(G) = (Jx2#(G, K) has a countable dimen- sion, For any v # 0 in V, the map f+ x(f)-v from ¢(G) to V is surjective; hence the dimension of Vis countable. Let A be the algebra of intertwining maps from V into V. For any v # Oin V, the map u ++ u(v) of A into Vis injective because (7, V) is irreducible; hence the dimension of 4 is countable. But A is a division algebra over the algebraically closed field C. If A # C, there exists a subfield of A isomor- phic over C to the field of rational fractions C(x). In this field, the uncountably many elements (x — 2)", for 2 running over C, are linearly independent. Con- tradiction! [This proof is due to Jacquet (33}.] For instance, let z belong to the center Z(G) of G. Then x(z) commutes to =(g) for every g in G. Hence there exists a character «w, of Z(G) such that x(2) = w,(2)-Iy for every z in Z(G). One refers to w, as the central character of x. (d) Any nondegenerate 3¢°(G)-module is associated to a unique smooth representa- tion of G. To summarize, the category of nondegenerate 2(G)-modules is identical to the ca- tegory of smooth representations of G and intertwining maps. To conclude this section, we define the contragredient representation to a smooth representation (x, V) of G. Let K be a compact open subgroup of G. Denote by V*(K) the space of linear forms v* on V such that for every vin V. The space 7 = |) V*(K) is called the smooth dual to V. In V there ex- ists a smooth representation # of G characterized by the relation (10) * A finite set is countable! * This condition is satisfied for the algebraic groups over a local field.[REPRESENTATIONS OF }-ADIC GROUPS 119 for g in G, vin V and # in 7. The representation (#, 7) is called the representation contragredient to (z, V). 1.5. Admissible representations and their characters. We come now to a more restricted class of representations. DEFINITION 1.2. A representation (z, V) of G is called admissible if it is smooth and the space V¥ of vectors invariant under K is finite-dimensional for every compact open subgroup K of G. Fix a smooth representation (x, V) of G and a compact open subgroup K of G. Let &(K) be the set of (equivalence classes of) continuous irreducible finite-dimen- sional representations of K; every neighborhood of 1 in K contains a subgroup L of K which is compact, open and invariant in K. It follows that every representation in &(K) factors through the finite group K/L for such a subgroup L. Let v be a vector in V. Since z is smooth, there exists a subgroup L as above fixing, v, Let kj,--+, km be coset representatives for K modulo L. The subspace spanned by ak): ¥4--5,2(kq) + is stable under K and affords a representation of the finite group KIL. Itis therefore the direct sum of subspaces affording irreducible representations of K/L, hence of K. In other words, the restriction of x to K is a semisimple re- presentation. For any > in 6(X), let Vy be the subspace of V generated by the minimal K-invariant subspaces of V affording a representation of K of class b. The space V, is called the isotypic component of class b of 7; if ¢ is the one-dimen- sional representation of X given by e(k) = 1 for k in X, then V, = VX. More gener- ally for any character z of K, the space V, consists of the vectors v in V such that a(k)-v = x(k)-v for every kin K. We state now the elementary properties of admissible representations. (a) If (@, V) is a smooth representation of G and K is a compact open subgroup of G, then V is the direct sum ® yee». Moreover (x, V) is admissible iff Vy is finite-dimensional for every d in &(K). Let now d in &(X) and let 5 be the representation of K contragredient to b. Since the space E of is finite-dimensional, the space of } is the dual E* of E. (b) Assume (x, V) is admissible. The restriction of the pairing between V and V to Vi x V, defines a nondegenerate K-invariant bilinear form on V5 x Vy. Since V, is finite-dimensional, so is 7; and each of the spaces V, and V; can be identified to the dual of the other. So we get from (b) the following result: (©) If (a, V) is admissible, then (%, V) is admissible and the pairing between V and Venables one to identify (x, V) with the representation contragredient to (#, V). We come now to the characters. (@) Let (x, V) be a smooth representation of G. Then x is admissible iff the operator (fis of finite rank for every fin °(G). By definition a distribution (in the sense of Bruhat [9]) on G is a linear form on the space 2¢(G) of “test functions”. According to property (d) above, we can associate to any admissible representation (z, V) of Ga distribution @, on G by ay 6,(f) = Tr(x(f)) for f in #(G). One refers to 6, as the character of z. (©) Let (a, Valor be @ family of admissible and irreducible representations of G. Assume that mis inequivalent to mp for « # 8. Then the characters @,, are linearly independent, hence mutually distinct.120 P. CARTIER For the calculation of @, we may proceed as follows. Assume to simplify matters that G has a countable basis of open sets, hence a countable basis (K,)q.21 for the neighborhoods of 1 consisting of a decreasing sequence of compact open sub- groups. Let V,, be the space of vectors in V invariant under x(K,,). Since z is ad- missible, each V,, is finite-dimensional, and Vc Vp c+ © Vm © + with V = UmVne Let g be in G. For every m, the operator x(ex,,)-7(g)-7(ex,) maps V,, into itself. Since V,, is finite-dimensional, this operator has a trace, to be denoted by @,,,(g). Notice that as a function of g, 6,,,,(g) is bi-invariant under K, hence locally constant. Let f be in 9(G). There exists an integer mp 2 1 such that f belongs to #(G, K,,,) and then one gets (2) Gx(f) = J, Scmte)fle) de 6 for every integer m 2 mp. This fact can also be stated as (13) @, = lim 6,,,, (weak limit in the space dual to #(G)). For each m, let B,, be a basis of V,, over C; assume that By ¢ By c++ © By © Byst ©. Then B= (),,B,, is a basis of V over C. Put B= {v,}ecr3 hence By, = (vahactm for some finite subset J,, of J. Define the matrix (7,3(g)) by (4) 2(g)-¥p = 3 Ta 8)" Then G,,,, can be calculated as as) r.n(B) = Be (g). Hence we get the series expansion (16) 0, = 2% 5 which converges in the weak sense. Remark. The definitions of the convolution product by (4) and of x(f) by (9) depend on a Haar measure 4, on G. To free them from this dependence, we can proceed as follows. Let C-(G) be the space of locally constant complex-valued functions on G. By C=(G) we denote the space of linear forms T on C>(G) which satisfy the following two properties: (1) There exists a compact open subgroup K of G such that T is bi-invariant under K.Namely, for fin C-(G)and ky, ky in K, then T(f) = T(f") where f(g) = f(kgk2). (2) Tis compactly supported, namely there exists a compact open subset 2 of G such that 7(f) = 0 for every f in C-(G) which vanishes identically on Q. By a generalized function on G we mean a linear form on C2(G); they make up a vector space C-=(G) over C. We can embed in a natural way C(G) as a subspace of C-“(G). The convolution product on C(G) is defined as follows: for T; (i = 1, 2) in C2(G) choose (as in (2) above and let 2 = Q1 U Mz. For fin C~(G) there exist functions Sis Sin ts Sm itt CoG) such thatREPRESENTATIONS OF p-ADIC GROUPS 121 «an Flaied) = FF@)- Flea) for ay 80 in 0 Then (7 * T:)(f) is defined by (1s) TKN = En)-TaV. For T'in C2(G), the operator z (T) in Vis defined in such a way that (as) Go, a(T)-¥) = Tye) for vin V, v* in V* (notice that z,, + belongs to C-(G)). If z is admissible, its character is the genera- ized function defined by @,(T) = Tr(x(7)) for T in Cx(G). If we choose a left invariant Haar measure on G, we get an isomorphism of #(G) onto C2(G) which associates to w€ ¥#(G) the linear form f+ fo fig)u(g) de on C*(G). By duality, one gets an isomorphism of C-=(G) with the space of dis- tributions. This brings us back to our previous constructions. 1.6. Absolutely cuspidal representations. In this section, we denote by Z a closed subgroup of the center of G. We fix a character y of Z and a Haar measure on G/Z and assume that G is unimodular. A y-representation of G is a representa- tion (x, V) of G such that (2) = y(2)-Iy for every z in Z. If x is smooth and ir- reducible, this means that the restriction to Z of the central character w, is equal to x (at least, when G has a countable basis of open sets). Let x be a smooth y-representation of G. For f in #,(G). the linear operator x(f) in Vis defined in such a way that 20) oh ay = J, 0% 206)» Me) dE holds for v in Vand v* in V*. It is then easily proved that the category of smooth z-representations of G is isomorphic to the category of nondegenerate »,(G)-modules. Moreover the ir- reducible smooth representations correspond to the simple #,(G)-modules, Derintrion 1.3, Let x be a character of Z. A y-representation (x, V) of G is called absolutely cuspidal (or supercuspidal, or parabolic according to some authors) if it is admissible and each coefficient x,,,(v in V, ¥in V) is compactly supported modulo Z (hence belongs to %s-1(G)). A representation is called absolutely cuspidal (w.t.t. Z) if it is an absolutely cuspidal y-representation for some character z of Z. One of the main properties of absolutely cuspidal representations is embodied im the so-called Schur orthogonality relations. TueoreM 1.1. Let (x, V) be any irreducible absolutely cuspidal y-representation of G. Assume that the character \y| of Z can be extended to a character of G. Then there exists a constant d(x) > 0 such that the following identity QD Soe <1, CB)“ v1 Cay m(B)- v2) dz = d(x) Cy, V2) Ce, 4 holds for vy, v2 in V and 6, ¥2 in V.122 P. CARTIER The assumption about y is satisfied if y is unitary or else if G is a connected reductive algebraic group over a local field, The number d(z) is called the formal degree of m. It depends on the choice of the Haar measure on G/Z. Indeed, multiplying the Haar measure by a constant ¢ > 0 amounts to replacing d(z) by d(z)/c. More invariantly, to z is associated a Haar measure », on G/Z such that (22) Sos Pty (8) VEY Pay @(B1) V2) de® = Pry Vo>< Fey 1d holds for v;, vg in V and %, #2 in V. We denote by d,g the integration w.r.t. v,. If Kis a compact open subgroup of G/Z, the number »,(K) is well defined and may be called the formal degree of z w.r.t. K. For instance assume that z is induced from a finite-dimensional representation J of K. Then ¥,(K) is the degree of 2. Theorem I.1 has a number of interesting corollaries. Generally speaking, let (x, V) be any admissible irreducible y-representation of G. For any linear map u:V — V, the following conditions are equivalent: (a) There exists a function fin #,(G) such that « = 2(f) holds. (b) There exists a compact open subgroup K of G such that w = x(Ke)-w-m(k’) holds for k, k’ in K. (c) There exist vectors vy, +, vq in V and linear forms i, +, 3, in 7 such that (23) 40) = De Gp Yom holds for any v in V. The set “(z) of all such operators is a subalgebra of the al- gebra of all linear operators in V. Assume now that z is absolutely cuspidal. Denote by f(z) the two-sided ideal in 9,(G) consisting of the functions f such that x(f) = 0. The vector subspace Aq) of (G) generated by the functions of the form g + <¥, x(g~!)-») is then a two-sided ideal in 9,(G) and 2 ,(G) is the direct sum of f(z) and 2€(z). Hence we get an isomorphism f+ 2(f) of the algebra «/(z) with the algebra (x). The inverse isomorphism is given by u ++ gx Where (24) PalB) = A(x): Te (ung) for g in G and w in $(z). Notice also that we have an isomorphism 6:V ® V +» Ya) given by (25) O0 @ ¥-v =, vey for y, v’ in V and ¥ in P. The three spaces V @ V, P(x) and (x) carry natural representations of G x G and the previous isomorphisms are equivariant w.r.t. these actions of G x G. Let 6, be the character of z. The projection A, of #,(G) onto.“(z) (a) is given by ALF) = gx.n.s; hence more explicitly” kernel “7 We abuse notation by treating @, as a function!REPRESENTATIONS OF p-ADIC GROUPS 123, (26) Ad(fV(a) a(n) Soe (xg Mf) dx for g in G and fin #,(G). To simplify assume that Z = {1}. Then we can rewrite formula (26) as a convolution (of a distribution and a compactly supported func- tion!) @7) Ad) = a(n) O%*f), where 8Y is the distribution on G deduced from 6, by the symmetry g ++ g-! of G. From the decomposition #,(G) = X(n) © «/(z) one deduces easily the fol- lowing theorem, due to Casselman [16]: ‘TuoREM 1.2. Let (x, V) be an irreducible absolutely cuspidal y-representation of G. Then V is projective in the category of nondegenerate 3 ,(G)-modules. ‘There are two important corollaries. Corotary 1.1. Any absolutely cuspidal z-representation of G is a direct sum of irreducible absolutely cuspidal y-representations, each counted with finite multi- plicity. The following is a converse of Schur’s lemma and follows immediately from Corollary 1.1 CoroLtary 1.2. Let (a, V) be any absolutely cuspidal y-representation of G. Assume every intertwining map u: V+ V is a scalar. Then z is irreducible. So far we considered one absolutely cuspidal representation at a time. We give now the second half of Schur’s orthogonality relations. ‘THEOREM 1.3. Assume (x, V) and (x’, V') are inequivalent absolutely cuspidal ycrepresentations of G. Then the following relation holds (28) Sue 8, a(g)-¥> i, alg-¥) dg = 0 whatever be vin V, v' in V', in V and ¥! in V', Let A be a complete set of mutually inequivalent irreducible absolutely cuspidal zctepresentations of G. From Theorem 1.3, it follows immediately that the sum of the two-sided ideals «/(x) (for running over A) is direct in 9#,(G). This sum is called the cuspidal part of #,(G) to be denoted by 2¢,(G)’. 1.7. Change of groups and Frobenius reciprocity. Let G and G’ be two groups of td-type and g a continuous homomorphism from G into G’. Denote by %¢ (Fo) the category of smooth representations of G (G’) The restriction functor g* from %q to Ye takes the smooth representation (z’, V') of G’ to the smooth representation (z, V) of G, where V= V' and (g) = z'(g(g)) for g in GS To define the extension functor py from /g to %q, we take the view that %¢ consists of the nondegenerate #(G)-modules and similarly for Yc. We consider 3(G’) both asa left 2¢(G’)-module in the obvious way and as a right #(G)-module If gis the injection of G into a larger group G’, we write Res?’ instead of g*.124 P. CARTIER as follows: for f’ in 9¢(G') and f in #(G), we define the convolution f”*, fas the function in 9¢(G’) whose values are given by 9) (f'* Ale) = fi F'(8- 98)) Ha) de(p(s)) as. We define now gy via tensor products. Indeed for any V in %, we put gaV = FG’) ®i@ V and define the action of 3¢(G’) on gy, V by the rule G0) Sr hO)= rer for fi, fo in @(G') and v in V. Let V be in %¢ and V’ in %¢,. Using the universal property of tensor products, we produce a canonical map (DD) @: Hom¢(V, g*V’) > Home(p,¥, V’) as follows: for u: V+ g*V’, the linear map 6(u) takes f” ® vinto f’-u(v) (f* in 2(G’), vin V). Frobenius reciprocity is the assertion that @ is an isomorphism. Unfortunately, as John Tate pointed out to me, this is not true in general due to the lack of unit elements in our rings. We have to introduce another functor g'. First of ail let us define the notion of a generalized vector in a representation space (x, V) for G. One defines in #(G) the translation operators by (32) LE, f(81) = f(g 81, Refs) = Als): M818) for g, g1 in G and fin #(G). The space V-" of generalized vectors consists of the linear maps u : #(G) + V such that uL, = m(g)u for every g in G. We identify any vector vin V to the generalized vector f+ x(f)-v. The representation x of G into Vis extended to V- by x-"(g)(u) = uR,-. It is easy to show that V consists, of the ‘smooth’ vectors in V—~, that is the generalized vectors u for which there exists a compact open subgroup K of G such that 2"(k)(u) = u for every k in K. ‘We apply this construction to a smooth representation (x’, V’) of G’. We get a representation (x’—~, V’-") of G’, hence a representation of G on the same space by the operators z’-(p(e)). One defines g'V’ as the set of smooth vectors for G in the space V’-~. It is clear that p*V’ is a subspace of g'V’ and the carrier of a sub- representation for G. Let (x, V) be a smooth representation of G. One establishes easily the following facts: (a) The map @ extends to an isomorphism @3) 6': Home(V, pV’) > HomeApeV, V')- Hence the functor g' from fg, to Fe is aright adjoint to py. By general functorial results it follows that py is a right exact functor and g! a left exact functor. (b) In order that @ be an isomorphism for every Vin Ze and every V' in Zen it is necessary and sufficient that y*V' = g V' for every V' in For. In order to get a counterexample to Frobenius reciprocity, it is enough to find a smooth representation (z’, V’) of G’ such that V'-~ # V" and to consider the group G = {1} since ! V’ = V'- in this case. Consider the left translations acting onREPRESENTATIONS OF p-ADIC GROUPS 125 2(G'). The identity map is a generalized vector in 3(G’)-* and is not of the form Sf fefo for a fixed fo in 2(G’) unless G' is discrete. Hence 2(G’) # #(G'* in this case. (©) Let g' be a continuous homomorphism from G' into another group G" of td-type. Then the functors $s 0 px and (y! « px from Fe to Pov are naturally isomorphic. This follows from the associativity of tensor products. Assume now that is open, that is g(U) is open in G’ for every open set U in G. Then, for any module V’ in Yc), a generalized vector in V’-* is smooth for G iff itis smooth for G’, that is belongs to V’. Hence one has g' V’ = g*V" and by prop- erty (b) above, Frobenius reciprocity holds. Let (x, V) be any smooth representation of G. We can describe more explicitly eV as follows. Let H be the kernel of g and let V(H) be the subspace of V gener- ated by the vectors a(/i)-v — v for h in H and v in V. Moreover, by Frobenius reciprocity, there is a G-homomorphism ¢: V + g*p.V such that 6(¢) is the identity map in pV. Finally, let {gz}. be a set of representatives for the cosets g’-p(G) in G" (notice that g(G) is open in G’) (@) With the previous notations, the kernel of the linear map ¢ from V into xV is equal to V(H) and p,V is the direct sum @qca%(g2)-¢(V) where 2! is the represen- tation of G' in p4V" deduced from its #¢(G’)-module structure. (©) Assume that the kernel H of g is the union of its open compact subgroups (for instance H is a unipotent algebraic group over a local field, or g is injective). Then the functor py is exact, For every compact open subgroup K of G, the operator (ex) (see §1.3, formula (6) is a projection of V onto the set V* of vectors invariant under K, with kernel V(K). Hence V = V¥ ® V(K). Under the assumptions made in (¢) one has YUH) = (J VOR) = (ker ater) where K runs over the compact open subgroups of H. Hence, for every G-invariant subspace W of V, one gets W(H) = W 1) V(H), hence the exactness of p,. There are two special instances of the previous results, Assume first that G is an open subgroup of G' and @ is the injection of G into G’. Then we can identify V to its image by c in p,V and then 9.V = Baca 2'(g.) - V. Assume now that ¢(G) = G’. Then g defines an isomorphism of topological groups from G/H onto G’. Moreover, ¢ defines an isomorphism of the linear space Vy = V/V(H) onto 9.V. 1.8. Induced representations. In this section, we denote by Ga group of td-type and by Ha closed subgroup of G. Let (z, V) be a smooth representation of H. We denote by ¥”, the space of fune- tions f : G + V satisfying the following assumptions: (a) One has fg) = x(h)-f(g) for h in H and g in G. (b) There exists a compact open subgroup K of G such that f(gk) = f(g) for g in G and k in K. The group G acts on ¥°, by right translations, namely G4) (0-(g)-f)(g1) = flgig) for g, 1 in G, fin vy, The representation (0, ¥,) of G is smooth. It is called the representation induced126 P. CARTIER from z and usually denoted by Indf x. One has a kind of dual Frobenius reciprocity, namely an isomorphism (35) 6* : Hom, (Resf 2, 2) + Hom,(a, Indf 2) for every smooth representation (2, W) of G. The proof is trivial. ‘The functions in ¥*, are locally constant, but assumption (b) is usually stronger than just local constancy. Denote by 7“ the subspace of ¥~, consisting of the func- tions which vanish off a subset of the form HQ where Q < G is compact. For g in G, the translation operator 0,(g) induces an operator 0%(g) in ¥¢. The repre- sentation (6, ¥“¢) is called the c-induced representation from x and is usually denoted by c-Indg x. If G/H is compact, there is no need to distinguish between ¥,and 7%, and c-Ind§ x = Indg x. The adjoint of a composite functor being the composite of the adjoints in reverse order, one deduces from Frobenius reciprocity the possibility of inducing by stage. Namely, if Z is a closed subgroup of #, there is a canonical isomorphism (36) Indf Ind’ 4A Indf a for any smooth representation (A, 1) of L. A similar property holds for the c-induced representations. Let g be the injection of H into G. We want to compare our functor p, to the induced representations. Define a character 6 of H by 5) (Hi) = A,(I/Ag(h) for hin H. If x is any character of H and (z, V) a smooth representation of H, the twisted representation (7 ® i, V) acts on the same space as z via the operators (36) (e® ph) = x(h) x(h) for hin H. TurorEM 1.4, Let H be a closed subgroup of G and » the injection of H into G. For every smooth representation (x, V) of H, $V is isomorphic to the c-induced representation c-Ind§(x ® 6-1). CoroLtary 1.3. The functor e-Ind§ from 7 y to Pe is exact. We know that pis right exact (see above, p. 124). It is clear that c-Indfy is a left exact functor, hence the corollary. ‘An explicit isomorphism P,: p.V — ¥-tas-1 is given as follows: G7) PAS ® vilg) = S, L(g hy 5H) a(h)-v dh for fin #(), v in V and gin G. IL. The structure of representations of p-adic reductive groups. 2.1. Properties of algebraic groups. We summarize here a few properties of al- gebraic groups. For a more complete exposition we refer the reader to the lectures by Springer [41] in these Proceepincs. As usual, Fis a local field. Let n 2 1 be an integer and let G be an algebraic subgroup of GL,(F). We say:REPRESENTATIONS OF p-ADIC GROUPS 127 G isunipotent if it consists of unipotent matrices (all eigenvalues in some algebraic closure of F equal to 1); Gis a torus if it is connected, commutative and any element of G can be put in diagonal form in some extension of F; Gis a split torus if itis a torus and the eigenvalues of every element of G belong toF; G isreductive if there exists no invariant connected unipotent algebraic subgroup of G with more than one element; Gis semisimple if itis reductive and its center is finite. A connected reductive algebraic group G is called split if there exists in G a maximal torus which is split. Then every maximal split torus in G is a maximal torus. From now on, we assume G is reductive and connected. Any split torus in G is contained in some maximal split torus of G. Any two maximal split tori in G are conjugate by an element of G, their common dimension is called the split rank of G. There exists in the center of G a largest split torus Z. We do not repeat the definitions of a parabolic subgroup of G, a Borel subgroup and a quasi-split group (see [41]). A parabolic pair (P, A) consists of a parabolic subgroup P of G and a split torus A subjected to the following assumption: If N is the unipotent radical of P (its largest unipotent invariant algebraic sub- group), there exists a connected reductive algebraic subgroup M of G such that P = M-N (semidirect product)? and A is the largest split torus contained in the center of M. Any parabolic subgroup P can be embedded into a parabolic pair. Given P, the split torus A is unique up to conjugation by an element of NV. Given (P, 4), the group M is the centralizer of A in G. One says the parabolic pair (P, A) dominates the parabolic pair (P’, A’) in case P > P’and A & A’ hold. There exists then a parabolic subgroup P; of M such that P' = P,-N and (P;, A’) isa parabolic pair in M. This result is used very often in proofs by induction on the dimension of G. 2.2. Jacquet’s functors. Let be given G, P, A, M and N as above. Define two homomorphisms \ /\ G M were ¢ is the injection of P into G and o(mn) = m for min M and n in N. The group P is thus a kind of link between the groups G and M, and will be used to define functors relating the categories of G-modules and M-modules. The first Jacquet’s functor is Jo.u = pat®: Zo > Pu. Let (x, V) be a smooth representation of G. Since c* is simply the restriction Res, the space of the repre- sentation J ¢,4 7 is Vy = V/V(N) where V(N) is generated as a vector space by the elements x(n)-v—v formin N and v in V. The representation of M on Vy is obtained from the restriction of z to M, which leaves V() invariant since M normalizes N. * The equation P = M-Nis called the Levi decomposition of P.128 P. CARTIER ‘TuroREM 2.1. Suppose (x, V) is an admissible finitely generated representation of G. Then Jo,sua, V) = (ty, Vy) is an admissible finitely generated representation of M. This theorem is a deep result essentially due to Jacquet [32] (see also [17]).. Corowtary 2.1. Assume G is quasi-split and P is a Borel subgroup of G. Then Vy is finite-dimensional. If G is quasi-split and P a Borel subgroup, M is a maximal torus in G, hence is commutative. It is then easy to check that any admissible finitely generated repre- sentation of M is finite-dimensional, hence the corollary. The second Jacquet's functor is Jy.g = Ind¥p*: %y > Ze. More explicitly, this functor takes a smooth representation (2, /) of M into (3, 7) where 7; is the space of functions f: G + W such that a Seng) = An)- fg) for g in G, min M and nin N. The group G acts via right translations, namely Q) (zg) Nev = f(eis) for g, g in Gand fin 7°. The following result follows easily from the compactness of G/P. THEOREM 2.2. Assume that (2, W) is an admissible finitely generated representation of M. Then (x7, ¥) is an admissible finitely generated representation of G. This construction is especially interesting when G is quasi-split and P is a Borel subgroup of G. We may take for (2, W) a one-dimensional representation corre- sponding to a character of the maximal torus M. The corresponding representa- tions of G comprise the principal series (see also S111). The Jacquet’s functors are exact by the results quoted in §§1.7 and 1.8. They are adjoint to each other, giving rise to a canonical isomorphism Homy(Je,4 V. W) > Homg(V, Jug W) for any smooth representation (2, W) of M and any smooth representation (x, V) of G. 2.3. The main theorems. Let G, P, A, M and N be as before. The parabolic pair (P,A) dominates a parabolic pair (P’, A’) where P'is a minimal parabolic subgroup of G; hence 4’ is a maximal split torus in G. Let © be the root system of G w.r-t A’ and A be the basis of @ associated to P’. There exists a subset 6 of 4 such that A is the largest torus contained in the intersection of the kernels of the elements of @ (we view the roots a in ® as homomorphisms from 4’ to F*). For any real num- ber ¢ > 0, let A~(c) consist of the elements a in A such that |a(a)| Se for every root a in 4\@. Moreover, let P be the parabolic subgroup of G opposite to P. The roots associated to P are the roots —a where a runs over the roots associated to P. Let N be the unipotent radical of P. Let now (x, V) be any admissible finitely generated representation of G. Let (z, 7) be the representation contragredient to (x, V). Using first Jacquet’s functor we get representations (ry, Vy) and (tg, Vg) of M.REPRESENTATIONS OF }-ADIC GROUPS 129 The following theorem is due to Casselman [17]. It plays a crucial role in the representation theory of reductive p-adic groups. THEOREM 2.3. There exists a unique M-invariant nondegenerate pairing ¢-.-)y between Vy and Vx with the following property: Given v in V and 9 in V, with canonical images u in Vy and it in Vy respectively, there exists a real number ¢ > 0 such that @) <¥, x(a): holds for every a in A-(e). Asa matter of fact, the previous pairing identifies (iy, Vy) to the representation of M contragredient to (zy, Vy). The following criterion is due to Jacquet [32] and results easily from Theorem 23. , tx(@)-0)y ‘THEOREM 2.4, Let (x, V) be any irreducible admissible representation of G. The following assertions are equivalent: ()) (x, V) is absolutely cuspidal. (2) For every parabolic subgroup P # G of G, with unipotent radical N, we have Vy = 0. Note that ‘absolutely cuspidal’ is with reference to the maximal split torus Z in the center Z(G) of G.10 An alternate formulation of Theorem 2.4 is as follows. Choose a character 7 of Z and recall that ¢,(G) is the subspace of #,(G) generated by the coefficients of the irreducible absolutely cuspidal y-representations of G. Then the following condi- tions are equivalent: (a) f belongs to 2G)"; (b) f belongs to 3G) and 6 J, fen an = 0 holds for g in G and every subgroup N as in Theorem 2.4, The next result is again due to Jacquet (32]. Its easily proved by induction on the split rank of G/Z. TutoreM 2.5. Let (x, V) be any irreducible admissible representation of G. There exist a parabolic pair (P, A) with associated Levi decomposition P = M-N and an irreducible absolutely cuspidal representation (A, W) of M such that x is isomorphic to a subrepresentation of Ind§: 2, (where dy is the extension of 2 to P = M-N given by Ax(onn) = X(mi)). In principle, the classification problem for irreducible adi of Gis split into two problem (a) Find all irreducible absolutely cuspidal representations for G and for the groups M which occur as centralizer of A for some parabolic pair (P, A) in G. ible representations 19 [ts well known that Z(G)/Z is a compact group. It makes no essential difference to take Z or Z(G) as central subgroup. The choice of Z is quite convenient however.130 P. CARTIER (b) Study the decomposition of the induced representations Ind A, as above, in particular look for irreducibility criteria. Needless to say, a general answer to these problems is not yet in sight. The con- struction of some absolutely cuspidal representations has been given by Shintani [40] for GL,(F) and in more general cases by Gérardin in his thesis [21]. The idea is to induce from some compact open subgroups. As to problem (b), let us mention the notion of associated parabolic subgroups. Two parabolic pairs (P, A) and (P’, A’) are associated iff A and 4’ are conjugate by some element in G. Let 7(P, A) be the set of irreducible admissible representa- tions of G which occur in a composition series of some induced representation Indg A where 2 is an irreducible absolutely cuspidal representation of M and M is the centralizer of Ain G. If (P, A) and (P’, A’) are associated, then 7(P, 4) = FPA). 24, Anexample. Take for instance the group G = GL,(F). For any (ordered) partition n =m + +m, of m, let P,.,,, consist of the matrices in block form g = (Gyhex,1

L Let Ayn, be the set of matrices which in block form are such that G,, = 0 for k # 1 and Gyy is a scalar matrix a-/,,. For M,,,..», take the matrices in diagonal block form, ie., Gy = 0 for k # Jand let finally N,,,...x, be the subgroup of Py,,...», defined by the conditions Gy = In. ***s Grr = Ty, THEN (Py, ynyr Anyyne) 18. para bolic pair, with associated Levi decomposition Py, ..n, = My osme*Niny-n:ne UP tO conjugation, the pairs (P,,...n+ Am, -.n,) Comprise all parabolic pairs in GL,(F). The pairs corresponding to partitions = my +--+, and n =m, += +m, are associated iffr = s and m, ~~, n, is a permutation of m, ---, m,. Notice that the group My,,..n, is isomorphic to GL,,(F) x «= x GL,(F). The well-known operation «0 on characters of the various finite groups GL,(q), introduced by Green [24], may now be generalized to the case of a local field. Namely, let 2 = n' +n", let (x’, V’) be an admissible representation of GL,(F) and (2”, V") an admissible representation of GL,-(F). Define a representation 2, of Py,» acting on the space V’ @ V” by a (OY Gi) = #0 @ "Gn. By induction from Py, to GL,(F) one gets a representation 2’ x" of GL,(F). This product is commutative and associative. In particular, given characters a, *-", ay of F* one gets a representation a; »--+o @, of GL,(F); these representations com- prise the principal series. Given a partition n = m, + --» + n,, the intermediate series associated to the parabolic group P,,,..,,, consists of the representations of the form m o--+e z, where x; is an irreducible absolutely cuspidal representation of GL,(F) for j= 1, ---,r. Finally the discrete series is the family of irreducible absolutely cuspidal representations of GL,(F). From the general results summarized in §2.3, one infers that any irreducible admissible representation of GL,(F) is contained in some representation of the form moron, wheren = m ++ +n, and x, belongsto the discrete series of GL,,(F). The question of the irreducibility of the representations x, »---o7, has now been completely settled by Bernshtein and Zhelevinski [3].REPRESENTATIONS OF y-ADIC GROUPS 131 2.5. Square-integrable representations. For the results expounded in this section, see Harish-Chandra and van Dijk (28, especially part I). Let again Z be the maximal split torus contained in the center of G. Fix a unitary character y of Z. We let 8G, 7) denote the (equivalence classes of) irreducible unitary representations (x, V) of G which satisfy the following two conditions: © (gz) = y(2)x(g) for z€Z,geG, a Sore lle) 0)8 de < + 0, Here (u|v) denotes the scalar product in the Hilbert space V.11 Due to assumption (6), one gets Gela(ez)-»)? = |(ulx(e)-»)|*s hence we can integrate over G/Z in formula (7). The integral (7) is equal to d(x) \u|2| |? where the constant d(z) > 0, the formal degree of z, is independent from w and y, These representations are called as usual square-integrable. Fix now a compact open subgroup K of G and a class of irreducible continuous representations of K. Every representation of class b acts on a space of finite dimen- sion, to be denoted by deg b. Moreover, for any unitary representation (x, V) of G, denote by (w: b) the multiplicity of bin the restriction of x to K. ‘The following theorem is easy to prove (see [28, p. 6)). ‘TneoREM 2.6. Given K, > and yas above, one gets @) By Me) (0) S deg d/meas(KUZ 1) K)) and in particular deg _ “d(x)-meas(K/(Z ) K)) ‘for every square-integrable irreducible representation x of G. e) (x:d) $ Let (x, V) be in &2(G, x). If is the unit representation of K, the integer (x: 9) is the dimension of the space V¥ of vectors in V invariant under x(K). Let V., = UxV* where K runs over the compact open subgroups of G. It is easy to check that V,, is dense in V and stable under 7(G). By the previous theorem we get an admissible z-representation (z., V..) of G. Moreover for any function fin 2#(G), the operator x(f) = Jcflg)x(g) dg in the Hilbert space V has a finite-dimensional range (contained in V¥ if f belongs to (G, K)), hence a trace 6,(f) = Tr(x(/)). To sum up, every square-integrable irreducible representation has a character Og, a distribution on G. 2.6. The fundamental estimate. Fix a parabolic pair (P, A) where P is a minimal parabolic subgroup of G; hence 4 is a maximal split torus in G. Let NV be the uni- potent radical of P and N the unipotent radical of the parabolic subgroup P op- © The scalar product (u|) is assumed to be linear in the second argument v.132 . CARTIER posite to P. Hence there exists a basis d of the root system of Gw.r.t. 4 such that N (resp. ) is associated the roots a with positive (resp. negative) coefficients when expressed in terms of 4. Let A~ be the set of elements a in A such that |a(a)|p <1 for every root a in A. ‘According to Bruhat and Tits [13], there exist a compact subgroup L of 4 and a finitely generated semigroup S in A such that A~ =ZLS. Moreover there exist finitely many elements gy, ---, g» in G and a compact open subgroup Ky of G such that G = Jism Ko SZgKo (‘Cartan decomposition’). Let K’be a compact open subgroup of G. We make the following assum (@) Kis invariant in Ko; (b) one has K = (K () P)-(K (| §) and w(K Mack N, aK Pato KAP for every a in S (hence the inner automorphism g ++ aga“! of G expands K ) N and contracts K () P). It is known that every neighborhood of the unit element in G contains such a subgroup K. The following estimate is due to Bernshtein [1]. ‘TueoReM 2.7. The compact open subgroup K of G is as above. Then there exists a constant N = N(G, K) > 0 such that every simple module over #€(G, K) either is infinite-dimensional (over C) or else has a dimension bounded by N. Let z be a unitary character of Z and »;,(G, K)° be the subalgebra of 3#,(G)° consisting of the functions invariant under right and left translation by an element of K. If (z, V) is an irreducible absolutely cuspidal y-representation of G, then VX is a simple module over #(G, K); hence dim VS < N by Theorem 2.7. By a well- known argument due to Godement [23], one infers from this bound the following corollary: CoroxLary 2.2. There is an integer p 2 2 such that the higher commutator (10) Un Sl = Dosen fea Sow oS, vanishes for arbitrary elements f,, ---,f/p in 30(G, K)°. 2.1. Properties of unitary representations. In his lectures 28], Harish-Chandra was unable to prove Corollary 2.2, and had to assume it!® in order to establish the following result: THeoREM 2.8. Let K be a compact open subgroup of G and d be a class of irredu- cible continuous representations of K. There exists a constant N = NG, K,») > 0 such that (x: d) S N for every irreducible unitary representation (x, V) of G. In the proof, one may assume that Kis as in Bernshtein’s Theorem 2.7 and that bis the unit class of representations of K.12 ‘As before (see end of §2.5), one deduces from Theorem 2.8 the following corol- laries: ¥ Harish-Chandra assumes apparently the stronger ‘Conjecture 1° (p. 16 of [28)). But the proof (p. 18, end of first paragraph) uses only Corollary 2.2 above.REPRESENTATIONS OF p-ADIC GROUPS 133, CoROLLaRy 2.3. Let (zr, V) be any irreducible unitary representation of G. Let V. be the space of vectors in V stable by x(K) for some compact open subgroup K of G. Then V., is dense in V and stable under G, hence affords a smooth representation 7 of G. The representation (a, V..) is admissible. CoroLtary 2.4. Let (x, V) be any irreducible unitary representation of G. For any function f in 2G) the operator x(f) = Jaflg)x(g) dg in V has a finite-dimensional range, hence a trace @,(f). The distribution @, is called the character of x. Byaneasy limiting process one deduces from Corollary 2.4 that x(f) is a compact (= completely continuous) operator in the Hilbert space V for every integrable function fon G. Hence the group G belongs to the category CCR of Kaplansky. In particular (see Dixmier [19]) every factor unitary representation of G is a multiple of an irreducible representation, there exists a Plancherel formula, ... . 2.8. Some other results. Much more is now known about the characters of the irreducible unitary representations of G. The character 6, is for instance repre- sented by a locally integrable function on G, which is locally constant on the set of regular elements (see Harish-Chandra [26] and my Bourbaki report [14)). Moreover it is now known that Conjecture II in Harish-Chandra’s lectures holds true. More precisely, if the Haar measure on G/Z.is suitably normalized, the formal degree of any irreducible absolutely cuspidal representation of G is an integer. As a corollary (see (28, part III}), the algebra 32,(G, K)° is finite-dimensional and its dimension is bounded by a constant depending on G and X, but not on x. Also for any character y of Z, any compact open subgroup K of G and any class b of irredu- cible continuous representations of K, there exist only finitely many irreducible absolutely cuspidal representations x of G such that w, = x and (w:d) # 0. Let (x, V) be a smooth representation of G. We say (re, V) is preunitary if there exists a hermitian form on V such that (y, v) > Ofory # Oin Vand ay O(a(g)-v, x(g)-v') = (>, ¥’) for v, vin Vand g in G, Wecan then complete V to a Hilbert space 7 and extend by continuity x(g) to a unitary operator #(g) in P. Then (é, 7) isa unitary representa tion of G. If (x, V) is admissible, V is exactly the set of smooth vectors in V, that is = Ux?* where K runs over the compact open subgroups in G. It follows from Theorem 2.8 and these remarks that the classification of the ir- reducible unitary representations of G amounts to the search of the preunitary repre- Sentations among the irreducible admissible representations of G. III. Unramified principal series of representations. 3.1. Preliminaries about tori. For this section only, we denote by k a (com- mutative) infinite field. Let G,, be the multiplicative group in one variable, considered as an algebraic group defined over k. To a connected algebraic group H defined over k, we associate two finitely generated free Z-modules, namely X*(H) = Homg(H, Gy), X¢(H) = Hom,(X*(H), Z). In these formulas, Hom,g, (resp. Hom) means the group of homomorphisms of algebraic groups defined over k (resp. of Z-modules). We denote by = ord, (2(H)) for hin H and Ain X*(H). In the right-hand side of this formula, ord, (A(h) is the valuation of the element 4(f) of F. We denote by °H the kernel and by A (H) the image of the homomorphism ordy. By construction, one gets an exact sequence (Ss) 1—°H — H 2, AH) — 1 We can also describe °H as the set of elements / in H such that A(h) « Of for any rational homomorphism A from H into F*. Therefore °H is an open subgroup of H. A character z of His called unramified if itis trivial on °H. Otherwise stated, an unramified character is of the form u » ord), where u is a homomorphism from A(H) into C*. Introduce the complex algebraic torus 7 = Spec C[A(H)]. By definition, one has A(H) = X*(T) and T(C) = Hom(A(H), C*). Thus, there exists a well- defined isomorphism 1 ++ 7, between the group T(C) of complex points of the torus T and the group of unramified characters of H. If H is a torus, one has @ wer) = GO) for tin T(C), pin X*(H) = X(T) and any prime element @¢ of the field F. Let again G be a connected reductive algebraic group defined over the local field F. We fix a maximal split torus A in G and denote by M its centralizer in G, We let M(A) be the normalizer of A in G and W = N(A)/M be the corresponding Weyl group. We choose also a parabolic group P such that (P, A) is a parabolic pair. Hence P is a minimal parabolic subgroup of G and P = M-N where N is the uni- potent radical of P. We denote by @ the set of roots of G w.r.t. A and by A the group A(M). Hence is a subset of X*(4) and P defines a basis 4 of ®. Let d~ be the set of roots opposite to the roots in 4. The basis d~ of ® corresponds to a parabolic subgroupREPRESENTATIONS OF p-ADIC GROUPS 135 = M-N>of G. Let be the Lie algebra of NV. For any m in M, the adjoint re- presentation defines an automorphism Ad,(m) of n. We set @ G(m) = |det Ad,(m)|p for m in M. The group °A (resp. °) is the largest compact subgroup of A (resp. M) and °A is equal to°M 1) A. Thus the inclusion of A into M gives rise to an injective homo- morphism of 4/°A into M/°M. We do not know in general if this map is surjective (see however Borel [5, 9.5]). More precisely, the inclusion of A into M gives rise toa commutative diagram with exact lines 1—5°A — 5 A284, (4) — 1 (Dy | 1—°M —> Ms, A Indeed, since A is a split torus, ord, is surjective. The inclusion of A into M enables us to identify X,(4) to a subgroup of finite index in X,(M), hence the relation X4(A) Ac X(M). We denote by X the group of unramified characters of M. We may (and shall) introduce as before a complex torus T such that X*(T) = A and an isomorphism 1+ y, of T(C) onto X. This isomorphism enables us to consider X as a complex Lie group. The subgroup N(A) of Gacts on M,°M, 4, °A via inner automorphisms. Using diagram (D) above, we may let the Weyl group W = N(A)/M operate on X,(M) so as to leave invariant the subgroups X 4(4) and A of X,(M). The group W acts there- fore on X and T by automorphisms of complex Lie groups. For instance, ify is any unramified character of M and w any element of the Weyl group WV, the trans- formed character wy is given by M, 6) wpm) = xOqmx,) for where x, is any representative of w in N(4). The unramified character y of M is called regular if wz, # y for every element w # 1 of W. For the applications to automorphic functions, one has to examine the case where G is unramified over F, that is the following hypotheses are fulfilled: (a) G is quasi-split over F. (b) There exists an unramified extension F’ of F, of finite degree d, such that G splits over F’. Let ¢ denote the Frobenius transformation of F’ over F. In this situation, the L-group associated to G is defined. It is a complex connected reductive algebraic group 4G° endowed (at least) with a complex torus 7’, an automorphism g’ ++ g’? such that 7’ = T’ andahomomorphism t’ + y;,of T’ onto X. We say two elements g.and g3 of 4G? are o-conjugate if there exists h in 4G” such that gz = hr! gi The following theorem has been proved by Gantmacher [20] and Langlands [35]. ‘TueoreM 3.1. (a) Any semisimple element in 4G? is a-conjugate to an element of T’136 P. CARTIER (b) Two elements ¢; and tof T’ are o-conjugate iff the unramified characters. and {p, of M are conjugate under the action of the Weyl group W. Otherwise stated, the orbits of W in the group X of unramified characters of M are in a bijective correspondence to the o-conjugacy classes of semisimple elements in 4G’. For more details, we refer the reader to Borel’s lectures [5, §6, 9.5] in these PRo- ‘CEEDINGS. 3.3. The unramified principal series. This series shall presently be defined via in- duction from P with the slight adjustment of 41/2, DEFINITION 3.1. Let z in X be any unramified character of M. We define the re- presentation (v,, I(y)) of G as follows: (a) The space I(y) consists of the locally constant functions f: G+ C such that © S (ming) = 5(m)/? y(m)f(g) for min M, nin N, ginG. (b) The group G acts by right translations on I(y), namely a (a) Se) = S(e'8) for fin IY), 8, 8° in G. It is important to give an alternate description of I(y) as a factor space of #(G). Indeed one defines a surjective linear map P, : 2¢(G) > I(y) by ®) Pe fle) = JF, ome fone) dnd. (See formula (37) in §1.8.) The groups M and N are unimodular, hence the Haar measures dm on M and dn on N are left and right invariant. The map P, intertwines the right translations on 2£(G) with the representation v, acting on the space I(). From the general results described in §I1, one gets immediately the following theorem, ‘TaroreM 3.2. (a) For every x in X, the representation (v,, I(z)) of G is admissible. (b) The representation H(y-) is isomorphic to the contragredient (I(y))~ of Ky). (© If is a unitary unramified character of M, the representation (vy, I(y)) of G is preunitary. One of the reasons for inserting the factor 6/2 in the definition of 1(z) is to get assertions (b) and (c) above. We state them more precisely: there exists a linear form J on J(61) invariant under the right translations by the elements of G and characterized by ° Pont) = § Ae) de for fin (6) (see Bourbaki [6, p. 41] for similar calculations). For fin H(z) and fin 1(7-*), the function ff” belongs to 1(61/2) and the pairing is given by (10) LL = IU’). Similarly, for y unitary and f,, f in I(x) the function f, f belongs to 1(61/2) and the unitary scalar product in I(z) is given by (ay (Alf) = Wh fo:REPRESENTATIONS OF prADIC GROUPS 137 ‘We now state one of the main results about irreducibility and equivalence (see also Theorem 3.10 below). THtoReM 3.3. Let x be any unramified character of M. (a) If x is unitary and regular, the representation (Yq, I(q)) is irreducible. (b) Let w be in W. The representations (ry, I(y)) and (Ym K(w,z)) have the same character, hence are equivalent if they are irreducible. (©) The #¢(G)-module I(y) is of finite length. In general, if V is a module of finite length over any ring, with a Jordan- Hilder series 0 = Vg c Vy c--< Vy. © V, = V, the semisimple module V;.,) = ti VilV;-1 is called the semisimplified form of V. According to Jordan-Hélder theorem, it is uniquely defined by V up to isomorphism. Let I()<» be the semisimplified form of /(,). It exists by Theorem 3.3(c) above. Itis clear that A(z) and 1(7).») have the same character. Hence for any w in W, the representations I(z), and (wy), are semisimple and have the same character. By the linear independence of characters, they are therefore isomorphic. 3.4, Structure of Jacquet’s module Ky)y. For any unramified character y of M, let C, denote the one-dimensional complex space C! on which M acts via z, viz. by (mm, 2) = y(m)-z, Frobenius reciprocity takes here a simple form, namely (see §2.2): TueoreM 3.4. Let (x, V) be any smooth representation of G. For any unramified character x of M, one gets an isomorphism Home(V, I(z)) “» Homy(V x, Cxair)- The proof is obvious. Indeed the relation (12) Dv) (g) = (for g in G, vin V) expresses an isomorphism @ + p of Homa(V, 1(z)) with the space of linear forms y on V such that (13) gy, ann) - vy = 81/2 (m)y(m) Cp, ¥> for vin V, min Mand nin N. Recall that Vy = VIV(N) where V(W) is generated by the vectors 2(n)-— v for nin N and vin V. Any solution g of (13) vanishes on V(N), hence factors through Vy. The previous theorem exemplifies the relevance of Jacquet’s module 1(z)y in the study of the intertwining operators between representations of the unramified principal series. We know by Theorems 2.1, 3.2 and 3.3(c) that I(y)y is a finite- dimensional complex vector space. The following basic result is due to Casselman (17] TutoReM 3.5. For any unramified character of M, the semisimplified form of the M-module I(y)y is @wew Ctwy-av%- Moreover, the group ° M acts trivially on Mow. COROLLARY 3.1. The dimension of Ky) over C is equal to the order |W| of the Weyl group W. COROLLARY 3.2. Assume x regular. Then I(y)y as an M-module is isomorphic to Bwew Cows138 P. CARTIER For the proof of Corollary 3.2, notice that M acts on I(y)y through the commu- tative group M/°M isomorphic to A. By Schur’s lemma, the semisimplified form of I(y)y is therefore of the form @j-, C;, for some sequence of unramified characters 1, --, z, of M; by a well-known lemma, each representation C,, occurs as a subrepresentation of M(z)y. Hence for w in W, Cgp siz Occurs as a subrepre- sentation of I(z)y by Theorem 3.5. Corollary 3.2 follows at once from this remark as well as the following corollary (use Frobenius reciprocity in the form of Theorem 3.4): Conowtary 3.3. Let z be any unramified character of M and w be any element of the Weyl group W. There exists a nonzero intertwining operator T..: H(z) —> Iw). If is regular this operator T,, is unique up to a scalar. A similar argument shows that if (x, V) is an irreducible subquotient of 1(y), then there exists we W such that (z, V) is isomorphic to a subrepresentation of Hw-7) (see 6.3.9 in [17)). We shall describe more explicitly the operators 7, in §3.7. We sketch now a proof of Theorem 3.5, a streamlined version of Casselman’s proof of more general results in [17]. Basically, it is Mackey's double coset tech- nique extended from finite groups to p-adic groups. The case of real Lie groups has been considered by Bruhat in his thesis [7] it is much more elaborate. (A) We remind the reader of Bruhat’s decomposition G = |)» PwP, where PwP means PgP for any g in N(A) representing the element w in W = N(A)/M. For win W, the set PwP is irreducible and locally closed in the Zariski topology, hence has a well-defined dimension. Set d(w) = dim(PwP) — dim(P). For any integer r 2 0, let F, be the union of the double cosets PwP such that d(w) < r. The Zariski closure of any double coset PwP is a union of double cosets Pw'P of smaller dimension, hence F, is Zariski closed, hence closed in the p-adic topology. We let I, be the subspace of /(y) consisting of the functions vanishing identically on F,. We have then a decreasing filtration (14) IQ =h2ho- 21 2%y> of (y) by P-stable subspaces. (B) The next step is to prove that any function on Fx which satisfies the relation (1s) S(mng) = 6'/%m)y(m) f(g) for min M, nin N, g in 41 is the restriction of some function belonging to I(z). Indeed, one proves easily (using local cross-sections of G fibered over P\G) that such a function is of the form Fig) = ff, 8%¢my-A0nyplonng) am dr for a suitable locally constant and compactly supported function g on F,.1. Extend ¢ to a function g' in 2¢(G). Then Pyp' belongs to I(y) and restricts to f in Fru (©) From this it follows that J,//,,1 is the space of functions fon F,,, which satisfy the following conditions: (a) f is locally constant; (b) f vanishes on F,;REPRESENTATIONS OF }+ADIC GROUPS 139 (©) relation (15). Moreover, F,,; is the union of F, and the various double cosets PwP such that d(w) = r, which are open in F,..; hence one gets an isomorphism (16) Tl = @ Sou aaser Here J, is the space of functions fon PwP such that S(mng) = 5/(m)y(m) f(g) for min M, nin N,g in PwP, and which vanish outside a set of the form PQ where is compact. Since Jacquet’s functor V = Vy is exact, one infers from (16) that the 2(M)-modules I(j)y and ®vow(Ju)w have isomorphic semisimplified forms. (D) It remains to identify the representation of M on the space (J,)y. Here we are paid off the dividends of our approach to induced representations via tensor products. Choose a representative x, of win N(A) and put P(w) = P (| x;1Px,; hence P(w) = M-N(w) with a suitable subgroup N(W) of N. It is then easy to show that, as a P-module, J, carries the representation c-Indf,,) 0, where the character 0, of P(w) is defined by ay a,(mn) = w-G1/2x) (m) for min M, nin Nw). Consider the group homomorphisms P(w)-+ P-8, M where a is the injection and B (mn) = mform in M and nin N. By Theorem 1.4, one gets ¢-Indf iq) oy = as(ou-d,) Where the character 5, of P(w) is defined by (18) 6.(P) = Apw(P)/4e(p) for p in P(w). Since g* is Jacquet’s functor V => Vy and By oa = (8° a) one gets that (J,.)y is the carrier of the representation (§ » a)q(24°5,). Since 6 is the projection of P(w) onto M with kernel N(w) and the characters g,, and 4, are trivial on N(w) one gets an isomorphism (J,)y ~ C, where A=0,5,|M. It remains to prove the formula (see formula (24,) below) 5;!1M = !/2(w-14)-1/2 to be able to conclude (19) Gow = Coop an (E) From (C) and (D) above, we know that I(y)y and yew Ciap.ae have isomorphic semisimplified forms. It remains to show that °M acts trivially on I(y)y. But °M is a compact subgroup of M. Hence its action on I(z)y and its semisimpli- fied form are equivalent. Since any unramified character of M (including 6) is trivial on °M, this group acts trivially on the semisimplified form of 1(y)y, hence on Mw. This concludes our proof of Theorem 3.5. 3.5. Buildings and Iwahori subgroups. Our aim in this section is mainly to fix notations. For more details, we refer the reader to the lectures by Tits in these PROCEEDINGS [42] or to the book by Bruhat and Tits (13). Let @ be the building associated to G and let «/ be the apartment in associated to the split torus A. We choose once for all a special vertex x in /. Among the conical chambers in ./ with apex at xp there is a unique one, @ say, enjoying the following property: for every n in NY, the intersection @ () @ contains a translate140 P. CARTIER of @. There is then a unique chamber C contained in @ having x5 for one of its, vertices (see Figure 1). The stabilizer of xy in G shall be denoted by K; it is called by Bruhat and Tits a special, good, maximal compact subgroup of G. The interior points of Call have the same stabilizer Bin G, called the Iwahori subgroup of G attached to fe} Ficure 1 Any element g in N(A) takes the apartment wf to itself, it fixes every point of o/ iff it belongs to °M. We may therefore identify the group W, = N(A)/°M, called the modified Weyl group, to a group of affine linear transformationsin «/. The group W, can be represented in two different ways as a semidirect product: (a) Let @ be the subgroup of 17; consisting of the w’s taking the chamber C to itself. The walls in «/ are certain hyperplanes and to each of them is associated a certain reflection. These reflections generate the invariant subgroup Ws, of Wi. Since W,; acts simply transitively on the set of chambers contained in /, the group W, is the semidirect product Q - Wa (b) Any element w of W has a representative a(w) in K () N(4) and °M = K 1) M. We may therefore identify the Weyl group W = N(A)/M to the stabilizer (K 1). N(A)(K 0) M) of x9 in W. The intersection of W; with the group of transla- tions in sf is MI°M which we identify to A by means of the exact sequence (D), p. 135. Then I; is the semidirect product W-A where Ais an invariant subgroup. The fundamental structure theorems may now be formulated as follows. IWASAWA DECOMPOSITION. G = PK and, more precisely, G is the disjoint union of the sets Pa(w)B for w running over the Weyl group W. BRUHAT-TITS DECOMPOSITION. G is the disjoint union of the sets Bw,B for w, running over the modified Weyl group W,. CARTAN DECOMPOSITION. Let A~ be the subset of A consisting of the elements of A taking the conical chamber &~ of sf opposite 10 © into itself. Then G is the disjoint union of the sets K-ordy}(A)-K for A running over A. IWAHORI DECOMPOSITION. B = (B (| N~)-(B 1) M)-(B 1) N) (unique factoriza- tion). Moreover one has B() M = °M and mB) Nm cB N, mB Nmc BN for any m in M such that ordy(m) € A~ As before, we denote by ® the system of roots of G w.r.t. A. We identify the ele- ments of @ to affine linear functions on .«/ in such a way that a(xo + 2) = <2, a)REPRESENTATIONS OF prADIC GROUPS 141 for «in and A in A. The conical chamber ¢ is then defined as the set of points x in . such that a(x) > 0 for every root a in the basis of @ associated to the para- bolic group P. We denote by %» the set of affine linear functions @ on w/, vanishing at xp and such that the hyperplane a~1() is a wall in / iff the real number r is an integer. An affine root is a function on «/ of the form « + k where a belongs to p and k is an integer; their set is denoted by ®,;. For any affine root a, the reflection in the wall (0) is denoted by S,. The reflections S, for a running over $y (resp. 04) generate the group W (resp. W,;). For a in Gp, there exists a unique vector f, in A such that (20) Sel) = x = a(3)-tq for any xin of. We denote by a, any element in M such that f, = ordy(a,). The set 0; is obtained by adjoining to p the set of functions a/2 for a in By such that (Ba(S,)B: B) # Sag)”. The sets 0, by and , are root systems in the customary sense (sce for instance 37, p. 14 sqq.]). When the group G is split, the sets 0, > and , are identical. In the nonsplit case, all we can assert is that, for any a in, there exists a unique root Ha) in Gp proportional to a, and that any element of the reduced root system is of the form A(a) for a suitable « in ®. Let w, be any element of 17, Since »; is a coset modulo the subgroup °M of B the set Bw, is a double coset modulo B. We put an 4(w) = (Bw,B: B). Since K = BWB, one gets (22) (K: B) = Yaw). Let 4; be the set of affine roots in / which are positive on the chamber C and whose null set is a wall of C. The group W; is generated by @ and the reflections 5, for a in dy. The value of q(1) is given by (23) 901) = GSx) °° TSaq) where w, = @S,,-S,, is a decomposition of minimal length m (@ in Q, a, + Gy it Ah). To each root f in ®, is associated a real number gp > 0. This association is characterized by the following set of properties 024) Ges = 4p for Bin ®, and w in W, (24) a) = Th am pemepen (249) a(n) =U] gp%*9 for m in a. 28 In the previous formulas f is a variable element in 0, and the notation 3 > 0 means that 6 takes only positive values on @. We make the convention that 4a/2 = 1 for in Gp if a/2 does not belong to ;. Two corollaries of the previous relations are worth mentioning (243) Se) Galas»142 P. CARTIER (24,) Bla.) = da? dais for any a > 0 in Op. When G is split, gp is equal to the order q of the residue field Oplpy for any root Bind = % = The structure of the Hecke algebra 2#(G, B) has been described by Iwahori and Matsumoto [30], (31). THEOREM 3.6. For w in W, let C(w,) be the characteristic function of the double coset BwyB. (a) The family {C(W,)} aycw, i8 a basis of the complex vector space #(G, B)(Bruhat- Tits decomposition!). (b) Let w, be any element of W, and let Sqy*"Suy, (0 in Q, ety, °*%5 yt Ay) be a decomposition of w, of minimal length m. Then 25) C6) = C(W)C(Sq,)-C(Sa,): (© For each a in Ay, one has (26) (C(Sa) =1)-(ClSz) + 9S.) = where q(Sq) has been defined by formula (21) above. (@) a and 8 are distinct elements in Ay, there exists an integer tiga = 2 such that C(Sa)CCSIC(Sa)--> = CCSAC(Se)C(Sp)-- Mag factors Mga factors Q7) Moreover the relations (26) and (27) are a complete set of relations among the C(Sq)'s. 3.6. Action of the Iwahori subgroups on the representations. Here is the main result, due to Casselman [18] and Borel [4] THEOREM 3.7. Let (x, V) be any admissible representation of G. The natural projection of V onto Vy, defines an isomorphism of V® onto (Vy)™. One proves first that V® maps onto (Vy)°™ using Iwahori decomposition of B and the methods used in the proof of Theorem 2.3. There are some simplifications due to the fact that P is a minimal parabolic subgroup of G. To prove that V? maps injectively in (Vy), one first proves that, for any given vector v in V(N) () V, there exists a real number e > 0 such that x(C(a))-v = 0 for every a in A satisfying |a(a)|» $ ¢ whenever the root a € @ is positive on P. But this relation implies v = 0 by Theorem 3.6, since one has q(S,) > 0 there. CoROLLARY 3.4. Given any unramified character 7, of M, one has a direct sum decomposition I(y) = Hy)® ® KyMN). This follows from Theorem 3.7 since °M acts trivially on I(z)y. A direct proof can also be obtained using the methods used in the proof of Theorem 3.5. Using the decomposition of G into the pairwise disjoint open subsets Pa(w)B (win W), one gets easily a basis for 1(z)®. Indeed, ow) normalizes Mand B (| M = °M lies in the kernel of y61/2, Hence the following function is well defined on G 8) Buxlt) = BAenatn) ig = mma, if g ¢ Po(w)B.REPRESENTATIONS OF )-ADIC GROUPS 143 The family (.,,Jeew is the sought-for basis The next result is due to Casselman [18] (see also Borel (4)). ‘THEOREM 3.8. Let (x, V) be any admissible irreducible representation of G. The following assertions are equivalent: (a) There are in V nonzero vectors invariant under B (that is V8 # 0). (b) There exists some unramified character x of M such that (x, V) is isomorphic to a subrepresentation of (24, I(p)) By Theorem 3.7, assertion (a) means that (Vy) # 0. By Frobenius reciprocity (Theorem 3.4), assertion (b) means that there exists in the space dual to Vy a non- zero vector invariant under °M which is an eigenvector for the group M. Since °M iscompact, acts continuously on Vy and M/°M is commutative, the equivalence follows immediately. ConoLLaRy 3.5. Let x be any unramified character of M. The space I(y)® generates I(p) as a G-module. We prove Corollary 3.5 by reductio ad absurdum. Assume that 1(;)® does not generate I(z). Since I(y) is finitely generated, there exist an irreducible admissible representation (z, V) of G and a G-homomorphism u: 1() + V which is nonzero and contains J(z)? in its kernel. Since B is compact, one gets V3 = u(I(y)®) = 0. By duality, one gets an injective G-homomorphism a: 7 — (I(y)). Since (I(y)) is isomorphic to (7) by Theorem 3.2, it follows from Theorem 3.8 that 73 # 0, But the finite-dimensional spaces V and 7 are dual to each other and this is clearly impossible. 3.1. Intertwining operators. In this section, we assume the unramified character 1,10 be regular, that is the characters wz, for w running over W, are al distinct. Corollary 3.2 may be reformulated as follows: given w in W, there exists a linear form L,, # 0 on I(y), such that (29) Lorn) f) = Bmw) L(P) for min M, nin N and f in I(z), unique up to multiplication by a constant. We normalize L,, by (0) Li =f for a function f whose support does not meet F, (r = d(w7})). The Haar measure is chosen in such a way that N(w)\N(w)-(N [) B) be of measure 1. To L, we associate an intertwining operator T,: I(z) ~ I(wy) defined by Gl) Tof(g) = Ly(e(g)f) for fin Hy) and g in G. It is easily checked that L,, hence 7,, depends only on w, not on the representative (w) for w. Since G = PK (Iwasawa decomposition) and the character 4" of M is trivial on M () K = °M, there exists in 1(y) a unique function x.y invariant under K and normalized by ®x,,(1) = 1. Explicitly, one has reo we 10") at (32) Dx.,(mnk) = 6% m)y(m) for m in M, nin N and k in K.144 P. CARTIER If the Haar measures on M and N are normalized by Synx dm = Syox da = 1, one may also define Ox, as P,(Zx) where P, is defined as on p. 136 and Ix is the characteristic function of K. The space 1(z)* consists of the constant multiples Of Dye The next theorem again is due to Casselman [18]. ‘TutoREM 3.9. The operator T,, takes I()* into I(wy)K. More precisely, one has 3) TSO x.y) = CY) Pr.wy> where the constant c,(y) is defined by G4) Cul) = tl Cal Q)> = (= u@a))(1 + Ga? 4(4e)) (5) eg) = a a) The product in (34) is extended over the affine roots «sin y which are positive over ©, but such that wa is negative over @. When G is split, formula (35) takes the simpler form Vag xls) | 1 yla) The bulk of the proof of Theorem 3.9 rests with the case where w is the reflection associated to a simple root £ in @y. In this case, there exists exactly one positive root ain Mp taken by w into a negative root, namely « = 8. The general case follows then since T,,., is equal to T,,T,, when the lengths of w; and w, add to the length of wy. 36) cal) CorOLLaRy 3.6. The intertwining map T, is an isomorphism from I(z) onto (wy) if xy) and ¢,-s(w) are nonzero. Indeed T,,-:T, is multiplication by ¢y()¢w-(wz) by Theorem 3.9. One may strengthen the irreducibility criterion (Theorem 3.3). THEOREM 3.10. Assume zis any unramified regular character of M. Then the re- presentation (v,, I()) of G is irreducible iff ¢alz) # 0, ¢a(Wox) # Ofor every positive root « in Dp positive over @, where wo is the unique element in W which takes € into os IV. Spherical functions. 4.1, Some integration formulas. We keep the notation of the previous part. If is any of the groups G, M, N, K, then /"is unimodular. We normalize the (left and right invariant) Haar measure on J’ by {rox dy = 1. The group P= M-N is not unimodular. One checks immediately that the formulas « fr din = J, §,, fond dim dn, @) f fp) dip = fi. fu fam) dm dr define a left invariant Haar measure d,p and a right invariant Haar measureREPRESENTATIONS OF prADIC GROUPS 145 d,p on P. Since °M = M () Kis the largest compact subgroup of M, one gets (P 1) K) = (M 1) K)-(N 0) K), hence the normalization ® Sone 4? ~ Sina? = The Haar measures are related to the Iwasawa decomposition by the formulas ® f,ferde = ff Mb ak ap, © ff) 4e = ff FG) aap for f in C.(G). Let us prove for instance formula (4). One defines a linear map hvu from C(K x P) into C.G) by the rule 6 ws(@k-A) = Fn pr) ci The linear form h + J u4(g) dg on C.(K x P) is then a left invariant Haar measure on K x P; hence by our normalizations, one gets a fi, nterde = ff Mi, v) tk dip. It suffices to substitute f(pk-) for h(k, p) in formulas (6) and (7) to get formula (4)! From the definition of 6 (see p. 135), one gets @) fu flrnnm-) da = 5m)? f, f(r) dn for any function fin C,(N). As a corollary, we get the alternate expressions for the Haar measures on P ® §,0 div = J, §,, 8earszeamy dn dn, (10) ff) 40 =f), J, deomfenny dim dr Otherwise stated, the modular function of P is given by ay Aponn) = Bn)! for m in M, n in N. The group N is unipotent and M acts on N via inner automorphisms. It is then easy to construct a sequence of subgroups of N, say N = No > Ni > DN > W, = 1, which are invariant under Mand such that N;./N, is isomorphic (for j +, 7) toa vector space over Fon which M acts linearly. Putting (2) An) = |det(Ad,(m) — 1,)|r for m in M, one gets by induction on r the integration formula (13) ffee an = aon) F foamin-t m=) dn for fin CN) and any m in M such that A(m) # 0 (see (28, Lemma 22) Let us define now the so-called orbital integrals. Let m be any element of M146 P. CARTIER such that A(m) # 0, let Z(m) be the centralizer of m in G and G,, the conjugacy class of m in G. Then Ac M and Z(m)(|M has finite index in Z(m); since M/A is a compact group, the same is true of Z(m)/A. Moreover, the conjugacy class Gr, is closed in G; hence the mapping gZ(m) ++ gmg-! is a homeomorphism from G/Z(m) onto G,.. Therefore, the mapping gA + gmg~! from G/A into G is proper and we may set after Harish-Chandra (14) Fon) = deo)f flame) de for any function f in C.(G). The Haar measure on A is normalized in such a way that Jur, di = 1 Lemma 4.1. Let f be any function in #(G, K) and m an element of M such that Am) # 0. Then Frm) is equal to Jy frm) dn. From formulas (2) and (5), one gets = dm, as) f1@rae = ff, meamy amy dn for any function u in CG) which is invariant under left translation by the elements in K. Putting u(g) = f(gmg-), one gets the following representation for F,(m) 6) Fyn) = fF, Mom) aim, ay hm) = A(n) f. Samm! n-) dr. Fix m, and set m, = mmm}. From the definition (12) of 4, one gets A(m) = A(m,). We get therefore Mom) = tos) FF (Gum w- mg3)mm) de by (1) = f fama) dn by (13). Notice that the group M/°M = Mj/(M () K) is commutative. Hence we get m, € mK and since the function f is invariant under right translation by the elements of K, one gets f(nm,) = finm) for any n in N. It follows that h(m) is equal to fy f(vm) dn for any m, in M. The contention of Lemma 4.1 follows from formula (16) since M/A is of measure I 4.2. Satake isomorphism. The construction we are going to expound now is due to Satake [38]. It is the p-adic counterpart of a well-known construction of Harish- Chandra in the set-up of real Lie groups. For any Zin A, let ch(2) be the characteristic function of the subset ord}(2) of M. Since Jynx dm = 1, one gets (18) ch(A) « ch(i’) = ch(A + 2”) for 2, 2! in A. Moreover the elements ch(2) (for 2 in A) form a basis of the complex algebra (lM, °M), which may be therefore identified to the group algebra C[]. We define now a linear map S: #¢(G, K) > #€(M, °M) by the formula (19) SHlon) = Btom¥® Fpl) dn = atemy-2 f fla) cnREPRESENTATIONS OF p-ADIC GROUPS 147 for fin ¥(G, K) and m in M. The two integrals are equal by formula (8). It is im- mediate that the function Sf on M belongs to C,(M). That it is bi-invariant under °M follows from the fact that f is bi-invariant under K and that °M = M ) K. The following fundamental theorem is due to Satake [38]. THEOREM 4.1. The Satake transformation S is an algebra isomorphism from HG, K) onto the subalgebra CLA\" of C{A] consisting of the invariants of the Weyl group W. Here are the main steps in the proof. (A) S is a homomorphism of algebras. By construction, S is the composition of three linear maps J€(G, K) * 9¢(P) *+ 26M) €(M). Here @ is simply the restriction of functions from G to P. It is compatible with convolution by an easy corollary of (4). The map 6 is given by (8u)(m) = {x u(mm) dn and one checks easily that it is compatible with convolution. The map ris given by (f)(m) =,flm)d(m)!/2; since d is a character of M, it is compatible with convolution. (B) The image of S is contained in C{A}". Since W = (N(A) () K)/°M, this pro- perty is equivalent to 20) Sfx) = Sf(m) for min M and x in N(A) () K. The function m ++ det(Ad,(m) ~ 1,) from M to Fis polynomial and nonzero. The elements of M which do not annihilate this function are therefore dense in M; they are called the regular elements. Hence by continuity it suffices to prove (20) for m regular. From Lemma 4.1, one gets an Sf(m) = Dim) j orl @meD dB for m regular in M. Here D(m) is equal to A(m)8(m)~!/2; hence D(my? = |det(Ad,(m) — 1,)|-|det Ad,Gn)|z* = |det(Ad(m) — 1,)[p-[det(Ad,m) —1,)|r = |det(Ad,(m) — 1,)|p-|det(Ad,-(m) — 1,-)|p- The last equality follows for instance from the fact that the weights in n @p F (F an algebraic closure of F) are the inverses of the weights in n~ @ F of any maximal torus of M. Since g = n ® m @ 1, one gets 2) D(m) = |det(Adyn (m) — Iya) and therefore (23) D(xmx-) = D(m) for m in M, x in N(A), On the other hand, the compact group N(A) | K acts by inner automorphisms on G and A. It leaves therefore invariant the Haar measures on G and A, hence148 P. CARTIER the G-invariant measure on G/A. Let m in M be regular, x in N(A) () K and f in 2(G, K). One has f(xgx™) = f(g) for any g in G; hence Jip, flacame ne) ag =F fC expt gx) dg = fiAeme® de The invariance property (20) follows from the representation (21), the invariance property (23) and the just-established invariance, (©) The linear map S: #(G, K) + C[A)" is bijective. We let as before A~ denote the subset of A consisting of the translations in «/ which take @~ into itself. For A in A>, let gy be the characteristic function of the double coset K - ordy/(A) - K; by Cartan decomposition, the family {g,},-.- is a basis of #¢(G, K). Moreover, any element of / is conjugate under W to a unique element in A-. We get there- fore a basis {ch’(A)},<4- of C[A]" by putting 24) ch’) = ch(w-2), 1 way 2 where W(A) is the stabilizer of 4 in W. Define the matrix {e(2, 2’)} by 5) Spx = Ee, 1)- eh") where 2, 2! run over A-. To calculate c(2, 2’), choose representatives m and m' respectively of 2. 2! in M. Then we get (1. is the Haar measure on G) (26) eA, 2') = SipjAm) = (or) 7? Km’ K 0) Nm). tis clear that KmK () NmK > mK; hence en ofA, 2!) = H(m)-172, Moreover Km'K (| NmK is empty unless x — } is a linear combination with non- negative real coefficients of the positive roots. Using a suitable lexicographic order- ing 2, we conclude that e(2, 2”) = 0, unless 0 = 2’ > A. Since c(A, 2) # 0 by (27), this remark shows that the elements Sp;,, for 2’ in A, form a basis of CLA}”, hence our contention (C). Corottary 4.1. The algebra #(G, K) is commutative and finitely generated over c. The algebra C[/] is commutative and generated by ch(2,), ---, ch(A,), ch(A), ++, ch(Ag2) if (Ay. +, 2g} isa basis of A over Z. Since the group Wis finite, it follows from well-known results in commutative algebra! that C[/]" is finitely generated as an algebra over C. and that C[] is finitely generated as a module over C[/]”. We determine now the algebra homomorphisms from 2#(G, K) to C. Let x be any unramified character of M. Since Joy dm = 1, the map f+ fx, S(m)z(m) dm isa unitary homomorphism from 9(M, °M) to C, and we get in this way all such homomorphisms. Define a linear map a,: 2#(G, K) -» C by ® See for instance N. Bourbaki, Commurative algebra, Chapter V, p. 323, Addison-Wesley, 1972.REPRESENTATIONS OF p-ADIC GROUPS 149 (28) off) = fu Sflm)-y(m) dm. CorOLLARY 4,2. Any unitary homomorphism from (G, K) into C is of the form «, for some unramified character y of M. Moreover, one has a, = wy: iff there exists aan element w in W such that 7’ = w-y. This corollary follows from Theorem 4.1 and the classical properties of invariants of finite groups acting on polynomial algebras (see previous footnote). Otherwise stated, the set of unitary homomorphisms from 9(G, K) to C is in a bijective correspondence with the set X/W of orbits of W in the set X of unramified characters of M. We refer the reader to §3.2 for a discussion of this set X/W. Notice that since X is isomorphic to a complex torus T such that X*(T) = A, then X/W is a complex algebraic affine variety and Satake isomorphism defines an isomor- phism of 2€(G, K) with the algebra of polynomial functions on X/WV. 4.3. Determination of the spherical functions. Since the characteristic functions of the double cosets KgK form a basis of the complex vector space 2#(G, K), one de- fines as follows an isomorphism of the dual to the space %(G, K) onto the space of functions on G, bi-invariant under K: 9) of) =f, f@@) de for fin GG, K), (0) 1) = lew) /f #1 forg in. Iclaim that the following conditions are equivalent: (a) wis a homomorphism of algebras from #(G, K) to C. (b) One has GD Mgil(e2) = S. P(gikg2) dk Sor 81, 82 in G. (©) For any function f in 2€(G, K), there exists a constant A(f) such that (32) fala afar pyr The equivalence of (a) and (b) follows from the following calculation ofa) = ff Peres fled flor des den = J, fulen der f files) der), Parkes) dk and the fact that the function (g), g2) + [xl'(gikg2) dk on G x Gis invariant under left and right translations by elements of K x K. ‘The equivalence of (a) and (c) follows from the following formula: ofis fy) = frtoiorve) dg = ffterrsiore) dg for f1,f2in #(G, K) where f(g) = f(g). Hence Af) = of).150 P. CARTIER DerInrmion 4.1. A (zonal) spherical function on G w.r.t. K is a function I’ on G, bi-invariant under K, such that [(1) = 1 and enjoying the equivalent properties (a), (b) and (c) above. ‘We may now translate our previous results in terms of spherical functions. Let be any unramified character of M. Recall that the function x. is defined by (33) ®x,,(mnk) = y(m)5'(m) for m in M, nin N and k in K. We put 64 Tye) = J, Px. ke) dk for gin 6. ‘TaBOREM 4.2. (a) The spherical functions on Gw.r.t. Kare the functions I, (©) Let x and z! be unramified characters of M. The spherical functions Thand Ty are equal iff there exists an element w in the Weyl group W such that y' = w-y. It is clear that /’, is bi-invariant under K, and (1) = 1. Theorem 4.2 follows from Corollary 4.2 and the formula @5) af) =f, M0) fe) de for fin 0G, K) This in turn is proved as follows: J, PON) de = J, Ox.Lere) de = f. f, j yp Pr (nk) fone) de dm cn =f, zhonaten ain J fn) an =f, xeons fea dm = of) We used the integration relations (1) and (4). 4.4, The spherical principal series of representations. DEFINITION 4.2. A representation of G is called spherical (w.t.t. K) if it is smooth, irreducible and contains a nonzero vector invariant under K. Let "be a spherical function on G (w.r.t. K). We denote by Vp the space of fune- tions fon G of the form f(g) = Dir cil"(ggi) for cy, ---, ¢y in C and gy, --+, gp in G. From the functional equation of the spherical functions (formula (31), one de- duces 36) fy flekg’) dk = P(g) - f(g’) for fin Vp and g, g’ in G. We let G operate on V; by right translations, namely G67) (ae(g)-f)(g1) = f(gig) for fin Vp and g, gy in G. I claim that the representation (xp, Vp) is spherical and that the elements of V» invariant under m,(K) are the constant multiples of P. Indeed, it is clear that for anyREPRESENTATIONS OF p-ADIC GROUPS 151 function fin Vp there exists a compact open subgroup K; of G such that fis invariant under right translation by the elements of K;; hence the representation (xp, Vp) is smooth. Let f # 0 in Vp and choose an element g' in G such that f(g’) # 0. The functional equation (36) may be rewritten as 8) P= f(y" f. arlkg')-f dk = fg’ ace If Any vector subspace of Vp containing f and invariant under z)(G) contains there- fore I’, hence is identical to V;. Finally, if a function fin Vj is invariant under 7/(K), one gets f= f(1)-P’by substituting g’ = 1 in the functional equation (36). Trtorem 4.3. Let (x, V) be any spherical representation of G. There exists a unique spherical function P’such that (x, V)is isomorphic to (rep, Vr). As usual, let V* denote the subspace of V consisting of the vectors invariant under (X). If fis any function in 2¢(G, K), the operator 2(f) takes V* into itself; hence V* is a module over #(G, K). I claim that this module is simple: indeed, let v 4 Oand v’ be two elements of VX. Since the 7¢(G)-module V is simple, there exists a function fin 2€(G) such that »’ = x(f)-v. The function fic = Ix # f #1 be- longs to 2¢(G, K) and ¥ = (fx)-¥, substantiating our claim. The algebra #(G, K) over the field C is commutative and of countable dimen- sion. By the reasoning used to prove Schur’s lemma (see p. 118) (or by Hilbert’s Zero Theorem), one concludes that any simple module over 2#(G, K) is of dimension 1 over C. Hence V¥ is of dimension 1 over C and there exists a unitary homomor- phism w: 9(G, K) > C such that (39) a(f)-v =o( fv for any fin #(G, K) and any v in VS, Let (z, 7) be the representation of G contragredient to (x, V). The space V¥ of vectors in V invariant under mK) is dual to VX, hence of dimension 1. Choose a vector v in VE and a vector # in 7 such that ¢¥, vy = 1 and define the function /” on G by (40) T(g) = <3, a(g)-v) forginG. From (39) and (40) one deduces w(f) = Jol'(g)- f(g) dg for any fin 2(G, K). It is obvious that /(1) = 1 and that /’is bi-invariant under K. Hence /"is a spherical function, ‘The map which associates to any vector v' in V the coefficient zy, defines an iso- morphism of (x, V) with (zp, V;). Moreover, for any spherical function J” on G, the representation («, V) is isomorphic to (zp», Vp) iff the following relation holds (41) aU x)a(g)a(lIx) = P'(g)-2(Ix) for g in G. This holds for [” = only. QE.D. The definition of spherical functions as well as the results obtained so far in this section depend only on the fact that K is a compact open subgroup of G and that the Hecke algebra #(G, K) is commutative. We use now the classification of sphe- tical functions on G afforded by Theorem 4.2. Let y be any unramified character of M; when the spherical function /"is set equal to 1, we write (7, V,) instead of152 P. CARTIER (ar, Vr). The family of representations {(t,, V;)}x-y is called the spherical principal series of representations of G. ‘We summarize now the main properties of the spherical principal series; they are immediate corollaries of the results obtained so far. (a) Any representation (7, V,) is irreducible, admissible, and the only functions in V,, invariant under x4(K) are the constant multiples of Ty. (b) Let x and y' be unramified characters of M. The representations (xy, V,) and (ap, Vy) are isomorphic iff there exists an element w in the Weyl group W such that v= (©) Assume that the representation (v,, I(z)) in the unramified principal series is irreducible. For any function f in I(y) define the function f* by f*(g) = {x fikg) dk Then the map f r+ f* is an isomorphism of the representation (v4, I(y)) with the repre- sentation (ay, V;). (@) In general, let 0 = Voc Vy c < Vi4 © V, = My) be a Jordan-Hélder series of the #¢(G)-module I(y). There exists a unique index j such that \ Weyp—>— 1 a quasi-character 0 of £* defines an n-dimensional representation of Wey, by in- duction; but W_,p isa quotient of Wp, so this gives an n-dimensional representa- tion of Wp, denoted Indf 9. Moreover, this representation is irreducible if and only if all the transforms of @ by /’are distinct, that is for @ being regular. In general, let /p be the stabilizer of @ in J’, and Ep be the corresponding subfield of E; thereCUSPIDAL UNRAMIFIED SERIES 159 are mo = (£: Eo] quasi-characters 6’ of Ej‘ such that @ = z;z, , and each of them is regular with respect to F; so the representation Indf 0 is the direct sum of the mp representations Indf, 6’, each one being irreducible. This gives part (a) of the fol- lowing proposition. For part (e), we use the property of inductivity of the L-func- tion; for part (f), there is only a degree zero inductivity for the e-factor, and the factor A(E/F, ¢) is computed from the identity e(Ind£0, ¢) = A(E/F, $)e(0, he, 7) by taking for @ the trivial character, so that Indf 1 is the regular representation of /, that is the sum of the m unramified characters x ++ Cy""* where { are the n different nth roots of 1; so: Wl Ob) = AIF, 9) cL, Gere)s but e(C!, db) = Cql/2)t¥ and e(1, deve) = g" "9, if g is the order of the residue field F of F. This gives the formula 2(E/F, 4) = (—1) "Pee, Proposition 1. The representations of W induced by the quasi-characters of E* satisfy the following properties: (a) the representations Ind£6 and Ind£G induced by two quasi-characters § and § are equivalent if and only if 6 and § are conjugate under I’; (b) the one-dimensional representation det Ind§0 is given by the quasi-character: we Fra (—1oDle G(x); (©) for any quasi-character y of F*, the representation Ind£@ twisted by x, is equi- valent to Ind£(Ozes)3 (d) the contragredient representation of Ind£0 is equivalent to Indf(0~); (©) the L-function L(Ind£6) is the L-function L(8); (f) the e-factor e(Indf6, §) is (— 1)" (0, Gers). 3. Construction of the representation. 3.1, For any quasi-character 0 of E*, we have the m characters 0/67, 7 € /, with the Galois group Gal(E/F). They are trivial on F*. Let a(6, 7) = a(7) be the con- ductor of 6/67; it is a nonnegative integer, and the following relations hold: a(7) = a(y~) for any 7 e 2, arr’) S Max(a(y), a(7')), for any 7, 7’ € I’, equality for a(y) # a(r’), a(y) 2 1 for any 7 # 1, if and only if @ is regular. For each integer r > 0, let /’, be the subgroup of /’ formed by the elements 7 with a(7) S r, and E, be its fixed points in E; call 4, the algebra Endg, E; we have the inclusions: Ecc AcacAc Observe that 4, = A, forr = s = Max p, a(7). The algebra 4, can be seen too as the algebra over E of the group /’,; this leads to Aylinear projections for r 2 s: T4,,4,: 4, > A, and decompositions in direct sum of 4,-submodules: 4, = 4, + A? = Zoyr, 74, where A} = Ds, A, Ker Ts,;ay, due to the partition of 7’, in 7, and its complement, written /’s, more- over, Taya (xax) = Tain, 01, forxe AS ae A,r S, the group A* acts by conjugation on A, and leaves invariant each term of this, decomposition.160 PAUL GERARDIN The natural filtration on £ by its ideals yf induces filtrations on each of the algebras 4,: the lattice A,(p") is the set of ae A, such that apf Og, the ring of integers in E; it is too the set of functions from /', to pg. As the extension £ is unramified over F, these filtrations are compatible with the maps T,/4, The residue field of £, is written £,, and 4, = A,(0,)/A,(pe) is the algebra Endg, £. The finite group 4¥ acts by conjugacy on each £,-algebra A,(p")/A,(p"*l) = A,(p"/p*), and leaves invariant each of the subspaces 7A,(y"/y"*), 7 € Py forr 2s. 3.2, Assume now that 0 is a regular quasi-character of E, ie., that Ap is E. For each r = 0, define a subgroup K, of A¥ as follows; we denote by r’ (resp. r”) the largest (resp. the smallest) integer such that 2r’ < r < 2r"; then Kg = F*, Kyis the isotropy subgroup in Ay of the lattice O, in E, and for r > 1, K, = 1+ A,-(v") + AEMy"). For each r = 1, the set Ky = 1 + pf + A%Xp") is an in variant subgroup of K,, normalized by each of the groups K,, s S r, moreover, by conjugation X, acts on K,, and sends K, in Xj’ for r > s = 2. The factor groups K,/K¢ are the following: KK = Ai, K,[Kj for r > 1 is the group (1 + p£)/(1 + pe) ~ peli, unless r is odd and A, #A,-1 where itis the central extension: 0 — pelos — K,1K} —> Ar'(p"]p") — 0, defined by the 2-cocycle a, be Ay" |p") > T,e(ab) € pé/ Pe. 3.3. For each r= 1, choose a character 0, of E* with conductor equal to Max, 1, the restriction of 8, to 1 + pe is fixed by /,1, so there is a character ¢‘” of E,_, such that OL + x) = Off, (2) for xe pe ve: moreover, the mapping defined by abe Ay |p") + bie, (Taeab) for r',r” as in 3.2, is a self-duality; this gives the following result: LemMa 1. For each r > 1, there is a unique class of irreducible representations &, of K, trivial on K+ and such that the restriction to E* () K, is isotypic, given by 0,; define then a representation x, of K, by Ax) = x0re(x)mx), x © Ky; then, the class of r, depends only on 0, and is fixed by the action of any K,,$ Taye Taalab) € ie, 1PE, S PEPE, it suffices now to observe that the action of 4* by conjugation on 4, fixes the form we A, + Taye,TayAa- 3.4. More precisely, for r > s > 1, the action of K, on K, gives a trivial action on Hr). For s = 1, the group H,(r) is a central product of the group's H,(7) inverse images of the subspaces 7A,(p"/p") + 7-1 Ay(p"/p”), the group H,(7) is a cen- tral extension of this subspace by pZ,/p5,, the 2-cocycle being given by a, be pA" |p") m+ Taye (ab) for pPy = 7 Vi, abe pA |p") + 7A (Hp) > Taye (a’b" +a'b') with a=a' +a", b=b' +5", a’, Be rAy"/p"), a’, BY pA" |p"), in general; the action of K; on K, gives an action of Kj/Kj'= A¥ on each of these subgroups Hy(7); for 7, = 7-¥}, the above 2-cocycle is a unitary form on the Ey-vector space 7A,(v" /yv") with respect to the field £; of fixed points of 7 in £,, and A, preserves this form; from [S, Corollary 4.8.2], there is a canonical extension to Ax % Hy(p) of any irreducible representation «; of Hy(7) which is given on the cen- ter by 2,5 foray Sy with 7M, # 7-U}, the group A¥ leaves stable each of the 4,-submodules of the quotient of (7); hence any irreducible representation , of this group which is given on pf!/pé, by ¢{f)x,_, has a canonical extension to the group 4, x Hi(r) ({5, Proposition 1.4], in fact, the character of the restriction to Aj is positive). The product of the representations x, defines a representation «, of K, as in the lemma, and the product of the extensions defines an extension #, of f, to the group K,X,. Now, the representation &, of this group obtained from , by twisting with ‘ as in the lemma is, up to equivalence, independent of the choice of gi”. For r = 1, there is a unique class of irreducible representations r; of K, which is trivial on Kjt and such that its tensor product with the pull-back of the Steinberg representation of 4 is the representation induced by the one-dimensional repre- santation £x++ 0,(1),1€ Of, x € Ki’, of the subgroup OfK;': it is the representation Re,(0,) of [2, Theorem 8.3], up to a sign (— 1)", m = [E : Ey], and itis a cuspidal representation. Define then ¢; as the twist of «; by 7: yx) = Bem), xe Kis its class does not depend on the choice of y‘?, Finally, the representation 9 of Ky = F* is the restriction of @ to F* Proposition 2. A regular quasi-character 0 of E* defines canonically a class of ir- reducible representations of Ky by the formula Bo XoX1 = Ko(%o) @ aim) @ + @ F(x)e(x,) @162 PAUL GERARDIN Jor x, in K,, where &, is defined as above, &, is its canonical extension to K for r odd > 1 with A, # A,1, and &, is the trivial representation for the other r > 1 4. Commuting algebra, 4.1, Let zz be the representation of 4* induced by the representation xy of Ky in functions on A* with compact support modulo the center F*. The commuting al- gebra is identified with the set of applications from A* to the space of x» which transform on both sides under the action of K; according to the representation rs. 4.2, For a quasi-character 0 of E* such that any character 0/67, for re’, 7 # 1, has conductor 1, the representation x» is obtained by twisting from a cuspidal ir- reducible representation 4’ of 4"; if T is a maximal diagonalizable subgroup of 4* such that A = KyTK,, then a function g in the commuting algebra is determined by its values on T; for at T not in Ke, there exists a unipotent radical U of a proper parabolic subgroup of A* such that ¢(U () K)f~! is contained in the kernel of Ky > A*; we have then, for we UC) K: $(tu) = a(S) = Glu) = G0; hence, from the cusp property of «’, (1) = 0. This shows that the commuting al- gebra is reduced to the scalars, and zy is irreducible; its coefficients being com- pactly supported modulo the center, the representation zp is cuspidal too. 4.3. Let now rbe such that r = Max,,a(7) > 1. Let ¢ be a nonzero function in the commuting algebra of the representation zp; choose ain A* with (a) # 0. Sup- pose we know that a © Koa,Ky for some a, in 4;as the values of g are determined by its values on a set of representatives modulo Kon both sides, we replace a by a,. From the definition of r, its restriction to the subgroup 1 + A,(y") of K, (r” is the smallest integer with 2r” > r), is a scalar operator, defined by the restriction of sey, that is 1+ xe1 $A," 4 Well + x0 + Tree). As g(@) is nonzero, we have, for x € A,(y") (| a714,(yr") a, the identity: OU + Tayex) = 0,(1 + Ta(axa-). Choose a character @ of E such that a(t) = 0,(1 + #) for ¢¢ yg’; then the character of A, defined by x aae(axaarge(x) is trivial on the intersection @A(y")a 1) A,(y1") so it can be written as x(axa~!)~ (x) with two characters € and 7 of A, trivial on A,(p"), so that GayeXE(X) = oa,e(axa(axa-}) for any x € A, 4.4. Fix a character ¢ of E, with order —r; the restriction to pig" of the character a is trivial on pf, and its stabilizer in /, is [,1; 50, there is an element z in the multiplicative pull-back of E* in £* such that E,(c) = E,; and a(t) = geye,(ct) for ¢ in pe". LeMMa 2. With these notations, then (a) any character of A, equal to a4,z, on A,(p") has a conjugate by an element of K, which is equal to x > ba,ye,(ex) on A,(0") + AT; (b) if an element of A¥ conjugates two characters of A, equal to x aa,/p,(tX) on A,a(w") + ATA, then this element belongs to A¥-. The proof uses the identification of A, with its group of characters obtained fromCUSPIDAL UNRAMIFIED SERIES 163 the application a, b€ A, ++ c4,/e,(ab), where the action o A, is the conjugation. Part (a) is easy, and for part (b), we have to show that an element b € 4% such that Or + Xb} =o + X' with X, Yin A,(p"), r+ 7” = rv, is in fact in AX: as X and Y centralize r, taking the successive powers g"™ of both sides, we get at the limit m infinite, the equality 6cb-! = , so b centralizes the center E,- of A,-1, hence is itself in 4%. We apply this lemma to the above situation: the characters of ,, @ayyer € and @4,re, 7 are Conjugate by suitable elements from K, to characters equal to x ++ ae 1, the group U () Ky acts on the£-vector space 7A\(yv']¥") + 7-14i(y" |p"); its fixed points form a subspace which can be lifted as a commuta- tive subgroup WV, of Hy(7) (notations as in 3.4), and there is a subgroup W, of unipotent elements in K, with projection W, on H(r). For r even, or without 7 such that a(y) = r, define W, =1;forr = 1, putW, = U1) Ky; for the other r’s, W, is the product of IV, for 7 with a(z) = r, taken in a chosen order, and without repetition. Then, for any r, aW,a™ is in K} and made of unipotent elements so is in the kernel of x9. For x = 1; «+, «=, w, € W,,we have: G(@) = $lax) = @reOwy) @ FE my)e(w,) @ From the next lemma, it results that the operators fy, #,(w,) dw, are fixed by «£,(0y;), So that the average Gay, £1000 @ + @ hdr.) @ od oo dn, isequal to Si, 10m) dy @ -- ® f,,,200 dv, @ which is 0 from the cusp property of 1. The lemma is the following, with the same notations as in [5]: Lemma 3. (a) Let V be a finite dimensional vector space over finite field, and n be an irreducible representation of the Heisenberg group H(V) nontrivial on the center; let U be the unipotent radical of a proper parabolic subgroup of G(V), and W the space of ‘its fixed points in V x V*; then W has a lift in H(V) as a subgroup, and the operator Sw 7(w) is fixed by the action of U through the Weil representation WY ; (b) let F be a K/k-unitary vector space over a finite filed, and 7 be an irreducible164 PAUL GERARDIN representation of the associated Heisenberg group H(F, i) which is nontrivial on the center; let U be the unipotent radical of a proper parabolic subgroup of U (the unitary group U(F, i)), and W the corresponding totally isotropic subspace in F; then W has lift in H(V) asa subgroup, and the operator Siw 7(w) is fixed under the action of U through the Weil representation WF? The proof is easy for (a), and for (b) it suffices to use a realisation of 7 as func- tions on W with values in the space of the representation associated to the Heisen- berg group H(W+/W, i). Finally, we have proved the following result: Prorosttion 3. Let 0 be a regular quasi-character of E*. Then the representation 19 induced by rp is a cuspidal irreducible admissible representation of A. 5. Intertwining operators. 5.1. Let now @ and @ be two regular quasi-characters of E*; we denote with one (resp. two) dot(s) every object attached to 6 (resp. 6): % = x9, K = Kj, 8 = Ki, +++; when the object is the same for 6 and 6, we take off the dots. The intertwining operators between the two representations # and # are identified with the applica- tions ¢ from A* to the vector space of linear maps between the space of # and the space of é satisfying the relation: g(xay) = a(x)g(a)k(y), xe K,y e K. 5.2. When there is a 7 such that f = 6r, then for any r, the groups /’, and /*, are the same; we can take 7 = 7°” and 6, = dr; moreover, for r > 1, the represen- tation 7 and its extension 4 have the required properties for the corresponding representations for #, so are equivalent to , and , respectively. The representa- tations é, and Z, of K, are trivial on K; and their pull-back with a Steinberg repre- sentation of 4¥ is equivalent to the representation induced from 0% K;' by the one- dimensional representation tx++6,(t) = 6%(¢) for te 0g, xe Kf, so they too are equivalent; finally, on F*, @is6 so Zo is £5; this shows that the representations # and tof K = K = K are equivalent, so too are the representations # and #7; but the operator #(7) sends the representation # on #7, so @ and # are equivalent. We have proved that two regular quasi-characters of E* which are conjugate under /’ give equivalent representations of 4*. 5.3. Suppose now that there exists a nonzero intertwining map ¢ between # and #; choose ae A* such that (a) # 0. Consider the following property for a non- negative integer r: P(r): for any tr, F=f and there is 7 € /” such that ae K Ax 7 RK. We observe that P(0) implies K = &, and that 4(7) intertwines # and g7 so that j on F*; on 1 + pg, the restriction of fy is the scalar operator defined by the restriction of @ to 1 + pe, so § and Or coincide on 1 + pe; this gives the eq valence between each of the representations #, and éf of K, for r > 1, and of the ex- tensions , and af to K;; the isomorphism ¢(7) intertwines the restrictions of #, and #, to Ky; as the character of Z, restricted to K; does not vanish, this implies that and é{ are equivalent, having the same character as ” = 7" on 1 + pp, this implies that the corresponding representations of 4¥ are equivalent, so 6, and 6; are conjugate by /}: 6; = 6", 71 € [1;as [) acts trivially on F* and on the restric tion of § to 1 + pg, we obtain that § = Or": the quasi-characters 6 and 6 are con-CUSPIDAL UNRAMIFIED SERIES 165 jugate under /. We note that P(r) is satisfied for r large; moreover P(r) is P(s) if ‘$s S ris any integer larger than all the conductors é(y) and a(y) for 7 € I. 5.4, Lemma 4. With these notations, we have the implication, for r = 1: P(r) => P(r = 1). We may assume that r = Max,,d(r) 2 s = Maxp, d(r). Suppose first that r is not 1. As 4(a) is determined by the double class Kak, we may take @ in Ax, from the property P(r). Let r", resp. s", be the smallest integer such that 2r” > r, resp. 2s" = s. We keep the notations as in 3.3. These integers r", s” are larger than 1; the nonvanishing of ¢(a) implies that, on the lattice L = 4,(p") () a~14,(y")a, the two scalar operators #(x) and 4(axa) are equal: G0 + Taye 2) Ried + 8) = OL + Taye axa Bre, (L + 2)5 themap xe Li 70, (1 + x) #5, (1 + x) is a character, trivial on A,(*) 1) @A,(y)a > L - L, 80 this character factors through T,,,., a8 a character € of E,, trivial on pg,. Let now d be a character of E such that &(t) = Ceye,(t)6,(1 + t) for ¢¢ pf, and let @ be a character of such that a(t) = 6,(1 + 1) for 1 ys. The two characters dg, ¢ and x++ &,,(axa~}) of A, coincide on L, so there are two characters € and & of A, such that € is trivial on A,(p”) and & trivial on A,(p") satisfying the identity: Garo) E) = dayelaxa)G(axa-) for alll x € A,. Applying now part(b) of Lemma 2, the right-hand side can be written Vave((é + X)baxab), for some be K,, with Ye A,,(p"), and ¢ in the multiplicative pull-back of £*, in E, primitive over E,. The left-hand side is Gave {(T + X)x) for some T in pz? and X in A,(p*). We have the relation: a'b-z + X)ba = T + X as the sequence of g powers of the left-hand side has a limit, a~5-! xba, we must have r = s; so, by part (b) of Lemma 2 again, there isace K,such that Pare l(T + X)x) = dave ((E + Xyexe), with ¥ in A, ,(p”) and @ in the multiplicative pull-back of BX, in E, primitive over E,. The equality a“b-(¢ + X)ba = c“\(= + X)c gives by taking the succes- sive powers q™, the relation ab? @ by ; this proves that ¢ and # generate the same subfield of £, hence that £,_; = £,1, and that the conjugation by bac”! isan automorphism of E,-1; as it is F-linear, it is given by a7 €/’; finally bac4y-1 fixing a primitive element of E,_ over E, belongs to 4,1. This proves the lemma for r>1 Suppose now r = 1; we know that /', = /', for any r; we may suppose that r, # 1. Let a € Af be such that ae KayrK. As in §4.5 if a, ¢ K\F*, there is a subgroup Wc K such that a,777~!a7" is contained in the kernel of #, and with Ju #0) dw = 0. But this implies that 6(a,7) = 0, so ay is in K and a in KIK: this is P(O), for we know already that the groups /’, are the same. We have proved the following result. Prorosirion 4, Two regular quasi-characters of E* define the same class of ir- reducible representations of A* if and only if they are conjugate under the group I’.166 PAUL GERARDIN 6. Computation of the -factors. 6.1. The L-functions of the representations zp defined by regular quasi-charac- ters 6 of £* are identically 1 [6, Proposition 5.11]. If we apply then the formula of 1.3 giving the e-factor of zp to the subspace of type xp, we get the identity: J fiber for the irreducibility of zp; representation induced by xg means too that rp occurs with multiplicity one in the restriction of xy to Ky Taking in this formula for f the characteristic function of the subgroup 1 + A(p*) with a any integer larger than the conductor of 6, the representation sy is trivial on this group, and the formula gives ai dag PE dagx = alae Hf Sdn | eae, J SFY? d4.y.x, scalar operator, Sep 847e0erndey- the meaning of the integral being by principal value for |x|, large, and by analytic continuation for |x|4/- small. 6.2. Let 0 be a regular character of E* with conductor 1. Then the representation x9 of Ky comes from a representation x of K/K* = A, so we have: he = FCF arate) dag uray bP The measure dy gives to A(0) the volume q-"**##2, and K+ = 1 + A(y), so the inner integral is 0 unless x belongs to p-°!¥"'4(0) where it is the measure qPsodd® of K*, Our expression is now: ees, 8) = gM TS harp eg) O eta), with NV = n(n — 1)/2.and aa prime element in . The cusp property of zz» implies that this sum is in fact on the semisimple elements of A* where the character of x is known (3.5); the computations have been made by Springer [11], and give ele $) = 9 88% — IT ersles) aos) =(-Ie fe. dere ()O(t) dy.g t = (—1)} (6, erp). 6.3. Suppose now that @ is a regular quasi-character of E* with even conduc- tor 2m: the integral over Ky giving e(z», ¢) can be split with respect to the subgroup K'= 1+ AQ): ela 8) = 3 (J), Bars) dag» pol) a|t3 choose an element Oy in E such that OU + 0) = derelOgt), 1 vB: then, from the definition of xo, we see that the restriction of fg to K’ is given by the sealarCUSPIDAL UNRAMIFIED SERIES 167 ysl tuel + Agr) Ol + Tare) = Gar eOyu). The inner integral above is the product by f(x) of the integral over A(y) of the character ¢¢,p((x — 0g)u) for the measure d,,, 0 is 0 unless x — 0, belongs to prem 4(0) where it is the measure q-"!"¥) of K’, This condition means x 0, K’, hence: ela, §) = = [Ole ber eO,)A0)* = J derel0000)" det = (9. Perr). tomtond ||? dhe (B4)6(0g)* 6.4, Take now for @ a regular quasi-character of E with conductor m, an odd integer greater than 1; call m' and m" the integers such that m” = m+ 1 and 2m! < m < 2m", Choose an element Oy in E such that (1 + 1) = gerp(Ogt) for fe yf’; the restriction of @ to the subgroup 1 + pp’ defines a second degree character of py’ such that (1 + O(1 +1’) = OU +1 + t)bee(Oytt’). The application ¢ € py > G(0jt)0(1 + 1)" is trivial on yg", and the e-factor of the hharacter 0 on E* is, 0.9270) =f, dere(0O0 de gt = [Ole er A000" J ae SerH(OJNO0 + 97 where j , for a finite set A means (Card A)! 4. The integral giving e(z, ¢) is split now with respect to the subgroup K” = 1 + A(y"’) ela B) = Fi (f Save CoA dag) call K’ the subgroup 1 + A(y”); the inner integral is 0 unless x belongs to 05K’, so the formula can be written: etn #) = LOBF Ye PareCDRA SY» But K’/K” is isomorphic to A(y/y") = vE'/ve" + A°(p"/ym"), with the kernel A° of Ty/z, So the expression splits in two terms and gives, using the formula for 20, Pere): lee 8) = 0. B78) J gg BAL + 9" OOO (amo) Call r the maximum of all the conductors a(7) of 6/6” for 7 # 1. We examine the situation in two cases, according to the respective places of m and r, the conductor of 6. (a) Suppose first m > r. But 0=0° yi as in 3.3. The restriction of xp to K’ is a scalar, given by168 PAUL GERARDIN 1+ xeK' =1 + Alp) O,(1 + Tarexdy Hell + >). For xin A°(p") itis only 7p (1 + x) = 1° (1 + 02 (x), where o2(x) is the trace of the action of x on AE, as an F-vector space. But now the application x ++ 4° (1 + 02 (2)) is a nondegenerate second degree character on the (n — 1)-dimen- sional vector space A°(y"'/p"") over E, so its sum J peigmpmry YO (1 + o2(x)) is (=I; this gives eto, f) = (— 1)" €8, es r)O(Og)e0(O5) 5 from the definition of the representation x, we know that the operator 6(0,)«x(0g)"! depends only on the class of 6 modulo 1 + pe; but the condition m > r means that this class is fixed by J’, so there is a representative in F*; but on F*, « is 0, so (0g) = 6(0,). We have proved the formula: e(z», $) = (— 1)" €(6, derr)- (b) Suppose now that m= r; put r’ = m', r” = m", The group K’ is contained in Kj+4K, (notations as in 3.2). From the decomposition 4° = A?_, + A’! defined by Tia,» we get, for xe A°(y'), ye Ap a(p), 26 ANY"), x = y + 2: al + 2) = 18 xhYo,4(1 + yer(l + 2). As in(a) the map y+ 7% e,_(1 + ») = x-P(L + of1(y)) is a nondegenerate second degree character on the vector space A? .(y’/p") over £,_, and we have: Sacuerun Bh Ben (Lt = (Dh where n,_1 is the dimension of A,.., over E,.., that is the order of J’... The element 0, of E is fixed modulo 1 + pg by F-1, so the operator (0,)r4(64)~! is simply 1 ® &,(64)", by definition of the representation x4 (Proposition 2). This means that eazy ¢) differs from e(0,d) zx) only by the scalar defined by the operator Sacene Al + 271 5 (0). In the semidirect product H(r) » £*, the image of 0,(1 + 2) is conjugate to the image of 8: this comes ftom the fact that if 7 ¢ /’ fixes 6, modulo 1 + pg then 7 € I-80 2+ 04205! —z is an automorphism of the £-vector space A”-1(y" /p"). To compute the above scalar, we compute its trace, which is the trace of £,(0,)-}, equal to (—1)"-"-+ ({4, Theorem 1, p.16], or [5)). This shows that in case (b), we have the formula: e(z, 3) = (— 1)" e(0, ern). 6.5. The discussion in the preceding section gave the following result: Proposition 4. Let 0 be a regular character of E* and xy be the representation constructed in §3. Then, if a(0) is the conductor of 0, we have: en, ¢)= (=) e8, dere) This formula can be written ela, $) = (=I Pees(— 1D) 68, Ye) Define a quasi-character 6 from @ by the formula § = (~1)-)™! 9 (we observe that the character (— 1)! on £* is the unique unramified extension to E* of the character of F* defined by the determinant of the regular representation of 7’, det Indf 1). Now, we can define the representation 04:CUSPIDAL UNRAMIFIED SERIES 169 Derinirion. The representation 6.4, associated to the regular quasi-character 0 of E* is xj, where zg has been defined in §3. Then, from Propositions 1, 2, 3, we get the theorem for the split algebra A = EndgE. 7. Remark. Keep the notations as above. For a nonregular quasi-character 0 of E*, the field Ey is strictly contained in E, and there are my = [E: Ep] quasi-characters 6" of Es such that @ = 2/2, and they are regular with respect to F. From the theorem, they define irreducible admissible representations 0'x,p of the multiplica- tive group of the algebra 4’ = Endp£p. The direct product of ny copies of A’* is Frisomorphic to.an Levi subgroup of an F-parabolic subgroup P of A*,and by Theo- rem 3 of [1], the representation 64, of A* induced by the representation of P defined by the product of the representations 0',,p for all choices of 0’, is irredu- cible; by Theorem 3.4 of [6], this representation 0, has its L-function and e-factor given as products of the L-functions and e-factors of the representations 6'y/p. From the properties of inductivity and the theorem, we have the formulas, with nt the rank n/ng of A LOare) = Ler) = LG eye) = LO 516.) = LO), are 9) = Mere. 8) = TM(—1)% 9 00", Gee) = (HP? Obey Serr) ME/Eo Yeye) (LIne Dowd $40 D0F (6, ep) = (HIPs (6, Gere) The other properties of functoriality given in the theorem for a regular quasi- character 9 are still true here. REFERENCES 1. I. N. Bernstein and A.V. Zelevinskii, Induced representations of the group GL(n) over a p-adic ‘field, Functional Anal. Appl. 10 (1976). 2. P. Deligne and G. Lusztig, Representations of reductive groups over finite fields, Ann. of Math, (2) 103 (1976), 103-161 3. P. Gerardin, On cuspidal representations of p-adic reductive groups, Bull. Amer. Math, Soc. £81 (1975), 756-758. 4. + Construction de séries discretes b-adiques, Lecture Notes in Math., vol. 462, Springer, Berlin, 1975, 5 . Weil representations associated to finite fields, . Algebra 46 (1977), 54-101. 6. R. Godement and H. Jacquet, Zeta functions of simple algebras, Lecture Notes in Math., vol. 260, Springer, Berlin, 1970. 7. R. Howe, Tamely ramified supercuspidal representations of GL, preprint. 8. ——, Tamely ramified base change in local Langlands reciprocity, preprint. 9. G. Lusztig, Some remarks on the supercuspidal representations of p-adic semisimple groups, these PRoceEDINGs, part 1, pp. 171-175. 10, T. Shintani, On certain square integrable irreducible unitary representations of some v-adic linear groups, J. Math. Soc. Japan 20 (1968), 522-505, UL T. Springer, The zeta function of a cuspidal representation of a finite group GL.«(K), Lie Groups and Their Representations (Gel'fand, Ed.), Halsted, New York, 1975. Universtré Paris VITProceedings of Symposia in Pure Mathematics Vol. 33 (1979), part 1, pp. 171-175 SOME REMARKS ON THE SUPERCUSPIDAL REPRESENTATIONS OF p-ADIC SEMISIMPLE GROUPS G. LUSZTIG 1. Let G be a semisimple group over a local nonarchimedean field K with ring of integers © and finite residue field k. We define G = G(K), @ = G(K) where X is a maximal unramified extension of X (with ring of integers 6 and residue field k, an algebraic closure of &). Let Tc G be a maximal torus, defined and anisotropic over K. We shall assume that 7 satisfies the following condition. There exists a Borel subgroup B of G containing T and defined over X. (This condition is certainly satisfied if T is split over K.) Let 7 be the set of homomorphisms of T = 7(K) into Of (J a prime # char k) which factor through a finite quotient of T, One expects that to any 6 ¢ 7 satisfying some regularity condition, there corresponds an irreducible admissible supercuspidal representation of G (over ,). Such a correspondence has been established by Gérardin (for T split over X, with certain restrictions, see (2]) using methods of Shintani, Howe and Corwin. (For SL; the correspondence was estab- lished by Gelfand, Graev, Shalika and others.) T would like to suggest another possible approach to the question of constructing this correspondence. This would use /-adic cohomology (or homology) of a certain infinite dimensional variety X over k. (The fact that /-adic cohomology might be used to construct representations of G is made plausible by the work of Drinfeld and by that of Deligne and myself, in the case of finite fields [1]. Note that, even in Gérardin’s approach, one has to appeal, in the case where the conductor is very small, to the representation theory of a reductive group over a finite field, which is, itself, based on /-adic cohomology.) Let U be the unipotent radical of B and let J = U(R). Consider the Frobenius map — G defined by the Frobenius element ¢ € Gal(K/K), so that G = GF. Let ¥ = {geG|g- F(g) ¢ 03/0 () F-10. (The action of OQ F-10 on G is by right multiplication.) Now G x T acts on X by (go, 1): ¢ > gost (go eG, teT,g¢6). I believe that, by regarding X as an infinite dimensional variety over k, one can define /-adic homology groups H,(X) on which G x T-acts in such a way that H,(X) = rer HAX)p (where H,(X)p is the subspace of H(X)on which 7 acts according to 8). Moreover, for 4 fixed, H,(X)p should be zero for large i, while if @ is not fixed AMS (MOS) subject classifications (1970). Primary 22ES0; Secondary 14F20, 20H30. © 1979, American Mathematical Society 11172 G. Lusztig by any nontrivial element in the small Weyl group of 7, H,(X)p should be nonzero for exactly one index i = iy (depending on @) and the resulting representation of G on H,,(X)p should be an irreducible admissible supercuspidal representation. This should establish the required correspondence between characters of T and repre- sentations of G. 2. Consider, for example, the case where G = SL,(K) and let F: G -+ G be the homomorphism defined by 0 o 1 oy 1 oI Qn) FA) = S| a9 ON 1 0 1 x 0 x 0 where z is a uniformizing element of © and, for any matrix A over K, A# is obtained by applying ¢ to each entry of 4. The fixed point set GF is the group of elements of reduced norm one in a central division algebra of dimension n? over K. Let 7 be the group of diagonal matrices in SL,(X); it is invariant under F. Let 0 < SL,(X) (resp. O-) be the subgroup consisting of all upper (lower) triangular matrices with I's on the diagonal, If 4 is a matrix in SL,(R) satisfying A~1F(4) € 0, we can find a unique Be O () F-10 such that (4B)-'F(4B) e U () FO-. Thus, {Ae SL,(K)| A-MF(A) € 03/0 9 FO) can be identified with X = {AeSL,(R)|A-1F(A) € O 9) FO-} on which GF acts by left multiplication and 7* acts by right multiplication. X is just the set of all n x n matrices of the form 7 “an 22) “ > a, ae with a; ¢ K and determinant equal to 1. For such a matrix, we have automatically ae6 (1 Si Sn) and a ¢ x0. It follows that X may be regarded as the projective limit proj lim,X, of the algebraic varieties X, over k, where X; (t 2 1) is the set of all n x n matrices of the form (2.2) with a € (G/x*0)*, a; €@/a*-G (2 Si S n), with determinant equal to 1. (We regard a;(2 $i S$ n)aselements of 20/20; the determinant of such a matrix has an obvious meaning as an element of @/ z*6.) Let G, be the set of all n x n matrices (a,,) with a,,€< 6/240 (Vi > j), aj € Gln*16 (Wi < j), a; € G/x4)* (Vi), with determinant equal to 1, as an element of G/x*0. Define F: G, > G, by the formula (2.1). G, isan algebraic group over k and F: G, ~ G, is the Frobenius map for a k-rational structure on G,. Let T, be the group of diagonal matrices in G, and let U, (resp. Uj) be the group of upperREMARKS ON SUPERCUSPICAL REPRESENTATIONS, 173 (lower) triangular matrices in G, with I's on the diagonal. We may identify X, with the variety {4€G,|4F(A) € U;, [| FUr}. Gf acts on X, by left multiplication and Tf acts on X, by right multiplication. (Note that G* = proj lim,Gf, 7F = proj lim,7F). The following lemma is cr Lema. The action of K, = ker(T, > T,-1) (h 2 2), on Xq preserves each fibre of the natural map X,,-» X-1, and each fibre of X,/Ky —> Xp-1 is isomorphic to the affine space of dimension (n — 1) over k. Let us define H,(¥) for any smooth algebraic variety Y over k of pure dimension d, to be H%~* (Y, Od), where lis a fixed prime # char k. The previous lemma shows that, for h = 2, H,(X,-1) is canonically isomorphic to H,(X,)** (fixed points of K, on H((X,)). In particular, we have a well-defined embedding HX) > HAX,). Using these embeddings, we form the direct limit inj lim,H(X,). We define H,(X) to be this direct limit. H,(X) decomposes naturally in a direct sum @H{X)p, where 9 runs through the set (7F)¥. It is clear that, for fixed 0, Hi(X)y is of finite dimension and is zero for large i. On the other hand, it is in a natural way a GF-module (GF acting via a finite quotient). Let Ry = E(—1H(X)p. TutoreM. For each @ €(T¥)Y, + Ry is an irreducible G?-module. If 0 # 0’, then + Ry, & Ry are distinct. It suffices to prove that, if 3 = Gf\(X, x Xj) (with Gf acting diagonally on X, x X,) we have X(— Di dim H,(2),, 6° 1 if o =06, =0 if #0. (Here Tf x Tf acts on 3 by right multiplication and H,(E)p,p-1 denotes the (0, 6'-)-vigenspace of TF x Tf.) To compute the (equivariant) Euler characteristic of 3 we use the principle that the Euler characteristic of a space can be computed from the zeros of a nice vector field. ‘The map (g, g) + (x, x’, y), ¥ = gIF(g), x" = g'1F(g'), » = golg’ defines an isomorphism Z = {Cx x, ye (Uy 1) FUR) x (Us 1 FUR) x Gy|xF(V) = yx"} (compare [1, 6.6}. Now, any y ¢ G, can be written uniquely in the form VaHWV, NE UT Fy ye TUR 1 FUR), YEU, | F Uz, ye Uy 1 FOU. We now make the substitution xF(y;) = ¥€ U,, so the equation of 3 becomes SFDFODFOD = ViVi IX. Any element ze U, can be written uniquely in the form z = y5x'F(y3)"! with yhe Uy 1) FAU,, x! € U;, 0) FU5, so the equation of 2 becomes174 G. LUSZTIG SF()FOY) € Vi YI Un = Viv Uw Thus, we may identify 2 = ((% yi. Yeyi) (Uy FUR) x (URN) Fs) x TUs 1) FUR) x (Uy 1) FAU§) | yet vt SF) FOU) € Uy}. The action of TF x TF is given by (6 0): & Yi This action extends to an action of a larger group H, consisting of all pairs (t, t') ofn x n-diagonal matrices with diagonal entries in (G/x*0)* such that det ¢ = det’ and t-1F(t) = ¢'-1F(”’) € centralizer of T(Ug ) FU;); the action of H is given by (6): Byte Ya WD) > (FORFOOM, FOMFOM, tre, tye A diagonal matrix of the form 1) > (8, oy Lo yp). > aeG/x0)*, [1] certainly centralizes T,(Uy (| F-1U;). Thus, any pair (f, ¢) with ¢ of the form (‘ : ‘ ee 0 ¢ (with ¢ ¢ @/x*6)* a root of 1 of order prime to char k) is in H. The set of all such pairs (, ) is a one dimensional subtorus 7 of H (over k). This torus acts on 3 commuting with TF x Tf. Its fixed point set on ¥ is the finite set given by ¥ = Ji = YT =e, ype TE, hence it is isomorphic to TF with TF x TF acting by left and right multiplication. It follows that L(— DF dim H(Z),o-1 = D(— NF dim H(2)s,0--1 = dim AlThye-1 = 1 if6 = 0, =0 ifoee, as required. 3. Let V be a 2-dimensional vector space over K and let 7 = V @, K. Let F: V + V be defined by F = 1 @ g. Assume that we are given a nonzero element we AV, The set ¥ = {xe V|x A Fx = a} is invariant under the obvious action of SL,(V) and under the action of the group T = {Ae K*|2-A% = 1} which acts by scalar multiplication. (This set X can be identified with the set X defined in §1 for G = SL; and Ta maximal torus associated to the unramified quadratic extension of K.) Objects similar to this X appear in the work of Drinfeld. We nowREMARKS ON SUPERCUSPIDAL REPRESENTATIONS, 175 show what is the meaning of the homology groups H,(X) in the present case. It can be easily checked that if x X, the G-module spanned by x and Fx is invariant under F, hence it comes from a lattice Lin V. Thus X isa disjoint union X = [[,X; over all lattices L < V with determinant 0%, where X, = {xe L @oG|x A Fe = a}. Each X, can be regarded in a natural way as proj ‘-dimensional variety over k defined by Xia = (XE L Oo G/x4O)|x A Fx = a}. Xin Where X),, is the The fibres of X,4 > Xz,x1 have a property similar to that in the Lemma in §2. This allows us to define H,(X;) = inj lim,#,(X,,s) as in §2. We also define H(X) = @, WAX). Similar arguments should apply in the general case. 4, Let G, T, B, Ube as in §1. Assume that G comes from a Chevalley group over Z by extension of scalars so that G(@), G(@) are well defined. Let G, = G(@/x*0). Assume that T(K) < G@). Let T,, U, be the images of T(K), UK) ) G(@) under G@) > G,. F:G(R) + G(R) induces F: G, > G,. This gives a K-rational struc- ture on the K-algebraic group Gy. Define X, = {ge G,|e7t F(g) O,}/0, 9) F710, The finite group Gf x Tf acts on X;,as before, by left and right multiplication. For each character 0: Tf + Q;* we form Ry = Ei (— HX. Tucorem. If 0 is sufficiently regular, the virtual Gf-module + Re is irreducible. Its independent of the choice of B. In the case h = 1, this follows from [1] REFERENCES 1. P. Deligne and G. Lusztig, Representations of reductive groups over finite fields, Ann. of Math. (2) 103 (1976), 103-161. 2.P. Gérardin, Cuspidal unramified series for central simple algebras over local fields, these PROCEEDINGS, part 1, pp. 157-169, Universtry oF Warwick, Coventry, GREAT BRITAINProceedings of Symposia in Pure Mathematics Vol. 33 (1979), part 1, pp. 179-183, DECOMPOSITION OF REPRESENTATIONS INTO TENSOR PRODUCTS D. FLATH 1. In this paper some generalizations of the classical theorem which classifies the irreducible representations of the direct product of two finite groups in terms of those of the factors will be discussed. The first generalization consists in expanding the class of groups considered. THEOREM 1. Let Gi, Gz be locally compact totally disconnected groups and let G=G, x & (1.1) If is an admissible irreducible representation of G,, i = 1, 2, then x, ® m2 is an admissible irreducible representation of G. (1.2) If x is an admissible irreducible representation of G, then there exist admis- sible irreducible representations x; of G; such that x = x ® 2. The classes of the zm; are determined by that of z. We recall some notation. For a locally compact totally disconnected group G, the Hecke algebra H(G) of G is the convolution algebra of locally constant complex valued functions on G with compact support. For a compact open subgroup K of G, let ex be the function (meas K)-!-ch, where chy is the characteristic function of K and meas is the Haar measure on G which has been used to define convolution in HG). Then ex is an idempotent of H(G). The subalgebra ex H(G)ex of H(G) will be denoted H(G, K). A smooth G-module W is in a natural way an H(G)- module, and for every compact open subgroup K c G the space WX = ex Wis an H(G, K)-module. Before proving Theorem 1 we state an Irreducibility Criterion. A smooth G- module W is irreducible if and only if WX is an irreducible H(G, K)-module for all compact open subgroups K of G. PRooF. This follows from the fact that if U is an H(G, K)-submodule of W*, then (H(G)-U)K =U. O Remark that in applying the irreducibility criterion it is sufficient to check that WK is an irreducible H(G, K)-module for a set of K which forms a neighborhood base of the identity in G. COROLLARY. Let K be a compact open subgroup of G such that H(G, K) is com- mutative, and let W be an admissible irreducible G-module. Then dim WK = 1. AMS (MOS) subject classifications (1970). Primary 22555. © 1979, American Mathematical Society 179180 D. FLATH PRooF OF THEOREM I. It is straightforward that @ HG x G) ~ HG, ® HG), (ii) HG x Ga, Ky x Ke) ~ H(G;, Ky) ® H(Ge, Kz) and Gil) (, @ Wok ~ WE @ WH for every pair of compact open subgroups K; of G; and every pair of smooth Gmodules W;. Assertion (1.1) follows from (iii) and the irreducibility criterion. Conversely, let W be an admissible irreducible G-module. Let K = K, x Ko, where K; is a compact open subgroup of G;, i = 1,2, be such that W* # 0. The space WX is finite dimensional, so by the corollary on p. 94 of [2] there exist irre- ducible H(G;, K,)-modules WF and an H(G, K) isomorphism ax from W to WE: @ WE, Similar remarks apply to every open subgroup K’ = Ki x Kz of K. There exist H(G,, K,)-maps b; = b(K, K'): WEi + WE; such that the follow- ing diagram is commutative. we Wh @ WE [va [nen we =. WEG WEE Moreover, the maps 6;(K, K") can be chosen for every pair of compact open sub- groups K, K’ of this type in such a way as to form an inductive system. Then W ~ W, ® Wz, where W; = ind limg, WE, and W, is an admissible irreducible repre- sentation of G, i = 1,2. The class of W; is determined by that of W, for the restriction of W to G, is ‘-isotypic. ‘An analysis of the proof of Theorem 1 reveals that the groups G and G; enter only through their Hecke algebras. This leads one to define an idempotented algebra (A, E) to be an algebra A with a directed family of idempotents £ such that A= User ede. An admissible module W for (A, E) is an A-module W which is nondegenerate in the sense that AW = W and is such that dim eW is finite for all ¢€ E. The tensor product of two idempotented algebras is naturally idempotented. The proof of Theorem 1 is readily adapted to establish a similar theorem about the admissible irreducible modules of the tensor product of two idempotented algebras. 2. The study of the representations of adelic groups, which are infinite re- stricted products of groups, requires the notion of restricted tensor product of vector spaces which was introduced in [4]. Let {,|v € V} be a family of vector spaces. Let %» be a finite subset of V. For each ve V\Vo, let x, be a nonzero vector in W,. For each finite subset of V con- taining Vo, let Vy = @res W,; and if Sc S’, let fe: Ws > Ws. be defined by Bees We res Wy Beesrs Xe Then W= @,,W,, the restricted tensor product of the W, with respect to the x,, is defined by W'= ind lims Ws. The space W is spanned by elements written in the form w = ® w,, where w, = x, for almost allveV. The ordinary constructions with finite tensor products extend easily to restricted tensor products.DECOMPOSITION OF REPRESENTATIONS 181 () Given linear maps B,: W, -» W, such that B,x, = x, for almost all ve V, then one can define B = @B,: W + W by B(@w,) = @B,wy. (2) Given a family of algebras (4, | v¢ V} and given nonzero idempotents e, € 4, for almost all v, then A = @,,A, is an algebra in the obvious way. (8) If W, is an A,-module for each ve V such that e, - x, = x, for almost all v, then ®,,J7, is an A-module, The isomorphism class of W depends on {x,}. How- ever, if {x4} is another collection of nonzero vectors such that x, and x, lie on the same line in W, for almost all y, then the A-modules @,,W, and @,, W, are iso- morphic. EXAMPLE 1, The polynomial ring in an infinite number of variables C[X, Xay-.-]is isomorphic to ®,, {Xj}, where ¢; is the identity element of CLX} EXAMPLE 2, Let G = []x,G,be the restricted product of locally compact totally disconnected groups G,, restricted with respect to the compact open subgroups K,, Then G itself is locally compact and totally disconnected, and H(G) is isomor- phic to @-,,H(G,). For each 'v ¢ V let W, be an admissible G,-module. Assume that dimW#+ = 1 for almost all y. Choosing for almost all v a nonzero vector x, ¢ W#:, we may form the G-module W = @,,W,. The isomorphism class of W is in fact independent of the choice of x, ¢ W and will be called the tensor product of the representations W,. One sees that W is admissible, and that itis irreducible if and only if each W, is, The admissible irreducible representations of G isomorphic to ones constructed in this way are said to be factorizable. TucoreM 2. Suppose that H(G,, K,) is commutative for almost all v. Then every admissible irreducible representation W of G is factorizable, W =~ @W,. The iso- morphism classes of the factors W, are determined by that of W. For almost all v, dim WE = 1. Proor. One first factorizes the finite dimensional spaces W*’ for compact open subgroups K’ = |] X; of G, then continues as in the proof of Theorem I. 1] 3. Let G be a connected reductive algebraic group over a global field F. Let A be the adele ring of F, and let V be the set of places of F. The adelic group G(4) is isomorphic to a restricted product []x,G(F,), where the subgroups K, are defined for all finite v and are certain maximal compact subgroups of G(F,). For almost all finite ve V, G(F,) is a quasi-split group over F,, and K, is a special maximal com- pact subgroup. For these places v, H(G(F,), K,) is commutative. See [5]. So the function field case of the following theorem, whose meaning has yet to be explained in the number field case, is a special case of Theorem 2. TueoREM 3. Every admissible irreducible representation of G(A) is factorizable. The factors are unique up to equivalence. Let F be a number field. Then the class of admissible representations of G(A) has yet to be defined. For each archimedean place v V, let K, be a maximal com- pact subgroup of G(F,), and let g, be the real Lie algebra of G(F,). Let K., Thareh » Kes K = Tae Kes and G. = Marcy G(F,). Let g... be the real Lie algebra of G,.. Let Ay be the ring of finite adeles of F.182 D. FLATH Derinirion. An admissible G(A)-module W is a vector space W which is both a (ge. K.)-module and a smooth G(A,)-module such that (1) the action of G(4,) commutes with the action of g,, and K.,, and (2) for each isomorphism class 7 of continuous irreducible representations of K, the 7-isotypic component of W has finite dimension. In Theorem 3, the factors at the archimedean places v are to be admissible (ge. K,)-modules. The proof when F is a number field is the same as that when it isa function field once an idempotented algebra is found for each archimedean place v whose admissible modules are the same as admissible (g,, K,)-modules. Let G be a Lie group, and let K be a compact subgroup. Let g and t be the real Lie algebras of G and K. Let U(gc) and U(te) be the universal enveloping algebras of the complexified Lie algebras. Define the Hecke algebra H(g, K) of (g, K) to be the algebra of left and right K-finite distributions on G with support in K. It con- tains the algebra A, of K-finite measures on K viewed as distributions on G. The map (X, 4) > Xu from U(ge) x Ax to the space of distributions on G induces a vector space isomorphism of U(ge) vite) Ax with H(g, K). With the set E of central idempotents of 4, H(g, K) is an idempotented algebra. Let (x, W) be a (g, K)-module, By means of the formula ¥ @ p+ w = x(X)x(y)w for X € U(gc), 4 € Ax, and w € W, the space W becomes a nondegenerate H(g, K)- module. Moreover, it is not difficult to verify that this construction establishes an isomorphism between the categories of admissible (g, K)-modules and of admissible (H(q, K), E)-modules. 4, In practice, a more analytic theory than that described above is needed as well, Let {H, | v€ V} be a family of Hilbert spaces. For almost all ve V, let x, be a unit vector in H,. The Hilbert restricted product H = ®,, H, is a Hilbert space which can be conveniently described by giving an orthonormal basis. Let P, be an orthonormal basis for H, for each ve V which extends {x,} for almost all v. The set of symbols ®h, such that h, € P, for all v and h, = x, for almost all v is an orthonormal basis for H. Constructions analogous to those described above with reference to the ordinary restricted tensor product are available in the Hilbert space context. For the following theorem see [3] and [1]. TueoReM 4. Let G(A) be as in Theorem 3. Let x be a continuous irreducible unitary Hilbert space representation of G(A). Then (1) There exist continuous irreducible unitary Hilbert space representations 7, of G(F,), almost all of which are unramified, such that x ~ @x,. The factors x, are unique up to isomorphism. (2) For each isomorphism class 7 of continuous irreducible representations of K, the 7-isotypic component of x has finite dimension. (3) The space of K-finite vectors of x is in a natural way an admissible irreducible G(A)-module x*. Let xX = @rk be the factorization of xX given by Theorem 3. Then xX is isomorphic as an admissible G(F,)-module to the space of K,-finite vectors of ty.DECOMPOSITION OF REPRESENTATIONS 183 REFERENCES 1.1.N. Bernshtein, All reductive p-adic groups are tame, Functional Anal. Appl. & (1974), 91-93. 2..N. Bourbaki, Modules et anneaux semi-simples, Hermann, Paris, 1958. 3.1. M, Gelfand, M. I. Graev and I. Pyatetskii-Shapiro, Representation theory and automorphic functions, W. B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, 1969. 4. H, Jacquet and R. P. Langlands, Aufomorphic forms on GL(2), Lecture Notes in Math., vol. 114, Springer-Verlag, Berlin and New York, 1970. 5. J. Tits, Reductive groups over local fields, these PROCEEDINGS, part 1, pp. 29-69. Duke UniversityProceedings of Symposia in Pure Mathematics Vol. 33 (1979), part 1, pp. 185-188 CLASSICAL AND ADELIC AUTOMORPHIC FORMS. AN INTRODUCTION I. PIATETSKI-SHAPIRO* 1, Classical Hecke theory. Let H be the upper half-plane {z ¢ ClIm z > 0}, 7° a congruence subgroup of SL(2, Z), i, /” > Iy for some integer N = 0 (where fab ‘a bY 1 0 Ty= {(C De SLQ, Z) such that ¢ i) = 6 i) (mod wp). The group SL(2, R) acts on H by z -+ (az + by(ez + d). We say that a function fH Cisa modular form of weight k (with respect to I’) iff (@) fis holomorphic on #. (0) f (az + byez + d))(ez + dy* = fl), for all (4) ¢ P, and k some strictly positive integer k. (© fisholomorphic also at the cusps of H with respect to I For example, at co, this means that has the Fourier expansion fe) = Dae Pt We say that fis a cusp formif in the Fourier expansion at each cusp, ay = 0. Let (/) be the C-linear span of the set {( 3 bee sar|(2 Heciie,o}. Here G = GL*(2, Q) = {g¢ GLQ2, Q) | det(g) > 0}. Note that GL*Q, R) acts on H, There is an obvious representation of G on 2(f). Hecke defined the L-function attached to the modular form f by the formula: Gadd F ginny ray = Sage (the Dirichtet series corresponding to f). Hecke [1] proved the following theorem: Uf,s) = THEOREM. (1) L(f, s) isa “nice” entire function when fis a cusp form (“nice” means that L(, 8) has a functional equation). 2) LU, 8) has an Euler product if Q(f) is algebraically irreducible, i.e., has no invariant linear subspaces under the action of G. The second statement is the more interesting; it is equivalent to Hecke’s actual AMS (MOS) subject classifications (1970). Primary 10D20; Secondary 10D10, 22E55. “The author was supported by an NSF grant while preparing this paper. © 1979, Amercian Mathematical Society 185186 1. PIATETSKI-SHAPIRO statement. He proved that L(/, s) has an Euler product if fis an eigenfunction of the “Hecke operators”. This is equivalent to Q(/) being irreducible. Already (2) sug- gests that it might be better to study modular forms from the point of view of representation theory. This leads us to the main purpose of this paper, which is to motivate the transi- tion to the adelic setting and the systematic use of representation theory in the study of modular forms. First let us explain the notion of Euler product. L(s) = L(f, s) has an Euler product means that Lo)y= TT £46), Po ine where Ls) = (1 — app (1 — Bop), arp, Bp EC. In Hecke’s theorem we have a functional equation of the sort: L(s) = e(s)Z(1 — s), where L(s) (resp. e(s)) can be written as an infinite product []Z,(s) (resp. [e,(s)). Now Tate’s theory of L-functions associated to Grossencharakters and Artin L-functions suggests the problem of finding objects such that the local factors L,(s) and ,(s) are e- and L-functions for these objects. It was the beautiful idea of Jacquet-Langlands [2] to take as such objects irreducible representations of GL(2.Q,). More precisely, let us look at Q(f). Any element he () is fixed by a congruence subgroup J’& G. Now we define a topology on G by taking a basis of neighborhoods of the identity to be the set of congruence subgroups of G, and let G be the completion of G in this topology. Then G = {ge Tléite pres GL, Q,)[det gy =r > 0, reQ}, where [| means restricted direct product, acts on Q(f), via the action of G, and it can be shown that this repre- sentation is an infinite tensor product (interpreted in a suitable sense) x = @iinive primes Zp» Where zy is a representation of GL, Q,). In the author's interpretation, it is the idea of Jacquet-Langlands to attach an L-function to the irreducible representation z = Q(f), rather than to f, and then to interpret L,(s) and e,(s) as the L- and e-factors for the representations zp of GLQ, 0,). Finally, let us give the following additional motivation for introducing the adelic framework into the study of modular forms. We wish to study modular forms with respect to different congruence subgroups simultaneously, and every such form is stabilized by some congruence subgroup. To each inclusion relation [’< [, cor- responds a projection H//' + HjJ. A small computation shows that the projective limit of this system, proj lim HII = K.\SLQ, A)/SLQ, Q). Pa congratnce subgroup Hence the study of modular forms has been transformed into the study of a cer- tain space of functions on this double coset space. 2. Automorphic forms for adelic groups. Assume G is a connected reductive algebraic group over a global field k. For such a G we can define the group G, (cf. Springer’s paper for the construction), and G, < G4 asa discrete subgroup.CLASSICAL AND ADELIC AUTOMORPHIC FORMS 187 We need some basic facts from reduction theory. First let G3 = (\{kerlyl, x a rational character of G}. Then G,\GQ is compact iff there are no additive unipotent elements. (This is due to Borel-Harish-Chandra-Mostow-Tamagawa-Harder.) Let G4 = NAK be the global Iwasawa decomposition (which follows directly from the local Iwasawa decompositions), where K is a standard maximal compact subgroup of G,, A the set of adelic points of a maximal split torus, and N is a maximal unipotent subgroup. EXAMPLE. G = GLQ, k). Then K, = 0(2) ifp is real, vey if p is complex, = GL(2,Q,) for a finite place; w= {6 he 4-0 ay Note that A > C = Z(G,), and that we can write A = CA for some subgroup Ast. C 1) Adis finite, We say that a set Sc A® is semibounded iff for any relatively compact subset No & N, the set (J, 0 and a positive integer n such that AMS (MOS) subject classifications (1970). Primary 10D20; Secondary 20G35, 22E3. © 1979, American Mathematical Socisty 189190 ‘A. BOREL AND H, JACQUET Q I A function f on G(R) is said to be slowly increasing if there exist a norm | || on G(R), a constant C and a positive integer n such that Q. [f@) | S$ C-|]x|", for all x € G(R). In view of (1) this condition does not depend on the norm (but 1 does). Remark. If ¢: G+ GL(E) has finite kernel, but does not have a closed image in End E, then we can either add one coordinate and det o(g)~! as a new entry, or consider the sum of ¢ and g*: g + o(g~!)*. The associated square norms are then [det o(g)! |? + tr(o(g)* o(g)) and tr(o(g)* o(g)) + tr(o(g-Hole)*). 1,3. Let [be an arithmetic subgroup of G(Q). A smooth complex valued func- tion f on G(R) is an automorphic form for (J, K), or simply for I’, if it satisfies the following conditions (@) fg) =f) (xe GR); 7 € 7). (b) There exists an idempotent £ ¢ 2#(cf. 1.1) such that f+ =f. (©) There exists an ideal J of finite codimension of Z(g) which annihilates /: f+X=0 (Xed). (d) fis slowly increasing (1.2). An automorphic form satisfying those conditions is said to be of type (é, J). We let f (I & J, K) be the space of all automorphic forms for (I’, K) of type J). 1.4. Exampe. Let G = GLa, [= GL{Z), K = 0(2, RB), € = 1, J the ideal of Z(g) generated by (C — 2), where C is the Casimir operator and 2 C. Then fis an eigenfunction of the Casimir operator which is left invariant under [right inva- riant under K, and invariant under the center Z of G(R). The quotient G(R)/Z-K may be identified with the Poincaré upper half-plane H. The function f may then be viewed as a invariant eigenfunction of the Laplace-Beltrami operator on X. It is a “wave-form,” in the sense of Maass. See [2], [5], [6] for a similar interpreta- tion of modular forms. 1.5. Remarks. (1) Condition 1.3(b) is equivalent to: fis K-finite on the right, i, the right translates of f by elements of K span a finite dimensional space of func- tions. These functions clearly satisfy 1.3(a), (c), (d) if f does. (2) Let r: K+ GL(V) be a finite dimensional unitary representation of K. One can similarly define the notion of a V-valued automorphic form: a smooth func- tion p: G -> V satisfying (a), (©), (d), where | | now refers to the norm in V, and C- |x|, for all xe G(R). (b) Sek) = rk) $0) (we G(R); ke K). For semisimple groups, this is Harish-Chandra’s definition (ef. (2), (11)). For ve V, the functions x++ (g(x), v) are then scalar automorphic forms. Conversely, a finite dimensional space E of scalar automorphic forms stable under K yields an E-valued automorphic form. (3) A similar definition can be given if G(R) is replaced by a finite covering H of an open subgroup of G(R) and /’ by a discrete subgroup of H whose image in G(R) is arithmetic. For instance, modular forms of rational weight can be viewed as automorphic forms on finite coverings of SL_(R).AUTOMORPHIC FORMS AND AUTOMORPHIC REPRESENTATIONS 191 1.6. Growth condition. (1) Let A be the identity component of a maximal Q-split torus S of G, and gM the system of Q-roots of G with respect to S. Fix an ordering ‘on g@ and let d be the set of simple roots. Given t > O let a) A, = {ae A: a(a)| = 4 (ae dD}. Let f be a function satisfying 1.3(a), (b), (©). Then the growth condition (4) is equivalent to: (d’) Given a compact set R < G(R), and 1 > 0, there exist a constant C > 0 and a positive integer m such that 2 [fx-a)| < C-la(a)|", for allac A, ae 4, xR. This follows from reduction theory [11, §2]. More precisely, let G’ be the derived group of G. Then A is the direct product of Z(R)° and 4’ = A () G’(R). For a function satisfying 1.3(a), (b), the growth condition (4°) is equivalent to (d) for ae A;; but says nothing for a € Z(R)°. However condition (c) implies that f depends polynomially on z ¢ Z(R), and this takes care of the growth condition on Z(R). (2) Assume f satisfies 1.3(a), (b), (e) and 8 flex) = 72) IO) — (Ze A(R), x G(R) where z is a character of Z(R)/(Z(R) () 1’). Then fis a function on Z(R)- G(R). If[fle L*(Z(R)P\G(R)) for some p = 1, then fis slowly increasing, hence is an auto- morphic form. In view of the fact that Z(R)/"\G(R) has finite invariant volume, it suffices to prove this for p = 1. In that case, it follows from the corollary to Lemma 9 in 11}, and from the existence of a K-invariant function a ¢ C=(G(R)) such that f=f+a (a well-known property of K-finite and Z(g)-finite elements in a dif- ferentiable representation of G(R), which follows from 2.1 below). 1.7. THEOREM [11, THEOREM 1]. The space «/(I, &, J, K) is finite dimensional. This theorem is due to Harish-Chandra, Actually the proof given in [11] is for semisimple groups, but the extension to reductive groups si easy. In fact, it is im- plicitly done in the induction argument of [11] to prove the theorem. For another proof, see [13, Lemma 3.5]. At any rate, it is customary to fix a quasi-character 7 of Z(R)( (| Z(R)) and consider the space «(I', & J, K)y of elements in AT, &, J, K) which satisfy 1,6(3). For those, the reduction to the semisimple case is immediate. Note that since the identity component Z(R)° of Z(R) (sometimes called the split component of G(R)) has finite index in Z(R) and Z(R)" () I’ = {1}, it is substantially equivalent to require 1.6(3) for an arbitrary quasi-character of Z(R)’. The space «/(T’, &, J, K) is acted upon by the center C(G(R)) of G(R), by left or right translations. Since it is finite dimensional, we see that any automorphic form is C(G(R))-finite. 1.8. Cusp forms. A continuous (resp. measurable) function on G(R) is cuspidal if a f(n-x)dn for all (resp. almost all) x in G(R), where N is the unipotent radical of any proper192 A. BOREL AND H. JACQUET parabolic Q-subgroup of G. It suffices in fact to require this for any proper maxi- mal parabolic Q-subgroup [11, Lemma 3]. A cusp form is a cuspidal automorphic form. We let °s/(I; &, J, K) be the space of cusp forms in /(T, & J, K). Let f be a smooth function on G(R) satisfying the conditions (a), (b), (¢) of 1.3. Assume that fis cuspidal and that there exists a character z of Z(R) such that 1.6(3) is satisfied. Then the following conditions are equivalent: is slowly increasing, ie., fis a cusp form; Fis bounde (iii) [f | is square-integrable modulo Z(R)-/’ (cf. [11, $4)). In fact, one has much more: |f| decreases very fast to zero at infinity on Z(R)/"\G(R), so that if g is any automorphic form satisfying 1.6(3), then|f gl is integrable on Z(R)-J"\G(R) (loc. cit.) The space °/(J, & J, K), of the functions in °/(J, & J, K) satisfying 1.63) may then be viewed as a closed subspace of bounded functions in the space LAT\G(R)), of functions on J’\G(R) satisfying 1.6(3), whose absolute value is square-integrable on Z(R)I"\G(R). Since Z(R)'\G(R) has finite measure, this space is finite dimensional by a well-known lemma of Godement (11, Lemma 17]. This proves 1.7 for «/(I, &, J, K), when Z(R)I'\G(R) is compact, and is the first step of the proof of 1.7 in general. 1.9, Let a € G(Q). Then «/”= a-I’-a~ is an arithmetic subgroup of G(Q), and the left translation /, by a induces an isomorphism of «/(J, , J, K) onto GT, &, J, K), Let 3 be a family of arithmetic subgroups of G(Q), closed under finite intersection, whose intersection is reduced to {1}. The union »/(2, & J, K) of the spaces /(/' €, J, K) (I"e 3) may be identified to the inductive limit of those spaces: @ A(S, & J, K) = ind limpez WA, & J, Ky where the inductive limit is taken with respect to the inclusions Q deri ALES KALE SK) Pe associated to the projections /”\G(R) > 1”\G(R). Assume to be stable under conjugation by G(Q). Then G(Q) operates on (2, &, J, K) by left translations, Let us topologize G(Q) by taking the elements of 3.as a basis of open neighborhoods of 1. Then this representation is admissible (every element is fixed under an open subgroup, and the fixed point set of every open subgroup is finite dimensional). By continuity, it extends to a continuous ad- missible representation of the completion G(Q)x of G(Q) for the topology just de- fined, For suitable 3, the passage to «/(3, &, J, K) amounts essentially to considering all adelic automorphic forms whose type at infinity is prescribed by &, J, K; the group G(Q); may be identified to the closure of G(Q) in G(A,) and its action comes from one of G(4,). See 4.7. 1.10, Finally, we may let and J vary and consider the space ./(5, J, K) spanned by the «/(3, & J, K)and the space .(3, K) spanned by the .(3, J, K). They are G(Q)y-modules and (g, K)-modules, and these actions commute, Again, this has a natural adelic interpretation (4.8). 1.11, Hecke operators. Let #(G(Q), 1°) be the Hecke algebra, over C, of G(Q)AUTOMORPHIC FORMS AND AUTOMORPHIC REPRESENTATIONS 193 mod /’, It is the space of complex valued functions on G(Q) which are bi-invariant under /"and have support in a finite union of double cosets mod /. The product may be defined directly in terms of double cosets (see, e.g., [17}) or of convolution (see below). This algebra operates on «/(/', &, J, K). The effect of Fal’ (ae G(Q)) is given by f+ Ssecrqervr yf More generally, let 2#(G(Q), 2) be the Hecke algebra spanned by the characteristic functions of the double cosets /”al” (I", I” € 3, ae G(Q)) [17, Chapter 3]. It may be identified with the Hecke algebra 7(G(Q);) of locally constant compactly supported functions on G(Q). This identification carries %(G(Q), I’) onto #(G(Q);, I), where I’ is the closure of ’in G(Q), [12]. The product here is ordinary convolution (which amounts to finite sums in this case). Since «/(3, &, J, K) is an admissible module for G(Q);, the action of G(Q)s extends in the standard way to one of #(G(Q);). The space «/(I’, &, J, K) is the fixed point set of /', and the previous operation of 2¢(G(Q), I’) on this space may be viewed as that of #(G(Q);, I). For an adelic interpretation, see 4.8. 2, Automorphic forms and representations of G(R). The notion of automorphic form has a simple interpretation in terms of representations (which in fact sug- gested its present form). To give it, we need the following known lemma (cf. [18] for the terminology). 2.1. Lemma. Let (z, V) be a differentiable representation of G(R). Let v ¢ V be K- finite and Z(g)-finite. Then the smallest (g, K)-submodule of V containing v is admis- sible. Indeed, 3 - vis a finite sum of spaces 3” - w, where 9° is the Hecke algebra of the identity component G(R)° of G(R) and K°=K (] G(R)’, and wis K°-finite and Z(¢)-finite. It suffices therefore to show that 9° - vis an admissible (g, K°)-module. By assumption, there exist an ideal R of finite codimension of the enveloping algebra U(t) of the Lie algebra t of K and an ideal J of finite codimension of Z(g) which annihilate v and moreover U(f)/R is a semisimple f-module. Then 3° - v may be identified with U(g)/U(g) - R + J. By a theorem of Harish-Chandra (see [19, 2.2.1.1), U(g)/UG) - R is t-semisimple and its t-isotypic submodules are finitely generated Z(g)-modules. Hence their quotients by J are finite dimensional. 2.2. We apply this to C=(/'\G(R)), acted upon by G(R) via right translations. Therefore, if f is automorphic form, then f'* 9 is an admissible #- or (g, K)- module. This module consists of automorphic forms. In fact, 1.3(a) is clear, and 1,3(b) follows from 2.1; its elements are annihilated by the same ideal of Z(g) as v, whence (d). Finally, there exists a € C<(G) such that f+ a = fso that f'« X satis- fies 1.2(c) (with the same exponent as f) for all Ye U(g) (11, Lemma 14]. Thus the spaces ALT K) = SAT. I,K), APR) = SAP J, Ky are (g, K)-modules and unions of admissible (g, K)-modules. If f is a cusp form, then f+ 2 consists of cusp forms. Thus the subspace °F, K) of cusp forms is also an #’-module. If isa quasi-character of Z, then the space °./(I, K), of eigenfunctions for Z with character y is a direct sum of irreducible admissible (g, K)-modules, with finite multiplicities. In fact, after a twist by IzI-*, we may assume y to be unitary, and we are reduced to the Gelfand- Piatetski-Shapiro theorem ({7], see also [11, Theorem 2}, (13, pp. 41-42) once194 A. BOREL AND H. JACQUET we identify °sv(V, K), to the space of K-finite and Z(g)-finite elements in the space °LA(P\G(R)), of cuspidal functions in L2(P\G(R)), (see 1.8 for the latter). 3. Some notation. We fix some notation and conventions for the rest of this paper. 3.1. Fis a global field, Of the ring of integers of F, V or Vp (resp. V.., resp. V;) the set of places (resp. archimedean places, resp. nonarchimedean places) of F, F, the completion of Fat ve V, O, the ring of integers of F, if ve V,. As usual, A or Ap (resp. A,) is the ring of adéles (resp. finite adéles) of F. 3.2. Gis a connected reductive group over F, Z the greatest F-split torus of the center of G, #, the Hecke algebra of G, = G(F,) (v € V) [4]. Thus 2 is of the type considered in §1 if ve V_ and is the convolution algebra of locally constant com- pactly supported functions on G(F,) if v e V,. We set a Ho = BQH, #1 = QHv = HB Hy, where the second tensor product is the restricted tensor product with respect to a suitable family of idempotents [4]. Thus 2 is the global Hecke algebra of G(A) [4], If Fis a function field, then V., is empty and ¢ = 3%. If Lis a compact open subgroup of G(4,), we denote by &, the associated idem- potent, i.e., the characteristic function of L divided by the volume of (relative to the Haar measure underlying the definition of 2#,). Thus /'* €, = fif and only iff is right invariant under L. The right translation by x € G(A) on G(4), or on functions on G(A4), is denoted r, or r(x). 3.3. A continuous (resp. measurable) function on G(A) is cuspidal if s flax) dn = 0, mw for all (resp. almost all) x € G(4), where NV is the unipotent radical of any proper parabolic F-subgroup P of G. It suffices to cheek this condition when P runs through a set of representatives of the conjugacy classes of proper maximal par- abolic F-subgroups. 4, Groups over number fields. 4,1. In this section, F is a number field. An element ¢ € 3 is said to be simple if itis of the form @) E=€.06, &€ #, €,, idempotent in #,. We let G., = TIycv.. G, and g,. be the Lie algebra of G., viewed as a real Lie group. We recall that G., may be viewed canonically as the group of real points H(R) of connected reductive group H, namely the group H = Ryyg G obtained from G by restriction of scalars from F to Q. This identification is understood when we apply the results and definitions of §§1, 2to G... The group G(A) is the direct product of G., by G(4,). A complex valued function on G(A) is smooth if it is continuous and, if viewed as a function of two arguments X€ Ga, ) € G(Ap), itis C* in x (resp. locally constant in y) for fixed y (resp. x). 4.2. Automorphic forms. Fix a maximal compact subgroup K,, of G_. A smooth function f on G(A) is a K,,-automorphic form on G(A) if it satisfies the following conditions:AUTOMORPHIC FORMS AND AUTOMORPHIC REPRESENTATIONS 195 @ S79) = Se) (7 € GF), x€ GCA). (b) There is a simple element ¢ € 9 such that f'* € = f. (©) There is an ideal J of finite codimension of Z(g.) which annihilates f- (d) For each y € G(4,), the function x ++ f(x-y) on G, is slowly increasing. We shall sometimes say that fis then of type (€, J, K.,). We let «/(€, J, K..) be the space of automorphic forms of type (6, J, K.)- ‘There exists a compact open subgroup L of G(4,) such that &;* &, = €;. Then AES, Ku.) © oS Gn" bs J, K.). We could therefore assume gy = &, for some L without any real loss of generality. 4.3. We want now to relate these automorphic forms to automorphic forms on G... For this we may (and do) assume ¢ = €,, ® €; for some compact open sub- group L of G(4,). There exists a finite set C < G(A) such that G(A) = G(F)-C-G.- L [1]. We assume that C is a set of representatives of such cosets and is contained in G(A,). Then the sets G(F)-c-G,,-L form a partition of G(A) into open sets. For ceC, let a P= GF) Ge x ¢-L-e7), Itis an arithmetic subgroup of G., Given a function f on G(A) and c € C, let f, be the function x ++ f(e-x) on Ga. Suppose fis right invariant under L. Then it is immediately checked that fis left invariant under G(F) if and only iff, is left invariant under /’, for every ce C. More precisely, the map f+ (f,)ecc yields a bijection between the spaces of functions on G(F)\G(A)/L and on [[.('\G,). It then follows from the definitions that it also induces an isomorphism Q) AE. ® Et, J, Ke) OMe bar Jy Kade so that the results mentioned in §1 transcribe immediately to properties of adelic automorphic forms. In particular, 1.6, 1.7 imply: ) The space /(€, J, K.,) is finite dimensional. )) A smooth function f on G(A) satisfying 4.2(a), (b), (c), and e@) f@-x) = 2)-f@) (ze AA), xe GA). for some character y of Z(A)/Z(F), such that | f] € L*(Z(A)G(F)\G(A)) for some = 1, is slowly increasing. (ii) For a smooth function satisfying 4.2(a), (b), (c), the growth condition 4.2(4) is equivalent to 1.6(d"), where R is now a compact subset of G(A). (iv) Any automorphic form is C(G(A))-finite, where C(G(A)) is the center of G(A). We note also that one can also define directly slowly increasing functions on G(A), as in 1.2, using adelic norms: given an F-morphism G > GL, with finite kernel define, for x © G(4), @ [=| = sup max(lot@jlu [ote Dsl) (or simply max Ja(g,,)|, if o(G) is closed as a subset of the space of n x n matrices). For continuous functions satisfying 4.2(a), (b), this is equivalent to 4.2(4)..196 ‘A. BOREL AND H. JACQUET 4.4, A cusp form is a cuspidal automorphic form. We let °s/(G, J, K..) be the space of cusp forms of type (6, J, K.). The group Nis unipotent, hence satisfies strong approximation, i.e., we have for any compact open subgroup Q of N(4,) (2) N(A) = M(F)-N,.-Q; hence N(F)\N(A) = (N(F) 11 (Nas x Q))\Now [1]. Let now fbe a continuous function on G(A) which is left invariant under G(F) and right invariant under L. From (2) it follows by elementary computations that Fis cuspidal if and only if the /.’s (notation of 4,3) are cuspidal on G... Hence, the isomorphism of 4.3(2) induces an isomorphism QB) ° AE. ® Et, J, Ku) Beto bor I, Ko) so that the results of 1.8 extend to adelic cusp forms. In particular, assume that f satisfies 4.2(a), (b), (c), and also 4.3(3) for a character y of Z(A)/Z(F). Then the following conditions are equivalent: (i fis slowly increasing, ie., fis a cusp form; i) fis bounded; i) || is square-integrable modulo Z(A)-G(F). Remark. In 4.3, 4.4, we have reduced statements on adelic automorphic forms to the corresponding ones for automorphic forms on G(R), chiefly for the conven- ience of references. However, it is also possible to prove them directly in the adelic framework, and then deduce the results at infinity as corollaries via 4.3(2), 4.4(3). In particular, as in 1.8, one proves using (ii) above and Godement’s lemma that °wG, J, K.) is finite dimensional. 4.5, Proposition. Let f be a smooth function on G(A) satisfying 4.2(a), (b), (d). Then the following conditions are equivalent: (1) fis an automorphic form. (2) For each infinite place v, the space f » 2, is an admissible 3 -module. (3) For each place v € V, the space f » 3, is an admissible 2 -module. (4) The space f + 3 is an admissible #-module. PRooF. The implications (4) = (3) > (2) = (1) are obvious; (1) > (4) follows from 4.3(i). 4.6, Automorphic representations. An irreducible representation of # is automor- hic (resp. cuspidal) if it is isomorphic to a subquotient of a representation of 2 in the space of automorphic (resp. cusp) forms on G(A). It follows from 4.5 that such a representation is always admissible. It will also be called an automorphic representation of G or G(4), although, strictly speaking, it is not a G(A)-module. However, it is always a G(4,)-module. More generally, a topological G(4)-module E will be said to be automorphic if the subspace of admissible vectors in E is an automorphic representation of 2. In particular, if z is a character of Z(A)/Z(F), any G-invariant irreducible closed subspace of LXG(F)\G(A)), = (fe LAG) - Z(A\G(A)), fe-») = 12) S00), 2 € Z(A), xe G(A)} is automorphic in this sense, in view of [4, Theorem 4]. By a theorem of Gelfand andAUTOMORPHIC FORMS AND AUTOMORPHIC REPRESENTATIONS 197 Piatetski-Shapiro [7] (see also [8]), the subspace °Z°(G(F)\G(A)), of cuspidal func- tions of L*(G(F \G(A)); isa discrete sum with finite multiplicities of closed irreduci- ble invariant subspaces. Those give then, up to isomorphisms, all cuspidal auto- morphic representations in which Z(4) has character y. The admissible vectors in those subspaces are all the cusp forms satisfying 4.3(3). 4.7, Let L > L! be compact open subgroups of G(A,). Then &,* &: = &13 hence /(E., ® &1; J, K.) © WGm ® Ex» J, K..). The space (EW, J, K.) spanned by all automorphic forms of types (@., @ &) J, K.), with , arbitrary in 3%, may then be identified to the inductive limit a) AE» J, K) = ind lim €. ® &1s Js Ku), where L runs through the compact open subgroups of G(4,), the inductive limit being taken with respect to the above inclusions. The group G(4,) operates on by inner automorphisms. Let us denote by *€ the transform of € € 3’, by Int x. We have in particular Q) (G1) = Gan) (¥€ G(Ay), &, a8 in 4.1); if fis a continuous (or measurable) function on G(A), then ® CAE (EGA), E628). Therefore, G(4,) operates on /(G.,, J, K.) by right translations. It follows from 4.3(i) that this representation is admissible. In view of 4.3(3), «/(E.» J, K.) is the adelic analogue of the space (2, 6a, J, Ke) of 1.9, where 3 is the family of arithmetic subgroups of G(F) of the form I, = G(F) 1) G.. x L), where L is a compact open subgroup of G(4,). These are the congruence arithmetic subgroups of G(F), i.e., those subgroups which, for an embed- ding G & GL, over F, contain a congruence subgroup of G () GL,(0;). This analogy can be made more precise when G satisfies strong approximation, which is the case in particular when G is semisimple, simply connected, almost simple over F, and G., is noncompact [16]. In that case, as recalled in 4.4(2), we have G(A) G(F)-G.,L for any compact open subgroup of G(4,), so that we may take C = {1} in 4.3. Then 4.3(2) provides an isomorphism @ AG. ® Ets Jy Kn) — Ay br Ss Keds for any L, whence © Abas I, Kn) % AEs ban Jy Keds where 3 is the set of congruence arithmetic subgroups of G(F). Moreover, the projection of G(F) in G(4,) is dense in G(4,) and G(A,) may be identified to the completion G(F); of G(F) with respect to the topology defined by the subgroups Ty. It is easily seen that the isomorphism (5) commutes with G(Q), where, on the left-hand side x € G(Q) acts as in 1.9, via left translations, and, on the right-hand side, x acts as an element of G(4,) by right translations. It follows that the isomor- phism (5) commutes with the actions of G(F)y = G(4,) defined here and in 1.9. Also, the isomorphism G(F); ~ G(A,) induces one of the Hecke algebra °(G(F)3) (see 1.10) onto »#, and, again, (5) is compatible with the actions defined here and in 1.10. Note also that /', is dense in L, by strong approximation, so that this198 ‘A. BOREL AND H. JACQUET isomorphism of Hecke algebras induces one of 2¢(G(F)z, I:), which is equal to #(G(F), 1), onto 2#(G(A,), L). [Strictly speaking, this applies at first for F = Q, but we can reduce the general case to that one, if we replace G by RrygG (4.1).] In the general case, the isomorphisms 4,3(2) for various €, are compatible with the action of G(F) defined here and in 1.9 respectively, and this extends by continu- ity to the closure in G(A,) of the projection of G(F). 438. Let /(J, K.) be the span of the spaces «/(G.., J, K.) and «/(K..) the span of the (J, K.). These spaces are #-modules, and union of admissible 2-submo- dules. When 4.6(5) holds, they are isomorphic to the spaces «/(3, J, K.) and (8, K.) of automorphic forms on G(R) defined in 1.10, Otherwise, the relation ship is more complex, and would have to be expressed by means of the isomor- phisms 4.3(2). 5. Groups over function fields. In this section, F is a function field of one variable cover a finite field. A function on G(A) is said to be smooth if it is locally constant. 5.1. Let be a quasi-character of Z(4)/Z(F) and K an open subgroup of G(A). We let °¥(z, K) be the space of complex valued functions on G(A) which are right invariant under K, left invariant under G(F), satisfy ay LEX) = 4@)- FQ) FE AA), xe GA), and are cuspidal (3.3). [These functions are cusp forms, in a sense to be defined below (5.7), but the latter notion is slightly more general.] We need the following: 5.2. Proposition (G. HaRpeR). Let K and x be given. Then there exists a compact subset C of G(A) such that every element of °¥(y, K) has support in Z(A)-G(F)-C. In particular, °¥(y, K) is finite dimensional, This follows from Corollary 1.2.3 in [10] when G is split over F and semisimple (the latter restriction because (1) is not the condition imposed in [10] with respect, to the center). However, since G(4) can be covered by finitely many Siegel sets, the argument is general (see [9, p. 142] for GL,). 5.3. ConoLtary. Let X be a finite set of quasi-characters of Z(A)|Z(F) and m a positive integer. Then the space °¥-(X, m, K) of cuspidal functions which are right invariant under K and satisfy the condition ® Tee -x@)-s=0 is finite dimensional. Proor. The space °¥°(X, m, K) is the direct sum of the spaces °¥({z}, m, K); hence we may assume that X consists of one quasi-character z. By 5.3, °¥°(X, 1, K) is finite dimensional. We then proceed by induction and assume that °¥(X, s, K) is finite dimensional for some s = 1. The group Z(4)/Z(F)-K’, where K’ (Z)) :2yaq be a generating set. Set A 51,0 Assia = {£€ Asal) ~ 12))-F = 0G = 1D}. ZA) 1) K, is finitely generated. Let °¥ (Xs + 1, K) and, fort = 1... g: ThenAUTOMORPHIC FORMS AND AUTOMORPHIC REPRESENTATIONS 199 Asti > Assi 2 oo > Aste 2 2 Assia = 1% 5, KD. Fix £0 S ¢- W taking gp to w. It maps € € %p onto a scalar multiple of x(€)-w. Therefore, it factors through an R(E)-morphism #9/J > W, mapping % onto w, whence an M(E)-morphism (%'p/J)y > Wy mapping 1) onto W. It follows that i is annihilated by Jy 5.6. THEOREM. Let K be a compact open subgroup of G(A). Let ve V and J an admissible ideal of #,. Then the space ¥(G, v, J, K) of complex valued functions f on G(A) which are left invariant under G(F), right invariant under K and annihilated by Jis finite dimensional. PROOF. Since the representation of G, on #,/J is admissible (and finitely gen- erated), there exists an ideal J, of finite codimension of C{Z(F,)] which annihilates HAS.200 ‘A. BOREL AND H. JACQUET Let fe W(G, v, J, K). Then hv f*h (i++ h being the canonical involution of 2) gives a G,-morphism #/J > f 2¢,. Therefore 1G, v, J, K) is annihilated by I, Let Z’ = Z(A) (| K and regard Z(F,) as a subgroup of Z(4). Then Z(F)-Z(F,)- Z’ has finite index in Z(A). As a consequence, there exists an ideal J of finite codi- mension of Z(A)/Z(F) which annihilates ¥(G, v, J, K). The space °¥ of cuspidal elements in ¥(G, v, J, K) is then contained in °y(I, K) (notation of 5.4), hence is finite dimensional. We now prove the theorem by induction on the F-rank rk,G’ of the derived group G' of G. If rk,G’ = 0, then ¥(G, v, J, K) = °¥, and our assertion is already proved. So assume rk,G’ 2 | and the theorem proved for groups of strictly smaller semisimple F-rank. Let now P= M-N vary through a set # of representatives of the conjugacy classes of proper parabolic F-subgroups of G, where M is a Levi F-sub- group and N the unipotent radical of P. For each such P, let Cp be a set of repre- sentatives of P(4)\G(A)/K. It is finite. The intersection of the kernels of the maps S fe. where fp,Am) = Jyceywcw fln-m-c) dn(ce Cp, Pe 2) (fe WG, v, J, K)) is then °¥*, hence is finite dimensional. It suffices therefore to show that, for given Pe, ce Cp, the functions fp,- vary in a fixed finite dimensional space. After having replaced J and K by conjugates, we may assume that c = I. We write fp for fp.1. Let now Ug (resp. Uy) be the space of functions on G(F)\G(A) (resp. M(F)\M(A)) which are right invariant under some compact open subgroup (de- pending on the function). The representation r of G(A) by right translations on Ug is smooth. If x ¢ N(A) thenfp = (r,f)p; hence jp: f+ fp factors through (Ug)viry- It follows then from 5.5 that the elements/p (fe ¥(G, ¥, J, K)) are all annihilated by some admissible ideal J” of the Hecke algebra of M(F,). Since these elements are right invariant under K’ = K () M(A), it follows that zp maps (G, v, J, K) into ¥Y(M, v, J’, K’). Since this last space is finite dimensional by our induction assump- tion, the proof is now complete. 5.7. Corottary. Let f be a function on G(A) which is left invariant under G(F) and right invariant under some compact open subgroup of G(A). Then the following conditions are equivalent: (1) There is a place v of F such that the representation of G, on the G(F,)-invariant subspace generated by r(G,)-f is admissible. (2) For each place vof F, the representation of G, on the space generated by G,)-f is admissible. (3) The representation of G(A) on the space spanned by r(G(A)) -fis admissible. PRoor. Clearly (3) => (2) = (1). Assume (1). Let v be as in (1). Then fis anni lated by an admissible ideal J of ¥,. Let U = f'* 2. We have to prove that UX is finite dimensional for any compact open subgroup K of G(A). There is no harm in replacing K by a smaller group, so we may assume that K fixes f: We may also assume that K = K, x K*, where K, is compact open in G, and K* is compact open in the subgroup G of elements in G(4) with y-component equal to 1. We also have % = ¥, ® 3° where 2? is the Hecke algebra of Gr. Let 6, (resp. é*) be the idempotents associated to K,, (resp. K*) (3.3). Then &, ® &* = Gx is the idempotent associated to K. Any element g in Uis a finite linear combination of elements of the form f* a * 8 (ae #*, 8 ¢ #,). If such an element is fixed under K, then g* & =AUTOMORPHIC FORMS AND AUTOMORPHIC REPRESENTATIONS 201 gs hence we may assume that each summand is fixed under K, and that a * € = a, 8, = B. Since fis fixed under X,, it follows that f'« a is fixed under K. The ele- ments f'* a then belong to the space ¥“(G, v, J, K), which is finite dimensional by the theorem. For each such element /'* a * 8 is contained in the space of K,-fixed vectors in the admissible #,-module f* a», = f+ 3, * a, whence our asser- tion. 5.8. Derintrions. An automorphic form on G(A) is a function which is left in- variant under G(F), right invariant under some compact open subgroup, and satis- fies the equivalent conditions of 5.7. A cusp form is a cuspidal automorphic form. Any automorphic form is Z(4)-finite (as follows from 5.7(3)).. An irreducible representation of G(A) is automorphic if it is isomorphic to a sub- quotient of the G(A)-module ./ of all automorphic forms on G(F)\G(4). It follows from 5.7 that it is always admissible. More generally, a topologically irreducible continuous representation of G(4) in a topological vector space is automorphic if the submodule of smooth vectors is automorphic. As in 4.6, it follows from [4, Theorem 4] that if y is a character of Z(A)/Z(F), then any G-invariant closed irreducible subspace of L{G(F)\G(A)), is automorphic. 5.9. PRoposttion. Let f be a function on G(F)\G(4). Then the following conditions are equivalent: () fis a cusp form. (2 fis Z(A)-finite, cuspidal (3.3), and right invariant under some compact open subgroup of G(A). PRooF. That (1) = (2) is clear. Assume (2). Then fis annihilated by an ideal J of finite codimension of C[Z(A)/Z(F)]. Let U be the space of functions spanned by r(G(A)) -f Every element of U is cuspidal, annihilated by Zand right invariant under some compact open subgroup. If Z is any compact open subgroup, then U+ is con- tained in the space °¥“(J, L) (notation of 5.4), hence is finite dimensional. Therefore Wis an admissible G(4)-module and (1) holds. 5.10, It also follows in the same way that the space °«/(J) (resp. °«/(X, m)) of all cusp forms which are annihilated by an ideal of finite codimension of C[Z(A)/Z(F)] (resp. which satisfy 5.3(1)) is an admissible G(4)-module. Moreover, if X consists of one element y, and if m = I, in which case we put «/(X, m) = °oty, then this space is a direct sum of irreducible admissible G(A)-modules, with finite multiplicities. To see this we may, after twisting with |y{-, assume that y is unitary. Then, since °.0/, consists of elements with compact support modulo Z(A), raf Sx) 1a) ax ZWGIPNGLAY defines a nondegenerate positive invariant hermitian form on ‘«/,. Our assertion follows from this and admissibility. This is the counterpart over function fields of the Gelfand-Piatetski-Shapiro theorem (4.6). ‘We note that, by [14], every automorphic representation transforming according to z is a constituent of a representation induced from a cuspidal automorphic representation of a Levi subgroup of some parabolic F-subgroup, for any global field F.202 ‘A. BOREL AND H. JACQUET REFERENCES 1. A. Borel, Some finiteness theorems for adele groups over number fields, Inst. Hautes Etudes Sci. Publ. Math, 16 (1963), 101-126, 2, Introduction to automorphic forms, Proc. Sympos. Pure Math., vol. 9, Amer. Math. Soc., Providence, R.I., 1966, pp. 199-210. 3. P, Cartier, Representations of reductive p-adic groups: A survey, these PROCEEDINGS, part I, pp. 111-155. 4. D. Flath, Decomposition of representations into tensor products, these PROCEFDINGS, part 1, pp. 179-183. 5. S. Gelbart, Auromorphic forms on adele groups, Ann. of Math, Studies, no. 83, Princeton Press, Princeton, N.J., 1975. 6. I. M, Gelfand, M. I. Graev and I. I. Piatetski-Shapiro, Representation theory and automorphic functions, Saunders, 1969, 7. 1. M. Gelfand and I. Piatetski-Shapiro, Automorphic functions and representation theory, Trudy Moscov. Mat. Obs. 12 (1963), 389-412, 8. R. Godement, The spectral decomposition of cusp forms, Proc. Sympos. Pure Math., vol. 9, ‘Amer, Math. Soc., Providence, R. 1, 1966, pp. 225-234. 9. R. Godement and H. Jacquet, Zeta functions of simple algebras, Lecture Notes in Math., vol. 260, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1972. 10. G. Harder, Chevalley groups over function fields and automorphic forms, Ann, of Math. (2) 100 (1974), 249-306. 11. Harish-Chandra, Automorphie forms on semi-simple Lie groups, Notes by J. G. M. Mars, Lecture Notes in Math., vol. 68, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1968. 12. M. Kuga, Fiber varieties over a symmetric space whose fibers are abelian varieties, Mimeo- graphed Notes, Univ. of Chicago, 1963-64. 13, R. P. Langlands, On the functional equations satisfied by Eisenstein series, Lecture Notes in Math., vol. 544, Springer, New York, 1976. 14 (On the notion of an automorphic representation, these PROCEEDINGS, patt 1, pp. 203 207. 15, I. Piatetski-Shapiro, Classical and adelic automorphic forms. An introduction, these PROCEED- 1N08, part 1, pp.185-188, 16. V. I. Platonov, The problem of strong approximation and the Kneser-Tits conjecture, I2V. Akad. Nauk SSSR Ser. Mat. 3 (1969), 1139-1147; Addendum, ibid. 4 (1970), 784-786. 47. G. Shimura, Introduction to the arithmetic theory of automorphic forms, Publ. Math. Soc. Japan 11, I. Shoten and Princeton Univ. Press, Princeton, N.J., 1971 18. N. Wallach, Representations of reductive Lie groups, these PROCEEDINGS, part 1, pp. 71-86. 19, G. Warner, Harmonic analysis on semi-simple Lie groups. 1, Grundlehren der Math. Wis- senschaften, Band 188, Springer, Berlin, 1972. ur INSTITUTE FoR ADVANCED STUDY CoLumnta UNtveRSITYProceedings of Symposia in Pure Mathematics Vol. 33 (1979), part 1, pp. 203-207 ON THE NOTION OF AN AUTOMORPHIC REPRESENTATION. A SUPPLEMENT TO THE PRECEDING PAPER R. P, LANGLANDS ‘The irreducible representations of a reductive group over a local field can be obtained from the square-integrable representations of Levi factors of parabolic subgroups by induction and formation of subquotients (2), [4]. Over a global field F the same process leads from the cuspidal representations, which are analogues of square-integrable representations, to all automorphic representations. Suppose P is a parabolic subgroup of G with Levi factor M and ¢ = @o,a cuspidal representation of M(4). Then Ind ¢ = ®, Ind g, is a representation of G(A) which may not be irreducible, and may not even have a finite composition series. As usual an irreducible subquotient of this representation is said to be a constituent of it. For almost all y, Ind a, has exactly one constituent x) containing the trivial representation of G(Q,). If Ind g, acts on X, then z$ can be obtained by taking the smallest G(F,)-invariant subspace V, of ¥, containing nonzero vectors fixed by G(O,) together with the largest G(F,)-invariant subspace U, of V, containing no such vectors and then letting G(F,) act on V,/U,. LEMMA 1. The constituents of Ind o are the representations x = @r, where 7, isa constituent of Ind a, and x, = x; for almost all v. That any such representation is a constituent is clear. Conversely let the con- stituent z act on V/U with 0s Us Vc X = @X,. Recall that to construct the tensor product one chooses a finite set of places Sp and for each v not in Sp a vector x; which is not zero and is fixed by G(O,). We can find a finite set of places S, containing Sp, and a vector xs in Xs = @yes X, which are such that x = x5 @ (ces X9) lies in V but not in U. Let V be the smallest subspace of X's containing xs and invariant under Gs = Tees G(F,). There is clearly a surjective map Vs @ (@ses V.) — VI, and if v ¢ S the kernel contains Vz ® Us ® (@sesuiny Vs). We obtain a surjec- tion Vs ® (@res V./U,) > V/U with a kernel of the form Us ® @xs VsIU,), Us lying in Vs. The representation of Gs on Vs/Us is irreducible and, since Ind o, has a finite composition series, of the form @res %» %, being a constituent of Ind ¢,. Thus x = @x, with x, = x5 when v¢ S. AMS (MOS) subject classifications (1970). Primary 30AS8, 20£35, 1020. © 197, American Mathematical Society 203204 R. P, LANGLANDS. The purpose of this supplement is to establish the following proposition. PROPOSITION 2. A representation z of G(A) is an automorphic representation if and only if x is a constituent of Ind a for some P and some a. The proof that every constituent of Ind g is an automorphic representation will invoke the theory of Eisenstein series, which has been fully developed only when the global field F has characteristic zero [3]. One can expect however that the analogous theory for global fields of positive characteristic will appear shortly, and so there is little point in making the restriction to characteristic zero explicit in the proposition. Besides, the proof that every automorphic representation is a constituent of some Ind ¢ does not involve the theory of Eisenstein series in any serious way. We begin by remarking some simple lemmas. LewMa 3, Let Z be the centre of G. Then an automorphic form is Z(A)-finite. This is verified in (1). LEMMA 4. Suppose K is a maximal compact subgroup of G(A) and an automorphic form with respect to K. Let P be a parabolic subgroup of G. Choose g € G(A) and let K' be a maximal compact subgroup of M(A) containing the projection of gKg™ (\ P(A) on M(A). Then sg = ar wl8) = Fann Meme isan automorphic form on M(A) with respect to K’. It is clear that the growth conditions are hereditary and that gp(-; g) is smooth and K’-finite. That it transforms under admissible representations of the local Hecke algebras of M is a consequence of theorems in [2] and [4]. We say that g is orthogonal to cusp forms if Soc,,ca) o(e)((2) dg = 0 whenever dis a cusp form and Q is a compact set in G(4). If'P is a parabolic subgroup we write ¢ LP if pp(-; g)is orthogonal to cusp forms on M(A) for all g. We recall a simple lemma [3]. Lemma 5. If 1 Pfor all P then is zero. We now set about proving that any automorphic representation = is a con- stituent of some Ind o. We may realize x on V/U, where U, V are subspaces of the space .o/ of automorphic forms and V is generated by a single automorphic form . Totally order the conjugacy classes of parabolic subgroups in such a way that {P} < {P"} implies rank P S rank P’ and rank P < rank P’ implies {P} < {P’}. Given g let {P,} be the minimum {P} for which {P} < {P"} implies y LP’ Amongst all the @ serving to generate x choose one for which {P} = {P,} is minimal. If ¢€ of let pg) = gp(1, g) and consider the map ¢ > gp on V. If U and V had the same image we could realize z as a constituent of the kernel of the map. But this is incompatible with our choice of p, and hence if Up and Vp are the images of U and V we can realize 7 in the quotient Vp/Up. Let 1p be the space of smooth functions ¢ on N(A)P(F)\GCA) satisfying (a) dis K-finite.AN AUTOMORPHIC REPRESENTATION 205 (b) For each g the function m — ¢(m, g) = (mg) is automorphic and cuspidal. Then Vp & wp. Since there is no point in dragging the subscript P about, we change notation, letting z be realized on V/U with U S V & wp. We suppose that Vis generated by a single function g. LEMMA 6. Let A be the centre of M. We may so choose and V that there is a character x of A(A) satisfying (ag) = y(a)p(g) for all g € G(A) and all a ¢ ACA). Since P(A)\G(A){K is finite, Lemma 3 implies that any in «/} is A(A)-finite. Choose V and the generating it to be such that the dimension of the span Y of {U(a)pla € A(A)} is minimal. Here /(a) is left translation by a. If this dimension is one the lemma is valid, Otherwise there is an a ¢ (A) and a € C such that 0 < dim((@) — a)¥ < dim ¥. There are two possibilities. Either (l(a) — a)U = ((a) — a)V or (i(a) — aU # (a) — a)V. In the second case we may replace ¢ by (/(a) — a)p, contradicting our choice. In the first we can realize x as a subquotient of the kernel of (a) — ain V. What we do then is choose a lattice B in A(A) such that BA(F) is closed and BA(F)\A(A) is compact, Amongst all those g and V for which Y has the minimal possible dimension we choose one g for which the subgroup of B, defined as, {be Bil(6)p = Bp, 8 €C}, has maximal rank. What we conclude from the previous paragraph is that this rank must be that of B. Since g is invariant under A(F) and BA(F)\A(A) is compact, we conclude that Y must now have dimension one. The lemma follows. Choosing such a g and V we let » be that positive character of M(A) which satis- fies va) =|x@|, aed A), and introduce the Hilbert space L3 = L3(M(F)\M(A), x) of all measurable functions gon M(Q)\M(A) satisfying: (i) For all m € M(A) and all ae A(A), dag) = y(ap(e). Gi) facoar@ ec ¥-%r)| gm)? din < 0. Lj is a direct sum of irreducible invariant subspaces, and if ¢ ¢ V then m > (rn, g) lies in L3 for all g ¢ G(A). Choose some irreducible component H of L3 on which the projection of g(-, g) is not zero for some g € G(A). For each din V define ¢'(-, g) to be the projection of ¢(-, g) on H. It is easily seen that, for all m, € M(A), (mm, g) = o'(m, mg). Thus we may define ¢'(g) by Gg) = G'(1.g). If V’ = {y'lg € V}, then we realize z as a quotient of V’. However if 8? is the modular function for M(A) on N(A) and g the representation of M(A) on H then V' is contained in the space of Ind 6“! a. To prove the converse, and thereby complete the proof of the proposition, we exploit the analytic continuation of the Eisenstein series associated to cusp forms. Suppose z is a representation of the global Hecke algebra », defined with respect to some maximal compact subgroup K of G(A). Choose an irreducible representa- tion « of K which is contained in x. If E, is the idempotent defined by K let 3, E,E, and \et x, be the irreducible representation of , on the x-isotypical sub- space of x. To show that z is an automorphic representation, it is sufficient to show that x, is a constituent of the representation of #, on the space of automorphic206 R. P, LANGLANDS forms of type x. To lighten the burden on the notation, we henceforth denote 7, by x and », by #. Suppose P and the cuspidal representation ¢ of M(A) are given. Let L be the lattice of rational characters of M defined over F and let Lp = L ® C. Each ele- ment 1 of Le defines a character €, of M(A). Let I, be the «-isotypical subspace of Ind €,0 and let J = Jp. We want to show that if z is a constituent of the representa tion on J then z is a constituent of the representation of 2% on the space of au- tomorphic forms of type . If {g,} is a set of coset representations for P(4)\G(A)/K then we may identify I, with I by means of the map y > g, with p,Ang; k) = E,(m) p(nmgik). In other words we have a trivialization of the bundle {J,} over Lo, and we may speak of a holomorphic section or of a section vanishing at yz = 0 to a certain order. These notions do not depend on the choice of the g,, although the trivialisa- n does. There is a neighbourhood U of z = 0 and a finite set of hyperplanes passing through U so that for yin the complement of these hyperplanes in U the Eisenstein series E(g) is defined for g in I,, To make things simpler we may even multiply E by a product of linear functions and assume that it is defined on all of U. Since it is only the modified function that we shall use, we may denote it by £, although it is no longer the true Eisenstein series. It takes values on the space of automorphic forms and thus E(p) is a function g > E(g, ) on G(A). It satisfies E(o,AD9) = rE) if he 9 and p, is Ind ,0. In addition, if g, is a holomorphic section of {J,} ina neighbourhood of 0 then £(g, 9,) is holomorphic in for each g, and the deriva- tives of E(g,), taken pointwise, continue to be in /. Let J, be the space of germs of degree r at : = 0 of holomorphic sections of J. Then g,, > p,(h)p, defines an action of 2 on J, If's E(p,) defines an #-homomorphism 2 from I, to this space. To complete the proof of the proposition all one needs is the Jordan-Hélder theorem and the following lemma. LEMMA 7. For r sufficiently large the kernel of } is contained in 1°. Since we are dealing with Eisenstein series associated to a fixed P and ¢ we may replace £ by the sum of its constant terms for the parabolic associated to P, modify- ing 2 accordingly. All of these constant terms vanish identically if and only if E itself does. If Q1, .... Oy is a set of representatives for the classes of parabolics as- sociated to P let £,(p) be the constant term along Q;. We may suppose that M is a Levi factor of each Q,. Define »(m) for me M(A) by &,(m) = e+, Thus v(m) lies in the dual of Ly. If p € Z,, the function £,(p) has the formAN AUTOMORPHIC REPRESENTATION 207 Esme 9) = 5: nlot cam Here gag lies in a finite-dimensional space independent of 1 and g,; 4,1 S$ 6 $b is a holomorphic function of j.; and {p,} is a basis for the polynomials of some degree. This representation may not be unique. The next lemma implies that we may shrink the open set U and then find a finite set /, ..., fy in G(A) such that E(y,) is 0 for ze U, g, € 1, if and only if the numbers E,(hi, y,), 1S i Sm, 1 Sj Snare allo. Lemma 8. Let Ube a neighbourhood of 0 in C!, »4, ..., v4, holomorphic functions on U, and py, .... Pa @ basis for the polynomials of some given degree. Then there is a neighbourhood V of 0 contained in U and a finite set y, ..., Ys in C! such that if pe V then © Dray) ev = 0 for all y if and only if it is 0 for y = yy, ..-5 Vy To prove this lemma one has only to observe that the analytic subset of U defined by the equations (#), y € Cis defined in a neighbourhood of O by a finite number of them. We may therefore regard £ as a function on U with values in the space of linear transformations from the space J, which is finite-dimensional, to the space C»*. One knows from the theory of Eisenstein series that E,, is injective for jin an open subset of U. Then to complete the proof of the proposition, we need only verify the following lemma, LemMA 9. Suppose E is a holomorphic function in U, a neighbourhood of 0 on C*, with values in Hom(l, J), where I and J are finite-dimensional spaces, and suppose that E,, is injective on an open subset of U. Then there is an integer r such that if py is analytic near . = 0 and the Taylor series of E,yp, vanishes to order r then go = 0. Projecting to a quotient of J, we may assume that dim J = dim J and even that 1 = J. Let the first nonzero term of the power-series expansion of det E, have degree s. Then we will show that r can be taken to bes + 1. It is enough to verify this for/ = 1, for we can restrict to a line on which the leading term of E, still has degree s. But then multiplying £ fore and aft by nonsingular matrices we may sup- pose it is diagonal with entries z*,0 < @ Ss. Then the assertion is obvious. In conclusion I would like to thank P. Deligne, who drew my attention to a blun- der in the first version of the paper. REFERENCES 1. A. Borel and H. Jacquet, Automorphic forms and automorphic representations, these PRO- CCeEDINGS, part 1, pp. 189-202. 2. P. Carter, Representations of v-adic groups: A survey, these PROCEEDINGS, part I, pp. 111-155. 3. R.P. Langlands, On the functional equations satisfied by Eisenstein series, Lecture Notes in Math., vol. 544, Springer, New York, 1976. 4, N, Wallach, Representations of reductive Lie groups, these PROCEEDINGS, part 1, pp. 71-86. ‘Tue INstrTuTe FoR ADVANCED STUDYProceedings of Symposia in Pure Mathematics Vol. 33 (1979), part 1, pp. 209-212 MULTIPLICITY ONE THEOREMS I. PIATETSKI-SHAPIRO* 1. Let G = GL, over a global field k. We shall discuss the following two results. (1) Muttipuicrry ONE THEOREM. Let x be an irreducible smooth admissible re- presentation of G(A). Then the multiplicity of x in the space of cusp forms is equal to one or zero. (2) Recall that any irreducible admissible smooth representation 7 can be written x = @sitp where each z, is an irreducible admissible smooth representation of the local group G,. STRONG MULTIPLICITY ONE THEOREM. Let x; = @ym,p and mz = @ymo,y be two irreducible representations; suppose 1,» © m2,» for every pS, where S is a finite set, which in case n > 2is assumed to contain only finite places. Then 7, x2,pfor all p. (Hence x = 2) We begin by sketching the proof of the first Theorem (1). The basic tool is the Whittaker model. We introduce this first in the case k a local field, and (x, V) an irreducible smooth representation. In the case of k archimedean, we mean by “smooth representation” the representation of G on the space V of C-vectors in some Hilbert space H on which G acts unitarily; for k nonarchimedean, this notion was introduced in Cartier’s lectures. Let ¢ be an additive character of k. Let f) be the standard maximal unipotent subgroup of G. Then a Whittaker model Wc, §) for (x, V)is the image of V under an element of Homa(V, Ind§(y)) where GO) = PO + + Spa) if ara 0 1! More explicitly, it is given by a set of smooth functions {W,:G + C, ve V} for which () W, (xg) = J(xX)W(g), for all xe X, g EG. AMS (MOS) subject classifications (1970). Primary 22ES5; Secondary 10D20. "The author was supported by an NSF grant while preparing this paper. '© 1979, American Mathematical Society 209210 1. PIATETSKI-SHAPIRO Gi) Wag) = Wgh), for all g, he G. We have the following important result due to Gelfand-Kazhdan for the case k nonarchimedean, and Shalika for general local fields ({1), (2). Uniqueness THeorem. For each irreducible admissible smooth representation (x, V), there exists at most one Wz, 3) (for fixed ¢) For k archimedean we assume that (z, V) is a unitarizable representation and V = {xe H\(@x, 9x) < w W @ € enveloping algebra}. Here H means the comple- tion of V with respect to the inner product (x, x). We assume also that W,(1) is a continuous linear functional on V with respect to the topology defined by semi- norms (2x, 2x), 9 € enveloping algebra. Returning to the global case, we point out that the preceding discussion easily implies uniqueness of global Whittaker models (defined in the obvious way). 2. Global Fourier analysis. Let (x, V) be admissible irreducible cuspidal as before, g€ V. Then we can define Wg) Seon. 0 (xg)oH(a) dx. Global Fourier analysis says that this “Fourier transform” defines a cusp-form uniquely. In the classical setting this is due to Hecke; for m = 2 it is proved in Jacquet-Langlands [3]; for n > 2 it is due independently to Piatetski-Shapiro (4) and Shalika [2]. The proof is motivated by a corresponding result over a finite field due to S. I. Gelfand [5} It is now easy to see that these results imply Theorem (1), since dim Hom,(V, W(x, g)) = 1 2 dim Homa(V, Lj). We now turn to the proof of the strong mu cuss the case n = 2; we need the following icity one theorem. First we dis- SMALL LewMa. (1) Assume k local, (x1, V1), (#2, V2) two irreducible admissible representations with Whittaker models. Then there exist v, € V;, v2 € V2 such that WalS 4) = Wel 9) Oa © Mend). 2) If k = Ror C we assume that (sey, Hh) and (x2, Hz) are irreducible infinite- dimensional unitary representations. Denote by V; (V2) the set of all smooth vectors in H, (Hz). Then there exist v, € Vi, V2€ Vo.such that (59) =MlS 9) remand Proor. For k a local nonarchimedean field it is known that V contains all ‘Schwartz-Bruhat functions with compact support in k®. Hence we have what we want. Now let k= R or C. The Kirillov theorem (see [8, p. 221]) says that each ir- reducible infinite-dimensional unitary representation of GL(2, ) remains irreduci- ble after restriction on the subgroup {(j)} = P and hence as a representation of Pis isomorphic to the standard representation of P. Hence, if y(x) is a C»-function with compact support then there exist vy € Vi, ¥2.€ V2 such thatMULTIPLICITY ONE THEOREMS 2u1 m(9 1) = 9°) ReMARK. Assume that for a unitary representation with a Whittaker model the inner product can be written as an integral similar to the case for n = 2. Using this result we can prove the “small lemma” for any n as we did for n = 2. This implies the strong multiplicity one theorem for any n. Next we give the formula for recovering from its Whittaker model due to Jac- quet-Langlands, for GL(2, A): © oe) = 3 W4((8 O)e)- Now suppose m, 72 satisfy the hypotheses of the theorem. To prove the assertion, it is enough to produce a nonzero pe Vj [| Vz, since then the irreducibility of (a:,¥)) implies equality. Further, since B,\B, is dense in G,\G,, it is enough to pro- duce two functions (nonzero) g, € V, which are equal on B, (as usual B is the group of upper triangular matrices). From the properties of Whittaker models and («), it is enough to produce Whit- taker functions W/,, Wz such that 174((59)) = Wo((9)), x€ 4*. One can suppose such W, are of the form [] , and then it suffices to construct the appropriate W; ata finite number of places (by assumption). But then one can use the smalll lemma. ‘This type of argument was found independently here by Shalika and in Moscow. For 2 3, we need a similar small lemma (Gelfand-Kazhdan): Suppose k local, nonarchimedean, (xj, Vi), i= 1, 2, irreducible admissible representations with Whittaker models. There exist v, ¢ V, such that w(t ) = will $) allke GLO = 1. ‘One can then employ induction using arguments similar to the case n = 2, in order to prove the general case. It should be possible to prove this lemma also for k archimedean; then the restriction we made that S contains no infinite places could be removed. Now suppose G is quasi-split and satisfies the transitivity condition: T(A) acts transitively on [Te ssinplerae X4(A). Here T is a maximal k-torus in a Borel group, Xt = X, ~ {I} where X, is the root group associated to the simple root a. Define an automorphic cuspidal irreducible representation (x, V) to be hyper- cuspidal (degenerate cuspidal) if Wie) = Jy, PORE) de = 0 for all y ¢ V. Holomorphic cusp forms lifted from symmetric spaces which contain no copies of H = {Im z > 0} are of this type. A cuspidal automorphic form will be called generic if it is orthogonal to all hyper- cuspidal automorphic forms (under the usual scalar product focyc 9d de). Counterexamples to the Ramanujan conjecture given during this conference by Howe and the author are hypercuspidal forms [6]. The author does not wish to kill212 1. PIATETSKI-SHAPIRO all belief in the Ramanujan conjecture; he conjectures it to be true for the generic cuspidal automorphic irreducible representation Now I shall sketch the proof of the multiplicity one theorem for generic cuspidal automorphic forms. First, the uniqueness theorem for local Whittaker models is true [2]. But of course now the Whittaker function does not define an arbitrary cusp form uniquely. Now it follows immediately from the definition that a generic cusp form is uniquely defined by its Whittaker function. This implies multiplicity one just as before. It can be proved that for each quasi-split reductive group there exist generic cusp forms. It also can be proved that for such groups there exists a unipotent subgroup U such that fyjw, p(ug) du can be expressed in terms of the Whittaker function. Since for any group except GL(n) there exist hypercuspidal forms, we cannot of course expect to be able to recover ¢ itself from its Whittaker function. Details concerning this will be given in a forthcoming publication of Novodvorskii and the author. (Notes prepared by B. Seifert and L. Morris.) REFERENCES 1. I. M, Gelfand and D. I. Kazhdan, Representation of the group GL(n, K), where K isa local field, Lie Groups and their Representations (Proc. Summer School of the Bolya-Janos Math. Soc. Budapest, 1971) Halsted, New York, 1975. 2, J. A. Shalika, The multiplicity one theorem for GL(n), Ann. of Math. (2) 100 (1974). 3. H, Jacquet and R. P. Langlands, Automorphie forms on GL(2), Lecture Notes in Math., vol. 114, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1970. 4. 1.1. Piatetski-Shapiro, Euler subgroups, Lie Groups and their Representations (Proc. Summer School ofthe Bolya-Janos Math. Soc., Budapest, 1971) Halsted, New York, 1975. 8. S. I, Gelfand, Representations of the general linear group over a finite field, (Proc. Summer ‘School ofthe Bolya-Janos Math. Soc., Budapest, 1971) Halsted, New York, 1975, 6. R. Howe and I. PiatetskiShapito, 4 counterexample 10 the “generalized Ramanujan con- Jecture” for (quasi) split groups, these PRoceeDINoS, part 1, pp. 315-322. 7. R. P. Langlands, On the notion of an automorphic representation, these PROCEEDINGS, part 1, pp. 203-207. 8. I. M. Gelfand, M. I, Graev and I. Piatetski-Shapiro, Representation theory and automorphic functions, W. B. Saunders Company, 1969. Universtry oF TeL AVIVProceedings of Symposia in Pure Mathematics Vol. 33 (1979), part 1, pp. 213-251 FORMS OF GL(2) FROM THE ANALYTIC POINT OF VIEW STEPHEN GELBART* AND HERVE JACQUET Introduction. Suppose G is a reductive group defined over an A-field F, Pousy i8 the representation of G(4) in the space of cusp forms, and g is a well-behaved function on G(4). Then g defines a trace-class operator p...(p), and the goal of the trace formula is to give an explicit formula for this trace. In most cases, one takes p = T],g, and wants to compute tr pcug(p)in terms of local invariant distri- butions. Although it is desirable to have only invariant distributions, this is not necessary for all applications. In any case, contrary to common belief, the goal is not to express the trace in terms of characters of irreducible representations. Indeed the distribution g(e) always appears, and one is quite content to leave it as is. In the anisotropic case, Pau, is actually an induced representation. In this case a general technique—valid for all induced representations and all cocompact groups— gives the trace of ps,(y) in terms of local orbital integrals. In general, Posy is a subrepresentation of an induced one p. Our purpose here is to describe the analytic theory of the trace formula for forms of GLQ). Since the trace of f.u,(g) is always computed as the integral of the kernel which defines it, we need an explicit formula for this kernel. For GL(2) this turns out to be the kernel of p(y) minus the sum and integral of the product of two Eisenstein series. But since only the difference of these kernels is integrable— not one or the other—we need to use a truncation process. For this we closely follow J. Arthur’s exposition ({Ar 1] and [Ar 2}). Any improvement in clarity over earlier references (such as [DL], [JL], or [Ge)) should be credited to him. A large part of these notes—§§3 through 5—is devoted to the analytic continua- tion of Eisenstein series. In particular, nearly complete proofs are given for the analytic continuation, functional equation, and location of poles of the constant term of the Eisenstein series. This analysis enters precisely because we have to subtract off the continuous spectrum of (g) before we can compute its trace. §1 is included to show how easy things are when there is no continuous spec- trum. §8 is included to give some idea of the power and range of applicability of the trace formula; here discussions with D. Flath on his thesis [Fl] were invaluable. 1. Division algebras. First we derive a statement of the trace formula for a division AMS (MOS) subject classifications (1970). Primary 22E55; Secondary 10D99. Alfred P. Sloan Fellow. (© 1079, American Mathematical Society 213214 STEPHEN GELBART AND HERVE JACQUET algebra whose rank is the square of a prime. Then we give a simple, but in a sense typical, application. A. Some generalities. Let F denote a number field and H a division algebra of degree p? over H. The multiplicative group G of H may be regarded as an F-group whose center Z is isomorphic to F*. Set G = G/Z. If w is a character of F*\A® denote by L%w, G) the space of (classes of) functions f on G(A)such that ay fizz) = o@ fig), 7 € GF), z€ Z(A) and (2 |Ag)P dg < +00. Let 9. denote the natural representation of G(A) in L%(w, G) given by right trans- lation, Suppose now that g is a function on G(4) satisfying (13) Gg) = ops) for z in Z(A). Suppose also that ¢ is C~ and of compact support mod Z(4). More precisely, let c;, 1 Si S p?, be a basis of H over F. Then, for almost all v, the module generated over the ring of integers R, of F, is a maximal order O,, In particular, K, = Of is a maximal compact subgroup of Hs for almost all v. We assume that p(g) = [Tp,(2,) where, for each v, 9, is a C*-function of compact sup- port satisfying the analogue of (1.3); moreover, for almost all v, pABe) MG) if Bp = KpzZys ky € Ky 2 € Zy 0 otherwise. Then the operator ) alo) = f wept) de is an integral operator in L°(G(F)\G(A)) with kernel (1.5) Kay) = Dey). 16m) When x and y lie in fixed compact sets the sum in (1.5) is actually finite. Therefore K(x, y) is continuous. TueoReM (1.6). The operator p,() is of trace class. PRooF. Since G(F)\G(A) is compact, and K(x, ») is continuous, p,(y) is at least of Hilbert-Schmidt class. But g can be written as eff; with J, g; satisfying the same conditions as ¢ (except at infinity where f; may only be of class Cv with m large; ef. [DL, p. 199]). Thus pa() is a sum of products of Hilbert-Schmidt opera- tors, and hence is of trace class. Corottary (1.7). The representation p,, decomposes as a (discrete) direct sum of irreducible representations each occurring with finite multiplicity. Proor. According to (1.6) the operator p,(y) is compact for well-behaved ¢.FORMS OF GL(2) FROM THE ANALYTIC POINT OF VIEW 215 Thus the corollary follows from a basic result of functional analysis (cf. [GGPS] or (La 1} If we denote by m(z) the multiplicity (possibly zero) with which the irreducible representation z of G(4) occurs in p,, then we have (8) tr p(y) = E m(x) tr aly). Note that each component of p, perforce admits w as central character, i.e., x(2) = w(2)l, 2 € Z(A). Thus the sum in (1.8) need only be extended over repre- sentations of G(A) with central character w. On the other hand, we can also compute the trace of p,(,p) in terms of the kernel K, viz., (1.9) tr p(y) = — K(x, x) dx. B. The trace formula, From now on assume that p is a prime. Then any element of G(F) — Z(F) is regular. On the other hand, if 7 = e (in G(F)) then g(x! x)= le). Thus we may rewrite the right-hand side of (1.9) as. (1.10) Jacs x) dx = vol(G(F)\G(A)) ple) + fz gx 'yx) dx. re But every element ¢ of G(F) — Z(F) generates an extension L of F of degree p in H. Moreover, if ¢' is conjugate to € in G(F), then the extension L’ generated by é” is F-isomorphic to L, and there is an F-isomorphism of L’ onto L taking ¢' to €. Thus, if we let X be a set of representatives for the isomorphism classes of ex- tensions of degree p of F which imbed in H, any element 7 # e of G(F)can be expressed in the form () where ¢ is in L*]F* — {e}for some L in X and 7 belongs to a set of representatives for wisn (FALN\G) = LAGE). Note that the extension L ¢ X is uniquely determined by 7 and, if g, is the num- ber of F-automorphisms of L, 7 admits g, decompositions like («). Thus Ko, = 00+ Be EL oom tem), Gell — {ene LAG) x ~ and xcs x) dx = vol(G(F\G(A)) ole) + 3 (gi. zs 907 Ex) de. ice BZN In the last integral, the integrand depends only on the class of x mod L(A). Thus we also have fac. x) dx = vol(G(F)\G(A)) gle) + Zev wol(P(ALAL(A) (un) es J reat 9 6) de =F pL). ee216 STEPHEN GELBART AND HERVE JACQUET In this formula the measures on G(A) and F*(A)\L*(A) are chosen arbitrarily and L+(A)\G(A) is given the quotient measure. Suppose now that the measure on L+(A)\G(A) is a product measure; given for almost all v, is in K, and g,(;1 &x,) = O unless x, K,L$. Thus we have Joerg de = TT figo, 058880) de almost all factors being equal to vol(Ls\L3K,). Thus we have expressed tr p(y) in terms of the local invariant distributions per ple) and py + [irc pA(xe' EX.) dX, C. An application. Let H’ denote another division algebra of degree p? and sup- pose H’ and H both fail to split at the same set of places S. For v ¢ S there is an isomorphism H, — H,, which is uniquely determined up to inner automorphism. For almost all y, we may suppose that this isomorphism takes O, to a similarly defined maximal order 0, (and hence K, ,)*). The resulting iso- morphisms G, ~ G, then give rise to an isomorphism of the restricted product groups GS = [yzsG, and G’S = [],zsG, which is again determined up to inner automorphism. Let V denote the space of functions on Zw, G) which are invariant under Gs = Tees Gy. Since GS and G; commute, Vis invariant for the action of GS, Thus we have a representation g of GS on V and (similarly) representation a’ of G'S on V’. Via the isomorphism GS ~> G'S we may transport ¢' to a representation of GS which we again denote by o’. (Its class does not depend on the choice of isomor- phism.) TuoREM (1.12). Suppose «w, = 1 for all v S. Then the representations o and o' are equivalent. Proor. Let 0 = [es 0,be any function on G* satisfying conditions analogous to those satisfied by gin §1.A. To prove our theorem it will suffice to show that, (1.13) tr o(6) = tr 00). Indeed a basic result in harmonic analysis asserts that o is a subrepresentation of a’ if and only if (4) twa(fo(f)* s tr o'(Na(f)* for sufficiently many “nice” f. Cf. Lemma 16.1.1 of [JL]; it will suffice to apply (1.13) with @ = 6,» 6f and 6f(g) = 6(g"). To prove (1.13), extend @ to a function on G(A) by setting g(g) = Ips 0(g.) and extend @ similarly to g’ by identifying G’S with GS. Now take the volume of G, (resp. G.) to be one for each v ¢ S and the measure on G(A) (resp. G'(A)) to be a product measure. Furthermore, assume that the isomorphism G, -> G, takes the Haar measure of G, to the Haar measure of G,. Then we find that (15) tr ply) = tr o(0) (resp. tr 9p") = tr o'(@)). Thus (1.13) holds if and only if (1.16) tr p(y) = tr p.(y').FORMS OF GL(2) FROM THE ANALYTIC POINT OF VIEW 217 To prove (1.16) we apply the trace formula (1.11) as follows. Assume that the measure on F+(A)\L*(A) is a product measure so that - 1 4 Gorcorccn 029) 4 = (ILS, ape, HOE) A) TL vole A similar identity holds for G’, and the extensions of F which imbed in H or H’ are the same. Thus (1.11) implies that (1.17) tr p.(p) — tr pal’) = (¢ — €')O(e). Here ¢ = vol(G(F)\G(A)) and c’ is defined similarly. To prove the theorem it re- mains to show c = Suppose ¢ > c’. If 0 = 0, Of with Of(g) = 0,(g-), then the right side of (1.17) is strictly positive. So by((1.15)—and the result described by (1.14)—o' must be a subrepresentation of g, and the quotient representation = = o/o’ must satisfy the identity te(2(01) (0))*) = Ce — {O12 for all nice 0). This implies that the regular representation of GS is quasi-equivalent to x and hence that the regular representation of GS decomposes discretely. Since the same is then also true of the regular representation of each G,, v ¢ S, we obtain an obvi- ous contradiction. The assumption c < c’ yields a similar contradiction and the theorem is proved. Remark (1.18). Suitably modified, the proof above shows that G and G” have the same Tamagawa number. The restriction on q is not really necessary. 2. Cusp forms on GL(2). Henceforth G will denote the group GL(2). The center Z of Gis , re 0 Again Z = F* and we set @ = G/Z. We also introduce the subgroups o= (62) 4-2} »- (03), If g is a function on G(F)\G(A) we say that g is cuspidal if (ng) dn ge GA) Sein As in §1, we introduce a space L%w, G) and a representation p,. We denote by L§(«, G) the subspace of cuspidal elements in L(w, G). THEOREM (2.1). Let 4,9 denote the restriction of p, to the invariant subspace Li(w, G). Let p denote a C=-function which satisfies (1.3) and is of compact support mod Z(A). Then the operator 0.,o() is Hilbert-Schmidt. SKETCH OF PROOF. For each ¢ > 0, recall that a Siegel domain g in G(A) is a set of points of the form #=(0)(0 a)218 STEPHEN GELBART AND HERVE JACQUET where xis in a compact subset of 4, is an idele whose finite components are trivial and whose infinite components equal some fixed number u > ¢ > 0, ais arbitrary in 4*, b lies in a compact subset of 4+, and é is in the standard maximal compact subgroup K of G(A). If ¢ is sufficiently large then G(A) = G(F)g. For a proof of this fact see [Go 3). By abuse of language, if @ is a Siegel domain in G(A), we call its image in M(F)\G(A) a Siegel domain in N(F)\G(A). If ¢ is such a domain, we denote by Tw, ) the space of functions on Y such that fizg) = o(2)f(g) and Surreal f(g)? de < +00. Clearly Aw, G) can be identified with a closed subspace V of Lw, #) if is large enough. In this case there is a bounded operator with bounded inverse 4 from L%o, G) onto V. If fis in LXw, G) and g is as in Theorem (2.1), then pucoifis) =f Hx, fy dy wenteay with Hx y) = 3 ort gy). echt However, if fis actually cuspidal, we also have 22) colo te) = fils 940) ay with 2.3) Ax, y) =,.2, rt Ey) — Src tay) dn. Indeed f cuspidal implies To prove the theorem we need to estimate H(x, y). If xis in a fixed Siegel domain (of N(F)\G(A)) it is easy to see that A(x, ») = 0 unless y is in another such domain 9". Then using the fact that the term subtracted in (2.3) is precisely the Fourier transform of g(x~1Q #)y) at 0 we see that ff [Ho Pax dy < +00, ommnzcansy werzcane?) ie., H defines a Hilbert-Schmidt operator B from L%w, 3’) to LXw, Y). For a detailed discussion of this type of argument see [Go 1] or [La I]. Now enlarge #’ (if necessary) so that G(A) = G(F)g". Then 9, o(g) can be written as the composition of the injection L3(w, G) > L%(w, '), the operator B, the projection of L%w, ¥) onto V, and the operator A~, This proves p,,o(g) itself is Hilbert-Schmidt. CoroLtary (2.4). p.,o(g) is of trace class.FORMS OF GL(2) FROM THE ANALYTIC POINT OF VIEW 219 Proor. The conclusion of (2.1) is valid if y is highly (as opposed to infinitely) differentiable at infinity. Thus one argues as in §1.A (cf. (DL, p.199). Coroutary (2.5). The representation pq decomposes discretely with finite multiplicities. 3. P-series. Suppose f is a function on G(A) satisfying BD Snyzg) = wl) f(g) with n € N(A), 7 € P(F), and z € Z(A). Then we call the series G2) F@= XY firs) Pertaey a P-series, To study the convergence of such a series we need a well-known lemma. Let H(g) be the function on G(A) defined by ite=(07)(6 Lemma (3.3) (cF. (JL, P.197)). Fix a Siegel domain & and a positive number ¢'. Then the set of y in G(F) such that H(rg) 2 ¢' for some g & & is finite modulo P(F). From this lemma we see that if the support of fis contained ina set {(g:H(g) 2 c’} —in particular if it is compact mod N(A)Z(A)P(F)—then the series (3.2) is finite. Moreover, in the latter case, the function F has compact support mod G(F)Z(A). Our goal in this section is to analyze the orthocomplement of Li(o, G)in terms of these P-series. A. The scalar product of two P-series, First we compute the scalar product of a P-series with a function ¢ satisfying (1.1): OP= Jorerocq $F 48 eemoen =Srcorden? ned 1.8 crv nak = JE sO 09 ~f rmceo MOO ~Srernorwew® Srerua OF ies 1" J rmnarwca shoe where gy is the constant term of ¢ 63) $M) = J oyyeg $08 From (3.4) it follows that if ¢ is cuspidal then (g, F) = 0 for any P-series F.220 STEPHEN GELBART AND HERVE JACQUET Conversely, if ¢ ¢ Lu, G) is orthogonal to all P-series (with f of compact support mod N(A)P(F)Z(A)), then yy = 0 and ¢ is cuspidal. Thus the P-series (with f of compact support mod ...) span a dense subspace of the orthocomplement of Li(w, @). Now we compute the scalar product of two P-series. According to (3.4) we need first to compute the constant term of F. But by Bruhat’s decomposition for GL(2), FOG) = fg) + Lpewen Swrg) with w = (2 9). Thus Ful) =f Normalizing the Haar measure on N(A) by the condition vol(N(F)\N(A)) = 1 we see that ween D+ I sp yey lt BLOND) 66 Fula) = Sa) + £8) where Gn F@) =f, Pome) de. Thus 68) (Fi, = [fi led de + [Fi Fe) ae where both integrals extend over the space P(F)N(A)Z(A)\G(A). To further analyze formula (3.8) we need to carefully investigate the map f++ /’. Note that f” still satisfies (3.1). Note also that all the computations above are merely formal unless certain assumptions on f; and f2 are made to insure convergence. For instance, if both f, and f; have compact support (mod ...) then these computations are valid. Under these same conditions, however, the support of f; need no longer (in general) be compact. Another formal relation which is easy to prove is this: G9) Aico Fas) de = J He) F40) de. Indeed the left- (resp. right-) hand side of (3.9) may be written as Spores "O40 A (resp. Jocerzcanoca Silg)/elwg) dg) and these integrals are equal P(F)Z(A). B. Induced representations and intertwining operators. To investigate the map f+ f’(and the scalar product (3.8)) we need to perform a Mellin transform on the group Z(4)A(F)\A(A). Right now it will suffice to deal with a subgroup of this, group. Thus we let F:: denote the group of ideles whose finite components all equal 1 and whose infinite components all equal some positive number u (independent of the infinite place). By F(A) we denote the ideles of norm 1 and by A? (resp. 43) the group of diagonal matrices with entries in F(A) (resp. F). For convenience we assume that w is trivial on F::. We also normalize Haar measures as follows. ice w normalizesFORMS OF GL) FROM THE ANALYTIC POINT OF VIEW 221 The Haar measure on F%; is obtained by transporting the usual measure on Rs. through the map r+ ||. Thus tie a fe J,.fole dt =f. Recall that the measure on N(A) is chosen so that vol(N(F)\N(A)) = 1. On A¥ we select any Haar measure and give F*\4* the quotient measure, Then we use the isomorphism F*\4* = FS x F*\F(A) to get a Haar measure on FFA) (which in general will not have volume 1). We also use the isomorphism (f 9) + a to get ameasure on Z(4)\A(4). Finally we select measures on G(A) and K such that 01) f= ff Fuu/(O A Qe nse Note that vol (K) is not necessarily 1. Now for each complex number s we introduce a Hilbert space H(s) of (classes of) functions g on G(A) such that oan AC" pS) oot for a, 6¢ F,a¢ A*,u, ve FS, and x ¢ A, Such functions are completely determined by their restriction to the set of matrices of the form 1/2 ee) (3.12) g= ¢ yi ac FYA), ke K. For g to belong to H(s) we require that 6.13) Ge Sonsnca!?PL(G 1) 4a dk < +00 The restriction of g to matrices of the form (3.12) satisfies ev dca 1-46 96 9 each time a € F* and (f ) € A(4) () K. Moreover, the group G(A) operates on H(s) by right translation and the resulting representation is denoted z,. This re- presentation is continuous but not always unitary. It is, however, unitary when s is purely imaginary. We may think of the collection H(s) as a holomorphic fibre bundle of base C. The sections over an open set U of C are the functions y(g,s) on G(A) x U satisfying AUS fale] = oo) [oe Of course this bundle is trivial since every p in H(s) is uniquely determined by its restriction to the set of matrices of the form (3.12). Thus we may think of H(s) as the Hilbert space of functions (independent of s) satisfying (3.13) and (3.14)222 STEPHEN GELBART AND HERVE JACQUET Put another way, we may set H = H(0). Then every element y of H defines a sec- tion of our bundle over C, namely (g, ) + plg)H(gy. With this understanding let f be a function satisfying (3.1), say of compact sup- port mod N(A)Z(A)P(F). Then define the Mellin transform of f by f@s)= SA tg |e, Since the integrand has compact support, f clearly defines a section of our fibre bundle. The Haar measure is chosen so that [iq 9a L(g) = Yat with x any real number. Now it is easy to see that the first term of the inner product formula (3.8) is at On 1-1 ge SLi Legh FG Me] raat L_ ps (2 %\es]Al(a = 287 SSS All6 1) VA [G I) -s] eras ee Jo ie fl 9) do. Here /,(s) denotes the value of the function /\(g,s) at s and the scalar product (AG), F(—§)) is taken by identifying all fibres with H. Alternatively, observe that if p; is in H(s) and ge is in H(—s) then giz transforms on the left according to the modular function of the group N(A)Z(4)4=A(F). Thus if we set _ ‘a0 @19 (9 Sram bP PUG i) dea ing between H(3) and H(—5)such that we obtain a nondegenerate sesquilinear (3.16) (.@)p1 7-s(8)92) = (Pr 92). This is the pairing which appears in our formula. (For more details see [Go 2, pp. 1.24-1.26}.) Similarly we find that the second term of (3.8) is, exif" 9), fe) ae Here we must integrate on a line where /;(—5s) is given by a convergent integral, i.e., we must have x > 4. It remains then to compute /“(—s) in terms of f(s). For Re(s) > } we find that Pea = fe [(b elle ae = flere frfoGo tho 4FORMS OF GL(2) FROM THE ANALYTIC POINT OF VIEW 223 = flare f7](G ?) ee ela = flee 172 “me 0 idee = Jalr(o ides] (Recall that » was assumed to be trivial on F.5; therefore Alo |= 1G 4] for te Fé.) If we define an operator M(s) from H(s) to H(—s) by G17) M(s)p(g) = Svc lwng] dn when Re(s) > 4, we conclude that (3.18) f'(-s) = Ms) f(s). Summing up, we find that the scalar product of two P-series F,, Fz (with fi, fa of compact support) is given by the formula (Fi Fd = ghz UO Sa-9) as (3.19) + by J Mo. LA@) a ‘The integrals are taken over any vertical line with Re(s) > } and the pairings we have written are on H(s) x H(—s) and H(—s) x H(s) (or simply H x Hb). It is worth noting that 20) (MCs)pu 92) = (pr M(Dp2) for g, in H(s) and go in H(G). (This is analogous to the identity (3.9) and proved just the same way.) If we think of M(s) as an operator from H to H then (3.20) simply asserts that G21) M(s)* = MG). Note finally that if fis replaced by h + f(hg) then F (resp. /(s)) is replaced by its right translate, ie., by e(g)F (resp. 7,(g)/(s)). On the other hand, it is also clear that (3.22) M(s)x,(g) = =_(g)M(s). ‘These facts play a key role in the next section. 4, Analytic continuation of M(s). Our goal is to use the inner product formula (3.19) to construct an intertwining operator between a subrepresentation of p,and a continuous sum of the representations z, with s purely imaginary. To this end we need to analytically continue the operator M(s). Indeed the integration in (3.19) is224 STEPHEN GELBART AND HERVE JACQUET over a line Re(s) = x with x > 4. So if we want to rewrite this formula using purely imaginary s we need to know something about the poles of M(s).. A. Prelimminary rearks. Now it will be more convenient to replace z, and M(s) with the operators we get by performing a Mellin transform on the whole group Fs\* rather than just F. Let 7 = (, ») denote a pair of quasi-characters of F*\A* with po = w. Let H(z) be the space of functions on G(A) such that @» A(8 e[= wore | 4" ete and (4.2) fle dk < +0. Once more we can think of the collection H(7)as a fibre-bundle over the space of pairs 7. These pairs make up a complex manifold of dimension | with infinitely many connected components and our fibre-bundle is trivial over any such com- ponent because the character (§ $) -+ y¢(a)-(b) of A(A) () K is fixed there. In par- ticular, H(q) may be regarded as the subspace of functions in L2(K) such that eG) - novo when (§ 3) € K. In any case, we denote by z, the natural representation of G(4) on H(q). The fiber H(s) decomposes as the sum of the fibres H(q), with = (4, »), and ze va) = [al for a € Fs; the representation x, decomposes correspondingly as the sum of the “principal series representations z,”; see [Ge, p. 67). As far as pairings are concerned, we have a natural one between H(y)and H(~) defined by nod = J leat) ae As before, (r_()p1 92) = (pr. p-s(e-!)g2). Moreover, if we set 7 = (v, 1), then formula (3.17) defines an operator M(p) from H(q) to H(@) satisfying (4.3) M(q)x(g) = x9(8)M(q) and (4.4) (M@)p1 92) = (G1 MGYp2). 1); ef. formulas (3.20) and (3.22). In particular, if we identity H(q) with H@7~) and H() with H(G-*) (keeping in mind that 7 and 77 belong to the same connected component) then (4.4) reads (4.5) M(y)* = MG). Note that (3.21) is essentially a direct sum of identities like (4.5). To continue analytically M(q) we are going to decompose it as a tensor product of local intertwining operators and thereby (essentially) reduce the problem to a local one. B. Local intertwining operators. Let v be a place of F and F, the correspondingFORMS OF GL(2) FROM THE ANALYTIC POINT OF VIEW 225 local field. If 7, = (14, »,) is a pair of quasi-characters of Fs such that 44.», =o, we can form the space H(7,) analogous to H(z), the representation z,,, and the operator M(y,): H(q,) > H(7,) defined by 46) Comende)@) = J, of(6 i) ] 4 Since the group G, operates by right matrix multiplication on F, x F,, and the stabilizer of the line F,(0, 1)is the group P,, we may define global sections of the bundle H(y,) by the formula 7) 8,76) = aaa) age J,.210. Delo. |e ae Here L(s, 1,05") is the usual Euler factor attached to the character 451, a(x) = |x|, and Ois a Schwartz-Bruhat function on F, x F,. Recall that if 7 is a quasi- character of Fs, and f is Schwartz-Bruhat on F,, the integral [ps f(t) |1|*y(t) d*t = Z(f.yys)converges for Re(s) > 0(> 0ifyis unitary) and the ratio ZF, x, sY/L(s, x) extends to an entire function of s. This is Tate’stheory of the local zeta-function.) Thus the formula (4.7) actually makes sense for all 7 and indeed defines a section of our fibre-bundle. Now we-want to apply the operator M(7,) defined by (4.6) to an element of H(y,) given by the section (4.7). After a change of variables we get DF fp. Me Denne" dra. (48) Here f denotes the usual Fourier transform taken with respect to the fixed additive character 4,, and e(s, z, 4,)is an exponential function which also depends on ¢. If we define the Fourier transform of @ to be 6, ») = Jfoe ¥) bp (pu — xv) du dv we see that (4.8) can be written as the product of 10, 9) o Tae 0. noe Ge) and (4.10) Ltt aetay JO. Deles'20 | deat"(det Note that we pass from (4.7) to (4.10) by the substitutions y + 7, @ +6, and multiplication by w,(—1). Next we write 7, = (jt Yor fe = 118% ve = gave", where yy, and yp are characters. For Re s > 0, we can write M(p,) as the product of the scalar (4.9) with an operator R(7,) which (for each 7,) takes the element (4.7) of H(q,) to the226 STEPHEN GELBART AND HERVE JACQUET element (4.10) of H(,). But for Re(s) > —4, every element of H(q,) can be re- presented by an integral of the form (4.7) (JL, pp. 97-98)). An easy argument then shows that R(y,) extends to a holomorphic operator valued function of 7, in the domain Re(s) > —} which again takes (4.7) to (4.10). Moreover, from the obvious relations (7)~ = 7, (0°) = ©, and w}(—1) = 1, we find that (4.1) RGG.)RQs) = 1d. ‘Since (4.9) is clearly meromorphic, this also gives the analytic continuation of the operator M(7,) in the domain Re(s) > — }. Although we do not need to, we note that R(y,) (and hence M(7,)) extends to a meromorphic function of all y, (or s € C). It is important to note that the operator R(7,) is “normalized” in the following sense. If 7, is unramified then H(y,) (resp. H(j,)) contains a unique function g, (resp. $,) which is invariant under K, and equal to one on K,. Then, provided ¢, has order zero, (4.12) RO) Pe = Pur Moreover, R(q,) is unitary whenever 7, is unitary. Indeed if 7, = 7,1, the opera- tors M(y,): HQ.) > HG@,), o-1)MG@,): HG.) > H(,) are adjoint to one another. Therefore, since the scalar (4.9) changes to its imaginary conjugate times ,(—1) when 7, is replaced by 7, we conclude from (4.11) that R(q,)* = R(y, REMARK (4.13) (ON THE RANGE OF R(y,)). If v3! = a, then y, = y,a'/? and », = ucts"? with y2 = w,.In this case the space H(y,) consists of functions satisfying (6 de] = nla | $0. and the kernel of M(y,) (or R(y,)) has codimension one. The space H(7,) consists of functions o satisfying ol(6 Be] = mlebrores so the range of M(y,) (or R(y,)) must be the one-dimensional space spanned by the function g++ z,(det g). Moreover, for the sesquilinear pairing between H(y) and HG), (4.14) (Repr 92) = ev x2 det 8) (Gar 7° det 8), where c’ is a known constant. C. Global theory. Our task is to piece together the local intertwining operators ‘M(,) in order to analytically continue M(s). First we define an operator R(j) as the “infinite tensor product” of the local operators R(p,). If g in H(q) has the form TIy., with g, invariant under K, and equal to one on X, for almost all y, then R(q)g = Tl, RC.) Ge. Because each R(p,) is normalized (cf. (4.12)), R(q)p is indeed well-defined in H(). Moreover, we can write M(q) as = 0,0") at) MO) = Fee, wy RO This gives the analytic continuation of M(q) since the scalar factor in (4.15) has aFORMS OF GL(2) FROM THE ANALYTIC POINT OF VIEW 227 known meromorphic behavior and the operator R(y) is a meromorphic function of p. To get the functional equation of M(q) we use the functional equation of the L-function L(s, sy~). This allows us to write the scalar in (4.15) as (4.16) EA, wy) Li, wo") Therefore M(7) satisfies the functional equation (4.17) MGM) = 1d. (CE. (4.11),) By (4.5) we also have (4.18) M(n)* = Mor) ifn = Thus M(z) is unitary when 7 is unitary. Recall that R(y) also satisfies (4.17) and (4.18). ‘We sum up the analytic behavior of M(y) as follows. Write || = a‘ with t real. Then M(y) is meromorphic in the half-plane ¢ 2 0 andits only poles there are simple ones which occur for u = yo!/?,v = ya-!/?, y? = w. The residues are scalar multiples of the operator R(7) and the ranges are the one-dimensional spaces spanned by the functions g + (det g). Going back to M(s) we get (from (4.14): THeoREM (4.19). As a function of s the operator M(s) is meromorphic in the whole complex plane and satisfies the functional equation (4.20) M(—s)M(s) = Id. Its only pole in the half-plane Re(s) % 0 is at s = 4 and the residue there is such that (Re s2MQ)A).fA3) = EL Lib x © det) (Fa) x © det) where c is a known constant. The last assertion follows from (4.14). D. Analysis of the continuous spectrum. Suppose F,, Fyare two P-series belonging to fi, fa. We know that F; and F; lie in the orthocomplement of L4(w, G) and their scalar product is given by the formula (3.19). If we use the residue theorem, Theorem (4.19), and some simple estimates, we can shift the integration in (3.19) to the imaginary axis and write (FF) = ge F(A), fa) + (MON), LA—D)} dy (4.21) +e (AG xo det) (Fx). x + ded) Here the sum is extended over all characters , of F*\4* such that 7? = w and the scalar product is the pairing between H(4) and H(—4). (Note that since a is assumed to be trivial on F, so is z ify? = a thus zo det indeed belongs to H(— 4).) But (cf. (3.15)228 STEPHEN GELBART AND HERVE JACQUET (AQ. x ode) = f Fila) (det 8) de PERN WZ(ANGLAY =f Fi(e) z(det «) de ecm zu ain since F; is the P-series attached to f;. Therefore the second term in (4,21) can also be written as (4.22) “Zz (Fi x det) Fa, x edet), the scalar product now being taken in L%(c, G). Now note that (4.20) and (3.21) together imply that, for ye R, M(iy)*M(iy) = Id. In particular, M(s) is unitary on the imaginary axis and, if we set (4.23) aly) = HA) + M-) f(y), then (4.24) M(—iy)a(—iy) = aliy), and the first term in (4.21) can be written as (425) EG” Cauda, axl a: This is significant for the decomposition of p, because if we replace f, by h + Aig) then F, is replaced by p,(g)Fi, y+ S(iy) by y+ x(g)fCiy), and y + aliy) by y+ xhaliy). To sum up, let % denote the Hilbert space of square-integrable functions a on iR with values in H (i.¢., square-integrable sections of our bundle over iR) satisfying (4.24). Equip Y with the inner product (4.25) and let 2 denote the representation of G(A) on & given by x(g)a(iy) = ,(g)aliy). Because of (4.24), we may also regard as the space of square-integrable functions a(y) from R, to H, the scalar product being given by (a4, 49) = 25° (a0), ax) dy Thus z is a continuous sum of the representations z;,. For each x such that y? = w we let , denote the space of the one-dimensional representation g ++ y(det g). Then, since (F), F,) is the sum of (4.22) and (4.25), it follows that there is an isometric map (with dense domain) from (Lj)! to ¥ ® (®,L,). This map (given by F + (aliy), f(4))) extends by continuity to a map T from (L#)+ to a dense subspace of @ (®, #,) and, by the remarks above, it is also an intertwining operator. To conclude, we see that L%(w, G) decomposes as a direct sum E30, G) ® Leona, G) ® Li(w, G) where L3, is the space spanned by the functions (det g), ie., L2, is the space @Y,, and LZ: is isomorphic to # via the intertwining operator S: L2,,(w, G) + &. Moreover, (4.22) is the scalar product of the orthogonal projections of F, and Fy on Lz. Therefore ¢ = [vol(G(F)\G(A))]}"! and we have computed this volume.FORMS OF GL(2) FROM THE ANALYTIC POINT OF VIEW 229 5. Eisenstein series and the truncation process. Let P.,,, denote the orthogonal projection onto L%(«, G). Since we need an explicit formula for the kernel of the Hilbert-Schmidt operator Pous0u(p)Pcup We need an explicit description of the operator $ of §4. This description is given in terms of Eisenstein series. A. Eisenstein series. If is a section of the fibre-bundle H(s) we set (5.1) EQO,8)= DL ors, 8). repo) This series converges only for Re(s) > } and in general has to be defined by analytic continuation. Recall that if f satisfies (3.1) and has compact support mod N(A)Z(4)P(F) then Sg) = Oni) fz42 f(g, 8) ds. Interchanging summation and integration we see that the P-series F defined by fis given by 62) FQ) = at J" BUC.) a provided x > }. Thus the functions of a dense subspace of (Lf) are “continuous sums of Eisenstein series”. However, as before, to obtain a useful formula we must analytically continue E and shift the integration in (5.2) to the imaginary axis. Since Eis a P-series, its constant term is easily computed (cf. (3.6) and (3.7)): Ey(g(s) 8) = o(8s 8) + Folwng, s) dn or 6.3) En(9(s), ) = p(s(g) + [M(s)e(s)(g). In both equations, Re(s) > 4. To analytically continue E we shall primarily deal with sections obtained from identifying H(s) with H. In other words, if te H = H(0), we define a section A(s) by the formula (6.4) H(g, 5) = h(g)H(g). The corresponding Eisenstein series will be denoted E(A(s), 2). B. Properties of the truncation operator. We shall use the truncation operator to obtain the analytic continuation of E. If ¢ > 1 we let y. denote the characteristic function of [c, +0). For any function p on G(F)\G(A) set (5.5) Arps) = 9(@)— 31 pulradze(H(r)). poe) The second term here is a P-series attached to a function with support in the set {g: H(g) > c}. Thus ifg is in a Siegel domain the series has only finitely many terms (cf. Lemma (3.3). If g is a cuspidal function, i.e., py need to appeal to the following lemma Lemma (5.6) (cr. (DL, Pp. 197). If there is ag in G(A) such that H(g) > 1 and H(rg) > 1 then y belongs to P(F). 0, then clearly Asp = g. In general, we230 STEPHEN GELBART AND HERVE JACQUET This lemma shows that, for a given g, the series in (5.5) has at most one term for ¢> 1. In particular, Ags) = 9(8) — pula z(H(g)) if H(g) > Le > 1, = (8) — pu(g) if H(g) > ¢ > 1. Now let g be a Siegel domain and @ the set of g in g such that H(g) S c. Then Qis compact (mod Z(A)) and, if ¢ > 1, Arp is given on Y — Q by the second for- mula in (5.7). Thus A°g(g) is bounded on Y — under very mild assumptions on - For instance, this is the case if g is the convolution of a “slowly increasing” or square-integrable function on G(F)\G(A) with a C*-function of compact support. Actually (5.7) will then be “rapidly decreasing”. On the other hand, if @ is any compact set, then (5.7) (5.8) Arglg) = lg) for ge Mand c large. Indeed suppose g ¢ Qand A*p(g) # pg) with c > 1. Then there is a finite non- empty set of elements 7 of P(F)\G(F) such that H(g) > ¢ > 1 (cf. Lemma (3.3) again; this finite set depends on @ but not on c). Since the resulting element 7g must belong to a compact set mod P(F)N(A)Z(A), and since H is continuous, we must have H(rg) < co. But if'c > cp we get a contradiction. Therefore (5.8) must hold. In other words, A‘ -> uniformly on compact sets as ¢ > +00. We also want to point out that AF is a continuous hermitian operator on L*(w, G): (5.9) CUrpn 92) = (pr Age). Indeed the left-hand side is (p}, 2) minus the scalar product of a P-series with go. In particular, by (3.4) the left-hand side equals (10) — Fp vcwzcarcen PME HCE) PB) Similarly the right-hand side is (py, a) — Jor, n(@)#a. n(g)ze(H(g)) dg; since 7. is real the desired equality follows. We also have, for ¢ > 1, (5.10) (l= A9p1, A*ge) = 0, ie., A® is an orthogonal projection in L%(w, G). Indeed (1 — A*)p1 is also a P-series. So the left-hand side of (5.10) is Sruarinzarernt MOH) (fren 108) But y.(H(g)) = 0 unless H(g) > ¢ > 1, in which case the inner integral is (by (5.7)) - c dr 0 Greer (208) ~ Pa.) ae and (5.10) follows. (In fact (5.10) is sometimes true even when g; does not belong to Lo, G).) C. Analytic continuation of Eisenstein series. Using the truncation operator (5.5) we can write our Eisenstein series asFORMS OF GL(2) FROM THE ANALYTIC POINT OF VIEW 231 AE(W(S), 8) + SL Ew(h(s), 78)x(H(r8))- PETG) (5.11) EAs), g) ‘The second term on the right side is the P-series attached to a function with support in the set {g: H(g) = c}. Thus, as noted before, for g in a Siegel domain the second term has only finitely many terms. In particular, it represents a meromorphic func- tion of s whose singularities are at most those of M(s) (cf. (5.3)). ‘On the other hand, the first term on the right side of (5.11) is initially defined only for Re(s) > 4. However, since it is square-integrable (cf. (5.7) and the remarks immediately following it), it will suffice to continue it analytically as a L%w, G)- valued function. Thus we need to examine the inner product (3.12) (A'E(h(8))), AEC). By (5.10) (which is true in this case) the inner product (5.12) is just (En(s,)), AE(le{&:))), which, since ACE is a difference of P-series, we compute (using (3.4)) to be Scarrcrecoroca =*(nls0- 8) le, 52) ~ Eyles) )z(H(8)} de. Now recall that Ey is given by (5.3) with g(g, s) = h(g, s) and 1a x), .)— | jragl(2 %\] ACS ie s]= leben fe] for 1¢ Fé, a€ F(A), and k € K. So by Iwasawa’s decomposition, we compute (Eh, (5), ECO) 6.13) = (hy laden — (Es, MisaV)e 0} —h— + (Chay MEDI) — (MUshy ha)? Here Re(s:) > Re(s:) > 4. Note that the right side of (5.13) is a meromorphic function of (s,,2) which seems to have a singularity on the line s, + s = 0. However, by (3.21) and (4.20), the expression in the first bracket vanishes precisely along this line. Similarly the ex- pression in the second bracket vanishes when s; — s2 = 0. Thus we conclude that (5.13) is meromorphic in 5, s2 with singularities at most those of M(s,) and M(s,). In particular, for s = sy = ~s, 4 0, (AE(A(3)), AE (he —3))) = (hy, haNlog c + (M(—s)M"(s)hy, he) (5.14) + {Cay M(— aha) = (MCs), hn)er*) 9 Now suppose that for hy = /p = hy the right-hand side of (5.13) is analytic in the polydisc |; — 59] < R, |s2 — so] < R, while £(4(s)) is holomorphic in some small disc centered at sp. Then the double Taylor series of the left-hand side converges in this polydise. Since232 STEPHEN GELBART AND HERVE JACQUET | Zapf = (25 see, 2% «e0«)) = aahaag (APU), APE) it is easy to conclude that the Taylor series of A°E(h(s)) converges in the disc |s— 59] < R,ie., AE(h(s)) is analytic in this disc. Thus we conclude A:E(h(s)) (and hence E(h(3), g)) is meromorphic in Re(s) > 0 with singularities at most those of M(s). ‘Note that in (5.13) and (5.14) we needed to identify H(s) with H to define the scalar products and the derivative M's) of M(s).. ‘Summing up, we know that if g(s) is any meromorphic section of our bundle H(s) then E((s),) is defined as a meromorphic function of s (at least for Re(s) = 0). Moreover, (5.15) E(M(s)9(s), 8) = ECs), 8). Indeed since g(s) belongs to H(s) and M(s)p(3) belongs to H(—s), the funetion > Ex(M(s)p(s),g) is equal to M(s)p(s) + M(—s)M(s)p(s) = p(s) + M(s)p(s) = Ew(y(s), 8). Thus Ey(M(s)p(s), 2) = En(9(s), g)si.e., the difference between the two sides of (5.15) is a cuspidal function. Therefore, since any P-series (or its analytic continua- tion) is orthogonal to all cuspidal functions, this difference vanishes as claimed. In general, say for a group whose derived group has /-rank one, the same facts can be proved. The only difference is that the operator M(s) may have a finite number of poles and these poles are not necessarily known. Nevertheless, the op- erator M(s) still similarly controls the analytic behavior of the Eisenstein series Cf. [Ar 1] and [La 1). D. The kernel of p.(g) in Lene. Suppose F\(g) is a P-series attached to f, (of com- pact support mod Z(4)N(A)P(F)). Our immediate goal is to prove that, for all heH, (5.16) OSD = 5 J ocosrcarcen OW BF C@) de for almost every y. Here E(h(iy), g) is defined by analytic continuation and SF\(iy) = ay(iy) as in (4.23), Note first that if F is the P-series attached to fy we get from (5.2) that «F=f LF ALG, &) as} Fe) de Geena bo mi L pee : <= ds E ), Fr ds ni fy Vecews (A) s)Fx(s) dg for Re(s) = x > 4. Shifting the integration to the imaginary axis we then get 61D Fe = ef" ar fA. 2Fder de + BF OG PD But (5.15) says that the integral in (5.17) is unchanged if we replace f,(iy) by ‘M(iy) f (iy) and then change y to —y. Thus, with a,(iy) as in (4.23), formula (5.17) readsFORMS OF GL(2) FROM THE ANALYTIC POINT OF VIEW 233 oF = a [af Ha, FW de + ‘ef (Fi OU Fa). On the other hand, computing the inner product as in (4.21), we also have FD = 4 J a), ax) & + 6 Y Fu whe Fd. Thus we conclude that 6.18) J Coty, SED) = FJ" {Ppp Elato> #) Fle) de} dy for all a in %. This formula is then also true for any square-integrable function a(y) with values in H since both sides remain unchanged when a(iy) is replaced by 4(a(iy) + M(—iy)a(—iy)). Thus we may take a(iy) = c(y)h(iy) with ca scalar function and h a “constant section” to conclude from (5.18) that (5.16) indeed holds. Now extend the map S: L2,,(w, G) + ¥ to S: LAw, @) > # by setting it equal to 0 on Lf and L2(w, G). Then S*S is the orthogonal projection of L'(w, G) onto L2,y. Since S is an intertwining operator, S*Sp,(g)S*S = S*x(y)S for any C= function g of compact support. Therefore, if F, and F, are in Lw, G) then (S*Sp.()S*SF,, Fz) = (S*x(p)SFi, Fx) = (x(y)SFi, SF2) (5.19) ae = 2 If) Gesosr oy, sry) a. Before applying the identity (5.16) we make the following observation. Although (5.16) was proved only for F; in the orthocomplement of L%(w, G) it is actually true for all F, in L(w, G). Indeed if F is in L%(w, G) then SF = 0 by definition. On the other hand, since every Eisenstein series is orthogonal to any cuspidal function (in the domain of convergence at first but for all s by analytic continuation), the right side of (5.16) is also identically zero. If (,} is an orthonormal basis for H we can finally apply (5.16) to (5.19) to get (S*Sp.(9)S*SF;, F) = £7 E Gl@SAW), 02) Ox, SFAO)) dv 1 : i. wd j Fils) E (x5 (p)aLiv), 8) de J: £(0,(0), W) ah with g, h in G(F)\G(A). Interchanging the integrations and summations then yields (S*Sp(p)S*SF;, F) (5.20) to 7 = Jf Cerra ae am S - [*_ B(OH) OAD), 2) a So if we let Pray denote the projection S*S onto Liq we find that the kernel of234 STEPHEN GELBART AND HERVE JACQUET Pens fal P)Pcon is precisely the expression in brackets in (5.20). Alternately, since EEQ)a = T(AMY)Pa, Dp) Bp, we also have 21) Koll 8) = ye EJ” (slp &) ECO). 1 E(OMD). 8) de On the other hand, if P,, is the projection onto LZ, then the operator P,,0,()P.p is defined by the kernel Kt g) = WOlGENGAN 3 nC aC@) f oedgldets) de. The operator p,(p) of course is still defined by the kernel K(h, g) = Dac pla). ‘Thus we conclude that (Pay eA VPeag CH) = [Keays 8)F(8) dey where Keuss(h, 8) = K(h, 8) ~ Keons(hs 8) — Kull 8). 6. The trace formula. Suppose ¢ is a C*-function on G(A) which has compact support mod Z(A) and satisfies (1.3) and the conditions immediately following it. ‘Then we have observed that Pep Pu(P)Peusp is of Hilbert-Schmidt class and also of trace class. In fact the technique we used can also be used to show that the kernel Kap i8 square-integrable, continuous, and integrable over the diagonal (cf. (DL) Moreover, 6.1) tr(PearpalP)Peasp) Socecas Kosa *) anon What we are going to do now is give an explicit formula for the right-hand side of (6.1). Note that for fin L8(w, G)*, { Keug(%, ))f0) dy = 0. Thus for each x, the function y + K(x, y) is orthogonal to Lio, G)* and hence in L%(@, G). In other words, itis a cuspidal function of y. If we denote by Aj the truncation operator with respect to the second variable then (62) KeoseslXs V) = MiKeasg( Xs Y) = AEK(%, Y)— Ai Keone(% Y)— ABKag(% Y). But one can show that each term in (6.2) is integrable over the diagonal. Thus (63) Poa PalP)Paug) = JABKC 2) dx ~ J AKonl 8) dx — FARK (4,2) a We shall content ourselves with computing each of these integrals. Note that since the left-hand side of (6.3) does not depend on c, we can let c tend to +00 and—when computing—ignore all terms which tend to zero. A. Contribution from the kernel (3K. When x = y, ASK(x, ») is by definition AK) = 3) ptr) Gin) (6.4) Gyre 2 2 Tre ILHED, ccohten Jenene Let us recall the following lemma: Lemma (6.5) (CF. [Ge, P. 201). 1f Q is a compact set in Z(A)\G(A) then there existsFORMS OF GL(2) FROM THE ANALYTIC POINT OF VIEW 235 number dp with the property that if 7 in G(F)and n in N(A) are such that x-Y7nx€Q for some x in G(A) with H(x) > dg then y € PCF). We shall apply this to the support @ of p. After changing 7 to €~!y we may write the second term in (6.4) as (6.6) dn J POE 1k) xe( HEX) Here we need only sum over those 7 for which there is x, €, such that g = x and g-tyng is in Q. Thus if c is sufficiently large (p being given) it follows from Lemma (6.5) that 7 must belong to P(F), ic., if c is large enough, we need only sum over those 7 which lie in the image of P(F) in G(F). But for such 7 we can write (6.1) r= withy= ¢ ) and ye MF). Thus in (6.6) we can combine the integral over N(F)\N(A) with a sum over N(F) and rewrite (6.4) as (6.8) rein m- 3 Xi pe pnx)y¢( HEX) dn cepdnow Jw a with pas in (6.7). Now we break up the sums in (6.8) and write ASK(x, x) = (6.9) gle) (6.10) + Lyx) (y Felliptic) a FB Ml Bed un 8 IMU HED) dh (y nilpotent regular) a 12-1 0\, ». er i eae ree Sarco 25 AG pee eG) ae (r hyperbolic regular). Here 7 Felliptic means 7 is not G(F)-conjugate to anything in P(F); 7 nilpotent regular means 7 is conjugate to a nontrivial element of N(F) and 7 F-hyperbolic regular means 7 is conjugate to some (§) with a # 1 in F*, One can see that each of the terms (6.9)—(6.12) is integrable over G(F)\G(A); our task is to evaluate the resulting integrals. The integral of (6.9) is clearly (6.13) vol(G(F)\G(A)) 9(@)- As for (6.10), it has compact support mod G(F). Indeed if g(x~! 7x) # O then x- 7x belongs to 2 = support(y). So since 7 is elliptic, Lemma (6.5) implies H(x) < dp. The integral of (6.10) over G(F)\G(A) is236 STEPHEN GELBART AND HERVE JACQUET (6.14) S, sencen 2M de (relic) and this can be transformed further just as in the division algebra case. In 6.11) we can write 7 in the form 7 = E16 Dé with €¢ P(F)\G(F), 7 # 0. Thus (6.11) takes the form coPboin PEO Tee] Jy gh ME HED ae which we now have to integrate over G(F)\G(A). This is the same as the integral over P(F)Z(A)\G(A) of (6.15) Zell - f of 6 4) eH) au. To evaluate this integral we shall use Poisson’s summation formula, Set (6.16) FQ) = Se a ae so that F(x) is a Schwartz-Bruhat function on 4. Using Iwasawa’s decomposition we get that the integral of (6.15) over P(F)Z(4)\G(A) is, 17) Gone BPO -FOxAalDle\"} Ja dra Using Poisson’s summation formula we find this is f vad FD) al dea + x F'n) da + FO) Salt ~ xa This shows that the integral converges. The term involving /(0) depends ‘on c and equals (log c) F (O)vol(F*\F%(A)).. For Re(s) > 1 we also have J, Flat a= J Sania} aa =f io(GFer)lak asf (Zhe )|aln aa telat & 70 1) da — F(0) f |a| da. + FOS, Here each term is analytic at s = 1 except the term involving #(0) which equals (FO vol(F*\F°A))/s — 1. Thus we conclude that (6.17) equals “tava — FOO) | |altdra fp(f Fool aa) + (log ¢) F(O)vol(F*\F°A)) where the symbol fp. means f.p.(. = value at 1 of {J4e F(a)|al* dsa — principalFORMS OF GL(2) FROM THE ANALYTIC POINT OF VIEW 237 part at 1}. Changing ato a~ inthe “f-p. integral” we get (finally) that the integral of (6.11) is ref SLC 1Yo 1X 1) lat eae + (log evol(F*\F%A)) f.5.de 6 al dx dk. Now we deal with the term (6.12). In this term we can write 7 in the form = £16 ))€ with in A(F)\G(F), ain F*,a # 1. But when varies through a system of representatives for A(F)\G(F) we obtain each 7 twice since a 0 10)_ (a0) ig 1 =(Oa)=(0 9) ne ‘Thus the first term in (6.12) is 1 -ag-i(a 0 Dean BPE 1] at dre : PenBein Sin SA EG te} The integral of all of (6.12) is therefore the integral over G(F)\G(A) of ze -ig-1,-1( 0 ser Bein Bin EATS GE Ie] - -1g(@ pa scram Syn AEG 1 mee este). Making the change of variables on N(A) given by (IGT wen we see that the integral of (6.12) over G(F)\G(A) equals the integral over P(F)Z(A)\G(A) of L r. 0 ay if 23,2, os 1] ~ Sacg 2 AG 9 et09) an To compute this last integral we have to first integrate over N(F)\N() and then over N(A)A(F)Z(A)\G(A). The integration over N(F)\N(A) gives a a he | ~ Grea Bor Ap tte a and the subsequent integral over N(A)A(F)Z(A)\G(A) is the same as the integral of (6.18)238 STEPHEN GELBART AND HERVE JACQUET (6.19) DofeG Ye (4 - Zune) a over A(F)Z(A)\G(A). Note now that the first factor in (6.19) does not change when x is replaced by wx but the second factor does. In any case, w normalizes A(F). Thus we see that the integral of (6.12) is also the integral over A(F)Z(A)\G(A) of 2 Ede isle = x H@)) ~ x(HOwx))). Using Lwasawa’s decomposition we get that this integral is u —1y-i(t 0 Sno BOE "| (Fog (l= aellal = zeal) a) ae But c > 1 and H(wn) S 1. Therefore in (6.20) the integrand in the inner integral vanishes unless c“14H(wn) < |al < c in which case it equals 1. Thus the integral of (6.12) over G(F)\G(A) is (log vol PVF) f Soca 2 x ge 15° f a dn = 5 vollF\FOA) f Goce ae ne a log Hiwnk) dn dk Summing up (6.13), (6.14), (8.16), and (6.21), we get (6.20) (6.21) PROPOSITION (6.22). Jakes 9) as = voI(GENGAV GE) +9 a, aye 8O UD AE 62) +0 f oremaen 0 1) (624) + dog ewol(rs\%ca)) ff 2, “ tea(S Jana (6.25) = pvolers\nca)) f Svco Ear in Oak at tog H(wnk) da dk. REMARK. The term (6.24) depends on c but tr “ does not, Thus we can expect (6.24) to cancel with another term later on. B. Contribution from the continuous spectrum. Recall that Rael I) = A8{ 4 DF sls 0.EOAG), 8) £( 00), 4. It is not hard to see that this also equalsFORMS OF GL(2) FROM THE ANALYTIC POINT OF VIEW 239 4 EJ O.SE(OM) 8 AE(OAD), 1 dy. So taking it for — that we can interchange orders of integration, we find ots xdx = BES 00 00) 4 Fg aug EO) YAECOM), 2) Note that the inner integral here has already been computed in §5 (cf. (5.14) with Iy(s) =Dq(5), fg(S) = 9,(s)). Plugging in (5.14) then gives JAiReouls 3) de 626) = [89.3 F" CeilQ)p 0.) Ou 09 dy (627) EP” MM Wr. 0) slp 00) dy 628) + ge x J eso, 0) {O0.MOr0) So After exchanging 5 and f the term (6.26) can also be written (log ¢/2x)- Jeo tr zy(p) dy. But xj, is an induced representation whose trace is easily computed to be wt I) J Fin Se Decl So after using the Fourier inversion formula we find that (6.26) precisely equals (6.24), ie, it cancels (6.24) just as expected. Now rewrite (6.27) as a (M00 55°} (te f ert) dn (629) = Jey Wrz 5(0)) a. As for (6.28), it can be written as 4 BI {estos Moray So — esl) M(—1)0,) Si} dy or civ if -2iy oH (M(—iy)m()» 3) “ dy (6.30) ty Fe BI MH0)s MOND ~ (0p M(—DVOD} Sa: But the last term here is the Fourier transform of an integrable function (namely L(HislG)Op MCiy)O,) ...) at log cf (cf. Lemma 9.14 of [Ge)). Thus it tends to zero ‘asc —» +00, To evaluate the first term we need the following lemma:240 STEPHEN GELBART AND HERVE JACQUET Lemma (6.31). If F is continuous on R, and F, F are integrable, then -2aisy F()) dy = 2xiF(0). Proor. Set G(x) JE. (ee —e ~*29/y))F(y) dy. Then GO) GQ) = 2nt foes + e-etn) F(y) dy = 2ni(F(x) + F(—2)). Therefore G(x) = ani f” (F+F(-9) dt =2if' FOa for x > 0, Soasx + +00, G(x) tends to 2xiF(0). Applying Lemma (6.31) to (6.30) we conclude that (6.28) tends to (6.32) ay (MO)zo(p)Op, Ds) = 4 tr MO)ro(y) asc +00. C. Trace formula. We leave it to the reader to check that J Akos xdx Rots x) de = WoIGRVGAN? ZS fecoxeo dx as ¢-» +00. Therefore, by combining (6.3), Proposition (6.22), (6.26), (6.27), and (6.32) we obtain TueoreM (6.33) UF PousglP) + tt Pog) = VOl(GF)\G(A)) p(e) * Jeucrnls a9 799 63) + J ronmow A (0 FI Yolk (3 {)nt joe Hlwnk] dn dk wena (635) = p votre f (63) + Jon wf) ay (6.37) — Ete(MOa0(¢)). Here the f.p. term is computed as the value at s = | ofFORMS OF GL(2) FROM THE ANALYTIC POINT OF VIEW 24 } Recall also that we have identified all fibres H(s) with H in order to define M's) = Mids. 7. A second form of the trace formula, Our next goal is to express the right-hand side of (6.33) in terms of loca! distributions, most of them invariant. This involves replacing the Mellin transform on Fi; by a Mellin transform on F*\F*(A), the fiber bundle H(s) by the bundle H(z), and the operator M(s) by the operator M(y). To express the right-hand side of (6.33) as a sum only of invariant distributions entails applying a form of Poisson summation to some nonsmooth functions. This analysis is carried out in §7 of {La 2] but is not needed for the application we have in mind. A. Normalization of Haar measures. We normalize the Haar measure on A* as follows. Select (in any way) a nontrivial additive character g = xg, of F\A. For each place v let dx, be the self-dual Haar measure on F, with respect to ¢,. ‘Then the Haar measure we take on F* is d*x, = L(1, 1,)dx,/|x,|. Note that on A the Haar measure dx = @dx, is self-dual. On 4* the (normalized) Tamagawa measure is {Jder(o Deller da dk — principal part at s = (ly ia ® ax, where (7.2) aa= ta (s — DLs, 1p). The map x + |x| allows us to identify F°(4)\4* with Ri. The Tamagawa measure on F°(A)is such that the quotient measure d*x/ (on F°(A)\A* or Ré)is dt/t and— as shown in Tate's thesis— 73) vol(F*\F%(A)) = To define the Tamagawa measure on G(A) we select in any way an invariant differential form q of degree 3 defined over F. In particular, we may take « to be the form whose pull-back through the map xn 10 i)G 1) is the form (daja) dx dy. Then for f = [TT f, on G(A), Jrerde = [r@loe)| = Tf Kedloe| = WSC NO TG. Depa oe On the other hand, the Haar measure on K is normalized by the condition 3) Jrerde = ff (8 9)(6 fe era a. (7.4)242 STEPHEN GELBART AND HERVE JACQUET Similarly the Haar measure on K, is defined by ) freed ae = §[(%5 (6 Pho dra dre ‘Then a simple computation shows that an VOIK) = 10, pater 4) Since dk = 2.1 ®, dk, wealso have os) VMK) = 19-1). Te Ga)” Now we replace the Mellin transform on F%, (introduced in §3) by a Mellin transform on 4*, namely Feoe) = fA (6 Qe pr@lals ara ‘Then formula (3.19) should be replaced by iF) = hp DY Sie, Lega) ds (7.9) wo ; tay DP ner 800-9 fly feta) ds Here y runs through the set of characters of F+() trivial on F*F; cf. (Ge, p. 167]. B. The “f.p.” integral. In order to compute (6.34) we have to remove from J gk7G DAI \al' dea dk the principal part at s = 1 and then set s = I. So first we write this integral as the product L(s, 1-)6(s) where =. fpa(l a’ | sd (7.10) 09) = Ty SG fk ale dra a At s = 1 the function 6(s) is holomorphic. On the other hand, L(s, Ip) = Hills — 1) + do +. Therefore the f.p. integral is 2,0'(I) + 2g0(1). But dta= (Qa) @ da, and dk = 1, ® dk,. So for Re(s) > 1, 068) = Tggty ol e'(b 1) ll ata de and since almost all factors here are equal to one, 00) = TD paige Fol Qe GG NC0 1)(Ge Bh [lal aya, = Weatty essestl "(0 1) Le., 6(1) is the product of the orbital integral for (}}) with a convergence factor (which is “missing” in the original f.p. integral) Similarly, taking the derivative of 0(s) ats = 1, we getFORMS OF GL(2) FROM THE ANALYTIC POINT OF VIEW 243 ow =5Tl santleG 1)8| ee a we eau Gy a «Sel Joleai(o 1) asl arauit6s, 1. Here the sum is extended over all places u, but only finitely many have a nonzero contribution. C. Computation of (6.35). Recall that vol(F*\F%4)) = 1, dk = 21 @ dky dn = @ dn,, and H(g) = T1,H(g,) where Hl 8] “EE I fol folic y ( enh, [loo Ha [wn,) dn, Thus (6.35) is equal to =2 1G Q)uke egal, or (7.12) Pz ou folen( 1 0, Ose |aee fed 85°(6 0 1) ates) de where uf (6 B00 TE] = Hoe Halon, re ANG, Since 1, vanishes on K,, the sum above has only finitely many nonzero terms. D. Computation of (6.36) and (6.37). To begin with, (6.36) can be written as ie z J Men) 1M") dy where 9 = (za, y-!wa™), m, is the representation of G(4) on H(7), and the sum is over all characters z of F*\A* whose restriction to F: is trivial The derivative is defined by M'()p = (dids)M(nip ify = (ya’, x twa~*) and |x is independent of s. (To define the derivative we have once again trivialized the fibre-bundle.) Since M(x) = m(q) ®, Ri(q.) (where m(y) is the scalar described by (4.15) we get (by taking the logarithmic derivative) that M'@)MAG) = ml + LD Rd RAqy) ® by But if 4 = @, A, where A, is an operator on H(y,) then tr(A) = [], tr(A,). Thus (6.36) is equal to ie Sf” monte ay (7.13) = FL LY Mee.) (RR Ondz—(00) a. oe At I) ico v0244 STEPHEN GELBART AND HERVE JACQUET Recall that if p = 1 on K, then R(,)p = ¢ for all y,. Thus R’(y,)p = 0, and the sum above once again has only finitely many nonzero terms. As for (6.37), we write it as (Mz, “er a,0(9))- E. Summing up. We have that tr peus(9) + th pop(p) is equal to the sum of vol(G(F)\G(A)) 9(@), @) pletra) dg ZS and a complementary term. As in the case of division algebras,(+) can be expressed in terms of local elliptic orbital integrals of the form So, cep, P18) Bory elliptic. ‘The complementary term can be expressed explicitly in terms of the following local distributions: (7.14) Senne, 870 18] 480 (7.15) Jac. f 6 ) ee] Aen 1.16) tr m(0.), (2.17) 4 ney folao(s (6 ai aa dea, dk, 18) Joler(G Q)eelmledde, (#1) and 19) te Ri Rote g (Po))- uutions (7.14) and (7.15) are orbital integrals. The distributions (7.16) are invariant and can also be computed in terms of orbital integrals (cf. [DL] for example). The distributions (7.17)—(7.19), however, are not invariant. F. A special case. The distributions (7.14)—(7.16) enjoy the following property. Suppose (7.20) Sasa of e-(6 oe) da=0 for all a # 1, ice, the orbital integrals of p, vanish for all regular hyperbolic elements. Then each of the distributions (7.14)—(7.16) vanishes. Indeed there is nothing to prove for (7.15), and (7.16) is an integral of orbital integrals of this type. As for (7.14) we note that [1-2 dee? eae. faler(s (6 te | dg =FORMS OF GL(2) FROM THE ANALYTIC POINT OF VIEW 245 ice., the nilpotent orbital integral is a limit of hyperbolic orbital integrals. It follows that if (7.20) is satisfied for a certain place u, then the sums in (7.11), (7.12), and(7.13) reduce to the term involving u = u,. On the other hand, tr x,(9) vanishes. Thus we have: THEOREM (7.21). Suppose condition (7.20) is satisfied for two places uy # uy. Then (7.11)—(7.13) vanish and we have tr Paul) + tt palo) = voG(F\GA) ol) +X » Ps 78) de. relipic J CORNEA The reader will note that this formula closely resembles formula (1.11). 8. Applications to quaternion algebras. As before, G is the group GL(2) regarded as an F-group and Z ~ GL(1) is its center. Let D be a quaternion algebra of center Fand S the (finite) set of places of F where D does not split. Regard the multi- plicative group of Das an algebraic F-group G’ and let Z’ denote its center. Then for all r¢ S the local groups G, and G, are isomorphic. More precisely, as in §1, the isomorphism D, ~ M(2, F,) induces an isomorphism G, ~ G; defined up to inner automorphism. If ¢;, 1 L;; the quotient spaces are then given the quotient measures.) A consequence of the last few identities is (8.8) Sle) = ve). (This follows, for instance, from the Plancherel formula.) Note too that if z, is a representation of G, which is neither square-integrable nor finite dimensional then (8.9) tra(f) =0. The following lemma results from the characterization of orbital integrals in $4 of (La 2} LEMMA (8.10). Given p in C*(G;, w") there are (many) f in CX(Gy, o!) with matching orbital integrals. Remark (8.11). Fix a representation 7, of G, and let , be the correspondingFORMS OF GL(2) FROM THE ANALYTIC POINT OF VIEW 247 representation of G, given by (8.1). There is easily seen to be a p in C*(G,, 1) such that tr xg) # 0, but tr o'(y) = 0 if o' is any irreducible representation of G; (with central quasi-character w,) not equivalent to z,. Thus if f has matching orbital integrals, tr x,(f) # 0, but tr o(f) = 0 whenever o is not equivalent to z, (oF finite dimensional). Now suppose / is a function on G(4) such that f(zg) = w-1(2) f(g). Moreover, suppose as before that f(g) = II, fu(g.) where f, € CG, w") and f, for almost all vis the function defined by Sage) @) ig, = 2k ke Ky 2% EZ 0 otherwise. Suppose g is a function on G'(A) satisfying similar conditions, p, ~ f, via the isomorphism G, ~ G; for v¢ S, and g, and f, have matching orbital integrals for ves. Proposition (8.12). With p and fas above, (8.13) tr pulp) = t pay S) + & pays A) Proor. By (1.11) the left-hand side is vol(Z(A)G'(F)\G'(A)) ple) (8.14) + + XY vol(A*L\L+(A)) gle ég] dg the sum extending over a set X’ of representatives for the classes of quadratic extension L’ of Fembedded in D. Moreover Sus coor 18 Eels = TTY 5, Pale EB) dee Here we have selected for each v a Haar measure on Fs\L$ such that (units FA\L%) = 1 for almost all v; to 4*\L+(A) we have given the product measure. On the GL() side, note that S has at least two places vy, »y and for these places Joy fo, have vanishing hyperbolic orbital integrals. Thus by (7.21), the right-hand side of (8.13) i vol(Z(A)G(F)\G(A)) f(e) ly (1 2\L¥ + PE volsTAl(a) Ye Jesse 8.15) ey S(g 8) dg where L runs through a set of representatives for the classes of quadratic extensions of Fin MQ, F). The measures are selected as above, and freee de = TY, Mer) de Masa. Note that if v S and L, is split then the corresponding local integral is 0 by (8.7) (i. Thus we need only sum over the set X of L which do not split at any v ¢ S, that is, which embed in D. But for every Le X there is an L’ in X' and an isomorphism248 STEPHEN GELBART AND HERVE JACQUET L ~ L’. So if we assume that the Haar measures of F3\L3 and F;\L( correspond to one another we have . PAR ER) deo for all v. Indeed for v € S this is clear, and for v ¢ S it follows from the fact that we may modify the isomorphism G, + G; so as to make it compatible with Ly > L?. We conclude from (8.7) and our choice of g,, f, for v ¢ S that in(8.14) and (8.15) the series on L and L’ are equal. Since we have used the Tamagawa measures on Gand G’ we also know that vol(Z(A)G'(F)\G'(A)) = vol(Z(A)G(F)\G(A)). Therefore, taking (8.8) into account, (8.12) follows. C. Proofs of the main result. Let p,,9 be the representation of G’(A) in the orthocomplement of the space spanned by the functions y, ov with 7? = w. From (8.6) and our choice of f,, p, for v¢ S we get Feedyldet 8) de =F PR) ae. ‘Thus (8.12) implies that (8.16) trp) = tp.,9)- First PROOF OF THEOREM (8.2). For each place v ¢ S fix an irreducible repre- sentation a, of G; and let o, be the corresponding representation of G,. Choose 1€ CAG;, w3) such that tr 9(g,) = 1, and tr x{(g,) = 0 for m, inequivalent to a7, Thus identity (8.16) reads Lala’) tr xp) = Y n(x) tr xf) where the sum on the right-hand (resp. left-hand) side is over all irreducible repre- sentations x of G(A) (resp. x’ of G'(A)) such that x, ~ 0, (resp. x, ~ z,) for all v in S, and n(x) (resp. n(z')) is the multiplicity of x in pg,o (resp. p.,0)- Moreover, if z and x’ satisfy these conditions, then, because S has even cardinality, we get 1 = Tres t(p.) = Mocs 25( fe). Thus Ln’) TL te ay.) = n(x) TL te 2K) oes ves (@, = 0, for ve S, x, ~ 0, for ve S), and Theorem (8.2) follows from fundamental principles of functional analysis (applied to the isomorphic groups GS and G'S). Moreover, if x’ corresponds to 7, then n(x’) = n(x). So since we already know from [JL] that n(z) is at most I, we have also proved multiplicity one for z’. SECOND PROOF. We rewrite (8.16) as (8.17) UMle2) = LM ral, where x = @x, (resp. 2’ = @r;) runs through all irreducible subrepresentations of 2.0 (Tesp. (,0)- What we shall do now is manipulate (8.17) until it equates theFORMS OF GL(2) FROM THE ANALYTIC POINT OF VIEW 249 right side to the trace of just one representation. (Since we are summing over sub- representations rather than classes, two representations on the right side of (8.17) may, a priori, be equivalent.) Lemma (8.18). Fix an arbitrary place w outside S and an irreducible unitary re- presentation zy of Gy. If f = Tf, andy = Tp, are as in (8.12) then xX MeN = YO tra) Sr 8m te 2505) om we) (HS ig03 Te * Tw) © u.03 He * Proor. Set a, = LM tratm) - 2 trate) ( S Pasty Tw * Te) (R! S Pix» Ty * Tu It suffices to prove a,, = 0. But (8.17) can be rewritten as Yea eA = ¥ tr xe.) tra) vow ¥ hg ve or, since G, ~ Gi, and fy ~ Per as O= 2 a, ttt fe) sein) Moreover, f, is completely arbitrary in C*(G,, w;'). Therefore a, must be zero by the generalized “linear independence of characters for GL(2)” (ef. [LL). LEMMA (8.19). For every w ¢ S fix te (which is unramified for almost all w). Then if f, and p, have matching orbital integrals for v € S, Ul 26) = LIT te xi) (620) oes oes ( S Poo Zu Tw WES) (RK Pio Ty ™ To WES). Proor. Apply the argument above to the restricted direct product GS = Toes Gu. PROPOSITION (8.21). Given 2’ = @r, in pio there exists a unique x = @ry in p.,9 such that x, x, for all v ¢ S. Moreover x, ¢ &(G,) for all v in S. PRooF. Uniqueness follows from the strong multiplicity one theorem for GL). What remains to be shown is that there is at least one such , and that ~, belong to €(G,) for all vin S. ‘Suppose no such z exists. Then applying (8.19) with c, conclude (8.22) UI alo) But (8.22) is a sum of characters of the group Gj = [yes G;. Thus by the linear independence of characters for Gi we get a contradiction. Now suppose 7», ¢ £2(G,) for some vp in S. The fact that z is cuspidal excludes the possibility that z,, is finite dimensional. So by (8.9) we have zra(fiq) = 0, and again by (8.22) we get a contradiction, {, for all w¢ S we 0 0' < bun 0% = for we S).250 STEPHEN GELBART AND HERVE JACQUET Coro.tary (8.23). The left-hand side of (8.20) reduces to exactly one term when tw = Zand Or, 13 in po. PROPOSITION (8.24). Given x = @r, in pao such that x, € &4{G,) for all ve S there exists a unique x' = @x., in po such that x, = x, for all v ¢ S. Moreover, for each ve S, there is e, = +1 such that 00’) = ¢,0,,(t) each time t' eG, and te Gy satisfy the conditions of (8.1). Later we shall see that e, in fact equals | Proor. For v€ S let X, denote a set of representatives for the equivalence classes of quadratic extensions L, of F, contained in MQ, F,). As in (JL, §15], we can introduce a measure y, on (J Fi\Li (L, € X,) and we consider the Hilbert space 2H, = Ay 4) OF all functions h on that union which satisfy A(z!) = w,(z)A(), for 2 € Fi, and f\h(x)|? du,(x) < +00; the functions 6;, 2¢6,(G,, w,), then deter- mine an orthonormal basis of 3#,. Similarly we can introduce a Hilbert space 2%, for the group G;. But since any quadratic extension of F, embeds into D,, we may identify 2, and 26%. Recall x = ®t, © Pu.o is such that z, € 6(G,) for all ve S. So for each ve S there is , € 6(G;, «,) such that (when we regard @,, and 6,, as elements of 2%) On 0c, = 4 # 0. Since both ,, and O,, are unit vectors, it follows that |a,| <1 Now, fix p, to be @,, when v€ S. Then for any z,€ &(G;, «,), trap.) =1 ifm, = oy, =0 otherwise. In particular, iff, ¢ C2(G,, w,1) and g, have matching orbital integrals, then (using the notations of [JL, §15)) weal =f, Jde0a(@) de 1 1 HET Yi AM Fg Bolero ds = (x, 06,2 = Ay This means (8.20) with ¢, = m, for v¢ S reduces to the identity Tla=31 pox, = 0, for ve S, x, ~ x, for v¢ S). ws From this we conclude that the right-hand side has only 1 term (once again proving multiplicity one for G’). We also conclude that |a,| = 1. So since a simple argument involving x, and z, implies a, must be real, we conclude finally thata, = £1, ie., (@,,.0,,) = +1. But this implies that x, = 9, is completely determined by z, and that 0,, = + 0; = 0,, (regarded as elements of 27). Thus the proposition follows. It remains to complete the local correspondence asserted by Theorem (8.1) and to show that g,, actually equals —9,’. For this we need to embed an arbitrary local representation z, of G, in an automorphic representation x’ and exploit the fact, that the cardinality of 5 is even. For details, see the original arguments in [FlFORMS OF GL(2) FROM THE ANALYTIC POINT OF VIEW 251 REFERENCES Ar 1] J. Arthur, The Selberg trace formula for groups of Frank one, Ann. of Math, (2) 100 ST acca [Ar 2] The truncation operator for reductive groups, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 83 (1977), 148-750. [Bo] A. Borel, Automorphic L-functions, these PROCEEDINGS, part 2, pp. 27-61 [De] J. Delsarte, C.R. Acad. Sci. Paris 214 (1942), 147-149. [DL] M. Duflo and JP. Labesse, Sur la formule des traces de Selberg, Ann. Sci. Ecole Norm. Sup. (4) 4 (1971), 193-284, Fl] D. Flath, A comparison of the automorphic representations of GL(3) and its twisted forms, ‘Thesis, Harvard University, 1977. [Ge] S. Gelbart, Automorphic forms on adele groups, Ann. of Math, Studies, no. 83, Princeton Univ. Press, Princeton, N. J., 1975, {GGPS} I. M. Gelfand, M. Graev and I. I. Piatetski-Shapiro, Automorphic functions and represen- tation theory, W.B. Saunders Co., 1969. {Go 1] R. Godement, Analyse spectrale des fonctions modulaires, Séminaire Bourbaki 278 (1964); also The spectral decomposition of cusp forms, Proc. Sympos. Pure Math., vol. 9, Amer. Math. Soc., Providence, R. I., 1966, 225-234. (Go 2} Notes on Jacquet-Langlands theory, mimeographed notes, Institute for Ad- vanced Study, Princeton, N.J., 1970. (Go 3] , Domaines fondamentaux des groupes arithmétiques, Séminaire Bourbaki 257 (1963), W. A. Benjamin, Inc., New York. (JL] H. Jacquet and R. P. Langlands, Automorphic forms on GL(2), Lecture Notes in Math., vol. 114, Springer-Verlag, Berlin and New York, 1970, {K] T. Kubota, Elementary theory of Eisenstein series, Halsted Press, New York, 1973. {La S. Lang, SLQ, R), Addison Wesley, Reading, Mass., 1975. [La] RP, Langlands, On the functional equations satisfied by Eisenstein series, Lecture Notes in Math., vol. 544, Springer-Verlag, Berlin and New York, 1976. {La 2] ‘Base change for GLQ): the theory of Saito-Shintani with applications, The Institute for Advanced Study, 1975 (preprint), ILL] 1.P. Labesse and R. P, Langlands, L-indistinguishability for SL., Institute for Advanced Study, 1977 (preprind). [Sa] H. Saito, Lecture Notes in Math., no. 8, Kinokuniya Book Store Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan, 1975. [Se] A. Selberg, Harmonic analysis and discontinuous groups, J. Indian Math, Soc. 20 (1956), 47-81. [Sh] T. Shintani, On liftings of holomorphic automorphic forms, U.S.-Japan Seminar on Number Theory, Ann Arbor, 1975 (see also these PROCEEDINGS, part 2, pp. 97-110). ‘Cornet. UNtversiry ‘CoLuseta UntverstryProceedings of Symposia in Pure Mathematics Vol. 33 (1979), part 1, pp. 253-274 EISENSTEIN SERIES AND THE TRACE FORMULA JAMES ARTHUR Pant I. EISENSTEIN SERIES The spectral theory of Eisenstein series was begun by Selberg. It was completed by Langlands in a manuscript which was for a long time unpublished but which recently has appeared [1]. The main references are 1, Langlands, On the functional equations satisfied by Eisenstein series, Springer- Verlag, Berlin, 1976. 2 . Eisenstein series, Algebraic Groups and Discontinuous Subgroups, ‘Summer Research Institute (Univ. Colorado, 1965), Proc. Sympos. Pure Math., vol. 9, Amer. Math. Soc., Providence, R. I. 1966. 3. Harish-Chandra, Automorphic forms on semi-simple Lie groups, Springer- Verlag, Berlin, 1968. In the first part of these notes we shalll try to describe the main ideas in the theory. Let G be a reductive algebraic matrix group over Q. Then G(A) is the restricted direct product over all valuations v of the groups G(Q,). If v is finite, define K, to be G(o,) if this latter group is a special maximal compact subgroup of G(Q,). This takes care of almost all v. For the remaining finite v, we let K, be any fixed special maximal compact subgroup of G(Q,). We also fix a minimal parabolic sub- group Po, defined over Q, and a Levi component Mp of Pp. Let 4g be the maximal split torus in the center of Mg. Let Kg be a fixed maximal compact subgroup of G(R) whose Lie algebra is orthogonal to the Lie algebra of Ao(R) under the Killing form. Then K = [[,, is a maximal compact subgroup of G(A). For most of these notes we shall deal only with standard parabolic subgroups; that is, parabolic subgroups P, defined over Q, which contain Po. Fix such a P. Let Np be the unipotent radical of P, and let Mp be the unique Levi component of P which contains Mg. Then the split component, Ap, of the center of Mp is con- tained in Ap. If X(Mp)q is the group of characters of Mp defined over Q, define ap = Hom((Xp)q, R). Then ifm = TT ym, lies in M(A), we define a vector Hy(m) in ap by exp((Hulin), 2>) = [xr)| = I] x0) Let Mp(A)! be the kernel of the homomorphism Hy. Then Mp(A) is the direct AMS (MOS) subject classifications (1970). Primary 22E5S; Secondary 22£50, © 1979, American Mathematical Society 253254 JAMES ARTHUR product of M,(A)! and A(R)?, the connected component of 1 in A(R). Since G(A) equals Np(A)Mp(4)K, we can write any x € G(A) as nmk, ne Np(A), me MyA), ke K. We define Hp(x) to be the vector Hyy(m) in ap. Let @ be the restricted Weyl group of (G, 4p). acts on the dual space of ay. We identify ag with its dual by fixing a positive definite Q-invariant bilinear form < , > on a9. This allows us to embed each ap in ag. Let 3p be the set of roots of (P, A). These are the elements in X(A)q obtained by decomposing the Lie algebra of Np under the adjoint action of Ap. They can be regarded as vectors in ap. Let Op be the set of simple roots of (P, 4). G itself is a parabolic subgroup. We write Z and 3 for ‘Ac and ag respectively. Then @p is a basis of the orthogonal complement of j in ap. Suppose that Q is another (standard) parabolic subgroup, with Q c P. Then Q? = Q ) Mpisa parabolic subgroup of Mp. Its unipotent radical is NE = No () Mp. We write af for the orthogonal complement of ap in ag. In general, we shall index the various objects associated with Q? by the subscript Q and the super- script P. For example, 2 stands for the set of simple roots of (Q?, Ag). Itis the pro- jection onto af of O2,\08,. We shall write 6§ for the basis of the Euclidean space af which is dual to 8. If P, isa parabolic subgroup, we shall often use i instead of P; for a subscript or superscript. If the letter P alone is used, we shall often omit it altogether as a subscript. Finally, we shall always denote the Lie algebras of groups over @ by lower case Gothic letters. If P and P, are parabolic subgroups, let O(a, a;) be the set of distinct isomor- phisms from a onto a; obtained by restricting elements in to a. P and Py are said to be associated if O(a, a;) is not empty. Suppose that ? is an associated class, and that Pe 2. at ab is called the chamber of P in a Lema 1. YryeoUsc0%, Before discussing Eisenstein series, we shall define a certain induced representa- tion. Fix P. Let 9} be the space of functions ©: N(A)- MQ): A(R)\G(A) + © Hea: >0, a € Dp} s“H(az) is a disjoint union which is dense ina. 2 such that (® for any x¢ G(A) the function m + O(mx), me M(A), is 2 seh yw is the center of the universal enveloping algebra of m(C), (ii) the span of the set of functions @,: x > #(xk), x G(A), indexed by k € K, is finite dimensional, wy tel FSi orblane < & Let 2p be the Hilbert space obtained by completing 3%. If A is in ac, the com- plexification of a, 0 € 3p, and x, y € G(A), put (AA, y)O)(x) = Dry) exp(CA + pp, Hplxy)>) exp( — ), me M(A). IAA) = 1f(A) is a representation of G(A) induced from a representation of ite, whereEISENSTEIN SERIES AND TRACE FORMULA 255 P(A), which in turn is the pull-back of a certain representation, I{(A) in our nota- tion, of M(A). We have IA y)* = IA Ay), ye GA), and TAA Sy" = Ik— A,f*), fe C2(G(A)), where f*(y) = f(y7!). In particular, I,(A) is unitary if A is purely imaginary. REMARK. It is not difficult to show that /4(0) is the subrepresentation of the regular representation of M(A) on L?(A(R))-M(Q)\M(A)) which decomposes discretely. We can write 1{{(0) = ®, 0%, where of = ®,o; is an irreducible repre- sentation of M(A). If v is any prime and o, is an irreducible unitary representation of M@Q,), define Fy, Am) = oenjexp(), — AE ae, me M(Q,). If g,, is lifted to P(Q,) and then induced to G(Q,), the result is a representation Tp(¢,,4) of G(Q,), acting on a Hilbert space #%;,(¢,). In this notation, F(A) = O.@z fe(0', «) Thus [(A) can be completely understood in terms of induced representations and the discrete spectrum of M. If P and P, are fixed, and s € Q(a, aj), let w, be a fixed representative of s in the intersection of K (| G(Q) with the normalizer of Ao. For De #%, Ae ag, and x € G(A), consider J “ge, pBetnayexp( )- siuonavcaus ico (We adopt the convention that if H is any closed connected subgroup of No, dit is the Haar measure on H(A) which makes the volume of H(Q)\H(A) one. This defines a unique quotient measure da on N,(A) 1 w,N(A)w;\N1(A).) Lemma 2. Suppose that (a, Re A — pp) > 0 for each a in Sp such that sax belongs to — 3p, Then the above integral converges absolutely. C) The integral, for A as in the lemma, defines a linear operator from 2% to 2, which we denote by M(s, A). Intertwining integrals play an important role in the harmonic analysis of groups over local fields, so it is not surprising that M(s, A) arises naturally in the global theory. Lemma 3. M(s, A)* = M(s~!, —sA). Moreover, if fe C(G(A))*, the K-conjugate invariant functions in C=(G(A)), M(s, AAAS) = Ios. f) MGs, A). O We now define Eisenstein series: Lemma 4. If © 98, x € G(A) and A€ ao, with Re A€ pp + a+, the series E(x, ®, A) = D(x) exp (CA + pp, He(5x)>) serde@ converges absolutely. O256 JAMES ARTHUR The principal results on Eisenstein series are contained in the following: Matw THEOREM. (a) Suppose that De 3%. E(x, ®, A) and M(s, A) ® can be analy- tically continued as meromorphic functions to ae. On ia, E(x, , A) is regular, and M(s, A) is unitary. For f ¢ C2(G(A))¥ and 1 Qa, a2), the following functional equations hold: () E(x, LAN), A) = Jocw SO)ECY, ®, A) dy, Gil) E(x, M(s, A) ®, sA) = E(x, ®, A), Gil) MCs, A) ® = MQ, sA)M(s, AYO. . (b) Let # be an associated class of parabolic subgroups. Let Ly be the set of collec- tions F = {Fp : P € ?} of measurable functions Fp: ia > 4 p such that @) Hse Na, a), Fo (oA) = M(s, AVF (A), io Wie = Zmcay(ah)"“f,, denaleaa < 0, where n(A) is the number of chambers in a. Then the map which sends F to the function Era, yy E(x, F(A), A) dA, defined for F in a dense subspace of extends to a unitary map from Ly onto a closed G(A)-invariant subspace L3(G(Q)\G(A)) of L*(G(Q)\G(A)). Moreover, we have an orthogonal decomposition LX(G(Q)\G(A)) = 9g E3(GQ\G4). O ‘The theorem states that the regular representation of G(A) on L*(G(Q)\G(A)) is the direct sum over a set of representatives {P} of associated classes of parabolic subgroups, of the direct integrals [2sTp(A) dA, The theorem looks relatively straightforward, but the proof is decidedly round about. The natural inclination might be to start with a general ® in 9 and try to prove directly the analytic continuation of M(s, A) and E(x, ®, A). This doesnot seem possible. One does not get any idea how the proof will go, for general ®, until p. 231 of [1], the second last page of Langlands’ original manuscript. Rather Langlands’ strategy was to prove all the relevant statements of the theorem for in a certain subspace 2%, cusp Of 2¢}. He was then able to finesse the theorem from this special case. Let pgp be the space of measurable functions ® on N(A)M(Q)A(R)\G(A) such that () |O]? = Srfa@acmoarca |(emk) |? dm dk < co, Gi) for any QB P, and x€ GA), Jrg@wacw Hnx) dn = Itis a right G(A)-invariant Hilbert space. Lema 5. If fe C¥(G(A)) for some large N, the map D0 + f, DE HG cusps 18 @ Hilbert-Schmidt operator on #6, cae O This lemma, combined with the spectral theorem for compact operators, leads toEISENSTEIN SERIES AND TRACE FORMULA 257 COROLLARY. °¢,cus decomposes into a direct sum of irreducible representations of G(A), each occurring with finite multiplicity. O H¢,cusy is called the spage of cusp forms on G(A). It follows from the corollary, applied to M, that any function in 2p, csp i8 a limit of functions in 9¢%.. Therefore H pcp is a Subspace of 2#p. It is closed and invariant under Ip(A). Let 7G) be the collection of triplets z = (2, 7”, W), where IV is an irreducible representation of K, is an associated class of parabolic subgroups, and ¥ is a collection of subspaces {Vee 204, cosp the space of cusp forms on M(A)}pcas such that (i) if Pe A, Vp is the eigenspace of Hf, cusp associated to a complex valued homomorphism of 2'yy¢g), and (i) if P, P’e A, and s¢ Q(a, a1), Vp, is the space of functions obtained by con- jugating functions in Vp by w,. If Pe J, define p,, to be the space of functions 9 in 24%, cup such that for each xe G(A), (i the function k > (xk), k € K, is a matrix coefficient of W, and ii) the function m — O(mx), me M(A), belongs to Vp. 2p, is a finite dimen- sional space which is invariant under 1,(A, f) for any fe C>(G(A))*. 2p, cusp is the orthogonal direct sum over all y = (2, %, W), for which Pe , of the spaces #p, Fix x = (7°, W)and fix P € A. Suppose that we have an analytic function A> OA) = O(A,x), AE o¢, xe N(A)M(Q)A(R)\G(A), of Paley-Wiener type, from ae to the finite dimensional space 4#,,. Then 809 = (3h) °F, ,cBPCEA + 0, Hole)9) OCA, 2) 4 is a function on N(A)M(Q)\G(A) which is independent of the point Ap € a. It is ‘compactly supported in the A(R)?-component of x. Lemma 6. For ® as above, the function d= DO g(x) ser @ow) converges absolutely and belongs to L*(G(Q)\G(A)). Let Li(G(Q)\G(A)) be the closed subspace generated by all such 3. Then there is an orthogonal decomposition LGQNGA) = QD, LGOQNGA). O Suppose that Ap € op + a*. Then = (t)” ‘ f cere BO Ms A) aA,258 JAMES ARTHUR ‘Suppose that ,(A;, x) is another function, associated to P. We want an inner pro- duct formula for SSE oh Jere B05 4 in terms of @ and ©). The inner product is BGR) ax f ec@ncta) s) di(amk) da dm dk. LEMMA 7. Suppose that P and P, are of the same rank. If € p,, and Re Ac pp + at, then f E(nx, 0, A) dn own = zB Ms AyO)(x) exp(). (Of course, the right-hand side is 0 if O(a, a1) is empty; that is, if P and Py are not associated.) Proor. Let {2} be the set of s € such that s~ta > O for every a ¢ 0§. Then {2} is a set of representatives in Q of the left cosets of modulo the Weyl group of M. By the Bruhat decomposition, f E(ax, ®, A) dn owen = Hw, ynx) sexp() dr, w.Niwy! () M is the unipotent radical of a standard parabolic subgroup of M. If the group is not M itself the term corresponding to s above is 0, since & is cuspi- dal. The group is M itself if and only if s = t! maps a onto a. In this case w;!Pw, () No\No is isomorphic to w;4Nw, () Ni\N). Therefore the above formula equals 2 _vol(w,N(Q)ws" 1 N(Q)\wsN(A)we'\N(A)) sbi, (Ww, nx) exp( = 4, w€C, ae Jp}, and that only finitely many r meet a* + ia = {A 4¢: 0, ae Op} Let L,, x(G(Q)\G(A)) be the closed subspace of L(G(Q)\G(A)) generated by functions (x), where ¢ comes from a function (A), as above, which vanishes on the finite set of singular hyperplanes which meet a* + ia. If $,(x) comes from ,(A,), for P; € P,, we can apply Cauchy’s theorem to the formula for Swoon 89809 The result is (ata) "“J,,, 2, O16 40D, (04) a4, 2a fa sedGay since —s, = sA on ia. Changing variables in the integral and sum, we obtain 1 vlna (on) BBs Ba j (M(s, tA)O(tA), (tA) dA _ (yin = (zz) MAE Peay bee . J (Mee, tA)O(tA), By(rA)) dA (aby) "may EXE (Me, A100), Mer, Ay o(rd) a = Era “YG inta, Picby where260 JAMES ARTHUR a) Fi, p(A) = oe Me AY Or), and Fp, is defined similarly. Define £,,, to be the subspace of the space Ly, (defined in the statement of the Main Theorem) consisting of those collections {Fri P2€ P,} such that Fp, takes values in 3#’p,,,. We have just exhibited an isometric isomorphism from a dense subspace of L,, to a dense subspace of 43, (G(Q)\G(A)). Suppose that {Fp,} is a collection of functions in Zs, , each of Ba is smooth and compactly supported. Let A(x) be the corresponding function in L§, (G(Q)\G(A)) defined by the above isomorphism. We would like to prove that A(x) equals , 1 \din a 1Q) = 1 HG) = mAs) (a) $c E(x, F(A), A) dA. If (x) is as above, the same argument as that of the corollary to Lemma 7 shows that - sin WED) dx = YnlA( 97) : f (MG, A)FpAA), O(rA)) a. fn, redtenen Since the projection of $,(x) onto L3, .(G(Q)\G(4)) corresponds to the collection {F,,p,} defined by (1), this equals Fas (gs) 8G ah Brand a We have shown that f(x) = A'(x). This completes the first stage of Langlands’ induction. To begin the second stage, Langlands lets Q be the projection of L&(G(Q)\G(A)) onto the orthogonal complement of L3,, (G(Q)\G(A)). Then for any g(x) and Jy(x) corresponding to (A) and (A), (06. gi) equals (aba) (Foose ed, lM DOA), O4(— 8) 44 xi Agtis eda) ~ fH, MOM), 04(— 24) aA), Choose a path in a* from Ay to 0 which meets any singular hyperplane x of {MG, A): 5 € O(a, «)} in at most one point Z(x). Any such x is of the form X(t) + 1, where t¥ is a real vector subspace of a of codimension one, and X(t) is a vector in q orthogonal to Y. The point Z(t) belongs to X(v) + r¥. By the residue theorem (Q¢, gr) equals The obvious tactic at this point is to repeat the first stage of the induction with Ay replaced by Z(t), 0 replaced by X(t), and E(x, ®, A) by Res,E(x, ®, A).EISENSTEIN SERIES AND TRACE FORMULA 261 Suppose that rY = (Hea: ). padre This is essentially a cuspidal Eisenstein series on the group M,(4). It converges for suitable A € ae and can be meromorphically continued. It is clear that E(x, ®, A X EXSx, 0, A) neree@ whenever the right-hand side converges. Suppose that ex, and A = X(x) + AY, Ave x¥, Re AY € pp + aj. Then for any small positive e, L Res,B(x, 9, A) = aif, lx, ©, A + c&8X(e)) dO es - GL (“en ant Ein (Bat [yPMOs 4 + eta) a) = XL OM(Gx) exp(), RaNGO where O°) = 3h; [BRO + OK (eH) a, the residue at X(x) of an Eisenstein series in one variable. One shows that the func- tion m + OY(my), m € Mg(Q)\M,( A), is in the discrete spectrum. Thus Res, E(x, 0, A) = E(x, OY, AY), the Eisenstein series over R(Q)\G(Q) associated to a vector OY in Xp, csp: Its analytic continuation is immediate. Let %p,, be the finite dimensional subspace of 2a consisting of all those vectors ®Y, By examining Res,M(s, A), oné obtains the operators M(s, AY): ny > Hoy AV COR. for s € Max, ag). Their analytic continuation then comes without much difficulty. Let 2" be the class of parabolic subgroups associated to R. In carrying out the second stage of the induction one defines subspaces 13, x(G(Q)\G(A)) < LA(G(Q)\G(A)) and £3,,, < £3-, and as above, obtains an isomorphism between them. In the process, one proves the functional equations in (a) of the Main The- orem for vectors BY € #z,y. The pattern is clear. For R now any standard parabolic subgroup and 2 any associated class, one eventually obtains a definition of spaces #’,y, Ly,» and L3, (G(Q)\G(A)). By definition, #p,, is {0} unless R contains an element of A, and the other two spaces are {0} unless an element of # contains an element of 2,. If @ is the associated class of R, there corresponds a stage of the induction in which one proves part (a) of the Main Theorem for vectors ©” in 3,, and part (b) for the spaces Ly and LS, ,(G(Q)\G(A)). Finally, one shows that L3(G(Q)\G(A)) = @ 1, (G(Q)G(A))262 JAMES ARTHUR Notice that if R and # are fixed, He= Qn» by = Clon and LY(GQ)NGCA)) = BLS, AGQ\GCA)). The last decomposition together with the Main Theorem yields @ EGONGA) = OLS, (GQ). This completes our description of the proof of the Main Theorem. It is perhaps a little too glib. For one thing, we have not explained why it suffices to consider only those x above such that r¥ = (Aa: ). We are really interested in the regular representation of G(A) on L2(G(Q)\G(A)); but this representation is a direct integral over € € ij of the representations Re, so it is good enough to study these latter ones. The decomposition (2), quoted in Part I, is equivalent to L>(Z(R)"-G(Q)\G(A)) = BAZAR? GQ)NGA). Suppose that fe C;(G(A))X. Then this last decomposition is invariant under the operator R¢(f). R¢(f) is an integral operator with kernel Kay = 3 fe try), rete)EISENSTEIN SERIES AND TRACE FORMULA 263 where few) Says F2H) ©0166, Heleu)y) de, we ZR\G(A) The following result is essentially due to Duflo and Labesse. LewMa I, For every N 2 Owe can express as a finite sum of functions of the form Sixf, fiecMG@Aa)®. O Let #_(G) be the set of 7 = (2, ¥, W) in YG) such that P# {G}. Let Ref) be the restriction of Re(f) to Bo@rereca) LB, x (Z(R)*G(Q)\G(A)). Then Rossy elf) = RD) ~ Re is the restriction of R,(f) to the space of cusp forms. It is a finite sum of composi- 1S Rossy g*) Rep, (F2) of Hilbert-Schmidt operators and so is of trace class. For each P and z let @p,, be a fixed orthonormal basis of the finite dimensional space 2 p.,. Finally, recall that a° = af is the orthogonal complement of 3 = ag in a. If Aisin ia®, we shall write A, for the vector A + €in ia, Lemma 2. Re(f) is an integral operator with kernel Kio = 5 Sar Lyne Fao) PF ci fof. BOs oe, NO, MEG, Dhda. The lemma would follow from the spectral decomposition described in the last section if we could show that the integral over A and sum over y converged and was locally bounded. We can assume that f = f1 «f?, If Kp, ff XY) = oes E(x, IAA, f) ®, AVEO, ®, A), a finite sum, then one easily verifies that [Kpg( L529] S Keg f!# (FD% x, 9172 Ke, (SO #/, 9,9)! By applying Schwartz’ inequality to the sum over y, P and the integral over A, we reduce to the case that f = f!*(f1)* and x = y. But then Re.(f) is the restriction of the positive semidefinite operator R,(f) to an invariant subspace. The integrand in the expression for K(x, x) is nonnegative, and the integral itself is bounded by K(x, x). This proves the lemma. 1) The proof of the lemma can be modified to show that K(x, y) is continuous in each variable. The same is therefore true of Kesop(X Y) = K(x, y) — Ke, y). One proves without difficulty Lema 3. The trace of Reasp,e(f) equals j zm qe(aKeusp(*, x) dx. O264 JAMES ARTHUR Of course neither K nor K¢ is integrable over the diagonal. It turns out, however, that there is a natural way to modify the kernels so that they are integrable. Given P, let rp (resp. 2p) be the characteristic function of {H€ a: a(H) > 0, ae Dp (resp. 4H) > 0, 2 Gp)}. (Recall that Bp is the basis of a? which is dual to Dp.) Then rp S @p. Suppose that T'€ ap. Lemma 4. For any P, S3s-pc@yc@ tA H(6x)— 7) is a locally bounded function of x G(A). In particular the sum is finite. O We will now take T’e aj, We shall assume that the distance from T'to each of the walls of aj is arbitrarily large. We shall modify K(x, x) by regarding it as the term corresponding to P = G in a sum of functions indexed by P. If x remains within a large compact subset of Z(R)°G(Q)\G(A), depending on 7, the functions corre- sponding to P # G will vanish. They are defined in terms of KD = PB feo ima) dr, ew pita) the kernel of RE(f), where R? is the regular representation of G(A) on L2 (Z(R)°N(A)M(Q)\G(A)). Define the modified function to be K(x) = (= Wy) KP x, dx)FAH(Bx) — 7). 7 eP@ic@ For each x this is a finite sum. The function obtained turns out to be integrable over Z(R)°G(Q)\G(4). We shall give a fairly detailed sketch of the proof of this fact because itis typical of the proofs of later results, which we shall only state. We begin by partitioning Z(R)°-G(Q)\G(A) into disjoint sets, indexed by P, which depend on T. Fix a Siegel set v in Z(R)\G(A) such that Z(R)\G(A) = GQ). Consider the set of xe x such that p(Ho(x) — T) < 0 for every re By. It is a compact subset of r. The projection, G(7), of this set onto Z(R)°G(Q)\G(A) remains compact. For any P we can repeat this process on M, to obtain a compact subset of A(R)°M(Q)\M(A), which of course depends on 7. Let F*(m, T) be its characteristic function, Extend it to a function on G(A) by FP(amk, T) = F°(m, T), ne NA), me M(A), ke K. This gives a function on N(A)M(Q)A(R)\G(A). If Q < P, define cf (resp. #8) to be the characteristic function of {He ag: a(H) > 0,a€ OF (resp. (H) > 0. pe 68)}. The following lemma gives our partition of N(A)M(Q)A(R)\G(A). Itis essentially a restatement of standard results from reduction theory. Lemma 5. Given P, F§x, T)rh(H(dx) — T) (aPeecri ot@rPc@ equals 1 for almost all xe G(A). O ‘We can now study the function k7(x). It equalsEISENSTEIN SERIES AND TRACE FORMULA 265 (- 1m) FGx, T)e(H(6x) — T) orAecri sealdice -2o(H(6x) — T)KP(x, dx). Now for any H € ag we can surely write th(H iH) = a (= Dinara He H) (Py PPEPSPD) = 2 oH), iPr where oH) = of) = Sy (— 1a eit H). web) To study ob, consider the case that G = GLs. Then ap/3 is two dimensional, spanned by simple roots a and az. Let Q = Po, and let Py be the maximal para- bolic subgroup such that a; = {H € ag: a(H) = 0}. Then ad is the difference of the characteristic functions of the following sets: iY all yy P; The next lemma generalizes what is clear from the diagrams. LeMMA 6. Suppose that H is a vector in the orthogonal complement of jin ag. If o(H) # 0, and H = Hy + H*, Hy €ag, H* € a, then a(H,) > 0 for each ae and ||H*|\ < cl Hg|| for a constant c depending only on G. In other words H* belongs 10 a compact set, while H, belongs to the positive chamber in a}. O We write k7(x) as Fx, T)oH(6x)- T) SY (=1im42) KP(x, dx). Eh, seduce neh The integral over Z(R)°G(Q)\G(A) of the absolute value of k?(x) is bounded by the sum over Q < P, of the integral over Q(Q)Z(R)°\G(A) of the product of F%x, Toi (H(x) — T) and ” |3.,,«neew f Seo npx) dnl, (P:QCPCPy) N(A) 2M @) q266 JAMES ARTHUR We can assume that for a given x the first function does not vanish. Then by the last Jemma, the projection of Ho(x) onto ag is large. Conjugation by x-! tends to stretch any element « € M(Q) which does not lie in Q(Q). Since f is compactly supported, we can choose 7'so large that the only 4 which contribute nonzero summands in (1) belong to Q°(Q) = Q(Q) M(Q) = Mo(Q)NEQ). Thus, (1) equals (ayn fo Be Feortsonx) dn), sito wedeP=P) a ERR) ' which is bounded by | ~ piece f Fe ponn) da). setae | wo2Fm) new Ho Recall that no is the Lie algebra of No. Let ¢ , ) denote the canonical bilinear form on tg. If X€ np, let e(X) be the matrix in No obtained by adding X to the identity. Then e is an isomorphism (of varieties over Q) from tig onto No. Let ¢ be a nontrivial character on 4/Q. Applying the Poisson summation formula to ng, we see that (1) is bounded by DECK Vew LP Kor tweexsV GX, &) a | ele conga) nota) If n(Q)’ is the set of elements in 14(Q), which do not belong to any n§(Q) with Q¢ P& P,, this expression equals ZLB fg Kor uecoaecx.d aX. 7 leoafea deat Therefore the integral of |k7(x)| is bounded by the sum over Q c P, and we M(Q) of the integral over (n*, ny, a, m, k) in NYQ)NV(A) % NGQ)\NAA) x ZR)P\ARY? x A(RYMolQ)\MelA) « K of Fm, T) o(H(a) ~ T) exp(—2) » coca |Jaey AGE tmertartmatn®*« pels)-nngambye(X,€)) aX ‘The integral over n* goes out. The integrals over k and m can be taken over com- pact sets. It follows from the last lemma that the set of points {a~! n,a}, indexed by those tg and a for which the integrand is not zero, is relatively compact. Therefore there is a compact set C in Z(R)\G(A) such that the integral of |k7(x)] is bounded by the sum over @ & P), 2¢ Mo(Q) and the integral over x € C of Geen scans *(~ 24001 H(A?) o8(2HC@) ~ T) “ey Sauf to te CAD H) HH, 6) | dr = J rcnsgine AO ~ DEI, HOM xe) “HCH Aaa) aX | daEISENSTEIN SERIES AND TRACE FORMULA 267 Since f is compactly supported, the sum over j« is finite. If @ = P,, 3 equals 0, unless of course @ = P; = G, when it equals 1. If 0 & Py, YP ROMEO YAK, Ye nla), sete) is the Fourier transform of a Schwartz-Bruhat function on ni(4), and is con- tinuous in x. If H(a) = Hy + H*, H, € a3, H* € a)/3, H* must remain in a com- pact set. Since Hy lies in the positive chamber of aj, far from the walls, Ad(a) stretches any element ¢ in n{(Q)’. In fact as H goes to infinity in any direction, Ad(@f goes to infinity. Here itis crucial that £ not belong to any ng (Q),Q ¢ PE Py. It follows that if Q & P,, the corresponding term is finite and goes to 0 exponen- tially in 7. Thus the dominant term is the only one left, that corresponding to Q = P, = G. It isan integral over the compact set G(T). We have sketched the proof of THEOREM 1. We can choose ¢ > 0 such that for any T € og, sufficiently far from the walls, f ke) de =f Kwde + Oe *™). zw'a1@ncw on We would expect the integral of k7(x) to break up into a sum of terms corre- sponding to conjugacy classes in G(Q). It seems, however, that a certain equivalence relation in G(Q), weaker than conjugacy, is more appropriate. If je G(Q), let js be its semisimple component relative to the Jordan decomposition. Call two ele- ments «and y' in G(Q) equivalent if 1, and 1, are G(Q)-conjugate. Let ¢ be the set of equivalence classes in G(Q). If o @, define K(x, ») Se 'uny) dn, ono) wea and KE) = (= 1) 84 — REx, 6x)Zp(H(5x) — T). * scree) Then A(x) = YY KEG, a If ze Gand H isa closed subgroup of G, let H, denote the centralizer of jz in H. LEMMA 7. Fix P. Then for we M(Q) and $< C2(M(A)), HO) = Foe). O cen ohne) v<%h@ ocho This lemma easily proved. It implies that for ve @, P(Q){ o= (M@) f) 0)N(@Q). If this fact is combined with the proof of Theorem 1 we obtain a stronger version. TueorEM 1*. There are positive constants C and ¢ such that J Ve) = Fe(x, T)KG(x, x) [de S Ce*™, J 2mc@cw268 JAMES ARTHUR The integral of k2(x) cannot be computed yet. What we must do is replace kZ(x) by a different function. Define FED = TEE yg AO taney) dn sestthne comida) n,,00 It is obtained from K?(x, y) by replacing a part of the integral over N(A) by the corresponding sum over Q-rational points. Define HH) = TL (— YA IY) | Ie(Ox, Ox)Ee(H(6x) — T). ra s) x FLAT Ww pews 2), sed R:P) CeMepeenl@)PC@) Therefore j7(x) equalsEISENSTEIN SERIES AND TRACE FORMULA 269 YH piaae oy Zz SAT pw) (Hx) — T). ? SOG P) FMyy nl (Qncr@) Since the centralizer of w,4W;" in G is contained in M, this equals gig HOO HOH) i (— MAD TL | Bol H(w.8x) — T). Bcc@) seofaP) Then J2(fz) equals Q) vol(,(R)°G,,(Q)\G,,(A)) i) ent cay FO T) dx, where The expression in the brackets is compactly supported in a. In fact it follows from the results of [7, §§2, 3] that (x, 7) equals the volume in a,/3 of the convex hull of the projection onto a,/3 of {s-'T — s1H(w,x); s€ Up,Q(ay, a,)}. It was Lang- lands who surmised that the volume of a convex hull would play a role in the trace formula, By studying how far JZ(f,) differs from an invariant distribution, I hope to express J7(f.), for general o, as a limit of the distributions for which o is as above, at least modulo an invariant distribution that lives on the unipotent set of G(4). However, this has not yet been done. The study of Ke(x, x) parallels what we have just done. The place of {o€ 6} is now taken by {z € %-(G)}. Given P, and y.€ ;(G), define ( a) yinawe K(x, 9) = Zh ntdad (ge ep 5 f { ZL EP(x, le Ap f®, A) EPO. a} aA, a lodta. where n?(4q) is the number of chambers in ag/a. Then if P # G, KGW =F Kel) The convergence of the sum over z and the above integral over A is established by the argument of Lemma 2. Define HA) = DY (- yea) RE(Gx, dx)Fp(H (x) — T). 7 ser @o@ Then Kea x) = AEX) — DEG). a rehetoy We would like to be able to integrate the function k{(x). But as before, we will have to replace it with a new function jf(x) before this can be done. To define the new function, we need to introduce a truncation operator. In form270 JAMES ARTHUR it resembles the way we modified the kernel K(x, x), but it applies to any continuous function g on Z(R)°-G(Q)\G(A). Define a new function on Z(R)?-G(Q)\G(A) by (ATA) = DE (DAD (MGS) -T) Bh screw : J G(ndx) dr. N@we AT has some agreeable properties. It leaves any cusp form invariant. It is a self- adjoint operator. These facts are clear. It is less clear, but true, that AToAT = AT. If 7¢ 7G), define en FHC 9) = Yncay (xh Sif XL Ele IelAy, fb, MATEG, ©, 6 ay dA. Af we apply A? to the second variable in Ke(.x, y) we obtain DyevgqJ{(a,9). Define FBX) = JE(x, x). TutorEM 4. The function Drevea)l2)| is integrable over Z(R)G(Q)\G(A). For any y, the integral of 7{(x) equals yay ‘(asi yur ATE(x, I Ag, f)0, VATE, GA) ‘f J ) dx d A ie ofp, J zm scroncw ‘The first statement of the theorem comes from a property of A?. Namely, if ¢ is a smooth function on Z(R)°- G(Q)\G(A) any of whose derivatives (with respect to the universal enveloping algebra of g(C)) are slowly increasing in a certain sense, then AT¢ is rapidly decreasing. The proof of this property is similar to the proof of Theorem 2. The Poisson formula can no longer be used, but one uses [3, Lemma 10] instead. Given the fact that 472A" = A”, the other half of the theorem is a statement about the interchange of the integrals over x and A. By the proof of Lemma 2 we can essentially assume the integrand is nonnegative. The result fol- lows. O TtoREM 5. There are positive constants C and e such that J kf) — #2G)| dx 5 Co*r, 127 J z@%c@cw It turns out that this theorem can be proved by studying the function k™(x) ~ ATK(x, y), at x = y. This is essentially the sum over all x of the above integrand (without the absolute value bars). The point is that the new function is easier to study because it has a manageable expression in terms off Combining Theorems 4 and 5, we see that [zim sci@neca Lxer a alk) a is finite. In particular, each kZ(x) is integrable. With a little more effort it can be shown that the integrals of k7(x) and /#(x) are actually equal, We shall denote the ‘common value by J(f,). It is a polynomial in T. We have shown thatEISENSTEIN SERIES AND TRACE FORMULA 2 tt Raf = OI) - LIMA) ie x07) for any suitably large T € aj. The right-hand side is a polynomial in T while the left-hand side is independent of 7. Letting J,(/;) and J,(/) be the constant terms of the polynomials J7(fz) and J7(f,) we have TueoreM 6. For any fe C(G(A))*, tt Ron = DIM) — Fe) O a Flo Suppose that z= (2, ¥”, W) and that Pe %. Then if De x#p,,, ATE(x, 0, A) equals the function denoted £"(x, 0, A) by Langlands in [2, §9]. This is, in fact, what led us to the definition of A? in the first place. If 0’ is another vector in Hey Langlands has proved the elegant formula J EM, 0, AVES, A) dx za@nc@cw = —_ (M(t, A’)0', M(s, AD) % scodeay sateen Tec tA + shay M640 Mis, A)O) (see [2, §9]. Actually the formula quoted by Langlands is slightly more complicated, but it can be reduced to what we have stated.) In this formula, we can set A’ and 9 = I(A,f). We can then sum over all @ in Bp,, and integrate over A €ia®. The result is not a polynomial in 7. To obtain JZ(fz) we would have to consider all P, not just those in the associated class #. The best hope seems to be to calculate residues in A and A’ separately in the above formula. For GLs the result turns out to be relatively simple. Parr IIL THE Case oF GL In this last section we shall give the results of further calculations. They can be stated for general G but at this point they can be proved only for G = GL». Our aim is to express the trace of Riv. ¢(f) in terms of the invariant distributions defined in 8. J. Arthur, On the invariant distributions associated to weighted orbital integrals, preprint. A trace formula for K-bi-invariant functions has also been proved in 9. A. B. Venkov, On Selberg's trace formula for SL{Z), Soviet Math. Dokl 17 (1976), 683-687. First we remark that the distributions J?(/;) and J(/2) are independent of our minimal parabolic subgroup so there is no further need to fix Pp. If A is any Q- jorus in G, let P(A) denote the set of parabolic subgroups with split component, A. They are in bijective correspondence with the chambers in A. In fact, if Pp is a minimal parabolic subgroup contained in an element P of A(A), then AA =U ws If P'< P(A), and P! = w;? Pyw,, define (Mpnp(A)O\x) = (M(s, A)OYw,x), De 3e(P).272 JAMES ARTHUR Then Mp ip (A) isa map from »¢(P) to 2¢(P"), which is independent of Po. Infact, if Re Ac pp + ab, (Monel AvOyx) = f Horx)exe(CA + pe, Helex)>) ODN NA) exp(—) dn We have changed our notation to agree with that of [8]. A is said to be a special subgroup of G if P(A) is not empty. Suppose that A and A, are special subgroups, with A > A). We write Q"(a, a),.; for the set of elements 5 € Ma, a) whose space of fixed vectors in a is ay. Suppose that P}¢ A(A,) and Qe (A), the set of parabolic subgroups of M; with split component 4. Then there is a unique group in (A), which we denote by P;(Q), such that P\(Q) < P; and P\(Q) 1) Mi = Q. LEMMA 1. Suppose that A and Ay are as above and that P = P\(Q) for some Pye A(A,) and Qe PMA). Then if A € iay, the limit as A approaches 0 of Meir Ay Mey + a TI ) sexp (— (A + por, Hp(x)>) dr, for x G(Q,). This is the usual unnormalized intertwining operator for a group over a local field. Then Myrw(A) = © Opel.) Lemma 3. If a, is an irreducible unitary representation of M(Q,), we can define meromorphic functions rprp(o,,4). P, P’€ PA), AE ae, So that the operatorsEISENSTEIN SERIES AND TRACE FORMULA 273 Rprip(x,a) = Mpiel0e,) * Fpe(ds,a)"! can be analytically continued in A, with the following functional equations holding : Rpnip(Gx,4) = Rpwip(Gs, Reels, P,P’, P”€ PA), and Rerip(e,a)* = Reyp(e,—a)- Moreover if g, is of class | and , is the K,-invariant function, Repl.) = % O Suppose that ¢ = @,o, is an irreducible unitary representation of M(A). If © = @,0, is a smooth vector in #(0) = @,2# o(a,), define Ronplo)b = QReielo Oe. For almost all v, the right-hand vector is the characteristic function of K,. Define ‘M1 to be the kernel of the set of rational characters of M defined over Q. Then M? is defined over Q, and M(A) = M¥(4)A(A). Let f be a function in C=(G(A))*, as in Part I. Lemma 4. There is a function $f) in C*(M(A))KO™™ such that (m, a)>g,(f, ma), me M¥(A), ae A(A), is compactly supported in m and a Schwartz function in a, so that the following pro- perty holds. If = @qa, is any irreducible unitary representation of M(A), tra) = tim S(T Ay define the operator r(P, 4,, A) on Hp by the limit in Lemma 1, with Mp,qp(A)4Mpyqie(A + 2) replaced by re@ieAY req ie(A + 2). It commutes with the action of G(A). Finally, for 1& Fx(G), define i,(fe) by the formula for J,(f) in Lemma 2, with M(P, Ai, Ae) replaced by r(P, Ay, Ac). Then i, is an invariant distribution. TutoreM 1. For any fe C2(G(A))*, ttRam(N = DAG - 2 if). O && reo) REMARK. It follows from formula (2) of Part II that if o consists entirely of semi- simple elements, J, is one of the invariant distributions studied in [8]. Moreover since G = GLy, it is possible to show that for any o, J, is a sum of limits of the invariant distributions in [8]. Suppose that f = [],f, and that for two places v, Sex) dx =0, t€ TQ), for all maximal tori T in G such that Z(Q,)\7(Q,) is not compact. It follows from the last theorem of [8] that if there exists an element 7 in a given v which is Q- elliptic mod Z, - . : TAF) = VON ZRP-GLONG KANG 4 OH) A and that /,(f,) = 0 if no such 7 exists. Moreover, it is easy to see thateach i,(f;) = 0. From this it follows that if {7} is a set of representatives of G(Q)-conjugacy classes of elements in G(Q) which are elliptic mod Z, tt Resp e(f) = x vol(Z(R)? FONG eu Seo tyx) dx, for fas above. Duke UniversityProceedings of Symposia in Pure Mathematics Vol. 33 (1979), part 1, pp. 275-285 0-SERIES AND INVARIANT THEORY R. HOWE. 0. Introduction, Historically -series have been one of the major methods of con- structing automorphic forms. In [Wi 1] Weil reported the discovery that a certain unitary representation, also important in quantum mechanics, underlay the theory of 0-series, especially as developed by Siege! [Si 1}, [Si2]. This note is a sum- mary of work which extends Weil’s representation theoretic formulation of the theory of @-series. So far, this formulation provides a systematic framework in which to place recent work by several authors as well as several important older computations (see [G] for examples). A key feature of this approach is its strong, ties with Classical Invariant Theory, as exposed in [Wy]. Indeed, it would seem that the theory of 6-series is in a sense a transcendental version of Classical Invariant Theory. Convention, Throughout F will denote a field, never of characteristic 2. More precise specifications on F will vary from paragraph to paragraph, and will be stated at the beginning of each. 1, The Heisenberg group and the Stone-von Neumann Theorem; local case, Let F be a local field. Let W be a symplectic vector space over F, with form < , >. Define H(W), the Heisenberg group attached to F by: H(W) = W @ Fas set, and has group law (w, s)(w’, s') = (w + w’, s +s" + 44, w’)). Let y be a nontrivial character of F. STONE-VON NEUMANN THEOREM. There is only one equivalence class of irreducible unitary representations of H with central character y. We denote this representation by p,. The corresponding representation on the smooth vectors (C 2], [Wa] will be written o7. Although this representation is unique up to equivalence, it has, as already noted by Cartier (C 1], many different concrete realizations which can be organized into smooth families. This circumstance seems to be at the heart of the theory of the oscillator representation. 2. The oscillator representation, local case. F continues to be a local field. Let Sp be the isometry group of ¢ , >. The action ¢((w,s)) = (g(w),s) for g€ Sp, and (w, s) € H(W) embeds Sp into the automorphism group of H(V). According to [M] there is a unique nontrivial two-fold cover Sp of Sp (except AMS (MOS) subject classifications (1970). Primary 22655, (© 1979, American Mathematc Society 25216 R. HOWE if F = C, when we will understand Sp = Sp). Let g > g denote the covering map. Trtorem (SHALE-WelL). There is a representation a, (unique up to unitary equi- valence) of Sp on the space of py such that (2.1) 0,(8)0,(a(E) = 0,(g(4)) for g¢ Sp andhe H. To w,, there is a corresponding smooth representation wy. The smooth vectors of p, and of a, are equal (in any common realization) so of and wy act on the same space. We call w,, or the corresponding multiplier representation of Sp, the oscillator representation, 3, Adélization. Let F now denote a global or A-field. Let » be a typical place of Fand F, the completion of F at v. Let A be the adéles of F. If W = Wp isa sym- plectic vector space over F then we can form H(W;) and also its adélization H(W,). As usual H(W,) is embedded as a discrete subgroup of H(W,), with com- pact quotient. We will suppress W, and just write H(W,) = Hp, and H(W,,) = H,, etc. Let {¢, f;} be a symplectic basis for W. Let /’, be the closure in H, of the sub- group generated by the elements {(¢,, 0), (fi, 0)} of Hp. Then H, is the restricted direct product of the H, with respect to the /’, Let y be a nontrivial character of A with F & ker y. Let {y,} be the local factors of z. At almost all places, there will be a unique vector ¢, invariant under 9,,(J7). Thus we may form a representation p, of H(W,) as the restricted tensor product of the p;,. Since each representation pj is admissible (C 2] and each g, is a smooth vector, the smooth subrepresentation p%° of p, is admissible and is the restricted tensor product of the pi [F]. Let J, Sp, be the normalizer of /',. Then Sp, is the restricted direct product of the Sp, with respect to the J,. We may fit local actions together to obtain an action of Sp, on H,. As locally, there is a two-fold cover Sp, and a representation @, of Sp, such that the global analogue of (2.1) holds. There is a corresponding smooth representation #7. Although Sp, is not the restricted product of the Sp,, there is a commutative diagram TISp, —> Sp, G1) TISp, — Spx The products in (3.1) are restricted products with respect to the J,. (For almost all in fact for v not dividing 2), there is a unique lifting of J, to Sp,. We use this ‘ing to consider J, a subgroup of Sp, when convenient.) For almost all v the vec- tor g, will be the unique vector fixed by w7(J,), and the pull-back of w to [],Sp, is the restricted tensor product of the w with respect to the ,. ‘TueoreM (WEIL). There is a unique homomorphism 8: Spp > Sp, such that the triangle